Tagalog Language - Forgotten Books

[Extract ]

WAR DEPARTMENT,OFFICE or ru n Cums or STAFF

,

“fishing/ton, August 30, 1906 .

Sm : I have the honor to transm it herew ith the manuscript of a workentitled “ A Handbook and G rammar of the Tagalog Language,

”consist

ingof 399 pages of typewriting, wh ich I est imate w i l l make abou t 200pagesin print. I wou ld suggest that the work be bound in a substantial waterroof cover, sim ilar to that used for the latest ed i tion of the

“ Soldier’sandbook ,

”and that the size he 8 by 5} inches, or approx imately so.

I wou ld also inv ite attent ion to the folders accompanying. I twou ld be best to have the left-hand edge of the folders begin at the outsidemargin of the

Prin ted page, so that when extended the student cou ld read

the correspont ing te xt to the svnopsis at the same time and not be ob l igedto turn the pages back and tort

a a a

Very respectfu l ly,W I LL IAM E . W . MACKxxLAY ,

First L ieutenant, First Cavalry.

Maj . W iLLIAu D. BEACH,

Chief , Second (Military I nformation ) D ivision ,

Washington , D . C.

1 6 3230

P R E F A C E .

Short ly after the arrival of the au thor in the Ph i l ippines he, in commonw ith many others, felt the need of a work u >ou the Tagalog language inEngl ish ,

and began to prepare th is compem ium , work ing upon it fromtime to time as other m i l itaryd uties perm i tted ,

and ,u N ) “ be ing ordered to

duty in Wash ington for thepurpose of having better iacilities for the com

pletion o f thework , has been enab led to bring it to such complet ion ,under

the d irection of Maj . W . D . Beach , Fi fteenth Cavalry, ch ie f of the SecondDivision , General Staff .

As the Tagalog, belonging to a very d i fferen t fam i ly of languages fromthose w ith wh ich Americans are fam i l iar, has ex tremely d issun ilar characte ri stics from Engl ish or any Aryan ton ue , the writer has dev ised a

type scheme, presented in the folder herew it l , by wh ich the sal ient po intsof d ifference may be seen at a glance and vivid ly reta ined in the memory,thus enab l ing the stud ent to use correct and inte l l igib le Tagalog.

Supplemented bythat constant ractice necessary for the car, it is be l ievedthat the c0pious index to th iswor together w ith the type scheme, selectedvocabu laries, and plain nontechn ical (as far as poss ib le ) explanations ofthe grammat ical structure of Tagalog, w i l l prove to be of value to thosewhose d uty or incl ination may lead them to consu l t th is book . Such , at

least, is the hope of the wri ter.

The Tagalog language is easi ly pronounced ,regu lar in its forms, and

although its structure is complex ,e t w hen once grasped it is so p lain that

it is not only clearlycomprehended’

,bu t is a key to all the Malayan tongues,

especially to those of the Ph i l ippines. I t is an id iom w h ich bu i lds u its

sentences and parts of speech from roo ts by means o f art ic les w llCh

are prefixed ,in tixed , or sufiixed to the roots . Several o these part icles

may be comb ined w ith the same roo t , each having its share in the mod ilication of the inherent idea o f the roo t .

Attent ion is also invited to the great u se o f the"defin ite in Tagalog,

the so—cal led “

passive”of the Span ish w ri ters Upon th is subject.

The index , wh ich has been made ver y fu l l and copious, shou ld be con

sulted , as every probab le com b ination of partic les has been noted , as wel las Tagalog roots and Engl ish word s occu rring in the work . For exam le

,

every word preceded by the compound part icle ipiw zg has been l isted , t us

enab l ing the roo t to be found at once , and so on in l i ke manner.

The writer desires to express h is appreciat ion for assistance rece ivedfrom the m il itaryau thorities both in the Ph i l ippine I sland s and the Un i tedStates, from man of h is brother oth cers, and from Profs. Fried rich llirth ,

of Columb ia; E. (V. Hopk ins, of Yale (secre tary of the American O rientalSoc iety) ; Pau l Haupt and F . W . B lake , o f J o hns Hopk ins ; Otis T. Mason

,

of the Sm ithson ian Inst i tu tion , and the late John W . Huett,o f Lu ther

Col lege, I l l inois. Val uab le suggest ions were also received from Messrs .

Ped ro Serrano Lak taw ,au thor of a Tagalog-Span ish d ictionarv; Lu is

Torres, and Vicente A lbert , all of Man i la.

A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR OFTHE TAGALOGLANGUAGE.

BIBL IO GRAPHY O I"TAGALOG .

BOOKS CONSULTED IN THE PREPA RATION 0? THIS WORK .

I t is scarcely necessary to mention that authorities upon Tagalog havenot been very plentifu l , even w i th the great revival of interest m theMalayo-Polynesxan lan uages which has taken place w ith in the last fewyears. The number oi; works, old and new, large and smal l , upon th issubject, or hearing upon it, is ver close t o forty, and many of these are

of l itt le value or are obsolete. The number of reprints , however, bringsthe aggregate Up to ab out one hund red , but th is has no bearing upon thematerial avai lab le for study .

The isolation o f the Ph i li pine Islands under the Span ish r egime alsocontributed to the neglect o the Phil ippine languages, and it seemsalmostas i f Span ish and foreign workers in th is field stod iously avoided consu ltingone another

’

s researches, or else were ignorant of them . In the rev iewof books written upon Tagal or contain ing not ic es of it, works writtento teach Span ish to the Taga o nove ls— general ly romances of the typecurrent in the m idd le ages in fi rope

— l ives of saints, and m iscel laneousworks

,w h ich make up what may be cal le d the Tagalog l iterature,

havebeen om i tted . The total number of works in Tagalog mavbe estimatedat

Ifrom four to five hundred , and very few can be said to have a l iterary

va ue.

The energy of those who are ab le to write Tagalog well has main ly been

gheorbed in newspaper work, and no great work has as yet appeared in theangn e.

I t (3351 scarcely be doubted that if some of the great works of the worldwere translated into Tagalog and placed where they wou ld be accessible tothe common ieople, who do not speak or read Spanish , and are almost tooold to learn Engl ish wel l , that the resu lts wou ld be of great and immed iateimportance in the men tal development of the race.

The honor of the firs t written treatise upon the Tagalog language rob

ably belongs to the Friar Agustin deA lbu rquerque, who arrived at an i lafrom Nneva Espana (Mex ico) in 1571 , and after three years

’residence in

Taal , Balayan, and other partsof Batangas , became Prior ofTondo in 1575,hold ing the position unti l h is death in 1580. Th is treatise has never beenpub l ishe d, and the assertion is 0p iosed by the Franciscan order, wh ichclaims the cred it for the first WOl‘li upon th is sub

’

eet. (See Vol. I I , p.

563, Estad ismo de las Islas Fi lipinas , de Ztiniga,”

ited byW . E. Retana,Mad rid , 1893;

“LaPolit ies de Espanaen Filipinas, alto VI ,mim . 134 ; and

the Catalogo Bio-Bibliognifico de los Rel igiosos Agustinos,” Perez ,

Man i la,

To the Franciscan friar Juan de P lasencia, or Portocarrero, who cameto the Ph i l ippines w ith the first m iss ion of h is order in 1577, is attributedan Arte y Diccionario of Tagalog in 158 1 , wh ich has remained in manuscript . (See Catalogo Biogréfico de los Rel igiosos Franciscanos,

” Moya,Man i la,

8 TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

However, the most im rtant int is when the first printed work uponthe language was ublis ed , an th is was undoubte dly in the year 16 10,when an Arte y las de la Lengua Tagala,

”by Friar Francisco de San

José of the Dom inican order, and who arrived in the Phi lippines in 1595,was

printed in the “ Partido de Bataan ,

”probably by Tomes Pinpin ,

a

Tags og. The book is a quarto of 327 pages of rice paper. One copyex ists in the Museo-B ibl ioteca de U ltramar at Mad rid . Other ed itions ofth is book were printed at Mani la in 1752 and 1832. (See Retana

’sed ition

of Zlii’iiga, p. 101

Th is wor was fol lowed in 1612 by the “ Vocabulario de la Len

Tagala,”by Friar Pedro de San Buenaventura of the Franciscan o er,

who was in charge of parishes in the present rovince of La Laguna, and

whose work was printed in Pi la b Tomas ’inpin and Dom ingo Loag,Tagalogs. The book is des cribe d y Me dina in h is

“ La Imprenta en

Man i la,”Santiago deChile, 1896 , and a facs im i le of the title-page is gi ven .

The Franciscan friar Juan de Ol iver, who d ied in the Camarines in1597, is said to have written a treatise upon the Tagalog, but h is workseems to have been lim ited t ocorrectingand add in to the

“ Arte yBiccionario ” of Plasencia. Another of the same order,Francisco de San Antonio, who was in cha e of Baler from 161 1 to 1616, and from that timeunti l h is death in 1 24 resided in the present La Laguna, w rote an

Arte and aTagalog-Span ish vocabu lary, wh ich works ex isted in mannscript in 1745, the author being known also as

“Orejita.

”Sec Cat .

Biog. Rel. Fran .,Man ila, 1880; and the preface to the

“A rte

”of otanés . )

The Augustin ian friar Juan de Qu inones, who d ie d in Manila in 1587,also left a work upon the T log, which is said byBeristain to have beenrinted in Mani la in 1581 . See Beristain,

Bibl io teca I lis no-Americanatentrional, Amecameca, Mexico, 1883- 1887, 2d e d. ) he first ed it ion

was printed in Mex ico City in 1816 . (See Vol. I I , p . The matterseems to be doubtfu l .The Franciscan friar Ger6nimo Monte y Escam i l la who d ie d in 1614 ,

is said to have left in manuscript an“Arte

”and “ Diccionario ” in Taga

log, but the work , i f extant, is in the arch i ves of h is order. (See Cat.Rel. Fran . , Mani la, 1880, p. A sim i lar manuscript is said to havebeen written by Francisco de San Anton io, of the same order, who cameto thgPh i l ippines in 1606 and d ied at Pila, La Laguna, in 1624 . (See Id .

,

13pThe third printed work upon Tagalog was the

“Arte de Id ioma Taga

log,” by the Franciscan Agustin de la Magdalena, who arrived in the

islands in 1665and l ive d in Ta '

abas and Laguna for some years. Return

ing to Mex ico he there ve is manuscripts to the press in 1679, and in1684 returned to Man i la,

' in in &nta Cruz de La Laguna in 1689. (SeeLa Imprenta en Mex ico, . 1 ins , Sevilla, 1893, No. 1784 ; and Cat . Rel.

Fran . ,Man i la, 1880, p. 292 .

The Dom in ican friar T ono (Qu iros) de la Mad re de Dios, who came

to the islands in 1627 and died in 1662, has been credited w ith an “Arte

”

of Tagalog1by some bibliogra hers of Ph i l ippine l iterature, but Medina

marks suc a work as doubtfu as far as the printing is concerned .

The eighteenth century w itnessed a revival of interes t in the language,and in 1703 two works, both of wh ich have been reprinted , were printed .

The first was the“Compendio de la Arte de la lengua Tagala,

” printedin Man i la. Th is excel lent treatise was reprinted at Sampziloc in 1787 , and

in Manila proper in 1879. Both the early ed it ions are now rare. The

author was the Augustinian friar Gaspar de San Agustin , who came to the

Ph i l ippines in 1668, and died in Man i la in 1724 . He is better known as

the author of the work “ Conqu istas de las Islas Fi l ipinas,”Part I , Mad

rid,1698 ; Part I I , Valladol id,

1890. The th ird ed ition ,however, retains

many obsolete words.

The second work was a“ Vocabu lario, or d ict ionary of the Tagalog,

written by the Franciscan friar Dom ingo de los Santos, w ho came to the

Philippines in 1665, and after adm in istering parishes main ly in La Laguna,

TAGALOG LANGUAGE . 9

died in Maia

‘

ay in 1695. His work was printed in the town of Tayabasin 1703, an ut two copies seem to be known . One is from the Man dencol lect ion , and is in the l ibraryof K in

’s Col lege, London , and the other

in the arch i ves of the Franciscan o er. Some leaves of a manuscript“Arte

” by the same author are also reserved in the archives. This d ictionar was reprinted in Sam £100 111 1794 and in Man ila in 1835. I t is

now 0 lete. (See Cat . Rel.‘

ran ., Man ila, 1880, p. 294 ; Bibl ioteca Fil i

ina,Retana, Madrid , 1898 [referred to hereafter as Nos. 77 and 148 ;

d .,Nos. 26 note , 66 note, 66 and 594 ; and Cat. Bio.

-Bib. Rel. Agustinos,Man i la, 1901 , pp. 133

The next work upon th is subject was the “ Arte yReglas de la lenguaTagala,

” by the Augustinian friar Tomés Ortiz, printed at the conventoof Sampziloc in 1740. The au thor came to the Ph il ippines in 1690, was a

m issionary in Ch ina unti l about 1712, and d ied in Man i la in 1742. (SeeMed ina, La Im renta en Man ila and Cat. Rel. Agustinos, p.

In 1742 the ranciscan friar Melchor Oyanguren de Santa I nes , whohad l i ved in the Ph il ippines, main ly at Los Baflos and Sariaya

,from 1717

to 1736 , gave a work to the press in Mex ico entit led “ Tagalysmo .

” Th isinterest ing book , wh ich has never been reprinted , compares w ith Tagalogthe Mandarin d ialect of Ch inese, Hebrew , and G reek, the Tagalog beingred uce d as far as possible to a Lat in basis. (R ,

In 1745 the work of the Franciscan Sebast ian de Totanes was rintedat Sam aloe. Th is valuable treatise, entitled

“Arte de la lengua agala

Manna Tagtilog,”was reprinted at Sampaloc in 1796, at Man i la in 1

and in B inondo (Man ila ) in 1865. (R.,42, 79, 202, and The author

came to the Ph il ippines in 1717 and remained twenty-n ine years in theislands. During his residence at L i lio and Pagsanhan, La Laguna, from1732 to 1738, he wrote the foregoing book . He d ied in Madrid in 1748,hav ing I

?“ the Phil ippines in 1746 . (Cat. Rel. Fran .

, Man ila, 1880, pp.

390—391 .

In 1 754 thegreat Vocabu lario, or d ictionary, of theTagalog, explainedin Span ish , was printed at Man ila by the Jesu its . The mam authors wereJuan de Noceda, S. J and Pedro de San Lua u

, S. J . A second edition ,

w ith a Span ish-Tagal append ix , was printed in Val ladol id in 1832, wh ichis now very rare, near y all copies hav ing been lost by sh ipwreck en route

to the islands. There is a copy in the L ibrary of Congress. Another

ed ition ,with add itions, was r mted by the Augustin ian order at Man ila

in 1860. Th is work, althoughmanyword s are obso lete, is the standardon Tagalog as yet. I t is also becom ing rare. (R.

,48, 136, and

The next work contain ing a notice of Tagalog is in English . In JohannRe inho ld Forster’s Observations mad e during a Voyage round theWor ld ” (London ,

1778 ; German translat ion by his son , Georg Forster,Berl in ,

1 783 ) a l ist of 47 Engl ish words is given , w ith their equ ivalents inTagalog, Pampango, Malay, and several Po lynesian d ialects . From some

rare word s the T log wou ld appear to have been taken from Nocedaand San Lucar. orster was born in Germany in 1729, a descendant of

the Forester fam ily of Scotland , and accompan ied Captain Cook in h is

second voyage to the South Sea (1772 After h is return he becameprofes sor at Halle, Germany, where he d ied in 1798 . His book is especially valuab le concern ing the Polynesian races and islands.

A few years later the German natural ist Pete r Simon Pal las (born 174 1 ,d ied who had become professor of natural h istory in the ImperialAcad emy of Sciences at St. Petersburg in 1768 , ublished there in 1787

1789 the work known as the Vombularium Cat arinae,

” from its patron

ess, Catharine I I . Written in Russian,it gives the correspond in word

for nearly 200 te rms in 200 languages. In th is l ist Pampango is o. 186

and TagalogNo. 187 . The source is not given , but that for the Tagalog is

evidently t e same as that of Fors ter. The Latin equ ivalent for the Russian word s isgiven in the preface. The fu l l t it le of the work is Linguarumtotius Orb is Vocabularia comparati va.

”I t is in two quarto volumes.


At the same time the Spanish author Lorenzo Hervas y Panduro (born1735, died of the Societ of Jesus, pub l ished two works bearingupon Tagalog to a sl ight extent, at of importance as inspiring other workupon the same l ine. The first was h is

“ Aritmét ica,”publ ished in Cessna,

Italy, in 1785, and the second , his Vocabolario Pol iglotto, pub l ishe d at

has h is observations Upon

of the Imperial and RoyalUniversity of Vienna, published a work of 60 pages upon the T log,w ith the title “ Ueber d ie tagalische S rache .

” Th is work seem s iasedupon a manuscript vocabu lary from the ihraryof Count t ua at V ienna,supplemented by wor ds fr om Pal las and the works of the Abbe Hervas.

The latter seems to have corresponded w ith Alter, who speaks of Hervasin the preface to his book ,

and also of M iss Kn igh t , of England , probablya sister of Thomas Payne Kn igh t , the num ismatist, as being interested inh is researches .

A work wh ich is yet of value to the student is that of Johann Christo hAdelung (born in Germany in 1731 , d ied in Dres den

,Saxony,

ent itled “ M ith ridates, oder Al lgemeine Sprachenkunde . I n the first

volume, wh ich a ipeered at Berl in in 1806,on pages 127 and 128, two ver

sions of the Lor d s Prayer are given— one of 1593 and the other of currentform— w ith an explanation of the grammat ica l forms as ded uced from the

words. The author, who gives specimens from over 500 languages, is bestremembered for h is great work in G erman ph ilology, and at the t ime ofh is death was irincipal l ibrarian of the Electo r of Saxony, at Dresd enAd riano Ba ) i (born in Ven ice in 1782, d ie d there 1848 ) ublishe d an

Atlas Ethnograph ique d u G lobe”at Paris in 1826 . (See ab le No. 364

and pp. 246 to 249, for remarks upon Tagalog. )The catalogue of W i lliam Marsden , the em inent oriental ist (born in

England in 1754 , d ie d there published at London in 1827, contains

mention of some manuscript“Artes

”of Tagalog not known to have been

printe d. One is an“Arte

” by a Dom in ican friar, dated 1736, and the

other a Vocabu lario by the Dom inican M iguel Ru i z, dated 1580. Th is,however, must be an error, as the Dom in icans d id not arrive in the Ph ilippines until 1587. Miguel Ru i z was one of the i r ear ly friars ,

but l ittleseems to have been recorded about him . I n Marsd en ’

s Misce l laneous“ f orks (L ondon , page 94 , are also some observat ions upon Tagalog.

To the gen ius of the German au thor W i lhelm von Humbold t the worldis indebte dfor h ismagn ificen twork upon theMalayo-Polynes ian languages,wh ich was pu bl ished by the R0 alAcademvof Sc iences at Berl in ,

in three

volumes, in 1838, under the tit e

“ Ueber die Kaw i-Sprache au f der Inse lJava.

” His d issertation upon the Tagalog verbal system and format ionsin Volume I I , pages 347 to 396 , clearly establishes the fact that the Tagalogand al l ie d tongues of the Ph ilippines have preserved the verbal mod i fying

rticles to agreater extent than anyothermembers o f th is great l ing uisticEm ily,and on page 288 of the same volume he goes so far as to say that at

first view the student of Tagalog seems to have come into a who lly new

system . Th is noted ph i lologist, who was born in 1767 and d ied in 1835,has evidently taken the greater part of his material upon the Tagalog fromthe second (1796) ed ition of Totanes, and hence lacked the advantage of

having been upon the ground .

The Augustin ian friar Manuel Buzeta, better k nown as the au thor of the

Geo ph icalD ictionary”or Gazetteer of the Ph i l ipfirms (in coo )eration

w ith rave ) , published a Tagalog grammar at Mad ridin 1850.

The author, whose name is spelled“ Buceta

”in the (fat. Rel. Agust inos,

came to the Phil ippines in 1827, where he was in charge of the chu rch at

Gu igu into in 1832 and of Malate in 1848 . He retu rned to Spain in 1849,and resided at Mad rid unti l 1854 , in which vear he left the order and

returned to secu lar l ife.

TAG ALOG LANG UAGE . 1- 1

The work of Sinibaldo de Mas upon the islands, pub l ished at Mad rid intwo vo lumes in 1843, con tains a short comparati ve vocabu lary of Tagalog,Visayan , I locano, Ibanag (Cagayan ) , and Malay. (R.

,

In 1854 the“ Tagalog-Span ish Dict ionary of Rosal io Serrano , a Tagalog

of Bu lacan Province, was printed at Man i la, and second and th ird ed it ionshave a pea re d, the th ird being rin ted in Binondo (Man i la ) in 1869. ASpanis

-Tagalog d ict ionary by t ie same au thor was printed in Man i la in1872. (R . ,

227, 376 ,

In 1855 Carlos Cuarteron , a priest who had also been a pi lot in theSou thern Islands, pub l ished a work at Rome en ti t led “

Spegaz ione e tra

du z ione,”

at the end of wh ich there is a vocabu lary of I ta l ian , Malay,Tagalog, and Joloano. (R . ,

In 1872 the grammar of Joaqu in d e Coria (G il y Mon tes de SantoDom ingo ) was ublished at Mad rid ,

w here the au thor had acce ) ted the

position of pro essor of Tagalog in the Cen tral I'

n ivcrsity. T e work

shows the care fu l study of the au thor w ho came to the island s in 1831and res ided in the Tagalog region un ti l h is return to Spain in 1866 . On

account of h is accept ing the chair o f Tagalog against the w ish of the prei

ate o f h is order,be was t iropped from its ro lls : bu t , un fortunate ly, the plan

of Min ister Moret. d id not succeed , and the pos it ion to w h ich he was

e lecte d never became, active. The au thor was b o n in 18 15 and en te redthe Franciscan O rder in 1830. (R. ,

4 1 1 ; also Cat . Biog. Rel. Fran . , p.

The same year, 1872, appeared the popu lar Span ish -Tagalog“

Lessons

upon the G rammar"of BlSiiOp Jose llevia Campomanes, b ishop o f Nueva

Segov ia ( V igan ) . A second ed i tion appeared in 1877, the th ird in 1 883,the fourth in 1888, and the six th in 1901 . All the ed i t ions were printedat Man i la and are alike

,no correct ions or add i tions having been made .

(R.,1 133.

Here shiiuld be ment ioned the interesting work of V . M . de Abe l la, the

V ade-mecum Fi l ipino ,

”a manual of Span ish -Tagalog d ialogues. lt con

tains a vocabu lary of Man i la local w ord s and ph rases. Th e first ed it ionwas published in 1868 (T. 11. Pard o d e Tavera,

Bib . Fil. , No . and o ther

ed i t ions wer e

pub l ished in 1869 and 1871 , and the n in th had been reached

in 1873. (R.

,A ll ed i t ions w ere prin ted in Man i la.

The most pract ica l of all Tagalog-Span ish grammars appeared in Man i lain 1878

, the work of the Recoleto friar Torib io M inguella. I nter l ineartrans lat ions, simpl ic ity o f arrangement, an d c learness of ex planat ion maketh is l i tt le book of great value,

and man y o f its suggestions and ideas havebeen very u sefu l in the preparation o f th is presen t work .

In 1880 P ro f. I i . Kern , a Javan ~born llo lland er, mad e a valuab le con

tribution to ph i lo logy by h is l ist o f wo rd s in Tagalog w h ich are derivedfrom the Sansk rit . Th is art icle, w h ich appeared in the,

“Bijd ragen tot

de Taal Land en Volkenk u nde van Ned er land - lnd ie”atThe Hague ,

volg.

(series ) 4 , dee l (vo lume ) 4 , pages 535 to 56 4 , shows the large num be r of

such words and the ir importance in express ing some most necessary ideasof civ ili z ation . Th is fie ld was further explored byT. l l . I

’ardo d e Tavera,

who published a pamph let o f 55 pages at Paris in 1887,in wh ich the San

sk rit wordswh ich have passed in to Pampango are also noted . (R ,

Kern remarks in h is article that the scarc it y o f Sansk ri t word s in the d ia

lects of northern Ce lebes ind icates that the Tagalog rece ived th is e lemen t

d irectly from Cambod ia and Sumatra, and no t b y way o f (‘

elebes Th is isan in teresting suggest ion , wh ich m igh t l ead to some th ing i f stud ied upon .

Dr . F. R . Blake, teacher of Tagalog an d V isa y an at J o h ns 1 l0pk ins l'

n i

versity,Baltimore, Md . , also read an artic le on

“Sansk ri t loan

-wo rd s in

Tagalog at the Apri l , 1903, meet ing o f the Am erican O riental Society , at

Baitimore ,Md . Docto r Blake has also w ritten art ic les upon Analogies

between Sem itic and Tagalog”and the Differences between Tagalog and

Bisayan .

In 1882 ap ared the second ed i tion o f a Span ish -Tagal og and Pampango

vocabulary gig

E . Fernand ez , prin ted at Man i la. Th is was fo l low ed in

12 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE .

1883 by his Tagal -8panish vocabulary. both of wh ich are very usefulbooks. (P. T. ,

106 and R. ,

The valuable “rap rt of Dr. Joseph Montano, Paris, 1885, to the

French m inister of pu lic instruction contains several Phi l ippine vocabularies, some of them of l ittle known languages, and also quite an analysisof the Tagalog. (R. , 885.

Under the pseudonym of Ju l ius M i les, an unknown author publ ished asmal ln

alog—Span ish grammar and phrase book at Barcelona, Spain, in

1887. 1054 .

In 1889 Friar oribio Minguella, Recoleto , ublished a work in Mad ridupon the un ity of the human race as roved y hilology. In this workhe makes some comparisons between m i tic an Tagalog.

The same year Dr. Pardo de Tavera published his pamphlet upon the

origin of the names of the Tagalog numerals, at Man ila. 1 G . Seiple, ofJohns Hopk ins Un ivers ity, also ublishe d an art icle upon the Tagalognumerals in the Johns Hopkins niversity Circu lar, No. 163, June, 1903,Balt imore, Md .

In 1889also a the“Span ish-Tagalog Dictionary of Ped ro Serrano

Lak taw, son of lio Serrano. and in 1903 d irector of the Span ish paper,El Pueblo, of Mani la. I t is understood that the author is now workingupon a Tagalog-Engl ish d ictionary. (R.

,

In 1890 a most valuable l ittle work was ublished in Mani la, under thetit le “ Coleccién de Refranes, Frases y M isii ios Tagalos,

”trans lated and

explained in S n ish by the Franciscan FriarsGregorioMartin and MarianoMartinez Cua rad o, and ed ited by the Friar M iguel Lucio y Bustamente .

The first came to the Ph i lippines in 1874 , the second in 1875, and theeditor in 1860. All adm inistered parishes mainly in La Province,Friar Martinez also serving for many years at Binan

‘

gonan e Lampon , on

the Pacific. Th is col lection comprises 879 proverbs,ph rases, and id iomatic

expressions as used in the vicin ity of Tansy and Pil i la, where the au thorsresided ,

and embraces but a part of the wealth of the language in th isregard . Many of these expressions, marked

“ T . P .

”(Tagalog proverbs)

have been noted in the explanation of the language . (R. ,

In 1893 r. Ferd . Blumentritt, of Leitmeritz, Bohem ia, pub l ished a

translation of a sketch of Tagalog orthography b Doctor Ri z al , at TheH e, under the tit le Die Transcription des Taga og,

”von Dr. JoséRizal .

e ad vent of the Un ited States forces at Man i la and the occupation of

the Tagalog region led to several smal l mpli lets being issued w ith the

Engl is Span ish ,and Ta log in para lel co lumns. One of these was

ivrfitten by Capt. John ordman , jr.

,Twenty-sixth U . S. Volunteer

n ant

In 1 2 Constantino Lendoyro a Span ish gentleman of more thantwenty years’ residence in the Ph i l ippines, published his work , entitled“ The TagalogLanguage.

"at Man i la. I t is a ver good book , bu t is fu l l

of typo ph ical errors, and in many places the Engl ish is not id iomatic.

The aut or deserves much credit for his labor, and a corrected ed it ionwou ld be of great value. At any rate, he is ent it led to commendation forhaving written,

in a forci language, a work upon the Tagalog wh ichshows h is thorough know edge of the Ph i lippine tongue.

I n 1902 R. Brandste tter issued a work upon the Tagalogand Malagasy

languages at Lucerne, wh ich is of interest as show ing t e resemblancebetween these two lan ages Spoken at such d istan t po in ts .

In 1903 the Engl is -Tagalog Pocket D ict ionary,”of P . D . Nei lson , was

published at Man ila, and , wh i le merel givin the Tagalog u ivalent for

the English word , is of considerable va ue. T e Tagalog-Eng ish part has

also been publ ished.

Mention shou ld also bemade of “ Crawfurd ’sGrammar of theMalayLan

guage,”wh ich has also a dict ionary attached ,

London,1852. Many valu

able comparisons are made between Tagalogand otherMalayan languages.

For a grammatical d iscussion of authority upon the Malayan languages

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

The Japanese language seems to have furn ished no word s to the Tagalog, al though many Japanese came to th e is lands d uring the seven teen thcen tu ry,

ow ing to the expu ls ion o f Japanese com erts to Cath o l icism . w ho

found a refuge in Man i la and the ad jo in ing provinces, main l y in Pam

panga, where it is said many of th em set t led around Macahebe . I t isthough t that some Japanese expressions st i l l ex ist in the Macabebe d ialecto f the Pampangan language .

Notw ithstand ing a comparat ive ly close con tact w ith the Ch inese for

several cen tur ies, and certain ly an tedat ing the Span ish conquest by manyh und red years, very few words seem to have come in to Tagalog from anyof the numerous d ialects of that Empire . The Ch inese elemen t in Tagalogseem s l im ited to a few comme rc ial term s

, some househo ld implemen ts,

and a few m iscellaneous terms,some o i

'

h ich are confined in thei r u se toSangley or Ch inese-Mest i zo tam i l ics. These wo rd s are no ted wherever

they occur in the hand book . Pro fesso r l lirth , the Ch inese scho lar, th inksthat the first not ices of the Ph i l ippines are to be fou nd in the work o f

Chao Ju -kna, co l lecto r of customs o f (‘

h uan -ch o u . a ci ty in Fo -Kieii l’rov

ince ,between 12 10 and 1240. i n th is W o rk he speaks o f the is land s of

Po ~ n i (Bo rneo ) , Ma-i (Mind oro? or and o f the I‘i-Sho -

yé o fTaiwan (Formosa ) . Th is latter nam e so u nd s someth ing l ike Bisava,

”

the nat ive name fo r V isaya. The bo ok speaks a lso o f the San-s it,or

Th ree is land s .

”Book 325 o f the Histo ry o f the M ing D y nasty (1368

1643 ) o f (‘

h ina, as ab st racted b y t irocneveld t . spc z kso f the K ings (Su l tans )o f Su lu as attack ing Fu ri i (Bo rneo ) in 136 8 . and o f the K ing o f Su lu

,l’ad u ka

(Javanese Lo rd i’nhala as d y ing h ile o n a is it to the l‘li i ipero r at T6

Chou o n the ( i rand (‘

ai ial (Shan tu ng Province ) . The Empero r then

recogn i zed h is e ld es t. son ,Tumohs u . as Su l tan o f Su l u

,in 14 17 . The

b ro ther o f l’ahala. ho was named Suh ,m ade a vis i t to Ch ina in “ 2 1

,

bu t a few years afte r th i s no m o re u as heard from th is K ingdom . Fromth is and othe r ex tracts it wo u ld seem that th e (

‘

h inese k new o f the Mohammedan sett lements at Man i la and Tond o prio r to the arrival o f the Spam

iard s , and m ust have ( arried on a luc rative trad e itli them,o the rw ise the

pi rate Lid ia-b ong wo u ld no t have made such a desperate attempt to take

th e ci t y so soon afte r its fo umlat io ii inThe Arab ic w o rd s in Tagalog,

w h ich are har dl y m o re than a dozen inn um ber. evid ent ly cam e in w ith the Mohammedan re l igio n . and upon the

ex t inct ion o f that fai th around the mou th o f the l‘a~ig, all bu t a few word s

fe l l in to d isuse . Mohainm eclan is in co u ld have hard l y become estab l ishedin the Tagalog region be fo re 1450 to 15300, as it cam e ve r y slow ly from I nd iao r A rab ia to Java, and thence b y way o f Borneo and Su lu to th e Bay o fMan i la and th e l

’asig V al le y . I t had apparen t l y not ex tend ed to the

in land provinces ,its farthest no rthern po in t appear ing to have been Hago

noy. A rab ic W o rd s w h ich w ere ad opted by the Span ish and thus b rough tin to Tagalog are no t i nc l ud ed in the above remarks .

Span ish , as a matte r o f cou rse,has cont ribu ti d a great number of wo rds

to Tagalog. many of w h ich have be e n tho rough l y natu ralized . The y arem ainl y re l igiou s , governmen tal , social , legal , and abstract it rms , inc lud ingal so te rm s fo r fo re ign art ic les and l uxu ries . Som e nam es fo r Mex icanart ic les are no t Span ish bu t Nah uat l o r Az tec . ow ing to the in t imate co n

nectio n between Mex ico and the Ph il ippines fo r m o re than tu o centu ries,and there are even som e. A rau ak word s from the tongue o f Cuba, l iaiti,and l

’ue rto R ico among th ese.

E ngl ish has as ye t given bu t few word s to Tagalog. ( if these th e news

iapers use fo ur , wh ich seem to have no exact nat ive o r Span ish equ iva

lents, viz : “

Se l f-governm ent ,"

h igh l i fe ,

” ‘sport , and besbo l,

”or

basebal l . The latte r has been verbal i zed and taken in to the languagebod i ly , wh i le the o the rs are st i l l quo ted .

The const ruction o f Taga log does no t seem to have been in fluenced byany of the foregoing, bu t to have retained its Malavan structure .

TAGALOG L ANG UAGE . 15

THE PRONUNC IATTON OF TAGALOG .

The most succinct statement 0 n the above subject is that gi ven byRev. W . A . Goodel l , of the Metho ist m ission in the Ph i lippines, as printedin Stuntz

’s The Ph i l ippines and the Far East, page 483 :

I I . The pronunciation ofTagalog is verysimple,and there are no soundstowh ich theAmerican vocal organs are not accustomed . The letter (sound )most d ifficu lt to get is wh ich has exactly the sound wh ich it has inthe m idd le of the word ‘

ringing,

’but wh ich becomes d iflicult when at the

beginning of a word , as in the word (s ) one of the words (terms)translat ing the conjunct ion but ,

’and wh ich often occurs at the beginn ing

of a sentence .

“ Bu t although so simple in word pronunciation ,Tagalog is ex tremely

d ifficu l t in u tterance, for one reason because of the great number of longword s (com unds ) it conta ins, and for another and more important sti l l,because of the

)

rhythm ic movement of the language , a qual i ty that can notbe described and a characterist ic for wh ich no ru les w hatever can be given,

bu t wh ich is entirely as much a part of the Tagalog language as are itswords themsel ves.

”

The“rhythm ic movement spoken of by the Rev. Mr. Goodell, who is

an excel lent speaker of Tagalo is what may be called the“nat ional

accent,”and , l ike the tones of C inese and other al l ied tongues, can on ly

be acqu ired by long practice .

The vowels are real ly bu t th ree in number, al though a, e ,i,o , and u ,

w ith their Span ish values, are printed (ah ,a, e , o , co ) . Of these e

”and

“ i ” are hab itually con fused , and“

e can hard l y be said to ex ist in pureTagalog.

“ O”

and“u”are also con fused ,

the tend ency be ing to d rop0 and substitute u

” in manvword s , a process w h ich has already takeneffect in Pampangan . The d ip thongs are ao (ow ) , au (aw ) , less nasalthan ao , and na (wa ) ; bu t there are no triph thongs, as each vowe l in suchcomb inat ions preserves its own sou nd .

The nati ve consonants, pronggmced (except rig) as in Engl ish , are B, C

(K ) , D , G (hard ) , H, L ,M

,N

, NG , P ,R

,S, and T. The sound o f F does not

ex ist in Tagalog, and is replaced by I’. is a lso a foreign sound merging

with B to the T log ear . Z is pronounced l ike 8 , and is found on ly inSpan ish words. he same is true of X ,

w h ich is pronounced at the beginning of aword asH . W is beginn ing to be used in nat ive papers as a sem ivowel in place of in itial na (wa) and in so (aw ) . K is also used by manyin lace of hard 0 and Q . Y is used as a part of the d iph thong ay (ai ) ,and

,

also as an in it ial consonant.The pronunciat ion and construct ion of the language w i l l be more clearly

understood bycarefu l lystudying the two vers ions o f the Dom in ica]Orat ion ,

or Lord’s Prayer, given below w ith interlinear pronunciat ion and trans

lation .

[From the Vu lgate . )

Tag. Ama nam in sungmasalaimit ka ; sambah i’

n

Pro . Ah-mdh ndhmee‘n soong-mah -86! Ira/i ; sahm-bah-ha‘n

Eng. Father our (of us) art in h eaven thou ; adored (worsh iped )

Tag. ang ngalan mo ; mapasaam in ang kaharian

Pro. ahng M -lahn mob ; north-poll-m h-(1h-mccn uhng kuh-hah-ree-ahn

Eng. the name of thee ; come to us the k ingdom

Tag. mo ; sund in ang 160b mo ; d i to sa lupa para

Pro. moh aoéndeen 01mg Idh-obemoh ; (fee-(oh suh 106-t pdk

-rah

Eng. of thee ; (be ) done the w i ll of thee ; here upon earth accord ing

Tag. nang ea lan‘

git ; b igyan mo kam f ngayon nangPro. nah aah Idhfig

-eet ; berg-3161411 moh kah-mcé n

‘

geye-éhn nahng

Eng. to (That) in heaven ; (be) given of thee we (us ) now of the

16

Tag.

Pro .

Eng.

Tag.

Pro .

Eng.

TAG ALOO LANGUAG E .

am ing kan in sa airao-zirao at pataw i'

irin mo

dh-mcmg kdh-nee n sah (Ul-TU U ‘-(Ul-TOIL‘ uh! pah

-tmr -dh-reen moh

ou r food upon everv day and (be ) pard oned of thee

kam i’

nang am ing manga i’

i tang, para nangkah-meé nahng (iii-mam!) "w h im-(ill o ii-tahng, [id le

-rah nahngwe (us ) o f the our (sign of pluralitv) debts, accord ing as

pagpatawad iiain in sa mangagkakau tang sa all llll °

[ialog-

pa-tmr-cid nah-mean sah mah [Ty

-u Jig-lath-kah-oé~tahngm l: (iii

-w een ,

(are ) forgiven of us to those indebted to us :

at houag ino kaming ipahii i tiilot toks o

aht hoo-dkg moh kale-moi ety ee-ImhJu'

en-too-loht Rah look-80h,and d o not of thee (let ) us (be ) perm i tted into temptation,

at iady:i mo kam i sa d i lang masaina.

aht ee-dudh molt [rah-me? am]: rlrélahng mah-sah-mtih .

b

but (be ) deli v ered of thee we (us ) from all e v il.

The vers ion from the translat ion o f the American B ible Society , following the au thori z ed , or K ing James v ersion ,

is as follows :

Tag.

Pro .

Eng.

Tag.

Pro .

Eng.

Tag.

Pro.

Eng.

Tag.

Pro .

E ng.

Tag.

l’ro .

Eng .

I’m .

Eng.

Tag .

l’ro .

Eng.

l’ro .

l’ro.

Eng.

Ania nam in nanasalz’

ingi t ka ; sambah fnAh-mdb mih-mem nali-nuh-suh-ldhifiz-eet Isa/i : sahm-hah-hei‘n

Father ou r(o fus ) (art ) in hea v en thou ; hallowed (worsh iped )

aiig parfgalan mo : d u in z’

itiiig ang kaharian

(11mg pah 1771-0hI-ahn moh (loo-nu?IiJ eeny uhng kaleJou le-reé-ahn

the name of thee : to arri v e the k ingd om

( iaw in ang iyong kalooban ,k ung paano

( imrm‘n (11mg reg/(ing kt ili-Ioh-ti-bulm

,Imony pah

-dh-no aah

(Be) done th e tliv w ill if as

lziifgit, ay gayon d in llall ltln sa lupa. I b igz’

iy mo

Id iom-rel, ego/e giiy-( m (lf 'eu nah-mdhn SU I! loo-pull . E e-hig moh

hea ven ,he thus tru ly also in earth . (Be ) give ii of thee

ea am in ngayo n ang ani iiig kan in sa zirao-z’

iran .

suh (iii-"wen ugryn- f

’

ibu (11mgah-un

’mg kllll-li l

'

a l salt tl’l-TINF-(lh

to u s iimv(th is da_v) the ou r food on evervdav.

A t ipatawad n io sa am in ang aii i ing mangz i

AM w -

puh-tow-(ih ll um ]: m ) : (iii-meme. ( thug (ill-mam!) malm

’

y-éh

And (he ) pardoned oi thee to us the ou r (sign oi plur . )

t’

itang, ga y a nannin nam in nagpatauad sa

oo-lahug, (mg/u h nu Ii -mdhn w ill -"wen nah nuhg-

pnh-Iow- tihd suh

d eb t (s ) , as by us now (are ) forgi v en (to)

inangz i (Hang a

ind ium-«iii my m i-tu lmg

(s . o f plu r. ) those-hav ing d eb ts against us .

kan i ing dailli i'

n tuk so

[CH/ifl aming] (lu ll/4 0min al l}: look-Noll

(let ) us (be b rough t into temptat ion ,

iligt :is kam i Ra inasai i i fi : Sapagka’

t

”J ig-h iss molt M ic-mm"m l: nmh-suh-mdh : Su h-mihg-kah

’

t

(he ) deli v ered b y thee us from e v i l: For (because )ang kaliariai i i t ang kapangyarilian at

f er/(3h u hng lath-huhref -aim ah! ahng kah-palmy-

yahreé-hahn ah!

th ine the k ingdom and the power and

TAGALOG LANGUAGE . 1 7

Tag. ang kaloualhatian , magpakailan man .

Pro. almg kah-loo-ahl-hah-teé-ahn, ma ig-pahrah

-celt’ihn muhn .

Eng. the glory , e ver (for e v er) also

Tag. Siyananz‘

i .

Pro . Seq /ah now-ah .

E ng. Amen .

The same prayer may be taken to show the changes in the language

since it was first red uced to Roman letters by the m issionaries.

From the Doctrina Cristiana of 1593, reprin ted b y Her vas, in SaggioPratt ico , p . A lso found in Adelung

’

s Mithridates,

” Vol. I , p. 609.

”Amd namin nasaldu

‘

git cu ,{pasambu mou ng n

‘

gu la mo ; mou i (retu rn ) 80«min u ng pagiahari mo

,iposonor (be obeyed ) mo (mg mo , d ito sa lupa

paran 8a Big-ion mo cumi n

‘

gu irin mmg cumin cucania para mmg so

(true; at pacauu lin mo any um in m an/ano n (sins ) , yag/ang (as ) n imm u lan

bahala (equally ) namin so Mob any com mon (ev ils ) nu ug mumm su (of ex istence ) ao amin ; hmmg mo coming (m um nang (Ii com?) mam/o nang tocsé;(fatapmia

’t (but ) yud iu (be deli v ered ) mo cam } so d ihm nummuf .

”

It may be said that th is last vers ion shows a comparat i v e want of fam i liarity w ith the language , except as m igh t be spoken by ser vants, etc . , and it

has doubtless su ffere d by reprin t ing, the proof hav ing to be read by those

ignorant o f the language , and hence u nab le to d etect errors except by copy .

An example of the folk lore sto ries is given in the“Tale of the Un lucky

Rat”from the examples o f Mala yan languages, published at Batavia, Ja va,

in 1868 , by J . (r. F. Riedel, the Dutch ph ilologist . I t is as follows :

Tag. fiayon d in isang daga nagwika sa kan iyaPro. Ngeye

-ou dean eesdhng (Ia/ago imhywec‘

ka salt lmlmccudNow indeed (one t ime ) a (one ) rat said to h imself

Tag. d in , nasak it ang ata y niyz’

i : Ayao ako yPro . dam , naiwahl’el

'

t (11mg u /itoé neat/(iii nah trickeryEng. (self ) , (being ) pained the li v er h is : No t w ish now 1

Tag . mat ira d ito ,sa ba yan ko ; iko y paparoon aakvat

Pro . mahtel'ra (IF/70h,

so}: buy-rm Icoh ; ”his/n; puparo

-na uhalckydhtEng. (to ) remain here ,

in town inv; I w illgo taud ) ascend

Tag. sa ano sa bundok , titiu‘

giu nang ibang bayan ,

Pro . aah anoh aah boondoke, ru t/my rebdhng Mig/m i,

Eng. somewhere into (the ) mountains, lo ok ing fo r ano ther town,

saan ako makak ita riang kaib igan ko ,nang pagkain

Pro. adhahn ahkémahkakeém win/mg kah-cwhcfgu n loll,iu ilmg pct/igkdhccn

Eng. where I can see soine o f friend (s ) inv, some food

Tag. masarap sa daga, at nang pakab i'

iliay ii iabu ti.

Pro . rdhp Rah duhglih, all! nah mall/1061113.

agreeable for rat(s ) , and some li v ing (o f ) good .

Tag. Pun iart'

ion ang daga, lu in zikad irao-:irao,

hangangPro . Poomahrohon nhng (Inlay/ill , loomdhkuh tl (throw Id ling/( 11mgEng. \Vent there the rat, tra v eling daily

,un ti l

Tag. d umating sa ba y bay, nak i ta isang tak lobo

Pro . doomdhleeny aah bug/bu y, nah/(em: w sd /mg lu h/z hihlmh

Eng. arr iving at (the) beach , (it ) saw a (o ne ) giant clam

Tag. nakan"

n"'

ga nang kau ii ti. Nagwika ang dagz‘

i :

PTO. nahkarigrihnga nahng kou nlw’. Jt /igz l

'

cf'lvl (11mg I’l l/Igdh

Eng. opening-the-mou th (of ) a little . Said the rat :

Tag. itb? Totéong wala pa ikong nak ik itz‘

i na

Pro. eel/iii? Toliloh-Ohng u'

ahhih pa]: (Niko/mg u t ilikt 'r’kec‘m nah

Eng. this? Tru ly not vet l ani see ing (have seen ) now

6855— 06 - 2

1 8 TAG ALOG LANG UAG E .

Tag. ganiyan . Ngayon pu in iisok ang daga sa b fbig nangPro . guhncéyahn . rfi/uyéhn poomdhsokc ahuy duhgdh salt beébceq nahngE ng. the like Then en tered the rat into mou th o f the

Tag. tak lobo,

t inignan ang lainan n i to, ngun i’

t nas ipi tPro . tahklohbo, teencc

‘

gnahn nhng luhmdhn neetéh, ii'

goénce’t nahseép il

E ng. gian t clam ,look ing at the meat of th is

,but was caugh t

Tag. siya hangang iiasira ang kan iyang u lu, at

Pro . seeydh htilm nuhscéru (thug kalmeeydhng 06100, o ld

Eng. be unt il was destroved the h is head , and

Tag. na iitol ang kaniyaug li ig.

Pro . nu ipootolc «hug kalmeeycilmg let‘ceg.

Eng. was cu t off the h is neck .

FREE TRANS LATION .

Once upon a time there was a rat who said to h imself, because h is liverwas ou t o f o rder .

“ I do not w ish to remain here in th is town of m ine : Iw ill go and ascend the moun tains look ing fo r another town , where I can

see some of my friend s. some agreeable food for rats, and some good liv

ing.

”The rat w en t ou t , tra veling daily , unt il arri v ing at the seashore it

saw a gian t clam (Tridacna ) , w ith sligh tly opened mouth . Quoth therat : hat is th is? Tru ly

,I have not seen any th ing like th is vet . Then

the rat went in to the mo ii th o f the gian t claim (fo llow) to loo k at the

meat,but was caugh t (by it ) unt i l h is head was cracked , and it was cut

off at the neck .

Acesm s .

From the forego ing examples it w ill be seen that there are three accents

used in Tagalog, the acute the gra\ e and the c°irt u in flex (

A

) .

Th e acu te at en t may fall upon auv syllab le ,bu t in Tagalog is general]

to be found upon the last (u lt ima ) o r the nex t to the last svllahle (penu

t i ina ) . The acu te accen t upon a wo rd end ing in a \ ou el i nd icates that

the final v owel has an open , broad sound,and that the su ffixed partieles

and“in pre fix an I: when jo ined to such wo rd s . E xample :

Muga iidd , elegan t ; kugmu luhan,

elegance ; MN, trad e ,

barte r ;”

(my Ii i/Iain ,what bo ugh t.

” Word s end ing in a consonant take an”

o r

in on ly,e v en if bearing the acu te accent , wh ich is on ly wri tten in such

word s when O f cu rring upo n the penu ltima o r an tepenu ltirna. Example :u ni/m u] ,

“

to borrow ; ii iagiitu ng,“

to lcnd : nag/matron} ,“to lend freely

(o r w i th good ku u la i f ycm d e b t ;’ “

cred it . I n manycases the su ffix ing o f Im n

’

o rr“ lu

'

n’d raws the at t

’

t’ll t one s y llablefarther toward the end o f the w ord . Th is also applies to

‘‘o u or in .

E xample : I’u h iy ,

idea o f k i lling o r de : ;i tli’

Ii o uum'

igmu ,

“death (ah

st ract no un ) : u ug ku um lu yd n , th e place o f ileath .

’The acu te accen t is

no t w rit ten w i th w ord s end ing in a w u e l un less the accen t is upon thefinal Vowel. lt niav be taken as a ru le that wo r ds unmarked w i th an

accen t , if end ing W i th a consonant , take the accen t upo n the u lt ima,wo rd s end ing w ith n and it being excepted . W o r ds end ing w i th an unac

cen ted v owe l o r o r s generallv takc th e accen t upon the penult ima.

Th i s is als o the ru le in Span ish .

The gra ve accent in Tagalog me rely mark s tho se wo rd s end ing in a

v owel, wh ich take or in,

” ins tead o f [m u o r“h in . The stress

is no t laid upo n the syllable marked w ith th e gra v e accent , bu t upo n theo ne preced ing. 1.xau iple : Hu h ) ch i ld ( in general ) , pro no uncedl) :lll l8

’

the final vow e l lim ing an o bscu re so un d: l' ri iumum,

“ch ild ish

ness”

(pro . l u h imb Ia’

h cm ) . The grave accent is no t u sed w ith words

end ing in a consonan t .

The c i rcum fle x accent is only used upon the final vowe l o f those words

end ing w ith an ab rupt , obscu re v ow el sound ,upo n which the stress o f the

v o ice is placed . I t adm its o n l y as a su ffix . Example :Ihmmlilci,

"to su ffer

,to end u re ; u ffering,

end u rance ;”

TAGALOG LANGUAG E . 19

tumur6,

“to signal; katuroan, signaling; ( mg tinuroan ,

person or sta

t ion signaled to .

”

Pract ice is the essential re uirement to become fam iliar w ith the accentw hich is most im rtant in agalog, as manyword s are only d istingu ishedby the accent, a thou

gh d i ffering totally in mean in Example : A86,

smoke ; ciao,“ dog ; gdtas,

“ m ilk ; gatda,“

pat trail;”mmilang,

to rise”(as the sun ) ; sumilang (ultima ) ,

“to pass between ;

”bumasa,

to read ; bumas’

h,

“to mo isten .

As has been alread y men t ioned there are some“roots in the

Tagalog language, many of wh ich are nouns, pronouns, ad verbs, and prepositions, etc . ,

in themselves. Verbs are general] formed by th e use of

certain part icles, of wh ich there are some 17, oil

wh ich all except one(um ) have a defin ite and indefin ite form . Together w ith the noun andad ject ive form ing art icles, of wh ich there are several, the poss ible number of intelligible agalog words can not be far from to qu itesu fficient to ex ros e any nontechn ical ideas of any language whatsoever.

Yet w ith all th is there are some curious facts about the language a nd itsvocabulary . Manygeneral terms can not be expressed in one word , bu t themod ificat ions of a general act ha ve many words to express them , somet imes far more than ex ist in English or Span ish . A sim ilar parallel isoffered by the lack of a verb in early English to express the idea of motionin general, although Anglo

-Saxon bad man words for d ifferent k inds ofmotion

, wh ich are used daily by all English-speak ing people . Upon th ispo int Brian H. Hodgson , the noted oriental scholar, says, in h is work

upon the aborigines of Ind ia, published at Calcutta in 1847,page iii :

Home-bred wor ds are all very particular,and pro )ortionably

numerous ; wh ile general terms, if more conven iently few , are ess charac

teristic and very apt to be of exotic (foreign ) origin ; take the English general term

‘to move ;

’it is Lat in and one ; bu t of the numerous sorts of

special mot ion (to hop, to sk ip, to jump, to tumble down ,to get up,

to

walk , to fly, to creep, to run, to gallop, to trot ) , all are

‘

genu ine Saxon , bythe sou l of Hengist . Th is idea w ill be more fu lly explaine d under“ The verb. In add ition to such part icu lari z ing word s, there are also

many synonyms or words mean ing the same th ing in Tagalog, many ofwh ich are local or prov inc ial and are not h eard in the same locality . For

th is reason Crawfu rd ’s remarks upon Tagalog and isayan , as expressed

in h is “ Malay G rammar,”L ondon , 1852, page cx ix ,

are st ill pert inent .

He says :“The languages of the Ph ilippine Island s may be described , not as c0pi

ous, but word y . I n the state of societ y in wh ich the nat ives o f tlie Ph i lip

pines were formed ,ideas are consid ered more in concrete than in abstract

,

and by an importance be ing attached to tri v ialmatters a profusion springsu

pwh ich ,

in a more ad vanced state of society , are considered unworthyo retent ion , or wh ich ,

if retained ,wou ld only be prod uctive of perplex ity

and d istract ion . I n Tagalog there are 12 names for the cocoa

nut, includ ing its d i fferen t variet ies and cond i tion s as to maturity andpreparat ion for use . In the same language there are 1 1 words to

expres the verb ‘to boil ’ (w ith variations) , and 75 (really abou t 50) for

the verb to go.

I t may be added that the verb“to carry w ith its variations has some

ci h ty words to ex ress all combinat ions in Tagalog, and there are man yotTier verbs wh ich ve been part icu lari z ed in th is manner, wh ich w ill bemore fully set forth in the appropriate

place .

The main object of th is work is to acilitate the acqu isi t ion o f an ele

mentary knowledge of the Tagalog language . It shou ld be borne in m indthat Tagalog is not constructed on English or Span ish lines, either in grammar or syntax . The un iversal tendency Upon using a new language is to

translate one’s own language word fo r wo rd

,or ph rase for phrase , into the

foreign one. The native may understand ,bu t the resu lt is not elegant .

No language can be learned entirely from books, and to su

pple ment the

special needs of each person constant practice in speak ing wit ed ucated or

20 TAGALOG LANG UAGE .

inte lligent Tagalogs is necessary . E ven w ith a considerable vocabulary,the American w i ll find d i fficulty in con vey ing just what he wants to sayin Tagalog, unless he masters the id ioms and peculiari t ies of the language.

Th is w ill not be a very easy task , bu t, once maste red , the key is held toall the Ph ilippine languages, and it m igh t be said to all the Malavan languages of the East Ind ies.

To those who have had to depend upon ignorant or untrustworthy interpretere, a knowledge of the local tongue w i ll be felt to be ind ispensable,

and th is knowle dge w ill als o be a protect ion to the people ignoran t ofSpan ish or English who in many cases have been so unmercifully fleecedby unscrupulous interpreters .

Th is work has been d iv ided into sect ions, and the use of technical termshas been a voided to as great an extent as p oss ible. W here cases, etc. , havebeen used , it has not been because such ex ist in the Tagalog language, butas an aid t o the memory of those who are more or less familiar w ithLat in ,

Fr ench , Span ish , German , and other Rumpean tongues.

The essent ial iculiarities of Tagalcig are its“roots,

”wh ich mav be

made into nouns y the use o f the art icle , in to ad ject ives by other pre fixedpart icles, into ad verbs in other cases, and h ually into verbs b y the use ofa large number of part icles ; and the great use of the defin ite, which is

inniatically a assive,”and is so treated by all grammarians who

ave been consu lte i although many t imes th is passive must be translate d into English by an

“act ive verb . For this reason the ter ms

defin ite ” and“ indefin ite have been used in the present work . Th is

po int is more fully explained under the verb .

Examples have been given where ver p ossible, and the vocabu lary givenhas largelvbeen founde d on actual ex I t is imposs ible to inventa series of ph rases wh ich w ill serve or an y two people. The quest ionsmay be gi ven accord in to the book , but the answer, com ing from a speakerof the language, w ill ) e constructed ou t o f that vastly more extensivevocabulary ex ist ing in his brain, and the w hole scheme be th rown ou t ofjo int. For th is reason a carefulstud y of the examples of the language andthe manner of bu i ld ing up the sentences w ill in the end n ow of moresolid benefit than the memori z ing of a large number of set p rases, wh ichmay or may not be a

ppropriate .

Some ph rases su i ta e to certain si tuations have b een inserted , such asmatters relating to the procu ring of someth ing to eat, d irect ions to thehouse bo y s, d istances to places. the weather, and other sim i lar matters,the carefu l perusal of w h ich w ill enable more complex sentences to beu ttered w ith success and a mastervof the id iom acq u ired .

SOME ORD INARY PHRASE.“ TAG ALO G.

\Vhat do you call that (th is ) in the Ami anypom/ohm niydn (n ilé ) ac

Tagalog language?

ir ib mg (lguloyf’

That (Th is ) is calle d in ou r Iydn (m3) uy tinatd imglanguage. tim ing N

’ikd .

GREETING S .

How are vou‘?

Well; and you , sir?

Not as well as you seem to be.

Good morn ing, sir.

Good morn ing, sir, to y ou .

Goo dmorn ing, evervone.

Good afternoon (even ing ) , sir (usedfrom noon to dark ) .

Goo d even ing (n igh t ) (used e itheron mee t ing or ret iringafte r dark ) .

Kmnush i (Como mid ) kayo?Illalm h

'

; o f 150316Hind i [ublmny mubuli mi para wing/6.

Magu ndm ig «iron, p f} .

Magrmd u ny ( mu ) pd )mmdn.

B igyrin In”

; silung luhat nang magnu(q g (i ron .

Mogum luny Import pi}. (P6 used as

W o rd o f respect to both sexes. )Jlugmu lu iiy gi lt) ; pf} .

Get out of there! Don’t run ! Umalia ka d iydn Houag tumakbo.

’

The do not w ish to. Namiyao «do .

I di not wish to . He wishes to. Ndyao aké. Siyzi ibig.

I don’t know. I can not understand Auan to. Di aké naalaman any

what you mid . sinabi ninyo.

00!NO ABOUT.

Driver, take me to the Wal led City. Cochero, ihatid mo aké 8a Ioob nang

Go by Palacio street (Calle Palacio ) .Straight ahead . Look out '

Go to the side. St0p!

To the ri ht . To the left .

Slowly . hoa!

Let us by th is road .

Wh ich is the shorter of the two?This is shorter than that.Are we far away yet?We are near now .

What is the distance from here tothe river?

Three hours riding, seven walking.

What are you doing there?I am gettin water, sir.

I s th is water? Yes, sir.

W hat is your occupation?Housebu i lder, sir.

W here do you l ive?

hit“house 18 here, sir.

ere are you from?I l ive in the country .

I am from the mountains, sir.

Where is the town (pueblo )?I can not tel l you .

Show me the road leading to the

pueb lo.

I want you to go w ith us to show us

the road (trai l ) .Don’

t be afraid and don’t try to run

away.

If ongu ide us wel l , you w il l be paidor your trouble.

Ask that person there where there isa spring or wel l .

W hat are you looking for?I am looking forGo across the river as far as thecrossroads.

I want a blacksm ith (horseshoer ) .

I want a saddler (leather worker ) .

I need a banca (canoe ) w ith outriggers.

One large enough to hold twentyfive people.

Tamalay 1a 3a daan nany Palacio .

Malu id (derecho ) . Tabi .

’ (QuedaoTumabi 1°a . I I um1

°

nld 1°a (para ) .80 kanan (mano ) . Sa 1°al1

°

11d (ailla ) .H

°

nay/1mm; (despacio) . Luayluay.

(This latter to home ,etc. )

Maytuloy layo 8a daany itd.

Alin any laiony ma1°

1°st 8a dalawd f

116 any lalonyma1°

1°ai 11a rodu .

Malayapa 11a tayo?

Malapit na l ayo.

And any layo muld d ito hanyany ca

110g?

Tallonyoraa kunycabayohin ,p1°

ld 1rtt 11yIakarin.

And anyyinayawd mo d ig/an?Akd

’

y naiyib, pd .

Mabuti ba {tony lcibiy! Gpd.

Alin kayd any iyang 1°

a11111y1°

ulanf

Anloa

fle, pd .

namamayan?

Any balmy 1°

o, pd, d ito.

Taga saan 1°af

Akd’

y n amamahay sa blikid .

Taya bundok pd .

Saan narodn any bag/an?

Hind i 1°o 11aala1nany aabihin ca int/d.

[turd 1110 ca 61111 any daany pahni'

yo

80 bayan.

1b Irony samama 1a 80 amin para{lard any daan (yalds) .

Houay 1°

any mattikol at houay kanytun1a1°bd

Kuny 111m) many 1na1°

y1°

, ay1°amla1n 1°a nany 1

°

a upahdn ca iymypay0d .

I tanony mo dodu 11a tduony (mama)1°

1/d 11 11 1 11 aaan mag/roan isany bukal6 110 1611 .

And any hinahanap mo?

Humahdnap n1°é nanyTawir in 1110 any flag at lumdkad 1°ahanyany ao sanyd

-daan.

I big 1°

o nany isangpanday (layapaylayay nany bdkal 8a cabayo) .

I big [co nan

y“iaany mananah t nany

bal at (lala artero) .Kailafi

'

yan ko isany bany1°d na may

kalig.

Isany 111ala1°i na makakadald. nany{

zany dulawang poud

’t limany l1a

110.

TAGALOG LANGUAG E .

Steer straight for the ship .

Land there at that int.

Do not land where I t is very muddy.

Don’

t make a noise at the landingplace.

Port! Starboard ! Stop!

Go ahead ! Astern !

See that everyth ing of m ine is takendown to the boat .

Pu t everyth ing into the cart .

W’

rapsometh ingaround that bund leso it w i l l not get wet .

Set that basket down here ; I wan t

to get someth ing out of it.

U n fasten th is cord .

From here to Mani la, how manyhours by road (walk ing)

?

23

fl u id mo any sasakydn .

181118 11! 7111) 1101511 8“ dd10ny 1°

y1’1n .

Houay 1°

a11ymu natsat sa 1apu ti1an .

Houay 1anymay111yay ao paysatsal.

S11 .S'

a kanan .

’ 11111113 1111!

8 1110119 na .

’ lfrony.

’

1 17911111 11 1110 1cu Iahat anydkiny 1asa11

1 1111 1111 may padald 8a sasakydn .

l layay 1110 lahat 8a carretdn.

Sapim’

m 1110 1°

yény balutan at baledl5(w i .

I Iagay 1110 d ito 11115119 tampipi; mayman 111 151 111 11 11111 .

T1130111111 7110 1111719 llibid .

Bahat d ito hanyany 8a. Maynila,ilang

oras la1°ar1°

11 nany daan .

’

rm : wsu n sn (ANG PANAHON ) .

How is the weather?

The weather is fine.

The weather is bad .

W e are in the d ry season now .

W e are having the wet season now .

The sun is becom ingobscured .

There is much fog.

Is it going to rain?

I t looks l ike it .

I t has been rain ing fearfu l l y all dav.

Th e rain is com ing down now .

G ive h im the umbrel la.

I t is thundering and l igh ten ing.

A bolt struck that tree .

The w ind is increasing.

I t is possible that th is mavturn intoa typhoon (hu rricane ) .

Come in under the shel ter of th ishouse .

The moon is r ising now .

Th e stars are com ing out .

Look and see if it is rain ing,because

I must 0 now .

Come bac here at sunset (lit .

,A t

sett ing of the sun,return here ) .

I t is growing dark .

I t is grow ing l ight.

FOB TA K ING L EAVE

I must say good-by to you now .

W hymust you go? Sit down first.

I can not sit down ,because I am in

a hurry .

And where are you going?

I am going to see a friend w ho is

leavmg for Man i la to-morrow .

I w i l l come back late r.

1a3/1'

1 111 1 115111 111] "irony balmy.

.fl'

11111 1'

11511 111y 1111 any 111111 11.

1111 any 11111113112 l1 1°

t111°

n .

T1°

y11an 11111 1 11 11 umu alan,at ualis 1la

(11113.

Pay/”boy nany 1’

trao,

111aybal1°

1 1 11111111.

1111 .

1111 .

(SA PAG PA PAA LAM ) .

P 111il1m1 11a 1113 111 131111

13111 1! 1 11 11111m1 111111il11 111’

111 117111 .

Hind i akd "1111 11 11 11116 8 1 1 1111511 11 7 1116’

y1111y111a11111111tli.

At m an 1 11 paru roon .

’

111 1} 1111 11111 kony 1 11 1°

b1°

yan

.llaynihl 1112108 .

.llaybabalik 1116 mama

If“

Maana any panahdn?

Mabnti anypanahdn .

111111 11 11111 any 111111 1111611 .

N11 1111 tayd tag/o 1771111611 .311 tayula11 [ago 1Tynyon

Nayd id ilhn any d rao.

means“day.

May 111ar1i 1n 1°

11y 1111111 .

(1 111111 bayd f

T1111 pd .

Katakotld kot 11111116 11 1111 111 11511 11a1115.

B 11 11111In 1ysd 1111 any 1111111 .

I biyay 11111 1111 1 11 1111111 any pay/011g.

Kn 111111 1111111 at 1 11 11111 1111111.

Isanylintik (1y 111111 11101] 1111 1°

y11'

ny16110311yan .

L ama/111 118 any hanym .

Mara/1 1°

! 1113 11 11 11111 11 11 1‘

111 1 bayyd.

24

We will see each other in the afternoon .

Good-by.

TAG ALOG LANG UAGE .

.llaykikitd tayo eu hapon.

Ad ios (Sp.

PIOUB EXPRESSIONS OF GOOD W ILL.

May God guard vou .

eGo d lp you .

Godbe w ith you .

D ias any 11111 1nga1 1111 1111115.

D108 any tumulany xa

any 811 11111 11111 1111

FOR EATING AND DRINK ING (8A PAGKA IN AT PAG IN I'

X ) .

Get me something to eat ; I am hun

grYGet me a d rink I am th irsty.

W hat do you w 1sh to eat?

W hate \ er you tim e .

Wou ld you l ike r oast ch icken?

Yes, and a l ittle w ine .

W hat else wou ld you like?G ive me some eggs, if there are any.

B 1y1/1'

1n 1110 akanany kauntmy malaI ain, nayuyu tnm alé.

11111 110 111111110

Ana any 111 1J nhu/ong kaninf

Iu m 11 11 11 mag/roan 1l1y1‘

i11 .

I biy 11 1n 1/11 (1 11 1) 1111111 10 1111 8 18111?

011 , at kaunlmy dink.

11 11131111 any ibig ninyé?

Biyyd u mo akén any idoykunmayroon.

Nora — See list for things to cut. pp. 28-29 and 311-40.

The meal is n ice .

Wash (wipe ) th is plate .

I have eaten enough .

Eat s ome more, sir.

Just a bit mor e.

On ly a bite more .

I am satiated now .

Don’t give me anyth ing more.

Bringsome water to wash the hands.

FOR THE TOILET

Shal l I get the clean clothes now?

No, bring.

me a towel and soap first,I am going to take a bath .

Get some water and pu t it in thebath tub .

The bath is ready, sir.

Benigno , put some water in the

wash basin .

Lay out a shirt, a pair of trousers,and a coat.

Khak i , sir? No, wh ite clothes.

Brin me my shoes

Han me that cap.

Get a handkerch ief ou t of the trunk(chest ) .

Open that door. Shut the w indow .

Take care of the house ; I am goingfor a walk .

Masarap anypaykain.

I luyasan (kusknsin ) 11111 itongmanlok

(11111311111 ) 1113.Marami alo ng kinain.

Kmnai11 pa kayo116.

Kapirasa p11 .

1811 1111 himany 11111111 .

Busay 110 111-13.

”( may 1111 111511111 1111 1119 biyydn nany1111 111111111 .

Maydahi ka nany hibigpaglaiyas

I

nanykam ay. (Id iomatic ex r. is: 11011Jtabony (cocoanut shel ls

,

tzibiy.

(8A PAG BIBHHS ) .

I big u inyongikuha ko kayénanyda mitnu malinis.

’

IIocmg, dulhdn mo muna aké nanyiw uy pamdhid at sabén at abd aymaliliyc) .

Kumuha ka nany tfibig at flagay moan p uliguan.

lug paliguan pri ag/ handd na.

Beniyno, lagydn mo nany tdbig anyhilumoauu .

I kuha mo aké nany iw uy barb, iumgsalamal at {m ugmnericana.

Kaki p63 Houag. dmm

’

t na mapuli.D allein mo xc (ikin any supin .

Idbul mo 8a dkin [yang gorra iydn .

Mag/laws ka nany iaang panyo ou

kubt'

m .

Buksdn mo iyangpinwiyén. Pinddn

(S urhén ) mo anyd urm‘

ifiauan (binInna ) .

I figaum mo (mg bdhay; at aké aymaglalakadld kad .


That is too dear. Totyony napakamahal iydn.

I must have it th is week . Ka

gmman ko no loob nany lmgang

I

N IBCELLANDOI'

B PHRA SE .

Are you teach ing English? L

'

ngmad ral rd ) bayd bagd

nany ingléa Aug unkang nanymmfyd mnericano )

W hat did you teach th is morning? . lno kayyny inidral (itinu ro) mayo

m

I taught arithmetic. Ang inid ral (iliaura) ko’

y aritntéliga.

When d id they write any English? Kaildn sungmtilat sdd

’

y nany myla .

They have written some within a few 8 11319111 1210! sild

’

y nany kamakadaagda '

8 . run.

I wish to rent a house. I big I’

o isany bdhaypaupahdn .

I shall be here some time—several

months at least .

I wish to rent fr om month tomonth .

I will pay you in advance .

A long time. A short time.

I willgo there.

What do these men want?

They wish to speak to you .

W hat do you (thou ) want?What is your name

?

Is that work finishe dvet that I told

you to do?

Not yet , sir. Then , when?

To-morrow , sir.

How mueh is th is (all)?

How mueh for eggs?There is no answer.

Wait, I am going to write a letter to

your elliployer.

I am under great obligations to you .

Don’

t mention it (lit. , I t is noth ing) .You are mistaken.

It is the truth .

It. is a lie .

This woman, sir, is ask ing that herhusb and he r eleased .

Tell her to state her reason for askmg.

Who, amongyou , know th iswoma n?

Tellme what you d id to Ped ro .

Tellme the truth , for if you do not Ishall s end vou to the guanlhouse

(priso n l.Why d id you leave the b arracks Ana l ikao lumabdl la cuafl d nanywithout permission

?trolli ng aabi.

Tell l'ed r o that he is wa nted bv the Suhih in 1110 kay Pain“11 d yd

’

y bai

yaptam . 111 15111 11 1111 1137mpildn.

but you d id was far fr om the du tv [yang gamma mo {ydn ay labtm 80

(orders ) o f a sold ier. 111mmaloe nany nanymandala.

Ako y man'

tira d int mard hil man

ilang buan .

Buy t o mnupd bunny-bu m .

Ma1i'

g'

muna any ha

Mahab anypanah 1. MaiksinypanaIu

'

m .

Paroroon

31-6 doon .

yd w IAnd any I 1'

y n ilon man"

no

IMymid makipa 3001) ou inyé.

A 116 any (big 1110

And anypa1i'

1'

1alan mo!I'

m-i na hayd anyyawany ipinaybih’

n

kn 8a iyéf

Hind i pa, pa. At kailan iBakesp13.AIaykano

Maykakano any idoyfli

'

ala ngmyod .

.ilaghinluy ka, mailat até nany («mymild ! 11a 1

'

yonypanymoon.

.1 1-1;p13aymalakianypaypapaaaldmat811 myo.

Wald p1‘

1 onema'

n.

Kayo[16 malt.

1115any kaloloohanan .

I la y kabuluan.

Irony bahaue i115po ay namamanla’

knap aa

'alun any baniyanyIpaawmy 1110 0 akaniyd any katu iran

na Iu'

nihinyi niyd .

Sine ha no 111316 any nabah'

bilala aa

h abaye’

.llaysaymy I?! ea (“i n nany mati'

ydginam i mo bay Pedro .

Sabihin mo any katotoohanan, at bun)n

'

nd i. (papadald Hid ca bilanyoan.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

You should always inspect themen’s

quarters.

T

hisr

l

ifies (carbines) must becleanedai y

I especially warn you not to be off

guard (or relax vigilance ) for a

moment .

The obligation of a sold ier on dutyis to know the orders.

Those who d isobey orders will re

ceive severe punishment.Tell the people here that what weare

f afioing to do is for the benefit

27

Dadalaoin nin 6 tu i-tuin any an

Icinalalayydri,nany mur

giya «undo?

d

d at linin’

n arao-drao any man'

ydharil.

Pmaybibiliny ko an iyomahiypit na

Icouay ka malibany isany mandali.

Nauukol 8a aundalo taya-paytdnod

uaiaain anyman (1 nice.

Any lumaban 3a u toa ko ay kakamldnnanymahiypit na paruaa.

Sabihm mo 8a taya d ito no any tilingyayawin ay kayalinyan nany lahat .

Sncn os ONE .

VOCABULARY .

Thomas . Tomas. Father. Amd .

Mary . Maria. Mother. 1 114 .

Joh n . Juan. Brother. Kapatid na laiaki.a

Joseph . Jooé. Siste r. Kapatid na babayc.a

ran “ m om or PROPER nouns

In Tagalog a defin ite article, Si, is generally prefixed to the names of

persons related to or well known to the 9

names of relationsh ip and terms of affection .

proper name of an animal belongmg to the speaker.

inces d im inutives are m uch especially w ith in the fam ily.

also some terms of this nature lai'gely used'

in Sang]

ker or writer, as well as withI t mayalso be used with the

I n some of the provThere are

or Ch inese-Tagaloge

fam ilies, wh ich are taken from Ch inese and will be discussed later.

Older brother (first born ) . K ;oy a ai koya, my elder brother. The pronoun is unders

E lder brother. Mammy (Manila and southern d ialect ) .E lder siste r. Kai-d ; n

’

kalcd , my elder sister.

My father. Si amd .

My mother. Si ind .

This article is declined as follows :

Nom . John . Si Juan .

Gen . John’s; of John . Ni Juan; hay Juan .

Dat . To, for John .

Aec. John. Kat] Juan .

Abl. From, with,John .

When a name is to be used°

in theplural, the article of common nouns,

any, is used , as : The Johns, any 111anya. ;luan or better, any manyd tina

tawny 1111 Juan (those who are called ohn ) .The article of names has a special plural when coupled with certain

words, as of the parents, relatives, compan ions, or the home.

Nom . John and h is Sind Juan.

Gen . The field of John and his family. Any biih’

d n ind Juan .

Dat. To, for, Pe dro and h is

Acc. The field of Ped ro and h is family. ny kand Ped rony bukid .

Abl. From , by, Ped ro and his

0 These two word s are d erived from patid and ka, meaning tied w ith the samecord . Lalakt

"inmate and babaye

'isk malc. In Tagalog. however, separate words

are used to express elder brother,"

elder sister,"

younger brotheror sister, etc.

28 TAGALOG LANGUAG E .

S i is not used alone be fore names of persons unr elate d to the s ieaker

except in a jok ing wav; in other cases the Spanish wo rd Senor, . lr. , is

inserte d as : S i Senor Blanca, Mr. Blanca . ( 17 1 1 131 1 is the Tagalog eq u iva

len t for“ Senor and Gal for Don .

"Dayany is

“ Dona. These termsare used by purists.

THE ARTICLE OF COMMON NOL'

NS.

The article any (the ) is used with all common nouns, and also those

proper nouns not applyingto persons— i. e . , the Pnsig . any 1

’1i11 1

'

y; the Philipines, 11ny Filipinos. Sometimes this art icle is prefixed to names of cit ies.

t is decline d both in the singu lar and plural, the word manya (sign of

plurality) being added in the latter case.

DECLENM ON OF ANG .

Noni . sing. The.

Gen . sing. Of the.

Dat . sing. To , for, the.

Ace . sing. The. Xany; 811 .

Ah]. sing. From,b y , the. Nany; 811 .

N01". plur. The . Any manyu .

Gen . plur. (li the . Nany many"; manya.

Dat . plur. To, for, the. N i "Mum/t .Acc. plur. The . Nany manyu ; 111 1 11111 1 13111.

Abl. plu r. From ,with , the . S11 1111113113; nany 11111 1 15111 .

The. for ms 11 1°

and nind of the article of names and the form nany of thearticle o f conunon nouns are use dwhen a wor d in the g

enitive follows anominative in the sentence . Examples : The mother of John

,any 111

°

Juan ; the. house of Thomas and h is family ,any bdhay nind Tonnis; the

darkness of the nigh t , any kad ilinnin nany yoh-i.

The forms kay, 1111 116 , and 1111 are used w ith the genitive when insertedbetween the nominative article and its no un . E xamples : The mother ofJohn , any kay Juan ind ; the house of Thomas and h is fam ily , any kami

TomdaMlmy; the darkness of the n ight , any so yab-i na kad ilimdn . AncientGreek has almost th is same construction .

TH8 COMMON NOL'

X .

Nouns in the Tagalog lang uage are of various classes ; s ome are root

words, whose d erivation can not be traced ; others are bu ilt Up from roo ts,and many are for

eign words, mainly from Spanish , although some Arab icand Sanskrit wor ds are to be found , as we ll as a few from Ch inese andother sources. They are indeclinable, and the sign o f plurality is generallvindicated by the word 11111 117113place d before the noun pluraliz e d.

VOCABI'

LARY .

Banana (in general) . 86 Eng.

Bed . I ’d /my.

Be dq u ilt. K tinw l.

Beer. Serbem ( from Sp. , ccrrez a ) .Blanket . zlfmda (Sp.

Bread . Timipay ( from {13my, idea of kneading, 1 . c kneat e1

Bread fr uit tree. Antipolo ; lipolo. Antipolo is also a

town in Riz al Province.

Butter ; lar d.

Carabao (buffalo ) .

general.

Cat, domestic. Pusa. JhwanyisMalay for the palmcat l’aradoxurus ) .

The definite and indefinite id ea runs throughou t the Tagalog language,and the word s

“to have ,

”not to have,

” “

there is,” “

there is not,”etc ,

bring th is out plainly.

vocasucanv.

Have (all persons ; from 1161111,

Have (de f.Ha3 e vou (some

, auv)?Ha3e 3011 (that, this )?1 .

Indeed ; tru lv.

Monev.

Perchancc .

Perhaps ; some ; auv.

There is not .

What?

111 111 requ ires the article and

preposit

l

ion .

E x l. la3 e vou auvrice ? l111 1/r1’

1on 1. 1 1 1 1y Have y ou that rice?

(g'

Aa 811

0

1311 1 1

°

y1'

1ny Yes,sir, 1 tim e some mayrdm z

Yes , si r I have it 1111 so

llayr 11011 is used 33 hen ask ing in a general way ,as in the mark et or in a

shop o r store ; 11 11 1111 is used 33°

hen a certain ob ject'

is m ean t . May/1 1 1 1111 means“ how 111 111 h is

“

I do n o t w ish to ,

’’

and 111511 is wh ich .

” W iththe fo rego ing 3 1_

»cab u l:1ry all o rd inarv com fo rts an d supplies, e~< 1 ept cloth

ing,can be asked in ! th t o ughont the prov

-hu es 33 here Tagalog is under

stood,and th ese 33 o rd s are gene rall3 un de rstoo d th rougho u t th e island of

I 1120 11 on acco un t o f the ir general sim ilarit y to the correspond ing w ords

in o ther d ialects. The mos t conspicuo us em 1 ptio n is 111 11 1 1, (33ate r ) , 13 h ich

is 1111 1111 111 in Pampango , I locano , and o ther no rthe rn d ialects of Lu z on .

lt i°

I ”(Y

Bo tt le .

C ustom : habit .

I la ) ; sun .

I°.3 e r3 1 l°13 ; 1lailv.

( vanta 1 .l lit1 rs ) .

1 Glass ; 1°

rvstal.

( iu l1 i.

1 1 1111 i 1/1 l 11 .

(Malav,

3111311 1111 11 (lit . , there is ;

X 11 1111 .

( 111111 1 61111 k11 bagd .

’¢{Mag/f

8 11 (lit . , Is w ith you?)Akri (form w ith nom inative ; indef.

Ago .

81111 1111. Also means halt°

peso .

Akin , [so (latter postfixed to def

in ites l.

11111111.

Bag/(i .

”ll/d .

( 1 111 13; 1 111 1; (”1n0-11 .

Kn (fo rm w ith nom inative ;

prefixed o r else is preceded hv a

1117111 1 1 1 .

Togo . I 111eri1 '11 .

{111116 11 (S IX ,

Pro ng/11 .

(111111 .1 11 1 11 1 .

“ 11 11111.

. I 1°1 11 1-1i1°1 1 1 1 .

Solo / 1 ( Iinglis h eq u ivalent , 3 q uartsl i l1l11t .

1 sai1 l to he fr11 11 1 d ialectical

( h inese ,If go ld ,

"and £11311,

i e g1‘

1l1 len z” Malay,

1 1 111 1 1 1°

nat ive go ld ,


Priest . Paré (Sp. , md re) .

Ring. Singsing (hialay, chinchin ) .Silver. P ita/4Malay,perak,alsoplace name ) .Son or daugh ter (ch ild ) . Anak.

Span iard . E spaiiol (S Taga (hatila (fromCastilla, astile ) .

Bald.

Tagalog.

Bayan .

Bel-on.

Sex is d istin iehed bythead dition of the words lalah'

,male, or babdye,

female,"wit the appropriate

“tie

”(9, ng, or na ) . Ex . : My sister (Any

aking kapat id na babdye— lit . , The my female brother ) ; my son (any aking

anal: na lalak'i) .A few word s ind icate sex in themselves, but they are very lim ited in

number compared w ith those in Aryan languages.

VOCABULARY .

Aunt

Father.

G irl, unmarried woman .

Male : man .

Female ; woman .

Miss ; young lady.

Mother.

Used also as a djectives.

Uncle . Principally heard in Ma

Young man ; bachelor ; venth . B inam (from bum boy, ch ild ) .Young man,

unmarrie d. Bagonytduo (lit .,

new

THE TlE4 .

The Tagalogear d islikes the sequence o f certa in sound s, and for th is

reason three ties,“

g,” "

ng, and“no

,

”are much used , more especially

when an ad jective is prefixed to a noun or a noun in the gen itive mod ifies

another in the nominative .

The tie g”is added to such an ad jective o r nom inative if end ing in

n , the genitive following the nom inative m od ifie d. The ad j ective may

greced e the noun , as in English , or follow it, as ls generally the case in

panish The tie is added to the noun in the latter case, if it end s

in“n . Ex . : (1 ) W isdom (karunufiycm ) ; great (dokthi) ; great W isd om

(Icarunufifzang dakila) . (2 ) Silver m irror (su lumin ) ; silver m i rror

aalmm'

ngpunk ) .The h e

“11 is a dd e d to words end ing in a vowel not preced ed by

another vows U, as in tduo,is conside red as a consonan t , as it sounds

nearlylike the English w ,

”and is w ritten W ith th is lette r byman y nat ives.

Ex . : A d u tiful ch ild (Batangma bm t ) ; a bott le o f w ine ( ixu ng bolcug d ink ) ;a beau tifu l woman (bab dyeng magandd ) ; a Man i la man ( isu ng ((uum gMaynila) .The tie no is used when the first word end s in any consonant (except

or in a d iphthong. E x . : A d u ti fu l ch i ld (.llu lnu t no hard ) , a large

house (bdhay na malaki) ; clear water (nil/ cg nu malmuo, or w almao nu

NO IN DEFIN ITE ARTK LB .

There is no special indefin ite article (a o r an ) in Tagalo o although the

numeral and (one ) may he used .

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

THE VE RB TO BE .

The En lish verb “to he” mayhe sometimes represented in Tag

alog bythe partic e ay, chan in to

’

y for euphony after a prece ding vowe EIs your horse white

‘ faxing cabayo mo’

y walnut?) The bird is singing

(. lng ibon ay hun muhuni) . Generally in uestions the verb to be isunderstood , as : 1 , noanyaabi mo? (What d i you say

?— lit .,What the said

The verb is understood also when a pred icate ad jective is used ;as,My father is good (Mabu li anyaking ama . lyalso connects two clausesof equal force ; as, I f John comes, go away (Kan damdting si Juan

,ay

umalia ka ) .

FUTURE AND PAST OF

The particle ay is invariable as to tense, the idea of past or fu ture beingexpressed by the answer or an adverb o f time. Ex . : Beautiful then , she is

is Ugly now (.llaganda gig/(i noon , flyayon ay parl‘

git) . You will be sick

to-morrow (Baikaaikao aymasakit ) .SomeTagalog writers use ai in place of ay, esp

ecially in newspaper w o rk .

THE CONJUNCTION AND .

A t,changing to

’t, under the same circumstances in w h ich ay changes

to’

y, represents the con junction “and .

”I t mayalso stand for becauw

”

in compound sentences w hen a cause is expressed ; as, I can not read ,

because I have no spectacles (Hind i akd makababasa 8a pagka’t u '

ald akongsalamin

When «3; and at are followed by a mono syllable, as so , the vowel is notd ropped .

SECT ION Two .

The principal interrogative pronouns and ad verbs are as fo llows :

“fhat? a nd? W hen?

W ho? {Sinai How?

W hich? {Alinf How m uch (value )?W here? gSadn? I low manv

?

And, what, is decline d as follows :

sxsecu a. PLl'

RA l

Nom . What? (Ana?Gen . Of what? j Sa and! gNrmg and.

”

Dat . To, for what? (Sn and ?

A00. g’

Sa and? ( 37mg and?

Ab]. (M e ) In , at what?

gSa and?

Ab]. (Ins. ) By, with what? gNangmm.

This pronoun is used only in speak ing of th ings , never

expression kn?means What do you wan t? ”

j Sinof ,“who, is declined as follows :

SI NGULAR . P l.l’

RA l

Nom . W ho? j Sino?

Gen . W hose,of whom . glyanmo? gh e e/J

?“

Other cases. gb'

a kanmo?

a l’

sed only when th e question is not h eard or und erstood .

6 Not kam no-kanmo, as the first form is a trisyllab le , and in Tagalog repetitions stop at

at the second syllable (or letter, as the case may be ) . A'

aumong mmTya and ea kunimmgare also used .


Example : j Kanineng blil’id iydn .

’ (W hose field is Sn capitdn

(Of the mayor or presidents ) ; gA’ine .

’ Sa capildn sa hag/an (Ofthe mayor of the town ) .

From early times the title of the mayor of a town or pueb lo was

gobernadorcillo”(little governor) . Th is name was changed in 1893 to

capitan mu nicipal,"and in 1898 to presiden te, a name retained u nder

American adm imstration . Natives ignoran t o f Spanish generally speak of

th e”capitan .

”

W h ile one is used for th ings and s ino for persons, the pronoun u lin,

wh ich ,

”is used fo r both f t is declined :

PLURA I

Nom . W h ich? g’

xllin f 1Alin-alin .

’

G en . O f which? j S aalin .

’gNang alin? gS aalin-elini

Dat. To. for what?

j Sa alin gSa alin-ah’

n?

Acc. W hat? gSa alin! gNang alin .

’(

‘

Se u h’

n-aliu !

Loc . In , at wh ich? gSa alin .

’gSa alin-aliu?

I ns. By,with

, etc. , which? {Naug alin .

"gNang alin

-alin .

’

S ow ith the genitive is preferable in answeringa question . p iling"long/ofmay also be use d for the plural. The form gJIarZF/(i alin .

’ is rather incle

gan t . Thus the English“ Which men?

”may be expressed bv “

p ilin

aling triuef” “

gAlin mafibd ti me?”

or (d ing tdue!”

THE INTERROG A ’

l‘lVE A ERBS .

These adverbs present no pecu liarities and are used as in English .

”Ian? (How many? ) obviates the use o f the pluraliz ing particle warm; as,

JI lang nine? (How manymen?

) I n inqu iring the price of an article in themarket the restrictive form nmgkakano is generally used ; as,

“

gJIaqka

kano anyman'

bailleg?”(How m uch for eggs

? ) Bu t in speaking of pu rching the en tire quantity nmgkano is righ t .

THE DEMONSTRAT IVE PRONOI'

NS .

These are four in Tagalog, two being translated bv this,

another bythat,

”and the fourth by the poetic form you .

”

The first is yari, and means th is .

”Strict ly speak ing, it shou ld be used

only to ind icate an object nearer to the speaker than to the person

add ressed , bu t practically th ispronoun is d ropping ou t of use . For exam

ple, l

'

aring aking prise (This leart of m ine ) , wh ile more exact , is little

card , the following word in} (this) being used : itengakingp rise . l'

eri isa d ialect ical form .

Yari is declined as follows :

smeuu n . ru'nu

Nom . Th is. Yuri. l'

ar ing mu ng/l .Gen . Of th is. K iri: d ini 8a . .Vlr l

'

ny"uni/d .

Dat . To,for th is. D ini 8a. I lin i 8a "m ug/u .

Ace. Th is . N iri; d ini sa . N iring mange , etc .

Loc. A t, in this. [hm su . h iu i sa mango .

Ins. By, with th is. K iri. mu ng".

The ord inaryword meaning this”is no, and strictly d eno tes ob jects o r

persons eq u id istant from both speaker and the pe rso n spoken to . I t isdeclined as follows :

S INGULAR . PU'

RA I

Nom . This. [long num gu .

Gen Of th lS .Vllony ma ngu , etc.

Dat. To, for th is. D ita sa um nga .

6855— 06— 3

34 TAGALOG L ANGUAGE .

Acc. This. Dile se . Dita an mafi'

gd .

Loc. At, in th is. Dita an. At, in these. Dile m ma tted .

Ins. By, with this. Kite. By , w ith these . Niteng mu f f/d .

That is expressed in Tagalog by the wo r d iycin ,especially when

applied topersons or objects nearer to the person sp oken to than to thetspeaker. is de cline d as follows:

arse-r u n. m u m

Nom . That. 13671 . Those. [yang naangd .

Gen . Of that . Aiyan; d iyciu m . Of those . Niyang"undid , etc.

Dat. To , for that. Dig/(in so . To, for those . h imin se minted.Ace. That . Nip/(in; dig/(inm . Those . .Viyang mangmetc .

Loc . At , in that. Klytia on . At, in those . Nimin m martini.Ins. By,wit.h that . Niydn. By , with those . N iyu ng mange .

The fourth demonstr ative pronoun , 31min, means you , although at

Present generallv translated“that .

”Teen is a dialectical form . I t is

decline d:

QiNG l'

IA R . P l.i'

RA l

Nem . Yon (that ) . l’

aen. Yon (those ) l'

ming,"mated .

Gen . ( if yon . A'

s/amp, d ti en m . () f yon . .Viyaliny Illtntild , etc.

Dat . To, for you . Drier: am. To . for von . [Men m "uni/d .

Acc. Yon . Nip/min; (Men am. You . A'

iyaeng"m ind .

Loc. At, in'

en . Dean na. At, in yon . Deon an mange .

Ins. By,wit you . Niyaén . By, with von . A'

iymmy

The. particle se follows the pronoun in each case as given ,bu t it

, as well

as the pluraliz ing particle mmiyri , belongs to the person or object pointedout , and not to the pronoun .

These four demonstra tives have a pecu liar id iomatic use in that they arerepeate d in the nominative after the person o r object mod ifie d as well asireccd ing the same, in the latter case agreeing in number and cas e

.

xamples : Th is man (I long lmumg f145) , both nominative singular. Thatboy

’

s clothes (Any damit n iyu ng Imtang iydu ) ; first, genitive singu lar ;secoml, nom inative sing ular. That man (has ) much money (Hammingsalapi n iyang (n iyaong) triwmgymin ) ; lit . , much moneyof that man that .

”

(Generally with nominative. ) [tony buhrklal: nu ite’

y d ip/tin m batcmg pain(Th is flower is for that child ) . In the second clause , the first pronounisin dative and second in nominative .

ADVERBH OF PLACE.

From the four demonstrative pronouns the following a dverbs o f placeare derived :

Here (close to the speaker ) . Din i.

Here. Dita.

There (near add ressee ) . Dig/an.

Yonder (there ) . Deon.

W ith theparticle na prefixe d t o this class of adverbs, the idea of

“am ,

is,” “

are’is expressed . I t will be noted that the initial letter J is soft

ened to r where the particle m is used alone.

Am ,is or are here (close ) . N arini; nayrri; naud ini.

Am,18 or are here (more d istant ) . Narato mu te. naud ite.

Am , 18 or are there. Nara/an; nan/(in; nand iydn .

Am , is or are yonder. Narecin; nayadn; namloen .

The particle d i with the same class of adverbs expresses the past tense.

For euphony the particle changes to do w ith dean.

TAG ALOG LANG UAG E . 35

Was or were here (close ) . Dirin i.

Was or were here (more d istant ) . D irito.

Was or were there . lh'

igma .

Was or were yonder. [Mr/mu .

The particle pa w ith the same adverbs expresses the fu tu re .

W ill be here (close ) . Pa rim'

.

W ill be here (more d istan t ) . Pu rilo.

be there . Pariyan .

\Vill be yonder. Pardon .

E x . Is the man there? (Nariyrin bag/z any (duo?) He is not here,

he isyond er Wald r im,

nu rérm ) . W here is Captain Tino (Faustino )? (58min[or uaundoon] Si ( hpinin Tina”) In Man ila (Nam Maynild) .

W hen w ill he come back? (gK u ihm Possibly w ith in a week.Ilu ru hil 8a {sum lingo) Who is his agen t

?

(gSino (mg kan iyung Imiiwala?)The Ch inaman O

/ng Laico on Calle Real . lug insik Ong La ico se Cu tieReal) .

Thank you S aldmat ) .

TH E PERSONA I . I’IlU NU l'

NS .

The personal pronouns in Tagalog shou ld receive careful stud as theyexh ibit several pecu liarities o f fo rm and use no t found in English.

A ll pers onal pronouns have,two genitives , the first fo rm being prefixed

to the accompanying no un o r verb , and the second fo rm su ffixed . The

two forms are not used in the same clause,the second fo rm being preferred

w ith the definite fo rm of the verb . Howeve r,if the sentence commences

with an adverb or negative, particle, or is a question ,the su ffixed forms are

placed be fore the verb .

The first person plural, like nearly all Malayan and Melanesian lan

guages , has two forms,the first. correspond ing to

“

we"in a general sense,

and includ ing those spoken to, wh ile the seco nd form,like the ed itorial

we,

”excludes the person or ersons ad d ressed . The re are also two

dual fo rms, wh ich may be trans ated tho u and I . These d ual fo rms

have the same mean ing, the first form ,kih i

,being m o re general and used

in Manila,Riz al

,Laguna,

Batangas , and Tayabas , w h ile the second form ,

kafd , is found in Bulacan , Nueva Ecija, and the Tagalog-siwak ing parts o f

Pampanga and Tarlac. Bataan probab ly fo llows Bu lacan in sty le, w h ile

in Cavite the usage is like that o f Man ila, e tc .

In the use of the personal pronouns together, a very d ifferent ord er is

observe d from E nglish . The l‘u galog ord er is

“I (we ) , tho u (you ) , and

he, she (they ) , ignoring the E uropean custom o f ment ion ing the lis tener

first, the absen t or th ird person nex t, and the speaker la st . The Tagalogsays I and

(on,

I and John ,

”and w ith the further peculiarity that

he literally p uraliz es the first pronoun and gives the pronoun or noun

follow ing its genitive fo rm in the correct number . The examples w ill

ex lain the matter more clearly.

he use of the word it”is avoid e d by speakers o f Tagalog. I t is on ly

used when ob jects are person ified , as in sto ries, e tc . See example .

FI RST P E R?“ HI NG l'

LA R .

Nom . 1 . Al’

Gen . O f me ; my. Akin (pre fix ) ; lo (su ffi x

Othercases. To,for, w ith ,

by me . Nu (ikin .

I NC Ll'

BIV I-Z FI RST I’E RSU h l’la‘.

KA l

Nom . We (and you ) . T(lg/o .

Gen . Of us ; our (and you r) . . lh’

u (pre fix ) ; nu lin (su ffixOthermses . To,

for, etc. ,us (and So « fin .

vm i )

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

EXCLUSIVE "m PERSON PLURAL.

Nom . We (not you ) . Kami.

Of us ; our. Amin (prefix ) ; namin (suffix ) .Othercases. To, for, etc. ,

us. S eamin.

"m PERSON DUAL .

Southern form. Northern form.

Nom . We (thou and I ) . K im. Katd .

Gen . Of us (we two ) ; our. Kan itd (“ppm(a ) . Atti la (a ) .

Othercases. To, for, etc . , us (we two ) . Sa kani 8a aid .

SECOND PERSON GINO l'

LAR .

Nom . Thou (you ) . (prefix ) ; ka (suffix ) .Gen . Of thee, thy (

your ) . Iyé (prefix ) ; mo (suffix ) .

Other cases. To, for, etc., t cc.

The sin lar forms are stillused in Tagalog, and when respect is intended ,instead 0 using the plural, as in English , or the third person singular, asin C anish , the particle pd is sufiixed . The plural, also with M, is usedn 1) anila in many cases, but may be said to be an imitation of the Spanisht 'oaotros (ye ) .

SECOND PERSON PLURA L .

Nom . You .

Gen . Of you ; your. m’

nyo(su ffix ) .Other cases. To, for, etc. , you .

THI RD PERSON BINGULAB .

Nom . He, she. Sig/d .

Gen . Of h im ; of her ; his ; her. Kan iyd (prefix ) ; m

'

gd (su ffix ) .Other cases. To, for, etc. , him , her. 8 akan iy

THlBD PER-SON PLI .

’

RAL .

Nom . They

. Sild .

Gen . Of t em ; their. Kanild

(prefix ) ; ailé (su ffix ) .

Other cases. Them (to, for, Se kan il

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS .

These are the same as the genitives of the

personal pronouns and are

generallypre ceded by the article any. The fol owing examples will showthe variations :

My ch ild .

Thy ch ild .

His (or her ) ch ild .

Our (of we two ) ch ild .

Our children (all of us) .

Our ch ild (exclud ing person spokento ) .

Your child .

Their ch ild .

{Any dkiny anak.

Any unak ko.

Any iyony anal:

Any anak mo.

Any kaniyany analr.

Any anak niyd .

Any kan itunyanak. Anyatanyanak.

Any anak ta . Any anal: ta .

ny aliny man‘

yd anak.

lny marfyd anak natin .

Any aminy arm/c.Any anak namin .

Any inyong and /c.

Any anak n inyé.

Any kanilany anak.

Any anak nild .

38 TAGALOG L ANG U AG E .

INDEF‘IN ITE PRONOL'

NB.

Besides anoman ,alinman, and sinoman , there are several word s which

may be used at times as indefinite pronouns, and at other times with

adverbial force. One of these is bdlany, wh ich can be used for“some, any,

and each . 3x . : Balany drao (mme day) . Any balany (due (any man ) .Sa Mlany fad. (for each one ) .The numeral fad (one ) , prefixed to wor ds like «tw o (day) , and (duo

(man ) gives the idea of “one dav; a certain man , etc . I t is also used

with demonstrative pronouns as follows : [tony but (th is one ) ; d iydn ou fed

(to that other ) ; dwin m ind (to that other yonder ) . M may be said to

mean“other

”among a few persons or objects , and the wor d flat to desig

nate“oth er

”amongmany. I bany lduo (another man complete ly) ; {bang

Myay (another thing entirely) .

Tanan ,(titan, and paua mean everyone, all (persons ) . All” (the

adjective) is (chat.

RELATIVE PRONO I'

NH.

These pronouns, which in English are exigessed by wh ich ,

" “that.

”

who,”etc. , are expressed veryobscurely in agalog bymeansof the art icle

any, and the ties y, ny, and no . The Tagalog als o has a negative relative

pronoun (If, translated by who not,” “

which not ," “

that not.”

Ex

Hewho is wellbehave dis esteemed byall. My mabuliny (Isa!ay minamahal nany Zahaf .

The bo ok which you are read ing is mine. . lny lihrony binabasa mo’

y dkin.

I d id not receive the letter that you sent DI kn limmyap any milat na ipi

to me . nadah’

t mo so akin.

The man who does not d isobey the laws . lny hiuony (If mmasalamtanywill be protected in h is rights . ijmymlanyol nany kamiran .

The phrase each other is expressed by the particle nayka o r mayka,together w ith the ap ro riate noun or pronoun . E x . : Do thev under

stand each other? 34 ay n imalam 3516 (fromThe rincipal d ifficultvthe student of Tagalog will experience here w ill

be in the use o f the exc usive and inclusive forms o f the first person plu

ral. The d ual forms are little used in the nominative, but are. q u ite fr:

uently hear d in the oblique and accusative cases. .\s has been remarked .

t lese exclusive and inclusive forms are to be fo und in nearly all the

Malayan languages, while in s ome of the. allied ) le laucsian tongues, such

as that of Fiji, the. second and th ird pem ms have not only a d ual, but a

triple form , 111 add ition to the ord inary plural. The Fij ian first person hasalso the d ual and triple forms, each of w hich are d ivide d into an inclusiveand exclusive form .

Sncrrox Tu nas .

As has been previously explaine d, Tagalog root words may be used as

nouns, verbs, a dj ectives, and adverbs in many cases, either by the context

or particles affixe dor suflixe d. Natu rally the mum is generally the sim

plest form , especially the concrete noun, but secondarv or derivative

nouns may be quite complicated in their construction . The noun is inva

riable in form , number being expresse d by the word mru‘

iyd , or such wo r ds

as“all,

” many,”etc. , for the plural. Cases ar e expressed by the article

or repositions, and no gender is known . A great many common nouns

in agalog ar e derived from the Spanish , a few from Chinese, and somefrom Arabic and Sansk rit sources. AllTagalog nouns may be used w ith

the article.

The words for meals and s ome articles o f foo d. cook ing utensils, etc. ,

vegetables, and fruits not previouslvmentione dare :

TAGALOG LANG UAGE . 39

Break fast .

Midday meal.Afte rnoon lunch .

Supper.

Meat or fish .

Broth .

Salted fish sauce.

Salty or sour sauce.

Pick les (bam boo sprouts,

Roasted or baked meat or fish (whatbaked o r roasted ) .

Frogs’

legs.

Suck ing pig.

Ven ison .

W ild pork .

The jungle fowl.The d uck .

The tree duck (De ndrocygnaThe goose .

The liver.

The heart .

The mudfish ; walk ing fish .

The following fish are much eaten in Lu z on,and

,having no English

names, the Span ish names are given instead :

The pam o Seulophngus ) . lug; Icilu ny (best fish in Lu z on ) .

The mi 0 lm / bet/47163 (large tish , eommon

The corvina (Us/eoehilus . lng ain'

t/mp .

The liz a. lug] (u lna/C.

The boca-d ulee. Any mama/i.

The sea pro ducts eaten are :

The 0 ster. A ug Id ld ’n’

l .

The 8 ell of a clam, etc. l ny ku hihi. ( .llneabeln ’ is said t<

mean“ W here there are clams,

Pampangan d ialect . )The lobster. 1 11g "lu ng.

The crab .

‘lnyalimmTf/o .

The small crab . l ug u /imumy.

The shrimp. AnyIi i/mu . ”Hu rt ing-loi/mn,village,

northeast o f Manila,

“

sh rimpd ry ing plaee .

AnyA u g] Int/d imly.

Any Iu lmm'

m (Sp , rubanu ) .Any (along.

. lng alumna] (Sp. , almuerz o)Auglmcghulian (Ianghu li, m iddavA ug m iu imlul (Sp. , meriemla ) .

Ang Impumm (Import . afternoon ) .Any u lum (Sp. , rmmlu ) .Aug sub/IO.

A ny pu h’

s .

Any m um mm . (.S'

umu u su u means to

d ip any viand into liqu id . TheW o rd elmwehow . so o ftenheard , is Cantonese or llongkongpigeon English for food . )

Anq uehara (S ix ,m 'hia, from "in

ustani, «Muir, pick les ) .

Any ini/um . l'

m ihuo means to

roast or bake

lug; uuu ogti him nanypu lakti.Ixmuin "(my lu ck.

Lu nuin "(my u sd .

m in nany balmydu nui; Jazmin nany

pug/fl.

A"y lu’m yu .

Any ih'

k.

Palm".

Any ganad'

(Salish , hafiisa , not fromSp. gam

e", a noose ) .

Any lm ru real (Sp.

.

‘lh y [NH'

U

f lny ku /upu li (Sansk . pardpd fl; ( ) ltlTag”lng halo/m i c; numli.lug] Imlm u 'm/mum (from In t/(m

,

we ll;A lloy"M y.

Any 1mm .

lug «Inlay(commonest fish in Lu z on '

l iple

TAG ALOG

The prop (against w inds ) .The partit ion (wall) .The household furn iture .

The chair.

The table .

The clothes press (or cupboard ) .The bed .

The q u ilt.

The pillow .

The head (o f a bed ) .The mosqu ito net .

The wash basin .

The water.

The soap.

The towel.

The tooth b rush (foreign ) .

The tooth brush (native ) .The clothes brush .

The pail or bucket .

The nigh t vessel.

The trunk .

The valise .

The key.

The d lock .

TheFol

ck .

Th read .

The need le.

The pin .

Silk t hread .

The scissors.

The th im ble.

The eyeglasses or spectacles.

The ietare ; image .

The ousehold sh rine .

W ick for cocoanut-oil lamp.

Cocoanu t-o il lamp.

The lamp (o ld name ) .

Matches .

Fire-making sticks.

The flint.

The steel.

The tinder.

Rice m ill (hand ) .The rice mortar.

The rice c tle .

The smal mortar.

The small pestle .

The broom .

The mop (cloths ) .The raz or .

The sad iron (flatiron ) .

LANG UAG E .

the hand

4 1

O l"

Any snhay.

Any d inyrliny.

Any Icasanlcapan 3a balmy.

Any u updn (from unmpé, to sit

down ) .

Any lamesa (Sp. , mesa

Any simpanan .

Anypdpay; any cama

Any kémot.

Any z inan .

Any ololnin ; any olondn .

Any knlamlni.

Any ln'

lamnsan .

Any lciln'

y.

Any saln’

m (Sp., j abén ) .

Any balindany.

Any cepillo nany nytpm (cepillo, Sp.

fo r

Any sipan .

Any cepillo nany damil .

Any timed .

A ny and"; any orinola (Sp ) .Any calnin .

Any tampipl; any talcln’

l .

Any scan (Ch inese , sosi ) .Any candado (Sp. W o rd )Any cerrad ura (Sp. word ) .Sinai/a! (spun , from milid ,

spin ) .

A ny lcan’

tymn .

Any us/n ler (Sp.,alfiler ) .

Siw ilal na sutlci (Sansk .

, salra) .

A ny ynnliny.

Any declal (Sp. word ) .A ny salam i) : sa maid .

A ny la ranan .

Any alll lr 8a ln'

llmy.

Any Iinsim ( from (‘

h inese In’ntsim ) .

Any tiny/my (from Ch inese ) .

Any samba; any siln lm ( I ’mn in now

used ) .

Apuya n ; p0sp0r08 (Sp. , j t)Any pnynsan (sim ilar to those O f

North Am erican I nd ians ) .

Anyplay/clan ; any panliz fyan (local ) .

Any ln'

nalon .

A ny llllu ll .

A ny ylllnyrin (from yillny, to grind ) .Any [nanny (said to he o rigin Of

“

Lu z on, bu t impro bab le ) .

Any halo.

Any lnsm zylnsonyan

lny ka zany ( li t .

,

“

arm”

A ny n'

allx (verb n'

a lis m eans lt ) re

move

A ny

. lny pa zfilalu t ( from tilu l, to shave :

also (‘

allt ' t l any labasa,from Sp.

naraj a , raz or ) .

Any prinsa (Sp.

,[a prensa , the.

u re c e l

46

Time.

The star.

Venus : the evening star.

The Pleia des ; the seven stars.

The morning star.

The shooting star.

The comet.

The sky.

The break of dav.

The dawu .

The morning.

Midday.

Afternoon (evening) .Night .

The dayligh t ; sunlight.

Moonligh t.

To-tnorr ow .

Yester day.

Davbefore yeste rday.

A few days ago .

After a while .

(Th ree ) days ago .

(Ten ) davs ago.

( ) ne week .

Every week , week lv

TAG ALOG LANGUAGE .

Any tim e .

Any bilafu .

Tmzt dayal“ ligh t of the

(Kamaka expresses

The names of the days are Spanish . Sunday being called L ingo, corruptedfrom llominya . Linya is also used for

“

week .

”The word “ minute ” is

also taken from Spanish , and the word for ho u r is a co rruption of theSpanish word ho ra . The names of the mon ths, days, and other d ivisionsof time from Span ish are given below for conven ience o f the student.

January.

Februarv.

March .

A ril.

3 ay.

June.

July.

August.

September.

Octob er.

November.

December.

The month of January.

Sunday.

Monday.

Tuesday.

Wednesday.

Thu rsday.

Friday.

Satu rday.

The beginning.

The m idd le.

The end .

The hour.

Watch : clock .

Half hour.

Minute.

Junie .

Julio .

Ayoxlo .

Septiembre.

Octal/re.

N oviembre.

Diciembre.

Any bunnymere.

L ingo (from Sp. , dominyo ) .Lanes .

Marten.

AIM’W ’UICR.

Jnercs.

l n '

rnes.

Sti'NldO.

Any maid .

Any p agilan .

Any kolo/mann ; any hanydn .

Any eras (from Sp. , hora ) .Orastin .

Kalahatin oras.

Minute. Sp. wor d) .

Any lala.

Any bnlalal'

ao.

Any bitu in may b untol.Any kaT

'

yil.

Any Inrayway.

Anymode ling tim e .

Any tuna l ,‘

a

Any (an?) at”(Malav, lcinyah-ari) .

Any Aa

ron .

Any ya ) i.

Any sinay nanyarao.

Any xinay nany budn .

B tikas.

Kahap on .

A'

mnakaih'

m .

Mamayd-maya .

A'

ainal'alafhi.

“days ago .

[m ay liuya (corruption of Sp. , Do)nmyo, Sunday) .

L inyolinyo.

48

Navigation was considerably develo

TAGALOG LANGUAG E .

by the Tagal prior to the

arrivalo f the Spaniards, and 3 considers lemaritimevocabu rvdeveloped .

The words in ord inary use are :

The vessel.The sail.

The art of sailing; navigation .

Anyone aboard .

Sailor ; mariner.

Pilot .

The rudder.

The compass.

The mast.

The oar.

The oarsman ; rower.

Padd ling.

Rowing.

Scu lling.

The cover (of boat or canoe ) .The canoe .

The prau .

Any saw kyoin.

Any Iayay.

Anyp aylaltiya

Any sakay or merlv“

padd ler

Tayarayat (lit .

, sea d weller

Halon (Arabic ) ; practico (Sp. )Any uyit.

Any brtiju la (Sp.

Any pale (Sp. word ) ; any aundony

oarsman,

rare ) .Any balaii

'

yan (Batangas Province) .A ny kaliy.

Any (loony.

Any hult’

nanymach /an .

Any likin .

Any sayiran.

Any niananayn'd n (S. to (Fil.

Sp., banquero ) .

Anyydod .

Anymanyaydod .

Anypaysaywdn .

Anypay-ydod .

Any yliuliu (Chinese word , liu ) .Any

°

arany.

Any bany/rd .

Anyp arao.

Political and natural subd ivisions are as follows, in so far as they pertain

to social relations :

The Ph ilippine Islands.

The Visayan Arch ipel

The Tagalog country.

The Visayan region .

The provmce.

The jurisd iction (of a municipality

townsh ip) .The court.

The town .

The town proper.

The fellow-townsman .

The house.

The nei hb or.

The sett ement ; ham let .

The barrio (war d) .

The head man of a barrio.

The mayor ; alcalde .

The secretary.

The treasurer.

Any kapuluan E lipinas.

Any kapu luan B isaya.

Any kalayaluyan .

Any kabinaydan .

Any (alan' iyan (formerly th is word

meant“

anchorage,”

Any sakop .

Any hokoman (from hokow , a judge ;Arabic hakim,

doctor, philoso

pher, judge ) .Anybayan (includ ing the ru ra l bar

rios)Any kabayanan (exclud ing rural barrios ) .

Auvkababayan .

Any bdhay.

Any kapidbtihay.

Any nayon (Sp.,sitio) .

Any baran'

yay (old wor d for vessel) .nypulo nany baranyay.

ny cabez a nany bara ii'

yay (Sp.

ter m) .Anypresidente; any capitan (Sp. )Any secretario 8a b ayan; any kalihim.

(L ihim means a secret .

Any team-(fro; any taya 1 at yaman

(lit. , the“wealth gua

50 TAGALOG L ANGUAGE .

Hair (pubic ) .

The crown of the head .

The tein le.

The fore ead .

The eyebrow .

The eyelid .

The eyelash .

The eye.

The pupil of the eye.

The white of the eye.

The tea r duct .

The nose.

The lip.

The tongue .

The car.

The tooth .

The molar.

The um .

The lard palate.

The so ft palate.

The throat .

The larynx .

The lower jaw .

The stoma ch .

The intestine.

The anus.

The neck .

The nape of the neck .

The shoulder.

The shoulder blade.

The arm.

The hand .

The palm .

The finger.

The thumb .

The index finger.

The m idd le finger .

The ring finger.

The little finger.

The wrist .

Bullml. (Bod y hair or feathers,

b alahibo ) .Any bambanan.

Anypili It .

Any no

Any kilay.

Any bubony nanymaid (lit. , the roofof the eye ) .

Anypilikmaid .

Any maid .

Any balinlatdo.

Any bili'

y nany maid .

Any daloyan nang (aha .

Any ilony.

A r

ley lain (probably from Sp.

,labia,

lpAny n

'

ln'

y (Malay, bibi'

r, lip) .Any b uba (Sp. , barba, ch in ) .Any f

anny.

Any n

'

gott (Sp. ; old wor d, mo'

ad y) .Any barbaa (Sp. ; old word s, yumi,bonny, yafiyot ) .

Any d ila .

Any (uni/a.

Any nyipin.

Any lmynnyAny yilriyid .

Any n'

yalan'

yald .

Anyy nlil.

Any lalamunan .

Any yulnny-y ulunyan (d im . of yu

Iuny. a wheel) .Any silmny.

Any aikmnra.

Any bimka.

Any tnmbony.

Any lny.

Any ln'

itok.

Any haliknt.

Anynahiyat.

Any Imraso (from Sp. , bm z o) .Any koumg (also armAnypalm!nang kamay.

Any daliri.

Any h inlaf al'i.

Any hintntnro (from tulu ré, to point

to ) .Any dole (the ch ief

,(lotto : Mala )"

atoll grand fathAny mmnonmy ainym

’

ny (fr om mm o t v

to pu t on ) .Any kolinykmyon .

Any yulnnyyalmiyan (from yalanyu1 1 ,

jewelry ) .Any silco.

Any knko.

Any bulconany dalirl.Any bilibili.

Any d ibd i'

b.

A"(I 8 0130 .

Any lad iany.

TAGALOG LANG UAG E . 55

The cash ier ; paymaster.

The hunter (professional) .The cre ditor.

The d ebtor.

The bearer.

The pred ecessor.

The successor.

The he ir.

The grass cu tter.

The n u rse .

The wet nu rse .

The m idw ife.

The pawnb roker.

The beggar .

The th ief .

The slave.

Sacrtox For a.

THE ADJac rtvs .

The ad jective is a word used in a grammatical sense to qualify, lim it , or

de fine a noun , or a word or ph rase wh ich has the value o f a noun, and it

expresses q uality or cond ition as b elonging to someth ing : Thus,“ b lack

ness”is the name of a quality and is a noun ;

“ b lack” means possessing

blackness and so is an ad jective . The ad jective is used ( I ) attribu tively ,

(2 ) appositively, and (3 ) pred icatively. I'Ixamplcs, (l ) A good man ,

"

(2 ) A man good and great , (3 ) The man is good .

”

Equally in Tagalog as in E nglish ,th is is the meaning of the ad jective,

and ow ing to the greater flexibility of the form e r the construction of such

word s is m uch more clearly to be seen . Like English , some roo t wo rds

are ad jectives by in trinsic significaticm and may be called simple ad joetives. Among the simple ad jectives are bayo new ) , mahal (dear, precious,noble ) , htimak (vile ) , latnyhan (foo lish ) , taninu

'

l.’ (q uiet , tranq u il) , and

(aloe (true ) . Bu t the greate r numbe r o f ad jectives in Tagalog,as in E ng

lish , are compounds formed from roo ts

,wh ich may he sometimes nouns,

by means of prefixes, infixes, and su ffixes like the English su ffixes“

Iy,

”

like” “

ab le,

”etc. , as in

“ friend ly,

“ch ild like ,

”remarkable , etc.

The ord inary article in Tagalog used in the fo rmation o f ad jectives is theprefix ma, nu oubted ly a contraction o f may, to have o r possess, as t here

are nouns w i th wh ich may is still retained w ith the noun to fo rm an ad jective . Among such ma ad jectives may be men tio ned nn tyttndd. (beau tifu l

from yandd , the root expressing the id ea of beau ty o r go o d appearance ,

and martinony (wise ) , from dauong, the roo t express ing t he id‘tl o f w is dom .

I t w ill be observed that ma , like some o the r particles so ftens d to r when

d commences a word .

When prefixe d to nouns denot ing th ings wh ich may be had o r po ssessed ,

ma denotes an abundance o f w hateve r may be sign ified by the noun .

Examples : Si Juan ay mayinn} (Joh n has m uch go ld ) ; mast/a!any balm y

(the house has many rooms ) .

The particle ma has at least n ine other fu nctions , wh ich w d l be ex plained

in the appropriate places.

- lny tuyupagbuyad (from hag/ad ,to

pay a d ebt ) .Any umuyauyaso (from «so

,a dog ) .

Any pimzykaku utu rTyrm (from oilu ny,a debt ) .

Any umytiluny (from litany, a debt ) .Any mnydahi (from (fold

,to carry ) .

Any hinulinhau (from halih'

, to fol

low ) .

Any kalmh'

h'

(from halili, to follow ) .

Any muynmnmua (from mmm , heirsh ip ) .

Any muydadumd (from (111 711 45, gras

s,

herb ) .

Any tuyup' zyuloyu (from alayu , to

care for ) .A ny sisicra .

Any hi/ol.

T i ny nmpaypalu lu i ( from mini, a

pledge ) .Anypulube.

. lny muynmuilcno (from nakdo, to

steal) .

‘lny"Ii/fin .

56 TAGA LOG LANG UAG E .

Way is used really as the verb“to have in the ph rase Ako

’

y may sakit

(1 am sick [ill], literallv,“

I have sick ness or I n ask ing if a person

is ill o r in min the ver is sometimes red uplicated ; e . g.,Maymag/aah ?ka?

(Are yo u ill [or 1 11 pain]?M11 ad jectives may be conjugated w ith the d e finite in fix in to express

opin ion ; e . g. , in im inm r iinony £31 1 (I th ink th is is w ise ) . 3111 is red uplicated to express the present tense ; m ino r iinony i115 wou ld mean I

though t th is was w ise .

Con jugate d w ith the inde fin ite particle may (any in present tense ) , thea1ljecti1 e assum es a verbal form , w ith the ii i iplied id ea o f boasting or pre

tend ing w hat mav be sign ified b y the ro o f ; as , 1111111111 1nu n

-171111 11 1; 111

°

l llipe

(Philip boasts o f being w ise ) ; 111 11) 111 11 1111 11/1 1i1 1l11 \ 1 1 1111 111; (Do lores [Lo la]pre te tnd s to be beau t ifu l ) .

'

l lie idea ma 1 also l_ 1e 1 11n 1 eved by“believes

h imse lf”

(o r‘he rself

”what mav be d eno ted b y the foot ; e . g.

,

“Lola

be lieves he rse lf to be beau t ifu l.”

The part icle 11 1 1 also fo rms some ad jectives, in w h ich the first syllable ofthe roo t is gene rally repeated . These 11 1 1 ad jectives also have an indefin ite ve rbal m ean ing. lix . : \

'

1 1 11 11h1io ( th irst 1 , to be th irsty ) , from uht‘

io;11 1111 1 1 111 11 (tired ,

to be t ired ) ; pogo /1°

11 (a t ired pe rso n ) : 111 1 1111111 13; (dead ,to

be dead , from 1 ’ is he re changed to m fo r en 1hon y .

Som e ad jecti1 es are also fo rme d from ro o ts by t ie pre fix mapay, as

1111 11111y11 1 11y1 1 111 1 11 (abusive ,

insu lting [wo rd s o r acts im plied ]O the rs are fo rm ed b y the pre fix 111 1 111 1 1 ; as, inn/im nu nsoy (boastfu l, vain

glo rio us , o ste n tat io us ) , from o stentatio n . 1 1’

is so ftened to m .

The inde fin ite particles 1111 1 1; and 11 1 1 11, w hen pre ti\ ed to some roots, gen

e rally w ith red upli1 atio i 1 o f the first sy llable o f the sam e, form ad j e1 t1 1 es

in some 1 ases . lax .ll1 1y1la 1

°

1 1 111i (fraud u len t , cheat ing ) , from t he

in itial 11 b1°

ing softened to r ; and 11 11111171 11 (so le u n iq ue,on lv) , from imi , one .

The parti1 le 111 1 1k11,in its sign ificatio n o f cause , fo ri i is ad jecti1 es sim ilar 1 11

m ean ing to th o s e°

1n lt .nglish end ing 1 11“able

,

“ing , etc w hen prefixed

to r1 1o ts 1 11p11l1le 1 1f su 1 l1 si1 1 11 ifi1 ations . The first svll.ib le o f the root is gen

erally red upli1 ate 1l, bu t no t alwa1 s . E x ”also /1 1113111 1 (agreeable , pleasu re

cau s ing ) , from (laughable ,com ic ) , from nine

,and maka

(d isgu st ing ) , from 111211 11, e tc

A few ad ject ive s are fo rm ed by the prefixed particles 11111111 and pain , as

1111 111 111 1 11 1 1 1111 1 (lu kewarm , applied to wate r ) , 11 1 1 111 1A°oko (q u ite warm ) , and

pahmm iy (1piarr1-lso u ie ) , from 1 i i i 1ii/ 1 1piarrel, (

“ Mi ld ly l.

Some ad ject ives are fo rm ed b y the red nplicalio n o f a roo t when the I‘OO t

has no m o re than tw o sy llab les . If there are m o re than two sy llables thefirs t tw o o n ly are r1_

1li ipli1 ated . Th is ru le is ge ne ral in Tagalog. E x . :

[hi/1 111 1311 1 (m ix 1 d i fro m l1 1i/1 1 , r1 io f o f the id ea to m ix ; sn nodsu nod (con

secu tive i,fro m 3 1 1 11 1 1 1 1, ro o t e xpre

s sing the id ea o f fo llo w ing ,etc. Th e

restric t ive partic le is so m e t im es pre fixe d to these red uplicated roo ts ,

im ply ing a le s se r d eg ree. than w ith 111 1 1 o r 11 1 1 1 11 ; as, (pain f ul ) ,

fro m 11 1 11 11. ro o t ( tw i t c h -ill! the i dea o f illne s s o r pain . A n example o f ho w

far 11 po lys y llab le is red u plica te d is fu rn is hed b y t he wo rd Auyinhuyinhd ua

S illllb rl i i lls ) from {fl u /1 13111 1,id ea o f re lie f , be ttermen t, rest .

Th e re n o a Ve ry fe w a dje c t ive s t1 11t

111c d b y the un io n o f two words o f

o pp1 mile m ean ing .o f w h ich 1 1 1

°

1 1 11y-s 11l1 1 11y ( ne u tral, in decisive ) , from u rony

( to go bac k 1. an d su lo ny (to go ahea d) , may be taken as the type .

The part ic le 1 11 ( 11 1 11 afte r an acu te ly accen ted vo we l ) su flixed to man y

ad je ct ive s gi1 1-s t h e id ea ( 11 a pe rs o n o r o b j e c t l1a1 ing the q uali

'

y denotedb y t h e ro o t | °ix .VN sHNH/H H (a lo ving pe rso n ) , f

'

r1 1111 s 1 11l1i . love ; tumoh in

(a i i-e tu l [o r avai lab le ] art ic le ) , from 11 1 11 1 13, o

s 1-, 111ilit 1 , and (a

b ro ke n o r tr ai l th ing 1 . f rom id ea o f b reak ing , trac tu ring, ctc. , anyth in g like g la 1 plate , t he h ead ,

e tc .

'

l lio firs t s 1 ils i1le 1 11 the root is

b e n t rc clllplic tt lc i l.

. 1 1 1 tha n ) , w h ich is ge ne rally a places u ffix . is som e tim es added to

ad jec t ives in w h ic h the id ea o f place o r lo catio n is inheren t , and occa

sio nally W i th tho se w h ic h d o no t adm it the su flix 1 11 fo r euphonic or otherrpaxon q

. I ) ; 111 1 1111 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 (i111pas s ab le o r im penetrab le ) , from d i (not ) ,

TAG ALOG L ANGUAG E . 57

and ddan road ) , and matusan (patient pers on ) , denoting what may hesu ffered w en su ffixed to matiis; as, 1111111111111 (11 hat su ffered or end u red ) .Th is

, however, belongs more prope rly und er the particles, where the d ifference in the use of in and an is set forth at length .

I n when inserted after the first consonan t o f some nouns gives the ideao f like, and one at leas t is sometimes used as an ad ject ive . I t is 1111111111

(youth ) , from bald (ch ild ) , and is sometimes used to mean young ,

”

though 11090 (new ) is sometimes used w ith the same idea, as in the word sbagw ig (duo (unmarried man o r bachelo r, literally

“new person

The English nouns and ph rases wh ich are used as ad jectives are ex

pressed in Tagalog b y means o f the ties g, 1 1g, or 1111,the word w hich is

m od ifie d preced ing the mod ifier, the opposite to w hat is done in English .

The tie is attached to the mod ified wo rd and answers somewhat to the

E nglish“

of.”

E x . : 8 11111 1111111) pilak (a m irror o f silver, a silver look in

glass ) (y) ; tinferong 1 1111011 111 11 inkstand o f glass , a glas s inkstand ) (11gsingsing 11a ginto(a ring of gold , a gold ring) ; 1111111 111 1111 [111 16 (a stone house,a house of sto ne ) , the last two examples show ing the use of the t ie 1111 .

Sometimes the tie is omitted if the mod ified word ends in a consonant

o ther than 11, but it is no t considered elegan t to do so .

Ad jectives like the English“

go ld en ,

” “s ilvery,

" “wooden , etc.

, are

e xpressed in d ifferent ways in Tagalog , genera lly by means of the ties

o r by d ifferen t particles ind icating“likeness

,

”wh ich w ill be explained

h ereafter.

Ne tive ad jectives like those form ed in E nglish by the prefixes u n

(Ang o-Saxon ) , (before I) and p soften ing to 111 for euphony) , im (Latin )0,an (G reek ) , are formed in Tagalog by the particles (13 (not ) , 11 1 1111

(w ithou t ) , and sometimes hind i (no ) . E x . : DZ 11111111p1°

f1111 (una 1proach

able ) , from lapit, idea of approach ing ; (13 111 1161111119 (innumerab e ) , fromb ilang (to num ber) ; d i madaa nan (ii i 1p11ssable or impenetrable ) , from(160 11 (road ) ; walang bahala (apathet ic, ind ifferen t, careless ) ; 1m l1111g l11111gdn(w ithou t end , lasting, eternal, infinite ) , and 111 11111

“

111 1m 11111u 111111 (un fru it fu l) ,from bmiba (fru it ) , with 1111 and red uplicated first syllab le 111

°

root (softenedto m from 11 ) to ind icate presen t tense (lite rally,

“not fru it

The use of d i and 110 111 is illustrated by 1/i Illa/( 1111 113111 11and 111 1111111] 111113/bayad ,

t he first mean ing“not ab le to pay

"and the second withou t means of

payment,”both being abou t equal to

“inso lvent .

”

As in English , there is no variation in the ad jective fo r gend e r and case ,bu t

t he ad jectivemay be pluraliz ed . Fo r the 1lu ral ( the m od ified word be ingu nders tood in some cases ) the word 111 11 17111 is used w ith simple ad jec tivesas , anymari

'

g'

jd hunqhang (the foolish [pe rsons] — and the first syllable of the

root is repeated i it consists of one o r two letters for com pound ad jectives .

I f the first syllab le o f the root contains mo re than two lette rs, the first two

letters onl are red uplicated . 3111 12111 is also used byman y w ith the plural

compoun ad jective . E x . : A ug 11111m1 r1i11o1 1g, o r 1 1 119 111 11 11511 1 11111r 11r 1inong

(the w ise [people]The ad jective may preced e or follow the noun mod ified , and it wou ld

seem that the latter fo rm is to be pre ferred , as it agrees with Malay (as

w ith S nish ) construction . Howeve r,w ith the spread o f E nglish it i

n ot un likely that the custom of using the ad jec tive be fo re the noun maybecome the usual construction , as it is equally as correct. as the other way.

E x . : Angmarifqd babaymg 1110911 111113; (mg Imba

yen magagandd ; any 11111911911111111 119 11 11 1111 111 , (1 1111 111/ lgagan rf1'

l,

am All six 1 11°

the forego ing ph rases mean

s im ly“the beautiful women ,

the first fo u r being pre ferab le .

The follow ing list of ad jectives w ill give the principal ones in o rd inary

u se . The plan has been followed o f giving ad jectives w ith ce rtain mean

ings, followed by those o f o

pposite sign ificat io ns , o r at least in we ll-d efined

groups. Word s having 8 11 ) stantially t he same mean ing are called sy no

nymSt those of opposite meaning, an to n ym W o rd s w ith the same so und

bu t d i fferent mean ings are called homo ny ins. Some Tagalog ad ject ivesrequire several d ifferent words in English to express their vary ing m ean

58

ing,just as occurs in translating English into Tagal

Practice alone w ill fully instruct the student, ow ing to t e loca lismsand provincialisms of the language.

image

space just ifies.

Dear ; noble ; precious ; esteemed .

Cheap, ignoble, etc.

Usefu l, available (th inHaslem ; withou t bene t .

G ood .

Harm fu l; h urtful; slanderous.

Strong.

Large, big, grand .

Small.Bulky; massive.

Much ; plen ty.

E xcessive ; superfluous ; remaining.

Little ; some .

Spacious ; ample ; w ide (as room ,

road , etc.

Broad ; w ide ; level; flat.

Disprori ortionately w ide (or b road ) .

Narrow (as street. door, Opening) .

Tall; h igh ; noted

Deep.

Low ; shallow ; h umble

Long ; also gigantic.

Short ; brief.

TAGALOG LANG UAG E .

or an other lan

As many examples will be given as

Mahal. Any minamahal, the se

teemed , dear, etc. , person or th ing.

Tamohin . Tame, use, utility, benefit.Wulan kabolohdn . E L : Walanykn ohtin any yawa

'

mo, you r work

is without value ; u seless.

Mabu ti. Mabutiny tatto, a good per

son

Luhhd (also means very beforeanother ad jective . LubhanyanM ,

serious illness.

Kannli. { Manmong kany Tagalog?

{Doyou understandTagalog? 0p6,

'

es, sir. gInylés! Kau nti, p6, 8

ittle, sir.

Malwmy. filaluany na silid,a wide

(or spacious ) room .

Mal/1mm. Kalaparan , bread th . Maltipmlml iai broad m inde d.

Malling. M nay na loob, a magnanimous heart (metaph .

.llakipot. Makipot any ddan, a nar

row road . Makipot na isip , nar

row -minded . Kakipolan ,narrow

Masamd . Kasamaan , evil.

Makap azmri'

yanydya. From anydyn,

pan , and make , with A goodexample of the bu i d ing up of

wor ds in Tagalog. Pu rifyanyaymnytauo, a man who destroys the

property of another.

Malakds. Malakds na td uo a strong

person . Malakds no hanym, a highwind .

M ahind . Kahinaan, weakness.

.llalaki. Kalak-M n, grandeu r ; siz e.

Maliit.Malambok.

(from dami. )'

aram ihan,abundance .

ness.

.llakilid . Makfliran,narrowness .

M attias. Kataasan , tallness, hei ht.Ala/(Him . Kalaliman

, depth . .

‘l ald

lim na ydh'

t, deep anger.

M abnb d. Kababaan , low ground ;also h umility. .llababany a

submissive (humble ) d isposition .

Mahabr’

x. Mahabany tulay, a longb ridge. Mahabang lauo, a gigan

tic man .

Mail‘lf variation (maikai) . Maiklinybeihay, a short life.

TAGALOG L ANG UAG E .

C lose ; short (as hair, beard , etc

Sq uare ; equal on all sides.

R o und ; circu lar.

Th ick (as a board ,b ook

,

Thick (as liq uor, clothes,

Coarse ; rough .

Rare ; th in .

S lend er ; fine .

l leavv.

L igh t (no t heavy) ; easy

Strong ; in tense ; heavv.

P ressed ; compact ; packe d; solid .

Hollow (as a tree, etc.

Clean ; neat .

Pu re ; limpid ; clear.

Turb id ; mudd y (as water ) ; b leared

(as eyes ) ; th ick (as the speech ) .

Pure (and w ithou t m ix tu re ) .

Ligh t ; fine (like chaff , paper ,Dirtv; fi lthv; d isgusting; nasty .

Dirty ; d isgusting, e tc. (Sou the rn ) .

Filthv; indecent .

Innumerab le ; numberless.

Full; complete.

Insu fficient ; not enough ; less .

Empty; sometimes wid e.

59

d ad .

Parimika! (from to meas u re,

and pu ris, equal, as ) .

Kabiloyun ,or puykahiloy,

(rare ) .

Malina? nu dumil,th ick

Tag/«mix.

ll'

u yu .

Ti l/I l ls. Tulms nu yiu lci, pu re gold .

Kain) a localword is yuHm/cor gal/m ).llmhnu i. A

'

u rumhu u (co ntr. d irtiness

, filth iness , nastiness . Mad um ilm u ,

(llrty, e tc. ,obj ec t .

.llm firi .

lllu firi/cin , (llrlv,e tc . , per

Nu lau u lci. K uau lcmolmm , filth ,ind e

cency.

I ) ; "m id /a ny. ( from «Ii,no t , and

LIVU NSI . idea o f m un tm number. )Jif fy/mm} In: (M,

comple te o r

fill th i

K zilu ny. Kal'

uhmym ,waste , luck .

7m hu nlu . a lack ing itlc'

zl .

Pa lm/any“ : mo .w l l/N Iy, d im in ish

the fire .

I ’ommy. A lso n'

d lu ny Immin ,w ith

n n t i m ln m ;

i n u n f

.Makapal.i llalimif.

clothes.

.llaytispany. .lluydspuny 7m ku n in

,

coarse food . (Synonym ,nun/(flu ng;

Aw n in . ).lf ud i

'

lluuy.

.llun ip is . Kam’

p isan , slenderness .

Monipis nu lmlawm,

slenderbod ied .

.llubiyu t. Jlubiyut 7 m (ooh, hea v yhearted .

.lluymiu . Kuyuunan , ligh tness. .llu

yad u ilony[rd /coy, th is wood is ligh t .

.llu limli. .

llu f imliny yamo , strongmed icine . Kalim li

,a coun ter

weigh t o r balance . .llu limlinyIoob,hea vy hearted .

i llu iyliuy (th is wo rd is pro v incialandnot generally used to-day ) .

q xiu xm .

Jq mmy.( iuanyu n Hung 1001i

this harigue (house pillar ) is hollow .

.llu linis. l in im n , cleanliness. .VaIim

’

s m 1 clumil, clean clothes . .llu

lim'

s nu limb, clean hearted .

.llulim

'

w . Tcibiy nu mu limio,or ma

Ihu iu nu h ibiy, pu re o r limpidwater. Malinda nu loob

, purehearted .

Mala/m .

60

C on tracte d; cram as a room ) .

Mixed .

Consecutive ; in order.

Entire ; whole ; unbroken , etc.

Broken ; fractured , etc.

Cooked (as food ) .

Raw ; crude (as food ,fru it ) .

E dible ; esculen t.Poisor

)ious (as toadstools, arsen ic,

etc.

Venomous (as the bite of the dahcmyp altry, or rice snake ) .

Fresh (as meat or fish , etc .

Sp oiled ; putrid .

lmpure ; adulterated .

Sweet.

Sou r ; acid .

Bitter.

Salty; saline .

Peppery; pungent .

Rancid .

Nauseating; unkempt.

Old ; stable ; permanent.

Stale ; musty (as rice, tobacco,w ine

Dry .

Th in ; watery ; flu id .

Th ick ; dense ; cu rdy.

Stick y ; ad hesi ve.

Ju icv.

Fleshy: pu lpy; meaty.

lin t .

Bu rning ; ardent .

Lukewarm .

Hard ; solid ; stiff.Soft ; fiexxble ; bland .

TAG ALOG LANG UAG E .

Masikip.

Halo-halo. Kahalo, m ixtu re. Maykakalo itong (flak, th is w ine is

m ixe d.

aS'

uné d-m nod (from m ndd , idea offollow ing, obeying, etc. )

Basay. Babaaa'

n, broken article,

from baaay, k m of fracturing,break ing, etc.

, as the head , a plate,

glass, etc.

Mutual.Hilda.

Makaia.

Gabon; makamanday.

Hilda pa, green yet.

Sariud .

Nabolak. Bolok na, utrid already .

Hind i pu loa (from ind i, not, andaim: alike ; of one color.

atamcs. Katamisan, sweetnem.

Tinamis, sap of the nipa whenfresh ly d rawn. .llatamis na wild ,

sweet speech (synonym matamisna mmTyiiaap ) .

Marian". Kunsimua, sourness ; aciditv.

Map ait. A'

apaitan, bitte rness.

Mad lul. Kati/(nan, saltiness. Ala

falalu n mo any kanin , salt the fooda little more.

Bayo.

Malayi. Palayian mo {tony yawri,make th is work permanent.

.llayinam'

n, a ch illy per

Malayk if .Af akalcis.

filalamdn .

Maim l. Kainifan, heat. .lfain it anyd rao,

the hot sun (or day) .Mari/u h. Houay many paalabalabinany nui

'

yas, do not add fuel to theflames.

Malahim nya . (Malakol'

o expresses

a sligh tly greater degree of heat . )Malam iy.

Magimio.

son .

Maligas. K utiyam n, hardnw .

Maldmbol.

62 TAGALOG

Fragrant ; odomus.

Fetid ; stinking.

Delicious ; pleasant .

Nox ious : malignant .

Powdered ; pulveriz ed .

Sonorous (as a hell) .Equal.

Une qual.

Transparent.

Opaque .

Concave.

Wholes ome ; salubrious.

Horrible .

Fearfu l; d read ful.

Righ t hand )

L d t flmmU.

In the m idd le.

To one side.

A few o f the foregoing

LANGUAGE .

Halom’

d .

Baluktol.

Malil'o. L ikolikong ddan, a roadwith many turns. Minoan pangIumiko, one turn (or bend ) more.

Mah mi'

i 6.

Haber/lg. Kabaho au , fetid ity.

Kalugod-lugod (from Iugod ,

idea of

pleasure

, etc

Makamw md (from aamd , idea o f evil,the particle mob : and tense red u

plication m for presentDorog (means putref

'i

lmmlities

M almwg (from lunog, sound ) .

Kaparia.

Hind i p or t'

s.

Jhmn imz

Koya got/an (both rare ) .Mala m ay. Malukong na p ingan, a

deep plate, like a soup plate.

Kaginhuginluiuu. (from ginhdua , ideaof relie f, rest ) .

Kakilukildbol from kildbol, idea o ftrembling w ith fear ) .

Kuwkolttikoi (from (til-at, idea of fear .

K’

u lukolun , fear, d read ) .Nalmrriau (from dorm ,

idea o f passing ) .

Nat ty/on .

Dan ih'

ng (from (Idling, idea o f ar

riving) .

A'

amm . Kanankanm t, a little to the

righ t . Kmumkmum iu mo, go a little to the right. . tng nakakmum ,

what lies to the righ t . Pakamm kn,

go to what lies on the righ t .

Is'

alim i (same compounds 8 8 th eabove ) .

S 0gt'

h uf .

Ha (obi.

in some

Gitmmy gab-5, m id n igh t .

not strictly ad jectives, either in Tagalog o r

English , bu t are pu t here fo r conven ienee .

All; en tirely; wholly.

All (k ind s or classes) .

l’auu (generally used w ith ad jectives ) . I ’auang mayo/ing, w hollv

good . l’uwmg magagah'

ng sild,

they are allgood . Pauanyma cilim8 flti, they are all black . I lmmgmony lm um

’

ng touam'

n, do not call

all.

Lahal (g enerallyapplied to persons ) .lxrhalin mo (mg panytmgum I

,

speak to all of them . ; syn . , 10min(pro v incial) . Taming (duo, allmen .

D ilcin (pro v incial) . Dihmg miginy,all k inds of bananas.

Brilang imi. Bdltmg tim e, some dav.

Bd tla’

f 584i.

TAGALOG L ANGUAGE . 63

The following is a list of what colors are nerally used by Tagalogs,with some names also not now ordinarily hcard

e

Wh ite . Maputt.’

apulian, whiteness. Anykapu tian nany illay, the wh ite ofan 988

Maitim. Kaitiman, blackness.

Mapuld . Kapulahan,red ness. R i

muld , blush ; redness of the face.

Yellow . Madilao; marilao (from d ilao, a root

dyeingyellow ) . Marilaona damit,yellow cloth ing. Also name oi

town in Bulacan Province, namedfrom sameplan t (c urcumadelayen ) .Also name of barrio of Manila (SanFernando de Dilao ) .

Bughao BataanProvince ) . Buk-Imo

van ) .Bluish -

green . Ginulay (from gulay, vegetables,herbs ) .

G reen . Halongtiang (rare ) .Brown ; brunette. Kayumangi.

Kaputlaan, pallor ; palePale ; d iscolored .

Brigh t ; clear ; light. Mabanaag.

Brigh t ; sh ining

Sas the dawn, the Maningmng. Maningning parang It

'

stars, ld , etc. wag/man, brigh t as the dawn .

Dark ; 0 are. Madilim . Kad iliman,darkness, etc .

Houagmungipand ili'

m itmcggcabayo,

do not take th is horse ile it isdark .

A ll of one color ; unicolorous. Palm . .llailim na pales, black all

over (as a horse ) .

The following list comprises the majority of Tagalog ad jectives pertaining to physical cond itions of the

O ld .

Y oung.

Tall (in stature ) ; high .

Short (in stature ) .Dwarfish ; short.

Fat. Matubd . Katabaan, fatness.

E legan t ; beautiful. Maqu nd ti. Kagandahan,b eau t y ;

e egance.

Pretty. Maril it (from (Ii/cit, id ea of pretti

ness ) . Karikitan, elegance , pret

tineas. Kar i/clung m'

kti, a gracefu l

word .

Ugly, deformed . Pézi'

gil.Stuttering; stammering. Magaril. Garilin , a stntterer ; stam

merer. Utal-utal is another word .

Mute ; d umb . l ’ipi. Kapipihmi , d umbness.

Blind . P isa/c, variation Lapisak. P isak anyiaang mam, blind in one eye.

Matandd . Katandaan , age.

Bago. Binatd , you th , is sometimesused , as any nami

'

gd binatd , the

you ths (from batn, ch ild ) .Haguay; mahaguay. Haguay na

(duo, a tall person .

L ipoto (rare ) .

64

Nasal; snuflling (as in the speech ) .Cross-eyed .

Blink ing.

Big-cared ; long-cared ' flap-eared ;

large-cared ; megalotme .

Thick-lippe d (person ) .W ry

-mouthe d.

Toothless.

Pockmarke d.

Le ft-handed .

Lame in hand ; one-handed ; unable

to use hands, etc .

Bandy-legged ; bow

-le

gged .

Lame (on account of aving legs of

uneq ual length ) .Qu ick .

Slow ;speech ) .

Hairy ; fa thered .

deliberate work or

Bearded .

G ra v -haired ; gray-head ed (person ) .Curled ; crisp; curly (as hair ) .Cu rly or waving (hair ) .Bald (person ) .Hairv (on body) .Hairless (as some animals, etc. )Horne d (animal) .

Scaly.

Hungry (person) .

Th irsty; to be thirsty.

Replete ; satiated .

Tired ; to be tired .

Numb or“

asleep,feet , to become.

Sick ; ill; to be ill.

Painful.

as the hands,

Wounded (person ) ; having sores.

Sore-eyed .

Living; alive .

Dead .

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

Bows. Kabifl'

m'

han, deafnem. Bin?inybiri

'

yi, totally deaf, but bin'

yihiri

'

i,somewhat or a little deaf.

(T e bigher d is formed withthe

“tie,

”the iminutive without

it . This is a general rule. )I lmnal.D uliny.

It'

il‘t'

m

Malabirap (from kirap ) .any tamya .

JVyw oin (from rayuso, lip ) .

n ipo, lack ing teeth .

Madali; marali.Mabinay. Possibly a variation ofmahina

, weak .

Malmlahibo. Di pa makitd any balahibé nany kamay, the hair of thehand can not yet b

e seen ; an ex

pression used to express that it isnot yet day.

B m‘

fyit.

l'

lmnin . Ad jective, mauban .

Ku lol.

I kal.

l'

panin.

Bolbolin .

Wahmy buhok.

St'

tn'

yay, horn , also a

twining plant resembling the convolv u lus or bind weed .

May kaliskv'

s .

Mayutmn in .

Nau uhdo .

Sandal.

Napdyal.

I limanday.

Kayutoman , hunger.

Kauhauan, thirst.

Kapaya Ian , fatigue.

May sakw'

t. ll'

alany calcil, without

illness, i. e .

,health y ; well.

Is'

asalcitsakil (from mil-it, idea of pain ;sickness ; illness ) .

Suyalin (from nuyal, wound ) .Mum. Mutant

, sore-ove dperson , etc.

Mahrilmy.

I ’nlay. I ’alayin, dead person , animal, etc. to be dead .

The list of mental or moral attribu tes gi ven below does not, of course,embrace all in the language , bu t the most usual are given :

Omnipotent ; all powerful. .llakulmnyyarihan (from yari, ideaof finishing, etc. , com undedwith pan, maka, and an x han ) .

TAGA LOG

Bra v e ; valiant .

Cowar dly.

Tim id (person ) .Abusive (person or act ) .

Bas h fu l; t im id ; shame-faced .

Bashiu l; mod est (especially in char

acter ) .) Io dest-eyed .

Modest in speech ; mod erate in play .

Modest ; q u iet .

) lodcst ; blow .

Mod est (in carriage ) ; slow ; delib

erate .

Peaceable ; quiet .

Tranq u il; q u iet .

G ent le ; tame ; qu iet (as animals ) .

Qu iet ; pacific.

Quarrelsome .

f )d ious ; rancorous.

Fierce ; sa vage ; w ild .

Qu iet (in sleep, or in eating) .

Abstem ious ; moderate .

Glut tonous ; voracious .

Bold ; gallant ; elegant .

Bold ; daring ; insolen t .

Vain ; proud ; haugh t) arrogan t .

Boastfu l; vainglorious.

Neu tral ; indecisive ; undecided .

influen tial.

Famous ; celebrated ; no ted ; no to

n ous .

Famous ; celebrated ; illustrious .

Famed ; honored .

LANG UAG E . 65

llaldpu ng (applied to w ine ,

strong, maidpung ml dluk,

strong w ine . A'

u lupn uyun ,b ra v

crv) .lh uiy. K u dcmguu , coward ice .

.llumlmtin (from l ikor, id ea o f fear ) .

.lIupag/Iu lfi/uyuo (from ih

. u lting words ) ..lln ild . Any the cause or

reason o f tlm ld lty , . luy

pang/myclcrlum . o f w hom o r w hat

atraud , etc

.llu hiuhiu .

o f d elib

tranq u il

.‘Itu lmd

ill

A'

upulu lou u , prid e ,van itv,

(from hu mw y,o sten

tallln n l.

(v

: Hug-M ilt on!) ll‘Olll

bar k . e tc

"lo v e o li

[Mb /f l .

rit-t y .

Jlu /m u g/i l rare 1.

Jlmvm’

gm/ ( fromin n u n

' l

firm ly,to go

sdloug, to go ahead ; to

Kah l i l/0111 1 14. farm no to

dvuTg/u l, farm

-lfumum'

ll.

.lluhin i.

.llu tim

'

ny. Also means

pitched , (as a V o ice ) ..

‘lln lcim lhllu ; mohamiyu d .

Mum /m u (from duhu n . id eac ration ) .

.llolomty.

.llu huyci. .a aycmy (Job , a

heart

Runmoon , tameness ; gen

tleness. . lnypug/comm) , the ac t o f

tam ing, breaking. etc . .llu umougloo/1

, 11 gen tle. d isposition .

Tall inn /c. A'

vlh lh im i/ Jm, q u ietness .

[whiz /t il: um a ny lu lu!) mo, keep

you r mo u th q u iet (sh utI ' d /miuom K cuiuuy, an enemy. . Iuymom/(t Aatlllu ‘

ll the cnemv. .llt lugd

kud uu y, enem ies.

.llulmyhmim from ((lu im , id ea O f ran

co r, hate , etc w ith mupay pre

fixed ) .

Mai/up . Ka i/upon , tierceness .

dia ling/ling.

filo/(Moo .

Mu ll/ms.

divin i ng/(thus.

en lem e

66

Fame ; noted ; talked about.

Mean ; vile ; worthless ; un fortunate .

Mean ; vile ; worth less.

Lo v ing ; amorous (person ) .

A ffectionate .

A ffectionate ; loving.

Polite person ) .

Polite ; courteous ; respectful.

Bourteous ; respectfu l.

Respectful.

I ron ical; sarcastic.

Honest ; righ t ; straigh t .

True ; refine d; perfect ;

bod y) .Patien t ; firm ; constant (person ) .

Impatient (person ) .

pure (in

Changeable ; inconstant .

Treasonable ; treacherous ; ungrate

fu l.

Two-faced ; doub le-faced ; treacherous.

G iddy; though tless ; careless.

Blundering; wild .

TAGALOG L ANG UAGE .

Balild . Kabalilan

person . Maybe Iibalilan (duo, a

newsmonger. Ana any we on

b ayou! What news in town?Hfimak. Ildmak na (duo, a worthless person .

fi mami (originally meant“freed

n fan ;” “

liberated slave . Ah

other word is bulisik. variation

tauo, a noted

hulf'

xiksik, literally“slave of a

slave.

” Kabulisikan , slavery;ser v itude ) .

Maxinfahfn (from sfatti , love, origin

ally Sansk . ch inld , though t , care,th rough Malav chinta , care, anxi

etv, etc.

Maifn'

y. Ko ihiyibiy, amiable. Kai

biyci

n , affection . Ku ibi an , friend ;belo ve d. (Notice the ifference inaccent . )

Malfaymlm/ao (from p alayao, affection , an mupay, prefixed ) . I rogmeans great love.

”

Masf fyapin . Anymyapan , person to

whompolite .

Mapaypiluyan (from pitayan , honor,respect, and mapag) . An paypi

pilaganfm, the person onored

(from pitayan , prefixe d by pay,red uplicated first syllable pi for

resent teum and su ffix an,here

ind icating person , bu t generallyind icating place ) .

Moalanydlany. Ang kinaaalfmyalari

'

yunan, the person to whomcourte ous (from alangalany, ideaof courtesy, compound ed w ith Iraand in (kind ) prefixed and an re

d u ) licated as a suffix ) .Mayalang. Kayalafi

'

yan, respect, rev

erence. Mugalanym , courteous,respectful person.

Mopanuyd .

Malu id . Katu iran , honesty.

Tanay.

.lfalnsan.

.lI ayng/mnulin (from yamot, idea of

annovance,S olau a mn. S ulauahany Mob, a

changeable characte r.

.lIaIilo . l’iuaqlililohan n iyaany inaampf

’

m, he is ungrate fu l to h is

benefactor.

fqllktlb.

.llaluliy, variation mala h’

ny.

Maid /6 . Partial synonym du lin‘

yas,which means “

restless, unquiet”

morf

l

-

dthan “

blundering”

or“w i

TAG ALOG LANGU AG E . 67

Restless ; tu rbulent ; fidgety.

Restless ; misch ievous.

m isch ievous.R estless ; uneasy;

I n to lerab le ; inStlfferable .

U nspeakable ; unsavable ; untellable .

U ntouchable .

J o y fu l; con ten ted (person ) .

C on ten ted .

Happy ; luckv.

Laugh te r-causing ; laughable ; com ic.

jesting; scofiing (p erson ) .

Sad .

J ust ; fair ; Uprigh t .

Barbarous ; ty rann ical; despot ic.

C ruel; rigorous ; severe .

Agreeable ; pleas ing : jo ou

i nd ulgen t ; generous ; li ral.

Charitable.

Mercifu l; charitable ; liberal.

Learned ; w ise ; etc .

D iscreet ; able .

( 1 ) Accomplished ; (2 ) excellen t .

.mmmma.

A lso power in some

power ; tyr

anny ; etc . theoppres

s ed .

A'

u lnufij isu u , cruelty ;se v e rity.

Alumni/«i .

.llulm g/blgu y . A lso mupamig/ay. Both

W o rd s are from biqau, idea of ghi1w .

'

l he seco nd is mo re properlythe tuijecth e .

.llfm uu .llcm uvl in

, a charitab le

pe rson . A rmmmn,

charity, com

pas s io n .

.lIupm/In u

mum (from lulu/mm id ea o fllu hu /uym u/ [f ilm

a men ifu l o r liberal person ) .

Aluminum; ( from (Manny, id ea o f

w isd om . K u runu ugu n , w is dm n ) .

.llu r z

'

u m ng/ kaug I ngli s.

“

I ) “ ) ( itt und e rs tand English?

(Span ish?

)

.lfu s il. up . Knee/Japan ,

d iscre tion

l l l’u lu u n 7m (d uo

, an accom plishedm a n i t? ) .llm mlm n m 1 filo /s e v

.lf ugaslfio . M ugasldo no (d uo

,a rest

less person .

Gaso . Aug gasohon , person d is

tu rbcd .

Maya/(lo. Probably variation o f um

usluo . .llugaldo any knmug/ h iyd ,

is hand is restles‘d said of a th ief ) .K ayo /m um

, m isch ief . .

flngyalau in,

the m isch ief. Auggalauan , person

anno yed .

DZumdu lild, (fr0m (1015117, idea of su f

fering , and (If, not ) .DZlm lsu bi (from 3065

,idea of telling,

and (If

DZ"mm /(mg (from flaking] , idea o ftouching,

w ith (If,not ) . Latin ,

noh’

me M ug/arc, taken by Riz al asa t itle to one o f h is wo rks. Hesigned many articles DimasAlang

.llu lum'

n, (from (0 1147, pleasu re ; con

ten t LK augmn/u from (lg/u ,

variation h'

yuga.

K u /iyu ‘

omlm n, conten tmen t) .

.llupfilml. ll'

ulu ny un lucky.

.llu kummmi (from (and ,laugh ter,

w ith make, and red uplicated firs t

syllab le (a to ind icate present

tense ) .

palahird . Taw ney fu ré,an inconsiderate person .

.llu lu nykot.

.lltm i/m! (from (ftlpllf ) . Ku rupahm ,

me rit .

.lfahag/SiI.

ases .

68 TAG ALOG LANG UAGE .

Able ; accomplished .

Fine (in bearing)

Prudent ; jud icious.

Discreet.

Though tful; grave .

Vigilant ; awake ; known .

Incomprcbensib le ; inimitable.

Simple ; silly.

Stupid ; foolish ; beast-like ; cracked

(as a plate ) .

Foolish ; stupid .

l'

seless ; stupid .

Stupid ; foobsh ; malicious.

Fo olish ; stupid ; du ll; gaping.

Ch ild ish ; foolish .

Id iotic ; simple.

Craz y insane .

la bo rious : d iligent ; industrious.

Laz y ; slow .

Slow ; tar dv: lasting.

Pantds. Pantda na tduo an ableman . Ka m dam n, ab ih ty.

Busnl/us. umbtuoulms 7m maginéo,a very fine gentleman . Kahuna

busan,excellence, etc.

Moha ir. Moh air no hiuo, a prudent

person . Dalagfmg wabu it, a pmdent. girl.

Timtim (provincial wor d) .Mubigof . Really

“

heavybigot ) .

litigat ing (from gifting, idea of

awakmg ) . D efinite is in mm , not

an . .Vogisnan Ico anyIindolkayo/p i,I was awakene d by the earthquakelast nigh t . G inisuau to 1m kulmym ono meg can! no main , 1 havealways k nown o f that custom .

Tinkald .

Mmmg. Tommy, foolish ; stu id .

Jlong/mung, fool, d unce ; also ack

of memory, forgetfu lness. 310 17516,variation nmngal, silly

, foolish.

Nammfi/al, to act foolish ly. Naymomangfmuni

'

fmlmn, to feign stu

pid ity. This meaning o f maiE'

ti

must not be confused w ith thehomonym ind icating plurality.

hich is mad e up of the particles

mo and iii/(i.Bongfio (rare ) . Bangam

’

n. a stupid

pe rson .

Toksil. Taksil na him), a stupid

person . Katrzksilau , stupid ity.

Rondo”. Kabrmdayan , foo lishness .

Any pagkuband d y, the error.

Rangal' in

,one regarded as a fool

ord unce . ”(maymo akonybo ngokfm ,

do not try to foolme (make afo ol of me ) . Also kahafifyalfm,

foolishness, from hmifjal, foolish .

T variation lungay.

I lu f ig/hung.

Tu tti/(i . .llagtfe Idtcrrfi/ahan , to feignstupid ity . A rare word for “ foolish is lankas.

( 7137748 , variation mini .

Balm. Kobe/5mm id iocy. Baliu in.

a foolish or id iotic person . ( h im

,uoug Imbaliuin, a foolish or r una

way horse .

Ulu l. variation olol. Kaulu lfm , insanity.

Mam'

pug. Kasipagan , ind u stry , etc.

Tamm i If utumamn,

laz iness .

Mu louo l. .llalouaf m1 kdhoy, durablewood . .llu louag is slack , loose .

"

and mah igpit is

70

Traveling; peregrine.

Unbaptiz ed ; infidel; pagan .

Belonging to ; pertaining to .

Abandone d.

Guiltv; cu lpable ; sinful.

Fru itful; to bear fruit.

Other ; d ifferent ; d iverse ; d istinct .

Sole unique ; orily.

Last ing; eternal; infinite.

Perishable .

Immortal.

Hopeful.

Hopeless.

I’lll) l

Reser v ed ; set aside.

Secret ; to be secret .

Occupied ; to be occupied .

Id le ; w ithout work .

Passionate ; quick-tempered

son ) .Hasty; of a bad d isposition .

Thankful; to be thank ful.

(per

G rate ful.

Ungrateful.

TAGALOG LANG UAGE .

without

Galmm’

i. Kagahas aan, hastiness.

Simm ilcinmt (from saldmat, thanks;derived fr om Arabic, aaldmat,

peac ;e safety) .A l

'

z lu luluqod (from lngod , gratitude,not"

, and the red uplicated first

syllable of root ) .Walang Iugod ; also malilo.

Ncu uyrbangbdyan (from brig/an, town

town ,foti

, other, and the redupli

cate d particle man, in the present

tense, hence changed to andiii} . Literally,

“ from another

town

D i binyagan from binyag, to baptiz e, and (If, not ) . Binyag is said

to have been a Bornese (A rabic?)

wor d brought by Mohammedansto the Ph ilippines . Its originalmeaning is said to have been to

pou r water from above .

”

Nam'

z kol (from tikol Nauru-oi so

D ies at"amt/col aa Your, belongingto ( iod and belonging to Greear.

Pab ayd .

Nagkakam ld (from said ) . li'

alangsum, innocent, not gu ilt

Nammmu iya (from bun‘

fqa, r uit , withma (7m ) and reduplicated first syllab le of root , wh ich is here softene d to m from h ) . Hind i namumnngm, unfruitful. Bu ii

'

gahaa, afru itfu l tree or plant.

1M .

.Vagus d (from ind , one ) .“Manyhanqdn (lit . withou t end ,

“end less

A'

alalapus (from lupus, end , finish.

Tapas na, finished now )ll

'

u lang kam at ayan (lit.death

filaam .

Ira/any am .

Mahayay. Kahayagan, ublicity.

A'

agl'

almlmkod (from bu or], idea ofreservation, setting aside, etc.

Bukdan mo also nanq dal au-d , put

two aside forme. Kabukoran, rescrvation ,

Mali/rim . Lihim nu gated , secret workor deed .

Naaalmla from abala,idea of occupa

tion ; the particle na (present tenseof ma ) and a

, red uplicated firstsyllable of root for present tense ) .. ibalahiu or .llaabalahifl , a buevman.

li'

alany yaut'

i..

‘llagalifan (from galit, idea of anger ) .

TAGA LOG LANG UAG E . 7 1

L it-it ; legal.

Immaterial; useless.

Naked .

L ib id inous ; sensual.

Asleep, to be ; sleepy, to be .

Aged ; venerable ; mature .

Tired , to be .

A lone ; u naccom an ied .

Com panioned ; c aperoned .

I gnorant .

Marrie d.

U nmarried .

Taxed .

E xempt.

P resent .

A bsent .

Ready, to be .

Un ready, to be.

Salab le.

I'

nsalable.

Valuable.

C lean ; neat.

D irtv; unclean (as the clothes ) .

Doub tfu l.

Certain .

L ucky.

O riginal.

(‘Opied (th ing, etc.

Metho dical (person ) .

S uitable .

Disorderly.

Profitable (th ing) .

U nprofitable .

( ) r namente d.

Plain ; clear (as a room ) .

Manu factu red ; mad e up.

Raw ; crude (as material,VVoven .

S un (also th read ) .P sited (as a mat ) .

H H

Jim -(m ung (lumil, d irty

Him /i ( Id/m l, u n lit .

Hal/d ug gu /o , w itho u t con

llll l g/N lu . con fusion , d iso rd er.

( from pu kimibang,id ea o f mak ing: a pro fit, etc

ii'

l llcl llfl In t/. u u ilu u u l.

(fi l fll l/fi

Alina /u s.

”nu n /vi ( l'

l’

O ll l yel l/vi and in ) .Hind i yum .

I lilm lu (from Ion /i i, i dea o f wea v ing) .

Smu t/id (from sci/id,idea of spinn ing ) .

S ci /(waltz .

righ t straigh t , etc.

f l in t/i nm lu id, illicit, illegal, e tc.

ll’

alu ng gum il.

l f ltblu l.

AINU’NY] ,

Jlum/og. i lfu fuhiloy bugd Are

Von sleepy? Nauth

'

llog bug/t sit/(1 .9

Is he as leep? l ’u lu loyn in mo soy/(i ,

let h im slee p (o r te ll h im , or her,to go to sleep) .Ma rni/(mg. . lng mang/ti nmgliltmg,the aged ; paren ts ; ancestors.

.llapdg/od .

Nag/u mi ; uwhmg/ ku stnnd .

.llu y t u m /mi.

f lin t/i mud/um .

31031 (m iuu .

ll’

u lu ug amino .

liumabdym l mmg Lou is.

110m l; (m um /Mum.

N70 .

ll’

ahi r im.

.lfu lm m ld .

[lin t/i hum/d .

.lfuyf limli paghihili.

Aloha/amt ll’

nlu ny [inlay/t , W orth

less . .lluylmu o (mg Imlugd n ilo.

’

W hat is the value (price ) o f th is?o f the same

value , at the same price .

JINM I N U .

clo thes .

Iliulmfimn .

Tan i“ .

”ll/(my [N ihl l], u nlucky.

K im o no ( from mm, firs t ; not Sp ) .

Nina /m ( from su /in, id ea o f t ransfer

ring. t ransplant ing , e te .

.llulm ru u n iu . ll'

u /mu / pu rmm , w ithn llt l llt ' tlln tl.

A'

mmg/os l'

rn ln (fromNAM/ l

72 TAG ALOG LANGUAG E .

Cultivated ; plowed . Naaararo (from Sp. . arado, plow ) .Hind i naaararo, uncultivated ; un

plowed .

Bukaa. lint-nan mo ironypinto, openth is door .

Shut ; closed (thing) . I ’indan . l’indan mo any dam age

nan , shu t the w indow . Some na

tives say sarhan mo, u ndou bted lv

a corruption of the Span ish verbccrrur, to close .

Spread ; extended . In lay. Nakalcalat, stretched ; taut.Fo lded ; doub led , etc. Tin il-Iop (from tiklop, idea o f dou

bling) .

COMPAR ISON OF ADJ l -E .

The Tagalog a djective, like a djectives of other langu es, has the threedegrees of q uality to be ind icated

— the simple form (w ich is generallycalled the positive ) , the comparative, and the superlative. Of course ,

as

in English ,some ad jectives are excluded from comparison by their mean

ing,such as those for

“ dead ,

” “alive ,

” “entire ,

”and some others.

The positiv e ad jective is that fo r md iscussed in the prece dingpages, andthe comparat ive w ill now be taken up. O f th is there may be said to existth ree varieties the comparat iv e of eq uality ,

that o f superiority, and that

of inferio rity. In English the first form is expressed by“as (ad jective ) as

(noun ) , the second by“

er”or

“ more ,

"and the th ird by

“er

”or

“ less.

"

In Tagalog there are thr ee ways by wh ich the comparative of equalitymay be expressed . The first is by using the ad verb para (variation raria) ,meaning

“as ,

” “so , etc. I n some cases

“like

”exprw ses the agalog

idea best . W ith ad jectives or common nouns para port'

s ) takes the tie rib,bu t w ith names o f persons, etc .

, and pronouns is followed bv what is

compared , w hich takes the gen itive case . lire : Parang malmli (howgood ) , mapuh

‘

parany gatas (as wh ite as m ilk ) , maitim parany tiling (asblack as charcoal) , parang pa tag/ (like a d ead person ) , parang hdyap (likea beast ) ; Ako

’

y para mo! (Am I like yo u?) aiya’

y paris ko (he she] islike me) , maliit par ix ko (as small as I am [small like aiya mahait

para m'

Juan (he is as prud en t as Juan ) , any dog on Naga’

y malonang

para aana l ’am

’

g (the river at S aga [Nueva Cti(‘er88 ] is as w ide as the

asig) . With the part icle i n d enoting likeness, para ind icates eq uality,the particle being prefixed to the ad jecti v e in such cases. Ex . : Para

u ig/ong nmnga Mao, kahuhati (equally good as these people ) . This word

para,which as a root denotes

“equality ,

” “close resemblance ,

”etc. ,

shou ld not be confused w ith the Span ish word para , meaning“to ,

” “ for,”

etc ., as the resemblanc e is purely accidental. The Tagalog word is Ma

layan , the Ja vanese word pad’

a ha v ing substantially the same signification.

The second way of expressing e ualitvwith an ad jective is bymeans of

the particle sing, w h ich denotes t llS idea precisely. Ex . : I toy ainghabd

n iacin (th is is as long as that ) , mmi’

y singlaki i n (he is as large as I am ) ,sing/Ia“ si Pedro m

'

Juan (Pe dro is as large as J uan ) . I t will be seen bythe examples that the ob ject or person compared takes the gen itive case

and the sub ject. the nom inati ve.

The th ird wavof ind icating e uality w ith the ad jective is bymeans of

the consolidated particles ka an sinq , i. e kam’

ng,the syntax being the

same as w ith sing only. Ex my, lasing/halal n iyan (this is as long as

that ) , xi I’cd ro

’

y kasinglm’rs ni Juan (Ped ro is as tall as Juan ) .

W hen e quality is to be ind icated for mo re than two objects it may beexpressed in two ways. The firs t is by prefix ing singto the root, of which

the first syllab le is red uplicate d. Ex . : .S‘inghahalxl (eq uall long

singbuhuti (eq uallygood [persons or 8 13191a 0119 rnaginam

’

Bangoy (Maria ) (i Iaria and her mother are the same in height ) . The;

TAoALoG LANGUAG E . 73

second is by prefixing basing to the root the part icle mag being refixedto knsin form ing maykas ing. E x Magi a.

~cinyd c’

tnong (e qua ly w iselearnedf) , magkaaingyaman (equally w ealthy [rich ] ang magind ai

angoy (Maria ) ay magkasingtaas (Maria and her mother are the same in

heigh t [eq ually tallJ) , ang ma in/(i cabayaat any manyd kalabao ay magkaxinydami 8a bag/an 116 (there are as many horses as there are carabao in

th is town ) , mayrdon I‘

angbagd In'

gtis na kasinydm a i nang palay,’(Ha v e you

as much hulle d rice as you ha v e o f theEq uality in quantity mavalso be expressed by maykapara ,

maykapar is ,or magkapanlay, the two objects cmnpare d tak ing the nom inative, and theroo t d enoting q uantity having to prefixed to it . lax . luy big/as [co at angbiglia n iyd magltaparis karanu

'

(he and I ha v e the same q uantity o f rice ) .Lite rally

“ m y rice and his rice is the same in quantity .

"Those in flu

enced b y Span ish are liable to say“h is rice and mv rice ,

” bu t the other

ord er is that o f the Malayan languages generally .

The comparati ve b y d ecrease is formed b y the use of the ad v erb k it/any,(less ) , pre ferably w ith the negati v e particles «N o r h im /i, as I

'

M/any alo ne

has many t imes the force o f“no t,

” “w ithou t

“

un e tc . , bu t , as in everylanguage, the conte xt ser ves as the best gu ide . I*Ix . : [lo ng Ingl is na ité

’

yI' tilang ao akin bim

‘

li (th is rice is lcss than the amo u n t I b mgb t any kalayci

ilong cabayo ilti’

y Isa/any so halayti nang ffni (the value o f th is ho rse is less

than the value o f the other ) , angma in/(i kalalaro I' d /any nany do nu

’

so manya

cab ayo ao bag/an no(there are fewer ca rabao than ho rses in th is to wn ) , anyma ii

'

yd Tagalog ou It‘

iilang nany lads so nnuTyci A nn'

ricano (Tagalogs are no t

as tall [literally ,less in statu re

”

] than Ame ricans ) , any An to

n/map“ . ( thedifference in price , the balance, the d ifference in am o u nt . etc .

Atmi'

yan (lack ing,insu fficien t, etc. ) is some times used in place o f Ali/any.

E L : A ng kayomanon p i Copifan Tino’

y ala zfi/an so ko yomo non n i l'

apitan

Lu is (the wealth o f (‘aptian Faustino is less than the w ealth o f Captain

uis ) , d arn/an pa itong bald no (th is ch ild is n o t o ld eno ugh ye t ) .

There are th ree wa v s in w h ich the comparat ive b y increase may be

xpressed . The firs t 18 b y the po sition o f the wo rd s on ly,w hat e xceed s

ik ing the nom inati v e and w hat is exceed e d the ab lati v e with ta g or so ,

lese two particles expressing“than .

”The particle ay is sometimes used

ith the nom inative word .

The second method is by prefix ing the a dv erb lolvi (more ) to the

iect ive , w ith the same construct ion as the forego ing .

The th ird way ,wh ich is on ly used co rrectly fo r comparing q ualities , is

med by su ffixiug pa (yet, still to the adjec ti v e ) e ither alone or in

junction w ith fold. Ex : (I ) alsoso (yo, or oko nmow/18 so imi ;

aké’

y lalong mamas so inci; (3 ) ma laria pa akoso (ya, or lo lo ny mah ois li‘

l

ou iyo. All the forego ing may be translated by I am taller than y~u

(1 ) I’aya! ka so dali (you are th inne r than y o u were befo re )

,s :

‘0’

y maxi/mg kay .Iaan (Ped ro is m o re ind ustrio us than Juan ) , a/in any

tat, kay Ped ro n i .Iaa n .

’ (W hich is the mo re ale rt , l’ed ro o r J .w

'

(Juan ) ; sf Jnon oy inn /m il so ko niyd si Joa n o y [along nm ho if so

vi ; (3 ) Bi Juan oy mobo if pa so kaniyo (Juan is more prud ent than he

he] is ) . (l ) . lny ka hono la'

y nu t/ml so kayanu t no n ; (2 ) [alo ng nm lm l

abanalan ao kayanuman (wo rth is more precio us than w >alth ) , ilu y

magu ling so d ig/«in (th is is be tter than that ) , l l/cin 031 [along mapn/i so

hat is wh iter than th is ) , [alo ng am raw i a ny ma ngo cabayo ao ma nya

0 ao bayo u ihi, nyn n l ( any"anti/(i Iayo fulf ill nu n/roan Io /ony l o in /am

m afJ/d t oga bayou ; (3 ) there are m o re ho rses than carabao in th is

bu t the farmers ha ve m o re carabao than the to “ it people ,si f

'

u‘m co

pa so akin , nyan i’

t any kupalnl kony baha yr n"arr i/cit po so ko no /l i

a is younger [literally , m o re o f a ch ild y e t than I am ,bu t m y

3 prettier than she. is ) , siya y Ialo paw ; I‘m /nam ngi so Imn iyo ny

iii! pa siyaao akin (she. is still darker [more b rune tte] than he r

and is shorter yet than I am ) .

vnic bu t correct form o f comparison is express ed b y u sing pa afte r

in, especially in ask ing a q ue stion . I‘Ix . : Him/z“

74 m em os LANGUAGE .

(I t was not reached byyou ; shall Hind i bonaaalaman ; {Icao pa,

a(I do

not know it ; do youFor the negative form of the comparat ive, as in such phrases expressed

in Engl ish by

“w ithout comparison,

” “there is noth ing like it,

"“there is not ing resembling it,

”etc.

, Ta log has several expressionsalmost alike in mean in wh ich are formetf

a

by prefix ing Ica to variousroots ; the negat ive waif, (there is no [t] ) with the tie n?) preced ing theroot and

E

its prefix. An is somet imes found as a sufi x with these expres

sions. x

ll'

atang lazhalimbdua, w ithout comparison ;ll

'

alangkahalintzilad , w ithou t sim ilarity(generallyin speak ingof objects ) ;Walangkah

’

dad , w ithout sim ilarity; unlike ; both the forego ing from hilad ;li

'

alang kalmmbing, w ithout resemblance ; synonym ;Wak ing kam niyis, w i thout resemblance ;ll

'

alang kaholilip, w ithout likeness (th is phrase is rare ) ;ll

'

ulang kanmkhd , w ithou t facial resemblance, from mule-lid , face ;ll

'

aluny kapanlay, w ithout an equal; referring mainly to he igh t, length,rank ;ll

'

alang kamlomitan, w ithout resemblance (a rare expression )ll

'

alang kawangki, w ithou t resemblance (also a rare phrase ) .

To ask quest ions as to comparat ive e quality, inferiority, or superiority isdone in Tagalog w ith ya (how ) prefixe d to alin (wh ich ) , or and (what ) ,in con junct ion w i th ka refixe d to the root of the quality. W i th manyad ject ival roots go and {a thus ser ve to show that the degree of the qualityis the subject of inqu iry. Ex . : Gaolin kalayof (About how far is

Germany kalokir’

(About how large is (Jaanong kohabd f (Abou t howlong is it?) Goalin kopulif (How wh ite is it?) The answer may be givenw ith the same construct ion , pre fix ing go to a demonstrat ive pronoun or

a noun , as the case may be , but if an ad ject ival root be used , it should be

prefixed by kn. Ex . : (Jaité; gau itci (like this ) ; ganiydn (like that ) ;gagalas kapuli (as wh i te as m i lk ) ; gonilong bola/vi (abou t as large as th is) ;ganoung kahabd (abou t as long as that ) . Goya is a variat ion . Gang",another form , is generally used to ind icate plurality. E x . : Gangu m

’

lokalu l i (about as large as these ) ; gnnya niydn kuhabd (abou t as long as

those ) . The noun , pronoun , or ad jective compare d somet imes takes thenom inat ive and somet imes the gen it ive in these answers . Ga and itsvariationamay b e said to exprw s likeness, and is but an offshoot of Ira. Inmany cases no is also inserted in the sentence. Ex . : (hurling na gaitékaau li.’ (liow small is it, like The letter n instead of 731 is used insome ph rases. E x . : Ganan cikiu (that which belongs to or affects me) ;ganan inyo(that wh ich affects you ) , etc .

THE SUPERLAT!"E .

The superlative degree of the ad ject ive may be d ivided into the simpleand the abso lute forms. The first, usually expressed in English by theuse of the adverbs

“

very,

” “

ex tremely,” “

excessively,

” “exceed ingly,

”

“surpass ingly,

”etc. ,

is expressed in Tagalog by the follow ing adverbs :

(l ) L ublui, very, very much , excee dingly .

(2 ) Masékil, extremely, excee dingly, hard (as in the phrase, to rainDist ingu ishe d by d i fference in accent from masakil, (ill) .

Th is adverb is used more w ith verbs than w ith ad ject ives . In some

places sadya has the sense of“very;

”ex .

,sadyam linis very clean.

(3) I) ?sopala, extremelv exceed ingly, from (If, not, an sapala,humble,

unworthy, the idea of the adverb be ing that of plenty or su fficiency.

(4 ) D i )uimok, ex tremely, from d i, no t, and lu’

mmk, vi le, worthless, mean,the whole idea being

“not paltry,

” “

not mean.

”

(5) I )?paluk, far, widely.

TAGA LOG LANGUAG E . 75

(6 ) L abia, too, too much . Th is ad verb has somet imes a slight id ea ofcraft , cunm ng, or sly ness.

(7) T0400 , truly, exactlv, preciselv.

The ad verbs formed w ith 414‘

always follow the ad jecti v e in the sen tence ,bu t the simple ad verbs mav e i ther follow or precede the ad ject i v e .

.43 3

414: 8 4111 4110 .

1141144714144 414 l44414444k .

He (she ) is v ery old (extremely iii/illi

filuk i

.lfuhm d ti

I44l4i0 .

1 4 1114141;

11 4444414 matandd : lle (she ) is vervold (too , tru lv, etc.

TO10 6

The follow ing phrases w i ll i llustrate the various id iomat ic u ses o f thead v erbs w i th the ad ject ive : (1 ) (1 am verv t i 1 ed ;lit .

,v ery great is my fatigue (2 ) mow ib t 4114

31 [4431

(That’

s so,bu t l

’ed ro is st i ll mo i e t i red ; lit . , bu t m o re can ess i v e is [that]

o f I nd /4431 111 4440 43; 44444444ik4'

t (We li ke vo u v e rym uch 1’44444gs 4'

.s

415144113] (Theyare repenting d eeply ) ; (ii ) Jim/444444414 si344'

1 (Heis exceed ingly wealth y [v e ry (5) l

'

443/44444I4'

444 44441431 [4414 4144 ( I t rai ned

too m uch ) ; (verbali z ed ) 41 143) 1. 41/4 4414'

1444n 44444 (Yo u are en t i re lytoo good 44443; utov $44 (You exceed ed y ou r o r

d e n ; yo u d id mo re than i tol d you in ( in i ; (ii ) [ 4444414 414341 44 4'

4/4i ( lie

is com plying w i th h is word [v e rbali z e d fo rm o f 44 4404 4] 1.

The abso lu te superlat i v e d egree o f the a dject i ve 4 in the singu lar num ber )w h ich is mad e in E nglish b y the su llix

“44s t and bv the ad v e rb m ost

is generally expressed in Tagalog b y repeat i ng the en t i re ad jec t i v e , w he therit be simple o r compound , b y 11 14

4

11 1141 o f the pro pc r t ie ,w h ich is d eter

m ine d by the end i ng o f the ad jec t i v e . J'Ix . : .ll4 4h4444

'

443/ 4444414 4444

'

(bes t 1 ; 44444

8 1 1 41144 443) 744413444444i (44444441 444! (44444441 (mos t \ i1 tuo us ) , 14444.si) 4443/ 4444 44444445

p41g (11 10 .~4t d i ligent ) ; un i/4441 4444 4444 414441 (d eare s t , m o s t prc4 1o us ) "44114 4414143;

114444 1 4412 (wb i tcat , v '

ery w h i te ) 44444444 441 7444 4444 4444444 ( l1l414 k 4~. b lac k ) .

The plu ral 0 1 such superlati v es as the forego ing is fo rm e d b y usmu the

part icle 44444 474141 w i th those fo rmed from s im ple ad je 4 t i 1 es t ud c ith 4 1 itl1

the red upl14 41t 1on o f the fi t\ t svllab le o i the l oo t ith t hosepou nd ed w i th ma, the su pc rlat lves th us to 1m ed 4 1t h 4 r in t he s i ngu lar o r

ilur‘al, generally be ing pri n ted as two o 1 4 |~ 1 11 4 41d 4 i to a v o id u nn ecessarv

length and also to d ist ingu ish mo re c learly from so 111c 4l1 11 1i1 1u t 1v4 lax

The d earest [pe rsons or o bjt' t ' ts und erstood ] ( 4 444 41 44444447 /4i “ 44 414441 4444The bes t [119 11 450 118 or U llj t‘t flh

‘

und e rstood ] ( 444431 44444447/4i 4444414 44 4444}41 4437 mabubutinyThe W t it

‘r‘t (persons O t

‘ th ings lllnlc t e‘lu u d l, 4 4 443] 44444443144 ”MIM I /444i;41113) 1414130 4441 44444r43; 44444

44 44s444444i.

The b ra v est men (417431 44444443/4i 4444ll4i14444434 44 4 4 4444 414i}44 4143} 4444 Il l/40. 4 ; 4 4443} 4444414 1143

pang 14a 4444

The ugliest an imals 144 4443141 4444 [14 1 4 4 4141 44 44

hat may be called the re lat i v e 11 14 14 l4 4 in linglis h by

add ing the expression o f all o r a s im i lar pb rasc to the s upc l lativc . is

formed in Tagalt ig b y ad d i ng the wo rd s 444 4 (o t all ) m 4

(among them ) , etc.5 44441 44 4 41431 44444I4il144443j

’ l1 i4‘liOf those t \\ 0 is the b ra v er" 4/ 4 1 443] 4444 40414414

4 4443; 4444 44444l4'

414i144 4 44 41

(W b l(‘h Of them is t llt‘ . ll43/ .s 4 4/4i 4/ m a id /444143,x4 l

1411111! (The smallest of all, he is t iie brm cs t o f all 1.

Superlat i v es are also to lme l bv pr44 ti \ ing an d su llix in 4 4444 ( 1444 44 1 to

redu licated b isyllab ic wm d s,and in the same 1114 111 114 r 11 1th po lysvlI41bi4

wo in the latter case on lv the first two svllables be ing red uph a .ted

E x ; 16 44444144'

sl444414'

s4444. (sweetest ) , from 444444454 : [4 4411 444444114444444141 41 (most virtuous t. from 144444441; (mos t w holesome ) . from 3144414444444.

The fi rst two roo ts ha v e two s y llab les and the last has t h ree . Th is fo rmmay als o be applied to abst rac ts fo rm ed ith and 4441 and in ten

i tie s them . l4lx . : 11'

44444444 4'

s4444 (sweetness 1 ; (swee tness i tself ) ;[41144 4444 4144 44 4 \ irtuc ) ; kahu na/0444444/4444 ( v i rtue i t s e lf ) ; A°44l4444441 r4444 (laz iness ) ;l. 4 414 4444444‘1444444 4 4' 4 44L ( laz iness ,

laz ine ss i tse lf )Ve rbs ha v e a ce rtain superlat i v e fo rm ,

w h ich mavbe ment ioned herefo r t he sali e n t assoc iat ion . it is mad e b y repeat ing the verbal roo t unitedb y 44 4 44434. 1144734; 4444 449 144 4731! tas k and a

s k o v er again 14'

1k444l 4444443/ Liked

w alk and walk ) ; 44 4 4443;4/4 s 4 4 44

3; 44444 (sav ves o v er and

o v e r ) . Th is form is 1118 41 fo und w i th nou n s

,e tc .

S no rlo x 13 1 1 1‘

T 11 12 \ 1 |

The num c rals fo rm a small nou n -

group b y them selv es , having the th reefo ld 4 harac te r o f su b s tan tiy e . ad je ct i v e . and ad v e rb . W h ile the d ist inctionbe t “ 4

4 44 11 gu ljcc t iu ' and 114 411 11 is N o t s o s ha1 p as “ ith some other words, yet

it is c lear that t h e card i nals in Tagalog are 114 411 11,as the y show by alwa ys

pre ce d i ng the nou n affe c ted that o f m us t be u nd e rs tood . Thus [444441 4434144 414414444 4 l1te rall1 m e an tixc head ) o f cattle . 1n d th is ho ld s goo d in all

( net‘s

ln Tagalo-4 4 u e fou r c lasses o f n umerals

1 114l 4 | 1s tribnt iy t

Th e card i na ls arc :

card i nals, o rd inals

Se v e n . P4143.

“ 4414 4 444 43,

Tu t/4}. Ni ne . 54344 4444 .

. 1344 44 (acce n t o n tirs i svlla T44 11 . N u n /34444443 (con t r . o f {so ng

o ne tcn

I

. l44 4 444 4 4cc 44

n t 4 411 tirs t -\ ll: l

. \ s in 1 1 11 1 1 144

rat i4 4n,b y U 1 1 s . i~ that u sed in Tagalog and

th rou g hou t t he Madm an l4 l ll l ll\ 4 41 I. 11 14_ f u . 1g c llu t u ses a pecu liarli

t tl'

l l l I I I t he tanne t als 11 4 11 1 1 4~| 4 4

x4 4 n tn l t il lt ' tm ' ll . W llit ’ll d i ffers fromm. fo llow e d in 4

4 1 4 4 4 } o th c r o f Lu z on . m ean ing44 l4 | 1ng . 1nd a is prc lixc d to the d ig i ts bvmeans o f

t l14 ' 4 ' 1l l4l14 4l1 i4' 1 14 '

4744 . 144444 4 4 , te l l , ll i ld t ’ t

'

r tn u l l.

[ 44144 4431 4i44 4'

444 .

44 l | t4 ‘

4* ll

I

The m u lt iph o f te n b c lo w o ne b u nd l e d a re fo rm e d b y pre fix ing the

d ig i t (N 4 4 !as the m u lt ipli e r to th e w o r dpo m }, u n i ted b \ the prope r tie.

S t‘H ' n t y .

Th e i n te rmed iate d ig i ts . w hen u s e d w i t h th e t we go ing . are jo ined bym ean s H i

i

t. a con t rac t ion H t 441 (and )

T“ "M ‘ 1401444 I linui.-t l1 r4 4e . I ‘U N o I - l44 4444 6 445441 .

4 4 4 . 4l

used for th is same id ea,the adverh follu w ing the card inal affected . E x . :

1s1'

1 I1i1111 1 11g (on ly one 1111111 111 3 16 111111111 (on ly two e tc. i t w illbe observedthat the firs t two sy llah les only o f pn lysyllah ie nume rals li ke dalauvi arerepeated ,

fo llow i ng the general ru le in Tagalog .

The 1 111esti1 111“ 'll1 1w man y ? is e xpressed in Tagalog hy 111711

!

Tagalog has no ahstrat ts li ke u lu z e u .

”

t se 1 1re ,

”etc.

,these phrases

req u i r i ng ronndahou t mean s o f e xpress io n . d o z en may be translated

h y 13 1 1 1111 Isa/111111 111 111 nany w h ich li te rally means“

a jo ini ug.r o f twelve .

”The same is true 1 1 1

'

E nglish abs tracts like “monad ,

”

‘deca de , etc .

More , w i th a card i nal fo llow i ng , is e xpressed l1v 11111111 or h igil, w h ichprece de the nume ral and are u n i ted w i th it hvsu , w lnch expresses

“than .

”

E x ; 1.11l1 1'

s 111 1 11111 13, o r [1 13111 .w (m ore than Lu lu s is the more

correc t . as has an i dea o f e xcess in w e ig h t rather than in num ber.

A'

fi/u u g/ ( less ) is u sed in the same way .

The ind e te rm i nate num e ral some , is e x pressed in Tagalogh y “ d i ll the firs t sy llable t

‘

e t lllplicate cl o r w ith Ici111 1 1 11 11 the idea Oi

”l i ly is expres s ed as

,1 1r 1l

'

1 1 1 “ 11 1 1 1 1 1 4 m u ly it few ) .

.\ lilt h ,

and s im ilat w u t ds are e x | 1ressed hv 11111 1 11 111 1 (frommid a g r ae 1t man y may he t 1 .m s l i te d In 1111 1 1 1 1 111511 1) ma ram i .

lly mak ing an ahs tr: 11 t «1 1 111 1 111 1 an d pre lix ing the di fin i te art icle o f com

m o n nouns is e xpre ssed“

the m u s t . the majo r i t y . e tc . E x 111gku u u u i/nm .

l nr the m ean i ng 1 11 the. nume. 1als se e t he wo rk hy T. I I . Pardo de

Tave ta. en tit le d ons id e racmne s s tih re e l U rige n de l N11n1 l1re d e los

N 11:nern s e 1 1 Tag: pu h lished at Man ila in 1889 .

”RU I N

The ord inals,w h ich are the num e rals d es ignati ng the place or posi t ion

o f the n hjec t in s om e part icu lar se ries ,ha\ e 1n 1 1re «1t the c haracte r o f ad jec

t i ye s than l1a\ e th e card inals . The y an s we r the q u e s tionw hat o rd er?) an d are fo rm ed in a w ry s im ple h au n te r in Tagalog fo r allnum he rs e xcept lirs t . h ich is q u ite irre g u lar ,

1 l.' 1 1 he ing prefixed to the

card i nal. I t shou l dals u he no te d that t h e tirs t s y llah le o f (two )is om it ted , as w e ll as the in it ial le tte r « 11 an d 1i/11 1t (f1 111r )hen preced ed | 1y Tw e n t ie th

,h 1 1 \\ e \ e r is torin cd w ith 11311 11 1111 the

en tire ( .trtliual.

The 1 1r di11als U p tn ten th 1 1 1 .

s e y e n th

1 1 11 11 1151 1110 119110 116.

In t he s n ttthe rn 1 1rm inces 1 1 11 11 11 1 1111 1113 is s om e time s he 1rd,d ue to Bicol

tu d in tine 111 e . I’u /13 ( t lm ) 11 1 he fou nd 111 the, d ialects

spu ken 11 1 t h e north 1 11

°

the Tagalog reg io n . an d th is fo rm may he found inthe h u rth .

h u t slm u ld he regard e das e x t rane ou s tn the language .

The t'

u lln wme sy nops is 1 11'

the ord iuals above ten th”w i ll give an

IAN /N IH } .

IAN /hi,

Ua i/m l.

11 1 1 11 111 1 1 .

( in it ial le tter d ropped ) .

Ju l/M fr}.

IAN /N H“ ;

TAGA LOG L ANG UAGE . 79

“

he fi ft ieth . Any ikalimang 71 11 11 6.

he six t ieth . Aug iktin im 1111 1111 11 13.‘he seven t ieth . Any Urupilonypo ll /1 .

‘he e igh t ieth . A 1151 11 7 1 111 1111 1111 110 1113.‘he n inet ieth . A ny 11 1 18 11111 111 1111 1111 116.

he one h und red th . A ug ikttsangd ftan .

‘

he one thousand th . Ang iA-11s11 11gl1

‘

bo.

‘h e one ten -thousand th . Any

Nouns follow ing ord inals are t ied to them accor di ng to the end ing of

he numeral. E x . : . lng 11 7 1 111110 111] M11 11 (the fifth person ) ; 11 111] ikn llong (irao

th e th i rd day) .

I n Tagalo g, contrar y to what obtains in Span ish , the o rd inals are used

or all days of the mon th, and thus agree ing w ith English . Ex . : [kn it/1 11

rao 171711111511 1111 119 bunny i113? (W hat day of the mo nth [is] (1 111; 11311 1111

115113(the twent y -seven th ) . 31 1 31 1 111,111911 ? (W hat day of the week is to (to -day is Fri

lay ) . A nong 11111 11 (What 8 11 11911710 , avg/11 111 1 111 1'

1i11'

l (n ineteentund red and f ive ) . Anong 11 1111 11 1 11/ago" 1 1 11 1111 (\Vhat m on th is

( 1119 11mm 1111 1117 enero, p1i (the mon th o f January , sir ) . A 116 (111910 13111 111 11 111 11 ? (W hat is your ((i licerio , sir ) . . lng 17 m

0 111 1 1111 1111 13311111 11 (The second name 31111 11111 1, Manalo,sir ) .

raga 11min kn ? (Where are you 3 1111 1 11111 13 , 7113 (Bataugas , sir ) .lbin ka no ng tw in

?(How old are 111 1111 11 '1 1 1111 p0116

’

t

imd (I am twenty-five years old ) . 1111 11 111 11 11 111; pw sidm tef (W here ishe presid en ts Nariyan 8a ik11£11 11~1 1 11g 11 1111 11 11 (There in the secondmuse ) .

Fract ions are expressed by the use of 11119 ( the ) i f the numerator is one,

he d enom inat or bei ng the ord inal desi red,and (a part ) follow ing

b e d enom inator e i ther expressed or und erstood . Numerals may replace

mg. E x . : . l11y iknhn ru ng/ 1111111 1111 (the second part ) ; 11 1111 ib ipu l (theou rth ) , etc . A lso 1311711; i11 z1111g1

'

(one part ) ; (th ree parts ) .Where the numerator is greater than one it is placed in the nom inat ive1nd the d enom inator in the gen i t ive ,

the tw o be ing connected by and

he ph rase followed by baltagi. E x . : 7311113 11 1 1 111/ (111 1 1! 1111 1111 111191 (th ree

1uarters ) 1 111 1111 (11110111; 111111091 tw 1 1-tl‘

1ird s l.

“ Half is expressed by k1111111al1'

,as 1111111111 0

11 (half a loaf o f

) read ) . The noun“a half is expressed b y Isa/1 1 111 , mean i ng generallv a

1 half-salapi o r 25 cen tavos.

I t shou ld be men t to ned that 1111 11 11 11 11 means in the first place , and

when made an abstract and preced ed by the d e fin ite article o f common

1onu s , as in t he ph rase 11 1111 L'

1 1 11 1111 11 111 1I1u 11,m eans the ve ry fi rst . In like

nan ner, 111111 (last ) , w hen made an abstract in the same way , as 11 119 ka/m li

hd ihan means“the verv las t .

”

ADVERBI A L NV .“ ERA LS .

Adverbial numerals, expressed in English b y once ,

” “tw ice , etc. , and

answeri ng the quest ion (past tense ) and Jim/51 1 11 1311 (presen t

1nd fu tu re tenses ) ,“ How How many times

‘

. are formed li kethe ord inals except that make is pre fixed m stead of 1111 1 to the ca1 d i11als .

The word for“

once 1s wh o lly 1rregu lar. 111 some d istricts these ad ver

bial numerals also express the idea o f “ fo ld,

"as

"two fo ld ,

” “th ree-told .

As w i th the car dinals the sense o f“on ly

”may be im parted by red uph

uating either the firs t sy llab le of the prefixed part icle or followmg the

adverbial numeral w i th (1111111119 .

Minsan , var. n insan N ine t imes. .lfalc1 1s 1

'

y11 1n .

Ten t t tues . Malaise 1111110 11 13.

Twice,Fou rteen t tn tes . .lld kafu lu ng 13111 11.

Th r ice . 311117 1111116 . Tu en tv t im e~ .I[ 11 t o 11 11 111 111 1 119Fou r t im es. .I[1 1l. yar . 1111 1 1111 11 15.

1 1 1211 1 1! (rare 1.

'

I'

wcn tv- tiye t im es . .ll u k 1 1 d 11 111 11 11 111;

.Ifu lcu linu i. limé .

.Ilaku ri11 i111 .O ne h u nd re d t imes . M11k1 1x11 11g1hi1u 1.

.Ilu kupito. thou sand t ime . Ma k a 11 1 1 11 9 1 1 711 1:

11111/c111il1 1‘

1.

Natu rally, a

s in all languages ,the re s trict ive form is no t used fo r verr

h igh num be rs.

( ln lv th re e t im es . .I11 1 11111k1tl11111i.

In th is connec t io n it shou l d be rem embe re d that m eans when .

Used in te rn 1gat txc lv.

D ISTIU IH'

I'

IV I‘Z “ HI:

Thes e num erals , e xpressed in llnglis h w ith bv I11 t \\ een th e numerah .

a o ne b vo ne,

"i \t t 1 b y tw .

’

o e t 1 . . an “ e r the 1 | ue s t ton I l1i11 1l1'

1 11 . (Iiou

man y at a t im e’1 and .1 1 e fo rm e d in T 1 : d o g b y the s imple rt pet i tion 1 1.

i Ilt ' t ard i n: l l it bisvllab ic,o r th e lir~ t l \\ 1 1 s vllah lcs thereof if longer, no

tic be ing u sed .

( h ie b y o ne .

Tu o b y tw o .

Th ree b y th ree .

I‘i

n ll l‘ b y fou r.

Fi\ e b y th e .

S ix b y six .

Seve n b y seve n .

[nig h t b y e igh t .

Nine by n ine

Ten b y ten .

I‘iIt ' n b y e leven .

Tn e lxc b y t a x Ive .

”‘

l u cn tv b y t xu n ty .

H u e b u nd l ed In o ne h und re d.

H u e t hous 1n d b y o ne thou s an d.

No un s re peated in th is m anne r acq u ire the i dea o f eve ry .

Iixc rv d ay : daiI\ . - l1 ' 1 1 1 1

W e e k ly 1 . Lo u /1 14 1 1 1 111 1 .

Ycarb : ann ually . 131 6 1 1 4 1 1 131 1 .

I Io u rIv ”m m -owm ( from Sp , ho ra ) .

The wo l d to r c \ 1 r \ is 1 1 1 1 1 1 . \\ I1i1 It may als o b e u sed .

I ll~l l' l l1 lll l \ t ring th e q ue s t io n (Ho w mam to each one .

b y pr1 fix ing the part i1 le 1 1 31 to t he t an imals . the fi rs t s y llable o l

t he latte r be ing re d u plicated in t ho s e g re ate r t han fou r ” . The fi rs t s \ Il 1b |e is d roppe d from 1 11 1/1 1 1 1 '

1 i and t he i n it ia l 1 from lu ll/1.

”llt' 1 1 1 eac h S ix to e tt t

‘b o n e .

Tu n to eac h o ne Se n d ) to ( “tlt' h “ llt

'

.

Th l c c to e ac h o ne . Inlg b t to eac h o ne .

I'

o l l t‘

to e t c h U llt ‘. N t l le l 1 1 e ttt' h

I‘ l \’

e t I t It M lle . Te n to i1 ‘l t

' h o ne .

i -c m a y b y o ne apie c e . e tc .

1'

13/ prc tn 1-d t in -s tam ped , co ined , o r fixed

valu e o f mone y ,

s tamps . In i II I < -c t he in it ial s y llable o f those

n um e rals ahm e fou r l~‘

n o t re d uplicated . is no w mo re generally used

S ig/( 1 1145 41111 1m .

NH Hypoxd liq/u nt il

18 13.

(Miam i.

TAGA LOG LANGU AG E . 81

than lig for th is pu rpose. 1511 3 511 1 0119 Ugo /(1 11 11 119 1311 11111 1 113 (a two cen t

stamp ) ; saluping tiglinumg pisos (a five peso hill o r gold piece ) ; 1191111 111 11 11119pou oug 1158 1111 (a twen tvpeso h ill o r go l d pie 1 e ) . I t must be borne in

m ind that th e Ph ilippine peso is eq ual to a half d o llar 1 11 1te 1 States ( u r

reney and that it is the legal currenc1 in the island . I len1 e the o ld d e

hatox over go ld and mex .

’’sl10uld he 1 1 legated to the pas t .

I n the sou thern d ialect tig is sometimes used to express the time at

11 h i1 l1 someth ing mav he done o r has been d o ne , as in (1911 1111 (to do some

th ing in the morn ing) ; liq/1 1 11111 11 (to d o so 11 1etl1ing 1 11 the afternoon ) .

The particle 1mm, prefixed to no uns d eno ting monev w

,weigh ts , and

m easu res, 1mparts the 1d ea of e111 h,

“1pie1

1

e,

”etc . Th is part icle causes

e uphon ic changes w ith some initial letters of roo ts , as fo llows : b and pchange to 111

, the final 11 d ropping from th e particle ; in itial 1°

(k ) , and qd ropout , mo difving n to 1 1g, 8 and l d rop ou t 1 1 d rops ou t

,

in most cases ; m itial

m,n, and 11 1; also d rop out, and an init ial 1 0 11 el t 1 ,

1, ,o and 11 ) mod ifies

the final 11 of the particle to 1 111.

The former monetary system was founde d u pon the 111111111 1, or half peso ,

nom inally worth 25 cents at a gold basis, and now resto red to that value .

also means money in general. The o f o ne h u nd red cen tavos

is worth two 1 11 the old system t 1e was d iv ided into 80

cuartos, and upon these the people reckoned their market and other m inor

transactions. As these values and terms 11 ill linger for some time to come ,

especiallvin d istri1 ts w here Tagalog onl1 is spoken , the following examplesw ill prove o f use :

A peso each or apiece .

half peso each or apiece .

half (salapi ) each or apiece .

A real 1 12 1 centavos ) each , etc .

half re d 16 } cen ta v os ) each ,e tc .

A cuartillo (5 cuartos or o r

each , etc .

A o r each ,”1 167111 1 1111 1 (from 1

1

1111101, a corrupt io n

Gu‘. H f

The only measu re o f 11 e ight inco rpo rate d in to'

l 1 1g 1log appears to l)1 the

lei/1 1! (froni the Ch inese (11 1 I, w l111 l1 11 1ta 11 1 e r 1 11111 1 1 1 t11 in stand ard ) . B 1

treaty the [111 115111

1 1 11 (1 111! o r cu~toms (1 1 1 1/ o r h ina 1 111 111 1 1 11 1 i 1 1) 1 r

dupois As a mone tarvun it the 111 1 1l. 11 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 11 1 i1 1 s from 5 ) 11 1 150 1 11 1 11

but onlvq uoted 1 11 bank ing ope ratio ns an d is n o t u sed In Tagalogs .

The Philippine l1ih 11 111a1' l1e. 1 1 1gard e 1l as s lig l1tl1 l11 1 11 1 ie i than a t 1 o 1

Ounce ,weigh ing 1

'

1 grains the t 1 o 1 a_

n

l

1 l apo thec'

aries 1 111111 11 11 11 1 1 rh 1u 1 r

480grains, and the a1 o ir1lUpo is 1 111111 1 1.11 grains.

One tah il each .lf1 1 1 1 1

'

111 1'

l.

One pound Spanish each . Alo n/111 11 1 1 l'

n ited States

po u nd s ) .

One k ilogram each . .111 1 171111 11p

-1 1 111 1 1 l

’

n i111 1l States

pu ll lltle l .

( )ne arroha (d ry ) each . .lla 1 1111 1 11

1 1l1 1 1 1 271 lil1ras o r 33 313l'

n ite dS tate s po und s ) .

O ne“ fardo each . ”1 1 111 1 1 1

1

1111 (ilil Sp.o r 33 475 l

'

n itc dS tatic s | 11 1 | tn l l> 2 u s ed in we ig h ing

() ne qu intal each . ”1 1 1 17 11 31 11 1 1 l'

n ited.\ tate s p o und > 1 .

6855— 05

310m isms .

Jinan /( 111i.

J/(mgu hat) (frnm knhat}, 25centavos ) .

Jlrm iktipu t (from m'

kt'

l lm l, a «on trzw

t ion n f .sw Mfr/ml, tn the fou rth o fa ralapi

1Iu m AuM ( from M iro/6 , a von tractiu n

f m ”mu -( 1M, to thv eigh th o f al

salapi ) .

m Tfm/iu (frum

82 TAG ALOG LANGUAG E .

Rice and grain is sold bythe cavan and its fractions, wh ich are as fol lows:

One a mum each . Mafigapauin of a pint, dry) .One c upa each . Mangatang (4 apatdn or of a

pint ) .One gan ta each . Manalop (8 cha or United

States quarts (from arr/op ) .One cavan each . Maribabdn (25 genius or gal

lons ) .

There are 8 gallons to the United States bushel. United States drymeasure is sligh tly d ifferent from British imperial. To red uce United

States to British d ivide same named measures by and to reduce

British to Un ited Sta tes multi fly by same. For common pu rposes umwh ich is close enough . autwine.

A cavzin”of rice weighs 133

“ libros.

One picul each . Mamiku l(137.9United Statespounds.

Two piculs constitute a“ bale

”of

hemp, ubakd ) .

The metric system is now official in the Philippines, and its use is gradu

ally spread ing to all sections.

Among the native measu res of length use dw ith man are the following:

One inch each . Mananali (from sangdali, which in

tu rn is contracted from sang,and daliri

,

The Spanish inch is of an inch . Daliri also means finger or digit,and the length of a Tagalog inch

”almost exactly corresponds to the

“ d igit of the earlyHeb rews, wh ich was of an inch .

One span .llanangcal (from danycal,a palm

The American span is 9 inches, wh ile the Tagalog dangcal is one

fourth of a vara,hence United States inches .

One vara each . Mumara (from ram , a Spanish

yard , equal to 33 United States

inches , approximately, and actu

ally of a ard ) .

One braz a each . Mand ipti (from d ime,a braz a , equal

to 5 feet inches United States.approximately 5) feet ) .

To express the idea of “at such a price apiece the former monetarv

units were used w ith in (hin ) su ffixed to the un it,of wh ich the initial sv

lable was red u lieated . The article or o bject of wh ich the price was todenoted prece ed the un it of value, the two words being linked with the

appropriate tie, accord ing to the end ing o f the first word . E x . : Pip!

sohiu (at a peso each ) , Iibrrmg sasalapiin (books at a half peso each ) , timi

pay no sisicupu tin (bread at a real a loaf ) , whammy aaliu hin (cigars at a“cuartillo

”apiece ) .

These terms w ill now on ly he found used w ith those people still unfa

miliar w ith the new currency, but as these people speak only Tagalogass

ru le they w ill naturally retain the old terms the longest .

The fo llow ing d ialogue fairly represen ts what mavbe said in makings

pu rchase in the market :

Magkano bagci ang halaga nité? W hat is the price of th is?)[sangpisos, p6 (a peso , sir ) .Malta! 1m (0160 oydn (that is too dea r ) .Hind i p6

’t mura (no , sir ; cheap) .

Anong mum ? (How [is it] cheap?

)Kayona

’

y tumauad (you set a price, sir ) .w>

w>

w>

TAG ALOG L ANG UAG E . 83

A . Tallony pesetas any ibibigay he (I w ill give 3 pesetas [60 centavos]B . H ind i pong manyyayari; tiptlt nu pesetas, pt? (I can not d o it ; 4 pesetas,

sir ) .

A . .llabuti (very well [offers aB . ll

’

ahi alcony su lcli, 116 (I have no change . sir ) .

A . I la/ti moma 8a aminy lnihay, (lo/m hu lmyu ran kitti (bring it [them ] toou r house , we w ill pay [you ] there ) .B . Malaya (Is it far?)A . Hind i, at drain itiniany so may cuartel (no ,

it is there close to the bar

rack s

I t shou ld be borne in m ind that magkakano is us ed when pricingob jects o f w h ich a part only is desired ,

such as eggs, bananas , etc

.\ Iagkano

”ind icates that the en tire q uan tit y is priced .

The verbaliz ed forms of the, numerals w ill be given u nd er the respective

part icles, as too lengthy explanations wou ld be req u ired in th is place .

Sse rxox 8 1 11 .

Tu e s ovaan.

Bv the name of adv’

erb is d istinguished that class o f words used to mod ifvthe sen se of ave i b ad jective

, participle ,o r o ther adve rb

,and usuallvplaced

near a hat 1s m od itied , as he w rites u ell, l l‘t t ld t/l/ a dm it , y(1 11 speak correctly,

wery co ld,naturally b rave ,

rcry generally acknow ledged ,m uch more clearly.

(A ll bu t o ne of the fo regoing are from the (‘

cn tu ry Dictionary. )A dverbs may be classified , acco rd ing to the same. au tho rity, as fo llows :

(1 ) Adverbs o f place and mo tion , as hcrc, there, up ,ou t

,e tc. (2 ) ( li time

and succession,as now

,then , often ,

erm'

, e tc . (3 ) Of manner and q uality,

as so , thus , n ell, tru ly, faithfu lly, etc . (4 ) Of measu re and d egree . as m uch,

mo”,1 cry, cnonyh , etc . (5) ( limodalitv,

as sm ely,not

, [u r n/taps thcrcfm c, etc .

\c,

cord ing to llarle , one o f the most d istingu ished autho rities on English ,

the re are th ree k ind s o f adverbs, the flat , flex io nal, and ph rasal.

(l ) The flat adverb , w hich is a noun o r ad jective used in an adverbial

sitiou,is not consid ered as correct in books and papers ,

b u t is to be

card daily in conversation,as in tt

'

alk f ttsf , n olk slow ,speak low l, speak low,

etc. I n G erman , th is form of the adverb is also lite rary,as cin ynnz scliones

llawd a w ho lly beau tifu l house ) ; er schrmht yu l (he w rites we ll [lit. , good ]Ad jec t ives o f certain clas ses may be used th is way in Tagalog, and espe

cially those of manner o r degree ,such as muyu liny well) ; nmsrnnti (bad ly ) ;

mmlu li (q u ick ly ,b ricllv) , e tc . \

, vh ich are, also a djectives. There are also

flat ad jective8 bvsignificat ion , wh ich are ex plained under the section to

1\ ha 11 they belong bvmean ing.

(2 ) The fle x ional adverb , w h ich is that d is tingu ished by a ten n inatio n

in E nglish and allied la11g1iages like tr'm cl

,lino lu ny,

ma il, and ln, as inbackwa rd , darkling, head long, p iecmnen l, and the great num ber 111 In, such

as qu icl ly, qu ietly, rap idly,etc. Tagalog has no part ie lc wh ich th us marks

ou t an adverb from other parts o f speech .

(3) The ph rasal adverb ,“ hu b is also calle d an a dverbial ph rase ,

is

greatly used in E nglish , and is to be fo und in abundance in Tagalog.

Am o ng English examples mavbe cited (it hurt,a t (m yth , by all mea n s

, f o r

go od and all,on crery sid e

,etc .

The re are also bo th in E nglish and Tagalog what may be sty led the ad

verb ial pronouns, such as was and no ,toge the r w ith the negatives no t

,nor

,

and neither.

Un like English adverbs nearly every Tagalog abve rb may be mad e in to

a verb if the proper particle is used , and the bo rd e r be tween adverbs and

prepositions is very indefinite in som e cases and m ust be dete rm ined bv

the aid of the con tex t .

As the form and composition o f a \\ f) r1 iS subo rd inate to its mean ing,the

Tagalog adverbs hereafter consid ered w ill be class ified accor ding to mean

ing, irrespective of form .


I . Adverbs of place and motion w h ich answer the question t itan!

where?”are usuallyexpressed in Tagalog byso followed bya root. This

root sometimes has the expulsive part icle 1

°

prefixed .

Where . Sdau .

Where? Stion!’

Where indeed ? Sdan nya.

Anywhere, wherever, somewhere . Stian man.

Evervwhere. Slianatian man. Stion red uplicated .

Nowhere. S lum ma’

y amid .

From all parts , may also mean to or Sa atian man.

in all parts.

W here are you from? Taga adan kn! Siyli he and 1 1111

they maybe used in placeof kn.

Scu mmay be verbaliz ed w ith um inserted , for ming samtian (to be some

where permanently ) , and also w ith 11111 in the latter case tak ing the

idea of to be somewhere either temporarily or rmanently, as the case.

may be. Namian any 11111l1al1ao 1m iloyf is the ford of the

lllasamimt m'

yd lmya .

”(Where w ill heS tan may be furtherverbaliz ed bvp a

,in wh ich case to go is inherent

in the meaning. l‘lx . : Xap amian myti! (Where d id he Napaaaaian

aiyd ! (Where 18 he going? l’asastian sly/1 ! (Where willtile

Slian has been corrupted to M an in some d istricts , owing to Bicol and

Visayan influence, the former using ham and the latte r hain.

Saan has an entirely d ifferen t meaning w ith 1 following or even alone

in some cases, expressing a negative id ea simi ar t o“not ye etc. In

I locano s ian is also the negative participle“no.

”

Si am pa f also means where then?”in rather a sarcastic manner. With

d l‘

added to start a an atfirmative inte rrogative meaning is expressed , as

Scion p a (Ii tot/111? How can it not b e.

it must also be noted that in Man ilaand places where Span ish is largelyspoken that some particles are used in a d iffer ent manner than is the

custom in rural d istricts. Thus, W here are you go ing?”is expres sed in

the coun try by mian ka paroro1'

1n,but in Manila by alian l'a pap arolin.

() ther e xlwessions of like natu re are S ian any paroroonan mo? in wh ich

the d efim te is used , and s ian ka nagmalci? (Where d id you start

Another sim ilar q uestion is Siian kn nari'

yagaliny! (Where are you comingfrom?) The answer is generally given w ith m in the sense of from : So

3111111 11 1111 (from Malabbn ) ; ea Imus (from Imus ) ; 811 11111113, ho (from myhouse ) . etc.

There are four simple a dverbs o f place, wh ich have hereto fore been

explained at length , and her e only some id iomatic uses will be set forth.

These adverbs are d ini, (lilci, d iyan, and 1111011 .

mean ing“ here

”(toward the speaker ) , is verbaliz ed by am,

in

the sense of taking a place near the speaker, etc. Ex . : Dum ini ka (take

you r place here ) ; d unymid ini 111 11 (I am tak ing my place here}; d angmini

1111-11 (I took m y place here ) ; d irin i aké (I will take my place here ) .W ith 111119 (11119) it is Verbaliz ed in the transitive sense, requ iring an

ob ject . E x . : Magrini Ira n iyang tinap uy (put some. bread here by me ) .W ith pa the idea of motion toward the speaker is expressed . E

Par im'

to (come here towar dme ) . Th is last form may be further com

pounded w ith the particle pa , definite, correspond ing to magma, indefin ite,

to express the idea of command ing,re questing, etc . E x . : Paparinih in mo

111°

Parlos (tell (‘

arlos to come over here ) .

“Over there

” is expressed bv11a mm .

0116, mean ing“ here (equally close to both speaker and person ad

d ressed ) , is verbaliz ed in the same way as d ini. Ex . : Dumito kn (take

your place here ) ; parihika (come here ) ; paparilolu'

n moai Carlos (tellCarloeto come here ) ; P ina 1aritomo 11111113 (Did you te ll him to come The

fou r adverbs under iscussion admit the d etiu ites o f i and an . That in i is

compounded with forming ika,ikina; and in mavbe used when united

plenty ) . The wo rd may prefixed to «113m : fa rm s the well-known and m uch

usetl ind efin ite may/min", to hal v e . E x . : Jim /Mun [may hu g/J “ any timi

pug/f

(Have yo u any b road?

) Jfayrtiun [sa n g] pu ru rmm cm .

’l l) “ yo u have

to go the re?) lint . Mum/mime « Irony ]m rom omm (Yes . imlced ,l ha v e tn

to gm .l/ayrcj un la ”a ny [lu ng (min! ( llmvn lclare y o u

? L it . Havey o u o f h o w many .llugm iu n a lt-tmy clef/u u wny 1mm} ( 1 am twenty :

lit . Have I twmxt y ) 1th m ine M i llixw l particles «Man is n im litied as

fo llows : ] ) Ju n Jm (in the same place there ) : «Lio n .w 1M ; «Mon d am (in an

o the r ]vlavc i : (Mon (U Vt‘l‘

t he n 1'

Sr! llritm mu n (W P F

Many ph ram l ai lve rh i are manic h y thv partivle w w h ivh means znnn ng

other th ings at an d in lw n plzuw l l it-lu re a ru n t . Among the m u st impu r

tz in t 1»h ra.~al aqlvvrhs n f pl um ith m are :

I n fro n t ; facing. Nu {rt/m l: (f t/m t m . P AH : [lu ng ln ilmy( l f/ { f l/m l .W l (t llirJ l10 11>0faves the ah t ) THIN ! has al

~o the

id ea u t’

svt t ingm it in m “ S,regular

e tc .,

> 111°h as trees. plants.

(‘i t '

ln tlw prosoncvu f z hvfn re ; Opposite ; Na [M I N I/1 . S 41 hoimp ”(my c'

up itl in

tn i llt ' fron t . {hc tm'

v th o

Be h in cl ; hack Hf . Sn li/cm l. l'ix . lug mu ng/u iu ilm yl .w

f ilm ] N i l / I f] mm rh / (the ho uses inll' li

f tho hu rrah -k s ) . . ln r/ h lmd (theluu ‘k )

Jn inw l t i ) .

A t ihv (f t lgj t

‘U l

’

sid e ( if .

(“

in the n th t-r h itlt ‘ ( ) f ; hevontl.

”lllr-li lt '

.

l 11~i¢lv1 \\ 11h i11 . Th is plum-v is mw 'h used

in thv iclva ml Uu ' hea r],

fl a nk ing in n umm l .\ vnw . lax

[M I N I / H ] Ilia }; lm lv-hvarted ly :

“ ith ll ll t ln hvu rtQ3, M m 1 1m in M a x an d expulsive

mrt ivlv 1 1 .

livl‘flV ,A"! I /I I I‘ IN ; l l

i

l'

H lI l INN/( i. it] ‘ii ( if

lun n h lv.

Th h “ u rt l ~llt 1llltl nu t be con fuse d

“ Ji ll the tu lln w ing.

t

Ni l / 1 17 1 1 13] .

Nu (f l/t i ; .e S i/ui

ng.

S c! lu lu /(i . “ l tll m ' lf} t ilt‘ 111021 H f

lm th"is lirfl llgllt in . EX SH

m ug/« 111 17 1?t u n hn th 11 l1ti i1}'

thv thv lirs t twn

n f thv rtm t the il lezl Hf

i ll"l lix Nu mug]

t u n all > itles ) . Napa

f in ial x i/r/ .w lat/HM 1 1 1 11151 Hu g (they

m n t u w r thvrvln-ymn l t lw river ) .

.\ u nu rc/b ibc/ci mnu/ lmhum n (m1

lm th > ic |v< H f thv lnnl} [CHM/(ihaw at lm t ll t ‘ it lva n f partly awl

is nw cl li llfl ll ltlt lt ’ally w hen speak

ing H t.

l it ' t ' . [lu ng] 1.7 mm 4131

lu lu /Um ( t h is rive 1 lmt halfmkw l I I n spvak inu ”(an y th ing

thv w i ll ie what in m ind .

thv 1l~ .lu t' i> q u ite i lilfe rcn t . lix

[h u f f]‘l H u g} Il l/m l ( 1 1157

lu lu /u_

r/ b im /r ( th is l“

m -n k zn nl part lv nu t ) .

TAGALOG LANG UAG E .

Upon ; on ; above.

U nd er ; beneath ; at the bottom of.

Halfwav (between two poin ts ) .

In th e m id d le .

A round ; abou t ; close to .

As far as ; up to .

To the righ t .

To the left .

Forwar d.

Backward .

At home ; in , to, or from the house .

In, to , or from town .

In, to,

or from the country.

In, to ,

or from the moun t ains .

87

Thes e atlverbial ph rases can be imle tin itelv inerease d bv th e use o f m

with the proper root .

Toward .

Approach ing.

1

I I . Adverbs of time and sueeese ion \ \ llIt ' lI ge ne rally ans “ e r the q ues

tion ka ilén t’

gw hen

‘

fl ,are. q ln te numerem ll] Tagalo g . sh o u ing that the

conception 0 time was well d e v e loped fo r a pt im it ixe pe ople ,o n ly the

hour and its subd ivisions being unk no wn to the language . except as d e

S41 ilmlm o (from bnbao and i) . E x

S M {bu /mo mmg Imndo/c (upon the

mou n tain [mountains] Ba lu’

w,

w ith accen t upon the las t syllable ,m eans po st, as bu ln

'

m so hating

gab-i, (past o r afte r m id n igh t I t

also m eans near”in som e places.

I‘Ix [main [m g/ti «my huyu n so

u tin .

’

(A re w e perchance near the

town?

) is now the ord inarvW o rd u sed fo r

Na [hi/5m ( from kilim,root O f idea Of

(Ir/ill: and expu lsiv e particle i ) .

Sn yilm i. lax .\s agilmi lug/o 3a

pug/ltd u rl (we are halfway in the

march [trip o r jo u rney]Nu [m g/fla n ( from (fi lm?l. 1 71 [10 .01

.

t

nu ug/ lu nsu ugu n ( in the m id d le O f

the stree t \. A ls o means“te rm .

”

I‘lx . : ”it/om ; [man «my puyimn(a te rm [pe riod ] o f eigh t mon ths ) .

So "m y. E x . : Nu may m artrl (closeto the barracks ) .

] q gdn . l'lx Still /1 (my lung!) mo ,

a

( \Yhe l'

e is you r trip to?

) f i lmy/(in

Mug/mm. [lu ng/ m ( lilo) (up to

here ) . A lso has the meaning.' o f

unt il. h x [lam/( m Milas

(u n til to -morrow ) .St : 15mm”.

Nu [cu /1 1rd .

l ’u lu im p .

Nu

Nu tu rf/( I n .

Nd Mil l /I ,

Nd [N I /N IOIC.

Iix . : “a lso .v'

w a (mg lun g/0 m'

.lw m . (To ward w here is Jo hn’

s

t rip. ) [h i /J im } .lluym ld ( toward

Man ila l. [h t/u » min"H ug UHF/U mo .

”

Toward w he re is ) o li i'

t rip?) Da

lco n o IN N/rm lso’

f/ (my (N IH/o kn (myt rip is to ward m y to w n ) . Togo

.w'

um (W he re are yo u from )?

I n ; iiU SH lDU SH , S it ) .

lo m g/ h om e ( to ward th e righ t ) .

[h r/11m g] ki t/l uv? ( to ward the le t“ .

[h i/H f (apI 'd /u t

(approach ing' the lo w e r co un try i .

[L i/H I W I H / (i ( illipl‘

fl tl t’ll illfl )

‘

H tl l

[h i/u ! has als o an id ea o f be

\ o nd o n the o th e r s id e o t.

( u sed relat ivelv1.

V

(”N i

Tllt ' l l . ] ) d u n

co n s tan t lv s o m e t im e s

w h e ne Ve r"

l .

I I II ICS ) .

( 1 ) Ke n . (‘

mnmon ly u sed ou lj

present an d futu re tenses , bube U s e d ith pas t ind e finitetio n is represen te d as custo

I‘Ix . : Km : t lvm ilmy (m y; cu

o ld /u h : Hu n t/Cd (w hen I ll?

comes , le t me k now [tu tuKa n ( IA/fly m lru rdon an .Vc) u lprts rtsH /um ’

tf l 111

(w hen I was in Man ila I

wen t to the Luneta [pas t till lt

c tts to tnar ) A'

u n

(whene v e r ) . lx'

u n g/ minsrm

tim es » . A'

u n is also used

pre po sitio n ,See und e r

("l .\

v

vl u gl. [v

b‘

t‘d W ith liO tll (It

1nd ind e fin ite pas t tenses .

t h u d /1 10 ”if/d [l u g/ab.

H id llt‘ came to

them las t n igh t , th e y wen

he re » -\Vm g/ (tu ne r/m g siyd

[mm m : a lso (wh en he cam e

th ro ug h eat ing )

w o rd s m ean really in

d a \ at t hat t ime , etc .

.\ u u u (M ' N f/cu

’

rlu ( If,

j u ry/mou l d .V I Im u s that

the tigh t at Im u s to ok pl

l u l u /d I n ! .e ‘lI I I I/I l l/li

Mi l i tant ( fi sh /( I t \\ l1ilt ’ the

iard s w e re y e t h e re in .\ lat

l'e i hap

s the n in so m e

w o u ld he the lie s t t tan slatin t

K im [ H I/m m 1m ,

m u, (lN ri ( l ug

h e n ) n tt e at the n y o u ill

w hat y o u are to han d .

tu llu n il l: l /m m an ti tin ‘

lid /f! I’M ."yum”

.

t /vl u l ll i, t/l il I N ] N l AN N [N I

t lu v} \ e t . an d d o ing so,

w i ll h e be the n w he n gro w n

I‘ix Tu rf / u !) h u r t (tu u' i

( f u r ; 1 au ra/M im i lu lu”{14m (7 (yo us o m e th ing to d o always ) . TiHm f. i t (whene v er

Seldom .

) ften .

S ince .

A go ; since .

As soon as .


w rite As ad jecti ve tu u ' i

means e v ery. E x . : lu cring tiruo

(e v ery day) . In some cases itmeans as long as. Bx ; Tu n ing(If mnpou i mu; pug/I atuu o (as longasmanhood is not ex tinct ) .

Among o ther Gxpressions may bementioned u

'

alomg Immpu u, ii ithou t end ; trulu ng lilu t, w itho u t t

'

ail;u-aIcmg tulum , w ithou t stop, inces

sant ly; i t'

d /any lug/of, w ithou t rest .

There are two expressions used for“

e ternally. fo rmed w ith the pretix "my/Ia to a roo t w h ich is followed hy wm u Ex ; ling

]mh ilm/ mu n Slitt ll , and mug/partiliug

(dd /ing ) man M an . Ano ther

ph rase is nmgpu lmihin nou n ,

nmu , both of w h ichsign ify alway s.

]Cu il /m"mu-q d i.

K n ng/ m q un . .Vuminsu nminsu n,

(from time to t ime ; now and then ).ilixlu ulomi (rarelv .) E x . lf ixun

(1mm Id umo

ng (my ]) d qpu rllo 11m

(yo u r com ing he re is rare ) .B lIN u t l'] Bclciranq lu ng/nu ttmfi/is

item; Imlana d o (th is Ch ild se ld omt ries ) .Mu li/m l. E x : .

lIu Iim it u lso ug; su ng/m an ilu t I w rite o ften ) .

Tum/m y. E x . :'

Iilmbu g/ h i ng}

(Sittee you left ) .

l‘lx . : .llahi Irahuprm (s inceyes terday ) . The particle pug/kt:

some t imes d eno tes“sinc .e as in

the ph rase [nu/I n land I.o (s inee m y

child h o od ) . l ro tn wo u ld he

an eq ually eo rrect translation .

Ka u a i/co t from Isa an dmake ) Ku nm

lirrlu some (it! ) s“ ago l. BO

t'

o i e a t ard inal fo llo w ed hy (iruo,

day. Imum lcct ind i '

ate s the num

her o f days w h ich har e e lapsed .

l'lx . : Kumrrku lcm '

ti (day be fo re ye

te r d' lit . ,tgn : I’t lm tl

Kn

pre ti\ ed w ith pa fo llow ing a root

also ind icate s s un e . l.x . : lu r

Iu l/m u [M t ( s ince y es te rday ) . K t!

alo ne ind icates pas t tim e,w ith

Son ic roo ts . I‘Ix . : [ Od in/mu (yes

from Iu lpon (afte rno o n ) .

Anya /oi t las t n igh t ) trom I n and

gob? (n igh t ) .

So used ad ve rh ially . d e no te s in t tne‘I l ' f l t fl \ l l s l l ‘l‘lv ‘A

\ lrea«lv.

le to rt . w ithal; it m ay he .

Be fo re : t w h lle ago

\ ll t ie n tly .

In t / 171m ” hac k to hat ) o tl e re

talk inu aho n t lve t‘

o re [Re tu rn tothe th read o f o u r s to ry ] Ka li /II ruZ/ u u r [N I ta lit tle w h ile ago , 3

h u rt t im e ago ) . li x Ai

tufilt(MPH/ N I ) N u

' I/ ri l tllt ’V he re

t s h o l t t t tn e 11 2 “ I .

N ! ”n o .V i mm (verv

l'ix

t in 1 ) l( l

t lw '

n

( t h is ( la )

Th is particle is in co nstan t use,

in d is alway s placed las t . E x“

Vapo r /u m n o s it/(i t he h as gone

ilrea dy ) . The re are m am o ther

u s es o f m ) in Tagalog , w h ich will

he s e t fo rth as the y o ccu r in the

e xam ples .

l'

u . Th is partic le ,as an ad v e rb

,is,

like m i, alway s placed afte r the

“ o l d m o d ified . l‘i\' [x i [N i (one

_

\ e t u u o / m m pu’( ls the re any

t h ing the re y e t I t is also itse d

s peak ing: iro n ically . lax - tIni 1m

m u} I har e i t ) go

the re ] m II [at ( lin t y e t ) .

] Il lfj u . Rug/o l u ng; Im m u sl l,

N i t/Iv”) m o Hug s IIN I (be fo re y o u

t ead , sw e ep the ro o m ) .

— l Bug/0

pt ) (a li lle ago ) . Bu g/n , as an ad

\ e i h o f tim e . alway s preced es the

U N ) it m o d itit

K o ri / om , \ ariat io n Icum'

na . [ Glu t/i

IN N / fl lu u g/Im /i lie t'

o i‘

e no o n I ro n / )

[H I /u ] u um gu 1 th is m o rn in g.' a w h ile

lid /(m o m m o i/rlo ng so u th).

i

h’

u H ua ng limo-llmm

, w h ich

lo llo w its y e i‘li . in J ans

e i t he r in t im e o r place .

l: \ In t m u m ! (yo u en ter

firs t (po lite Hugo

I mm u u I o, In ! m u na (lie

io re o u e . i t . was h tirst [i. e .,y ou r

hand s ] - l Hu i / in mo m um z (doit tirs t ”inlay Isa mum )


Formerly ; ancient]y.

A tterward s.

Later ; presen tlv; bvand by.

A t once ; immed iately .

.\ t once ; im ined iatelv; su dden lv;abruptly.

I nstan tly ; at once.

I nstantly ; like a flash .

Sudden lv; in a moment.

Ofihand ; suddenly . (l'

sed w ith A'

u m kum lscl .

verbs o f doing and speak ing .

After beginn ing; upon starting, ete . lax( a ft e r l (

'n i i i t i u ' i im u l t n n ei t l

(wait tinst .s a, used

w ith a pro no un w itho u t a V e rb,

comes first , and go v erns the nom i

native. l‘ix .llmm ken/«i (youfirst ) ; mu nu Ito no (you ahead ) .

S f ! (ti t/i.

Su k i . lax (Naom i (my Po ng/m oon

D ias (my [mitt/it, .mm any (theLo rd (iod made the Heavens

,

afterwards the xarth ) . Bib . Nu

tm u'

i sip/ii (she laughed ) : o f sa lt )?

l Su knn tm kei

(long afterward s ) . .lImm I 'u nuM

(afte r a long d e lay ) . .\Vrg/sosaI

sea/J) (o ne who is d ilato rv in h isW o rk o r d u ties ) .

’llu umyti. Ex ; Numilu f ”I'd mommy/(i

( I shall w rite b y and by ) .- l. .

JIM /1 11311 1 1 11] Ito/ ion (late r in the at

terno o i i .llo umymm um (one t ime

o r another, little by lit tle ) .-I.

II ci’

y m im tnm ytmmmf Isa (1 d id th islittle by little ) . .llag/nuo/ci (to d o

an y th ing little by little ) . Mug/paimparts the id ea o f waiting to th isroo t and its com b inations. E x

ob i (I an ) going to wait a little wh ile ) .

Tfunbing. Th is wo r d is o u t o f u se inManila. E x K i l l/m in [id iom /l ing

[tud eh] ; lumbin ym m o Isu nm in

[d eb ] (eat at once ) . Trunk i ng/inm any Iccm iu ( take it at o nce ) ; ilm ii

In'

ug )u ono ibig/Hy (giv e it at once ) .lax . lg/u rin monggo u

' in (doit at once ) . Conunon lv u sed inMan ila.

I‘ix . tIilq nag/(Ii! ti ff/ii

(he he'

ame angry at once ) . Also

mean one bv o ne"in some

places . E x - lIipq’I d lui

'

ng Imm'

a

(I w ill take them o ne by one ) .

Koyiol. FA' Kogiol Hog/Iog/(Imhig

s ig/ti so also)”mold (like a flashhe d isappeared from m y view ; hewas out o f s igh t instant lv Tug;

Im lay, id ea o f d isappearing o r becoming in \ isib le .

]x’

t iym m g/ium (fro m ginsu , repe t itio no f roo t and pre tix Im ) . Varia

tion ImIi iu so Ii inso . Ku nIo nq msome tim e s m eans sudd en ly ( froma lum red uplicated , an d prefix It

‘

o l.

Q

So ; th us ; in that “ av.

So : th u in that way .

Like ( req u i res gen it i v e ) ; thus.

Like : as :

How large ; h o w m uch in ex ten t?

(v'

ci has been q u ite fully eXplaiiied und e r the comparati v e o f ad jectives,to w h ich the read e r is re fe rred . .\m o i ig some e xamples may be q uo ted

q t! bo t/i (my Ido l; mo ( v o u r h eart is lik e sto ne ) , and ga ffe /i i"mo (m ake it

like th is ) . fio th ali ke"is e xpressed b y lupmu i

, as may be seen by the

e xam ple : amm o : mo Isa/m u d s i/u ug (in /(u n i (pro h ib it them both alike )‘

(my [J I/m ll t i mo (d uo ( like you , a perso n [lig .

, yo u r (1k!)

m o i m o , bo il .

” I pe rhaps, like y ou , withou t Judg

lii tc i it io i iallv; pu rpo se ly .

Vo lun tarilx : w illinglv.

liv fo rce .

li s pe c iallv: u n iv.

s “ i t var . m /lm u; tum/my; agapay.

Ni l /m ix. l-I.\ - lu q lu lo lci li a subayw ing[n i l/( 11W (the man as well as thew oman ,

o r th e male as well as theit ' l lRllt ‘ L — l

I i i i rried h o r m o re q u ic k ly ( said to .\ om m m lopil i i ( from sundopikc’

i, idea

be applied o n lv to w h ipping ) . o f pun is h ing ano the r ) .

h am/1m (from d ig/1m) . G ll Ili llNiytin

(to act in that manner ) .

Gu noou ( fromHug/ 1311 (from ( iumuyon (toac t in that way ) . E x

l 'e dro si .Imm (Juan is like Ped ro ) .

(h ty/1 1 .

Ex Hau lin lru layo! (How

far? [sang horas , pd

(o ne h ou r sir

I ’u lssd . E x I ’inu l'sd 11 171?(they d idit in ten tio nally ) . Syn u n ify/«i.

Ano th e r w o rd is E x

Tin t}. ca n t/(i i llt‘V (liti ii

lu l l/1!

( Did he [sh e ] d o it

Ix'

om w'

( lle [she ] d id it \ilil igly \Vit ll v erbs ku si i fo llo wsth e sam e co i istruc t im i as to the

part ie lc s as d o the \ e rbs . lix

[\ o o u u 1110 115; {1111 1 111 1 11 so ld (call

h im pu rpo se lv,i . e . d o not fo r

ge t to call h im ) . [ Iciisd mom; ilu

pu n 1113 ( th i o w th is o u t pu rpo se ly

i. e,

\ o ll sho u ld ha v e th rown

th i o u t y i i ii i se ll ) . Pug/summ it

\ t i lll ll lil l’ il) A

'

umi is: in tensified

b y red uplic atio n . ]‘A’

ll'

u ld h mg[ u ser/co m i ng} {111 1 1 1 1 1 1117 11 11 111] 17 111 1 1111 1 11

( y o u d o no t d o anvth ing “ ith theleas t w illingne ss )

Vi i / 111111 1 1 1 ( fro m E X P ili! 1m

(1 /1 1 1 1‘1 it i ll l l

I to /m i l. lix He lm ! swu ng nah imrg

t he [has been ] summoned

e s pc i ially i . li'u /J fl l lJ l

(mm a re th e o n ly one amo ng all) .“ 1 1 1 1 1 (mg 111 11 130 11 lin ked

m i l l/1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 ( it/1 17m l 1. 11 1'

s (there areman y princ ipale s ,

b u t tho. on lv

i' ii ' li o ne is (

'

u p t a i n L u i s ) .Tm?” is so m e tim es used in th is

TAG ALOG LAN Q UAG E .

Qu ick ly ; hastily.

Except ; bes ides.

Except ; excuse me ; perm ission .

Hard ly scarcelv.

Q carcelv; hard ly.

Nearly ; almost .

Acco rd ingly.

Agreeab lv.

I nside ou t .

Upside d ow n ; re v ersed .

Slowly; smoothly; noiselessly.

95

B igl1i . Ex \ amald u siyang (1 11/Id

(he d ied q uick ly ) .— L . Verbal

iz ed . E x 1£1 1/l11 111 mo ang tutol 1110

(hasten [abbre v iate] vou r accoun t[or story

L 1I11i11 . E x L il/1 11 81 1 10111111111ib1i 11g 11111I 11p11r11 r1511 11 (except vou ,

there is no other person who can

go there) . L ibdn 11a iyo any 111 111111,

ay 1111?Ice iI1£I1 1°

g1iy (except that youare to be the one. tak ing it , I shou ldno t gi v e it ) .

Tobi. E x ° T11I1£ 116, aI'O’

y (Ion ian

(excuse me [fo r goingb efore you ,

fo r lea v ing fir st, Th is is theshout

“coche ros

”use, Tubi.’ I t

lite rally means thus : Aside .

Tobi is also used fo r a polite cor

rection or con trad iction : Singtabi8 11 (you w illpardonme ,

b u t it is no t j ust like that ) .Tobi/111 11

,refuse heap, rubbish

heap,e tc.

3 1011 111 1117, var. I111I11rg1'

1i. E x B11

I11 1 1/i1i 7111 1111051 111111" (it is hard lysuflicien t ) .

— I. . A synonym isI1 11I1

'

11 111i

B 1I1 1'

r1‘

1 . .

v11m ; 11111-1111 . E x

0 1111111 151 1 111; 1111111 11111 1 : (I scarcelyreached it ) . also means“seld om .

”lax as

“

hard lvz”

kn 11 11 11 111} 111 1gs 1/11i r 1111 ( Ith ink scarce ly anyone has come

here yet ) . ] f iI1 1'

1'

1 1 11g 111‘

1 1ap1 1r 15o11(scarce ly anyo ne was no t there ) ;

nearly ew ryone was there ) .1110111111 111 1 s 1

'

1/1 1 1/ I1 1'

l1 ir11 11 1)

(she [he] is \v ze i k vet , and can

hard ly walk [is hard ly ab le to

walk ] ) 1311111 1‘

1 1s u rbaliz ed w ith

1111 11/ aiid 1111 11/Ii 1 1 . lax 1 ’1 11/b1I1i1 11 1 11

11111 11 1117 I'

1 1 1 1 1'

11 (change the food ) .s 1

'

I1'

1 1111 1111 pagda

1'

11 111 1'

t (they d iffer in their manner

o f d ressing ) .

ll1il11a. l‘ix

[she] almost d ied ) .

. l3/11 11 .

A Iinsd nod ( from 11 171 1111 1,to follow

,

B 1 111 Id 1111. i'ix . : Ru ff/stu d I' 1 1 11 1311711

b1 111k11i r 1 11 11111 11111 11 ( tu rn

that inside ou t ) .

(from Syn .

E X Touar fk 11 1 1 I1m 1l1i (ligh t

liead ed ; in j u dicio us ) .

Mum /1 1 1 11 (from .V11 1'

11/1 1 1 11

1 I1 1 I1 1 1 1 1 fi r 1 I1 1 I1 1 i 11 ( In /1 1 1 1 1 vu rv s lo w

96 TAGALOG LANG UAG E .

“'

ell

Care iii llv; in an on le t lvmanne r.

1 1~°

1 1 1 1 l

llam l: i'

c ign i'

n i is lv.

llrie llv; q u ick ly .

N n 1 i iglv.

kang 1111111ikad (govery slowly 1’111' 11 r11

11 1 111111 11111 1 1 1151 111111111111 (th row it

delibe rate ly .llup aku ru

1111 11 , to go very smooth ly ; slowly,

e tc . l‘ix 1 1 1 1 (it

has slowed up already ; it has

q u ie te d d own alread y . et

The re is als o a d efin ite w ith 1111 .

E x . : [1 111 1 1 111 1 11 1111 1 111 11

(do that wo rk q u ietly , etc . .\let.

atlj ect . lax diam /1 1 1 11 1 1 1111 1131 111

11 13111 (he has a magnan iino us

heart ) . [11 1 11 11 1111 v ery slowli .

little b y little”

is not m uch in11111 1111, little by little,

i. ‘ abo u t eq ual to 1 11111 11,e tc .

,and is

u s ed ge ne rallv calling to an imals.

vervw ell.

S yn .

.111111 1131 111 7111

v e ry care iii llvz in a v ery o rderlymanne r . l‘lx 111 1 11 11 1 11 111 111 111g“ 1 1 111 11111 1 11 (d o th is care fu lly ) .111 111 111 11 111111111 111 1 111 11511 1, (w rap it upcare fu lly ) . ”1 1 111 111 11111, to pu t in

o rde r : to arrange ; to d isen tangle.

to arrange we ll: to

se ttle th ings w ith are . Ad jwe ll kept . etc . l‘ix [111111 111 111 1

11 1111 1 11: 1 W e “ kept hair ) . . l111/ 11 111 11

1 1 1 11 ( w hat d isen tai igled or se t in

o r de r ). 1111 1 1 111 11 11 1131 11 1 (a care

fu l co n v e rsation11111s1 1 1111i. very

ba dly . I'ix

l l s lept bad ly last n igh t ) .

”1 111 113115; ]Cx

k w u n 1 1 1 1 111] (d t ) not

talk to m e so m uch in such a

ro ugh m an ne r ) . Kala/1 117 111 131 1 1151111 111 111 1 1 1 1 (walk w ith vigor ) . 111

11 1 111 1 1; 11 1 111 1 111 1 1 1 11 1111 111 11‘1

'

1s 11 11g 11 11111111 1

( he pus hed the banca [canoe]

vigo ro usly ) .ll1 1 1 l1 1/1

'

, va i'

. (‘on ib ined w ith

bo th 11 1 1 1 and 111 1 1 11, an anomalo u s ve rb is fo rm ed

,

to mak e haste, and in tu rn thi

is u s ed w ith a n o on to ind icate

t ii i ie . (a

sh o rt w h ile . o r tim e ) . Examples

is an ad v e rb o i 11 1 1 1 111 111 are : Ho w?"1 1 l1 1 it q u ick ly 3 1 1111

11 111 111 1 1 113} 111 1 1 111 111 (it‘ll it q u ick ly ) .

JIM/1111 1 11 . l‘ix 711111 1 11 111 11 1111 111 111111113/(tie i t s tro ngly ) . ”1111 1 1111 11 11 11 11 111111 111 1 1; 11 111111110 11 (thereis no repairing: stro nge r than to

replace w hat is d estroye d) .

— T. P. ,

in tly .

lasm uch .

1rth w ith ; ins tan tly .

'

hv no t?

w o u l d be be tter .

it we re no t .

1 rtain lv.

crtam h : in deed .

rnlv: reallv.

bush .

811 11111 11 1 1 . W hen fo llo wed l1y 1111 11g,

1”1 1 11 13

7111111 1 11 1 11 11 1110

11 . A lsU 111 1111 1 11111 ; 1011111

v e ry tru ly ) . T11

11 111 11 1 1 1 1 1 11111 1} 11 11111 1 ( v ery tril lv, in( lt ‘t ' l l l.

11711 1 11 11. l‘ix . : Sig/11 17111 11 111;“ 1 1 11 11 1 11 111 1 (h e is ce rtain ly the

f ll le f ) .

1 1111 . H'

liali z e s to afte r some

o rd s.

Nearlv all th e ad v e rb s o f m e as u re lu d d eg re e ha ve. been fu lly(plaine d u nd e r th e c o m parat ixe and s upe rlatn e o f t h e a djecti v e . I t mayt in ted th e 111 i\ e l' | 1 is ma de snpe l

’ latiVe by the red uplica tion Of

1e a dxe rb , w ith the pro pe r t ie . in th e sam e manner as the ad jecti ve.

anve xam ple s hm e be e n gi v e n o n the fo re go ing: pages . The on lyad v erbs; .ed here w ill he 11 1111 1 1 1 1 11, ” 111 1 11 1 1 1 1111 5 1111111 1111

,

“

enough .

”

111111. 1111 11111 11 , e tc the final 11 is

d ro pped .

(111111 1 11 1111 (from id ea o f a little ) .

E x .il 11 1111

'

1 1 11 1111111/ (a little wate r ) .

a litt le , as in speak ing a

language , e tc .

S11 1111 11111111. E x 111 1 111111 11 1 119 1111 1

111 111 1 111 11111 1 11, .1 11 11111 11111 111‘

11111 11 11 1 11111 1111

(d o no t d elay there mo re than an

instan t ) . S11 11111 1111 11 1391111 111111 11 (inthe tw ink ling o f an eye ) .

var. 5111111 1111 111‘

( \Vily no t that way? )

( \Vl‘o d o u b ts it? )11 or 1 111 j o ined w ith certain parti

cles m eans w hv?”

E x

(\Vllvno t?)

JIM/11 1 1 13111 . Ka

(ad nn rable )1 11 1 1 1 111 1 11 . I ’111 11 11111 1 11T1111 11 (for the

sake o f 1.711 1 1111. Ve rbaliz ed 11111111 means to

u n de rtstand . li x 11111'

(Do yo u und e rstand it") [111110 1111

”1 111 111 1 11111 ( l d o n’

t und erstand it

\ c t )


V . Adverbs of modality, such as surely , not, perhaps, etc. ,have

been treated under other adverbs or will be included w ith the adverbial

pronou ns and expressions o f affi rmation , negation , and doubt .

A ffirmative adverbs are fairly numerous in Tagalog. The prineipal are :

00. 0116 (yes sir [or111111 and 61) 121711 111! (yes, ih

d eed ) . (to say yes ) . Ang1°

a1io (what said ) . Augpinaoohu n

(person to w hom yes has been

said ) .

Ind eed ; w ithou t doubt . P0 111 . Sig/(1 1111111 (it is he, indee d) .This wo rd is use d in assertingwhen a th ing is certain . Ex

[11115 3 1'

Ped ro 0 11g 11119110 11 110?

(Is Ped ro the th ief withou t

doubt?) 187311?1111111 (he is, indeed ) .A

'

11p11l11 1111 (it is clear ) . E x . :

K'

apu ltt parordon (th i (it isclear that I am going there ) .Kapalu 111

”

p11ror1'

1011 (it isclear [o f cou rs e] that I am not

going there ) .Also ; likew ise ; as well. Nu rw in . Man (even ) .

Shou ld . Disin . Ex . : Kun 31 sum’

dat 111°

8 111 , 113/ paroréon 1111 1111 aké (if heshou ld w rite

,I wou ld go there ) .

Wou ld ; shou ld ; cou ld (idea of com 8111111 . Ex . : [big [so

pu lsion ) . 111/u nfit 1111 11 111] kupanahonan

(I wou ld like to w rite, bu t I haveno time ) . AM any pardon 8111111 ,

11111111 napariui (I had to go

there , befo re Vou came here ) .

The. principal negati v e ad verbs are as fo llows :

I don’t want to.

I lla/11 11 1111 , to sayn n r e n n t n

11111111.

[111/Z. 11 1 111 1111 (not yet ) . 1 111181111111 ;111111

'

r 1'

11 (neither ; not either ) . 111115

1111 (not now ) . I nd i (among (notonly,

solely ) . 1 11111”

(not that) .

Aug/4 11 1111 13. A’

Erenounced abrupt

ly] (I don’

t lkc it ) .

[abst . ] (d islike ) . A111)

(what d isliked or refused ) .

E x “ 1 11111 1111111 ; 1117

1111111 111111 1?

(in no way ) . 0511111 11 ; 111 1 (not

ye t ) . (\Vhat matte r? )11111 1 111 1 (for it is said

that I )? 11 111 11 11 13(it is said ) .1 11 11 11 13 1

'

[low can it be? ) DZ111111 111 1111 111 111 (may it be thu s ) .

1111 31 111‘

1111 15111 (th is is no t good ) .

lax In‘

s ino

(1 1111 1111 113111 11 1111 1 , 1311 1111; 1 1 111} 01 111111 1 11 !

(To w ho else s hou ld you r eom

plain t be made ex eept the fl ip

D 111 varia .

' I l l '

TAGALOG LANGU AGE .

No (forbidding) .

whom no has been mid manytimes (past tense ) . Pad ili 1111,my no. Dili rin, no ind eed . At

the end of a sentence d ili some

times means or not .

’

Ex ; Ba

bdyad sild , d tli? (W ill they pay or

not?)H0111ig. E x . : I Io uag 1111 (d o not do

it now [presupposes revious com

1J n (leave that'

d rop that!) 1101111a 1110 iy1i11 (letthat alone ) . Houngan 1110119 1 11 11511

(do not take it ) . Houagun mongitapoa (do not th row it out ) .Houagan 111011 tiri

'

gnan (do not

look at it ) . ouag kang p ardon

(do not go there ) . Pal wungin 1110

13111 119 111 110 111°

y1‘in (tell that man not

to do that ) . Pahouagan mo {mind 1

°

1111n 811 Mid (forbid that to that

ch ild ) .

There are a few adverbs of doubt in Tagalog, as well as some ph rases

meaning the same. They are :

Why? For what reason?

Perhaps.

I don’t know .

I f it could be thus.

THE PREPOSITION .

The preposition, wh ich serves to connect a noun to the sentence, in the

same manner that the c '

onjum tion in trod uces or attaches sentences, ts not

as h igh lyd eveloped m Tagalog as in English . and for th is reason the same

preposit

ion means what it Wo uld take se veral d ifferent ones to express in

ugheh The prim ipal Tagalog prepositions an

In ; to ; from ; against : at ; by :

per ; between ; t h ; ot : among;for ; across.

Kayo. Kayd (just because, justfor that reason ) . Used with af

firmative sentences. Kayd(as s oon as ) . Kay/121711911111 (since ) .Used w ith negati 1 e sen tem es .

Makakayfi, to be able (in a pin s

ical sense ) . 11p/1i is also am

h unting or fish ing u tensil o r in

strument .

Wari. Ex At 11116 war i pa rdon!

(\Vh 1 do I ha1 e to go there?)“

'ith neg. it 111

‘

un ri 111 13pardon?

(W by don’t I ha1 e to go there

? )L

'

pan . I t is never pu t last in a

sentence .

A 111i11. Do not confuse 11 ith 111iy110

(I don’t “ ant to ) .

N11116 . S1°

1/12 1111116 (it may be th is

way) . Used for“amen .

”

S11 . Ex (in ) So bog/1111 (in town ) ;84

' 11 13111131 (in the house ) ; (to ) 111 1

1 111 £11 (to 111 1 aunt ) ; 1111 11m11 1'

11 to

(to 111 1 mu le ) ; 1111 111116 10 (to myfat lu imi be (to my mo ther ) ,these also mean for

”my aun t

etc . ; 1111 1113110 1; (to the house ) ; s o1111311 (11111113, (to that house ) ; (from )1 11 Whey (from the house ) ;

102 TAG ALOG L ANoe E .

( ) f (genit iv e o f s i ) .

( ) i (ge ntitive o f any) .

To (dati v e , etc. o f xi ) .

Against .

From .

From .

THE

t ien nine con j unctions are rath e r in Tagalo g ,bu t many o ther w ord s

may be used as a co nj unc t io n wo u ld he m English to j o in sen tences together.

The pri nc ipal o nes are :

as e ll as .

\ IN ) MIN I ) .

n u n/ in .

Th e fo rego ing are called b in ding

l ll t ' l' fl llU ' t n t h e | ° l~t

sat in c o n j u nc tio n The y art

l llt ‘LI I

I . lix Anyn iogan n i L u is (Lou is’

co coanu t palm gro v e ) . . lng brilmyu i Tomas (Thomas

’

ho use ) .

Ah oy. l‘ix . lng I’d /my nu ng (mu?

(m y fath e r’

s house ) .

K an. E x [long lung/ka] in, lawJ uan. (this cane is Joh n

’s [is to

.I t ili ii jL d’m n ; Mbu n so . E x ] kuo

’

y (d iam

so also : (you against me ) . [songho].ho Ilihan m nnd ll 80 ”id (0 11? armyagainst ano ther ) . .) Iaglcilmu (to

res is t o r struggle against ) .

lid /m l. E x M in n ’U l nagbzihat.’

(W here d id y o u come from?

)) lnh i. lax .

) Inhi “pm/on ( from now

o n ) . No mu ln’

(from the beginn ing ) . E x .lf u lti an [fin es Imugf m.w r ierncs (from Monday until

Frida y ) . JIM/(1 st! .Vayn i/d ho ngt'

mso Su n/n .c I (from Manila as far

San ta Mesa ) . Mognmld (tos tart ; to commence ) .

II Th is lo ses the Vowel in man ybe ing pro no u nced w i th the

u o rd preced ing as a linal I . and insu c h cases is u rit tcn l.

Kn m n n? (from I.” and snmd ) .

[li n t /f h iltu lug— [J nu h bu r/Avis .

[lu l l f l‘

l/

AW’N HL

I h /l .

.)Im /in

( I (S I)

c o npm c t io ns as to the first fo u r and

fo u r Th e are called ad ver

(Ju l / 4h ; (IN IHINN N I ; alim

.\ 5/u n i n e y e r begins a prin(

' ipz tl c lauw hu t alu ay s a su bo rd i

nate o ne in d ge ne rally in an an

sm r . l' Ix l in g; Iso m nu ng/ Icu nm in ,(u m /f u lu

,

) I IN I N N‘UHNN I

'

I

‘

( i

u o u ld like to eat , bu t I am no t

t lrle to — I 7. iro n ) «I I , is alnmst

in xariah ly j o ined to 17,/u n i. K nmh'

i~ u ~ed l'

o r s u lu u'd inate clauses , gen

he n the principal o ne has

ni n e m ean ing . I‘ix H in t/ilu lu /J , [su m /1

°

In t /n ine any Hu n t (theb ird is n o t a m ale ,

b u t a female ) .[M M /n u n ! h ic h ge ne rally take

’l,

m eans s till stro nger than


Bu t rather .

Ne i th er— nor .

A lthough ; though .

Although (more formal than abo ve ) .

E v er so m uch , although (giv ing a

reason or mak ing an excuse ) .

A lthough .

Since ; whereas.

No matter if ; e ven it.

What ; becauseBut ; vet .

Some conjunct ions mav be st y led causat i v e . The princ ipal ones inTagalog are :

Raisin .

”\ ar. Int/cit. Bcikil tli.’ hy

no t . ) [MM also m eans as,

"

“ h ow,

"e tc .

, in sen tences . As a

no un m eans an o ld m o nke yw ith de v elo ped tee th . -lno I .”alsomeans wh y

'

.

Because (giv ing reason ) . Nu pug/af t.

kund i, denoting a sharper contrast,as between rich but m iserable

, etc.

Saba/i means“ bu t fo r

,

”etc as

cond i t ional. llin lnno,wh ich tak es

’1 in beginn ing a clause . m eans

bu t iorall that. etc Verbaliz edthe two forego ing wo rds m ean

“

to

except .

” Hugo is somet imes usedin the sensc o i

“

bu t.”

E x Tun

glmli nq yo’

y ire /(i 1m Sig/ti (noonalread y , bu t he is absen t yet ) .

K u nd i lmgkcis. These word s may beused alone in th is sense , and mayalso be jo ined together.

.)Ian mu n . Mu n nmn/oimh‘

rin .

E x Wold 1.7 1mi binds 7mm,illuy

man (we have noth ing, ne itherrice nor eggs.

Boom /Min . E x Bugmm’

m (Ink/iti Simm ,

so pu ri nama'

ymam’unu n siyt

'

t

(though Juan is poor, he is rich ina good name ) .

B ish i'

l. B ishi’l napopoot siyri sa akin,

uy ln'

ln’

gycin d in (1136 (although he isangryat me ,

it w i llbe gi v en to me ) .flirting/tw in . .llo luynuin ak in/mmkn iln

'

g parilo, on (If kn makug/onan,

(although i w ished to com e , I was

not able to [I had no

[WI /t i, var. knhinm l, l‘

tlh in nti, Ira/i i

m/d nmn , Ian/u 1. E x ’l

(15 Infini ty sihi, Im rorcion (Ii/l also,

(altho ugh thev d o no t consent,1

shall go there ) .

I ’M/{blown (from Sansk ri t, pu ribluislu i

,sentence , reprimand , etc . ) I t

is fo llowed bv y in se ntences . As

an ad verb it is eq ual to Ian/u ugn

Ian/ii pain . as ell as to“

since

and whereas . .\ s a noun itmeans iro n y . (tospeak i ron ically ) .

Su la/«in . l‘lx . : .llngpupalcnhnsog muna

si‘nvi, s i t/( thin s ip/(T3; nun/ku su /cil (hew i ll go rge himse lf first. e v en if he.mak es h imse lf sick

Ji l ly/un i, var. nu n/opci’

l,li ttle heard .

B io/u . li x Nilri’

yn ny nu n / solo ,In igo

a lsoany [n'

nncnm /m n (they are theo nes at fau lt , bu t l am the one whohas been pun ished ) .

A fifth group of con junctions is generall y that called“cond it ional.

The sign ifications of the mem bers of th is group are self-explanato rv.

A'

u u .

K im (flrl Idmang; kun d i trimany;[Hum m l .

As if it were . K an mum so .

“'

e re it no t fo r. K im «MiG/m i ; (far/3mm.

Pro v id ed . K an fd nu l ug,

‘ ItOln I/imang.

Lest . Baku , var . makd .

Th e sixth and last group o f con junct io ns is that o f the class called cou

clu s ives in some grammars and“illat i v es in o ther In Tagalog the

princ ipal ones o f th is class are :

That (relat i v e) . \ u ug. I ix . : lfagpagamot nany{Ado 03/ ga un t/ing (allow youn elf

to be t reated so that vou mavbehe tte r ) . —l

That . N d . lax .Vuysabi 8 f3/(i n o d ko 31m ini/3,3; (he said that I was ash

=ep) .Co nsequen tly ; that is to say. I )?3mm.

There fo re (conseq uentlv) . So lit . in o th er word s

I‘Ix . : Net/( 3m sild kayah-i

,so ma

l amm hl In'

m fi sild su ng/1733117 131 (I

saw them last n igh t , t here fore

thevd id no t embark ) .

In o rd er that . I t is ne v er pu t last in a

I nasmuch ; in so far as . I'

mmm y,var . 3/(i3mmu ng; yaw/o rig;

Iu nndu q .

N H] IN “ l l/l l”mo/«mum «"f’lU y

31min rm dlm'- 3lem rdl (he is ab le to

d o it , inasm uch as he is go v ernorgeneral) .

TII E \ \ I

The exclamat ion , o r in terjectio n ,can hard ly be regarded as a part of

spee c h ,c o m pel l ed “ ith \ e rlvs , N o uns , ad jec t iu '

s , e tc . , bu t fo r wan t of a

be t te r c las s ificat io n the y may be t reated he re . They are generally self

e xplain ing , and man y s eem to be ro o ts u sed as imperat i ves of the verb.

The m o s t charac te ris tic'

I‘

agalog in te rject io ns are :

h e tr m e .\ las'

. Iln i .

’

( ) uch . o w ! . Iro3/’

. Im u .

’

( ) h how I l .\ lway s fo llow s. ) . lmu i.

’

(most ly used by women ) .O h ho w fo llow s . 1h :

,u iu May be used together,

fu t/nil! preced ing. Bapda is more

in U se b y men .

( loo d! Fine f

l’oo r th ing !W o u ld that it mav be e .Vami.’ .llaami.’

that

Qu ic k ! Du li.

’

Be silen t (to o ne ) ! j immy [sang magmgay.

’

talk ? S ile nce ! 1 10 33333} 1331310 113) nmgmgay.

’

Ligh tn ing f (U h , hellf) L inn/sf

My mothe r! No la?! Nomi ! (Contract ion fromind ko. )

W hat a pi t y ! Seq /(mg!

Mo v e on ! ( lo ah ead'

Suiting!


it ) . KaaaliaMmangm’

ya(he has just gone away ) . Kaaaltapa nany til-ing

ama (my father has just gone away ) . Kuaalis d in fi

ga on m ay on iuin

(the capta in just now left ) . W ith roots like (iral, wh io ave severa d is

t inct mean ings accord ing to the verbal particle prefixed ,ha does not

requ i re the first svllable to be repeated . Iain : d in rifting/onnany paré (the priest has just fin ished preach ing) . In th is case the prefixis re duplicated ,

mu ififliralmean ing to preach .

”Kapagalis d in m

'

Benig no

nany damit (Ben igno just took the clothes away ) . Magalfa means“to

take away .

”

IV. Ka has many other funct ions,wh ich w ill be taken up later. I t is a

most important particle and should be carefully stud ied . I t should be

note d that the pronouns w ith the imperati ve are mostly in the nomina

t ive, wh i le w ith the first and th ird persons they are in the gen it i ve .

V. A ll such sentences are in the defin ite or so-calle d passi ve,”wh ich

is by far the most usual form in Tagalog, but wh ich wou ld look verystrange man t imes if translated by the English passive.

VI . The oregoing form is also used to ex ress opiosites, the wor d

being linked by ay. I t may be expressed in English y “now ,

again ,

or now,then . Ex

Now he sleeps, then he wakes. Katuti'

dog ay kagi'

gim'

n m’

yd .

He comes in and goes out. Kapapdsok ay kalala m 6

He is com ing and going. Karartd in ay Icaaalia ni.

Somet imes he walks, then he rests a Kalaldk ay kahiliintéhintd m’

gd .

li ttle.

Now she laughs and then she cries. Katalaua ay kai iyak.

VI I . When a prefix changes the mean in of aword , it is reta ined in theimpera

l

tive. Ex. : A ral ka (teach ) ; paggral ka (study ) ; pari'

qdral ku

ireac1VI I I . W ith the except ion of the forms alread y cited , the verb is always

accompan ied by part icles,wh ich somet imes mod i fy the root itself for

euphon ic reasons. Nearly every word in the lan nage can be made a verbof some k ind or another by the use of these particles, wh ich are the striking pecu liarity of the Malayo-Polvnesian languages, but have been re

taine d in the prim i t i v e tongues of the Ph i lippines much more than in theMalay , Javanese, or other cognate d ialects. There are some twenty ofthese verbali z ing particles, of wh ich seventeen are used as prefixes toroots , and th ree are the defin ite aux i liar y part icles in ,

i, and an . Of these

part icles, wh ich are tabled at the end of the hand book , the most important are in , i, an , um,

may, and ma, the last th ree being indefin ite part icles.

Pag, correspond ing as a defin i te to mag, is also im )ortant . The maste ryof these particles is the mastery not only of Taga cg, but of every otherPh i lippine d ialect, as well as a valuable aid in learn ingMalay or auvsim ilar tongue of the fam i ly .

IX . The root w ith any one of the indefin ite part icles prefixed may betranslated as the infin it ive, prov ided the part icle is merely attached to

give the mean ing of the root s omod ified , bu t whenever a tense is ex ressedthe part icle o r the root is mod ified , and somet imes both . Besi es the

imperat ive and infinitive,Tagalog has really bu t one other mod e , the ind ieat i ve, as the subjunct ive , includ ing those mod ifications known in variousE uropean languages as the Optat ive, cond it ional, dubi tat ive, potent ial, etc. ,

is expressed by certain words corres pond ing to the English“could ,

should ,would

,may

,

”etc .

X . Strictly Speak ing, there are but th ree tenses in Ta alog, the past ,present , and fu ture ; but it is possible to render the imper ect, plu perfect,and fu ture perfect tenses by means of aux i liary particles. The first th ree,howe v er, are those in common use. The participle is also in use , corre

spond ing li te rally to the E nglish participle in some cases , and in others

must be rendered by a phrase. The same remark may be made of the

gerund in English , wh ich is variously rendered in Tagalo ( ) ne tense

is sometimes used for another, when the context clearly ind icates the time

of the event, as happens in English .

TAGA LOG L ANGUAGE . 107

X I . As in Engl ish ,Tagalog verbs may be t ransi tive.

requ i ring an objectto complete the mean ing; or intransit i v e, in w h ich the m ean ing is com

piete w i th in the verb . These do no t always co rrespond in the two lan

guag es ,and a Tagalog root may somet imes be in trans i t i v e w ith o ne pre fix

and transi t ive w i th ano ther, wh ich may re v erse o r m od i f y the m ean ing.

X I I . W i th in the tense the verb d oes no t change fo r the person or num

ber, and requ i res a noun or a pronoun to ind icate the same .

X I I ] . The em inent Indo-T ibetan ph i lo logist Bryan H . I lodgson (1800in h is Monographs upon the Tribes o f No rthern Ti be t , reprin ted in

Part 1 1, pages 73- 76 , of

“ The Languages. L i teratu re , and Re ligion o f Nepal

and T ibe t ” (London , gives it as h is opin ion that the (i yarung d ialcctof Eastern T ibet has a v er y sim i lar structure to that o f Tagalog, quot i ngLeyd en and \V. von llum bold t (the latte r at second hand ) in support o f h is

views. Rock h i ll, the T ibetan scholar now Un i te d States m in ister toCh ina,

w ho has a w ide acquaintance W i th Ti betan ,sa y s that Hyarung is

mere ly a variat ion of or dinary Ti betan ,and th is be ing the cas e, the re can

be no p ossible affin ity between the two languages. As llodgson’s error

has been given w ide pub licity b y its inco rporat ion as a footnote to the

art icle by de Lacouperie upon T ibet in the Enc y cloped ia Bri tann ica, it

shou ld be corrected as far as possi ble by any stud en t o f TagaloX IV . As quoted and corrected b y llodgso n , the remark s o f

llieyd en , as

taken from the Researches of the Bengal As iatic Soc iety,Vol. X , page 209,

u

po n Tagalog are as follows : Few languages present a greater appearance

0 or iginalit y than the Tagala. Though a mu lt i tude o f its terms agree pre

eise l w i th those of the languages just enumerated (western Polynesian ) ,yet. t e simple terms are so metamorphosed b y a var iety o f the most sim

ple con trivances that it becomes imposs ible (d i fficu lt— B . ll . l l . ) for a

person who understands all the o riginal wo rd s in a sen tence to recogn i z eth em ind ivid ually or to comprehend the mean ing o f the whole . The

—

art ifice} ! w h ich it employs are ch iefly the prefix ing o r postfix ing (o r in fix ingB . H . H . ) to the s imple vocables (roots) o f certain part icles (ser v i les ) ,w h ich are again (may be ) comb ined w i th o th f rs, and the complete o r par

t ial repet it ion of terms in th is red uplicat ion mavbe again comb ined w itho th e r part icles.

”

X V . H odgson notes u n the forego ing as follows : I may add , w i thre ference to the d ispu ter prim i t i v eness of Ta-

gala,ow ing to its u se o f the

‘art ifices

’above ci te d, that th roughou t the llimalava an dTi be t it is pre

c isely the rudest ormost prim i t i v e tongues that are d is t ingu i s hed b y useless

in tr icac ies, such as the interm inab le pronou ns , and all the perplex i t y caused

by con jugat ion by means o f them . w i th the i r d uals and plu rals, and in

e lus ive and exclus i v e forms o f the first pe rson o f both . The

m o re advanced tribes, w he ther o f the con t inen t o r o f the island s,ha ve.

gene rally speak ing, long since cast awa y all o r most o f the se lrtitices .

’

A s has already been noted , the Tagalog pronou ns d o no t mod i f y the v e rbs,w h ich have the same fo rm w i th in the tense fo r all persons and numbe rs

As com are d to tongues like Fij ian and othe r \ lelanesian d ialec ts , Tagaloghas m e long strides toward becom ing a v e h icle o f a m uch h ighe r cnltu re

than it now enjoys.

X VI . \V. von H umbold t says in h is Kaw i Sprach e ,Vo l. page 34 7 :

The construct ion of the Mala yan v e rb (to speak o f the en t i re li ngu i s t icstock ) can be fu lly recogn i z ed from the Tagalog v e rb alone . The .\ lalagas y

and true Malay contain bu t fragm en ts thereo f, w h i le the l’o lvne s ian lan

guages have a more prim i t i v e scheme o f the v erb— fewe r in form s . I t

there fo re seems appropriate to presen t :Firs t , the Tagalog v erb complete w i thou t anv regard to the other

languages ;Second , the Malagasy (verb ) , wh ich has in itse lf v e r y m u ch o f the same

construct ionTh ird , to show what the Mala y language in its d iscard ing and grind i ng

of grammat ical forms has sti ll retained ; and


Fourth , to make a research as to how the simple but uncultivated Polynesian verbal construct ion stands in re lation to the part ially cultivatedTagalog.

'rnn Dnrmrrn.

I . As has been stated before, the defin ite form of theverb , wh ich is reallya verbal noun w ith tense-ind icating part icles, is more common than theind efin i te form , wh ich is more of a true verb in construction . One of the

great d i fficult ies to be overcome byspeakers of non-Malayan tongues is the

improper use of the defin ite and indefin ite. I t is as easy to begin right aswrong, and if attent ion is paid to the cond it ions ex ist ing, an id iomaticmaster of Tagalog may read il be requ i red .

I I . be true defin ite part ie es. in (lain after the final vowel w ith acuteaccent, and nin in a few cases for euphony) , i, and an (hu rt after a finalvowel w ith acute accent ) , are used e ither alone or in comb ination when

emphas is is to be lace d upon the object or there is a special idea im lied .

These th ree partic es are further comb ined w ith pay, the defin ite ver liz

ing part icle correspond ing to the indefin i te may; i, in , and paymany timescommencing a defin ite

“

verb w ith the comb inat ions ipoy and ipinay. Theroot begins afte r these comb inations, subject to tense red uplications, asw ill be seen by the table at the end . The subject takes the genit ive w iththe defin ite ,

the object tak ing the nom inat ive case. E X . : Root yamd (ideaof mak ing or do ing) . Gumawd (to make or do ) . Anoan yawd mo?(Whatis your work?; i . e .

,What are you do ing or h is isan indefin ite

quest ion , w i th theverbal ideaalmost absen t, the verb“to be ” beingunder

stood . W ith an a dverb of t ime, such as kahapon (yesterday) , n'

yayon(now ) , or bakaa (to-morrow ) the verb could be “

was,” “ is,

”or

“w ill

be.

”But themore usual form is w ith the defin ite part icle in and the proper

tense . Ano any yinamd mo? (W hat d id you do?[or For the

past tense in is inserted w ith consonan t roots between the in itial con

sonant and the rest of the root. Anoanyyinayawd mo d itéf (What are youdo ing here?) As w i ll be seen , the presen t tense is formed by the red uplication of the first syllable of the root, in wh ich in is infixed . A 116 any

'

yaymr in mo? (What are o n going to do? [or what w ill you do? ;what w ill you make?) The future of th is verb is formed by reduplicating

'

the first syllable of the root and sutfix ing in . And anyya,awfn nany amain .

mo niyany kdhoy na iytin? (W hat is your u ncle going to o w ith that lumAmain, from mud

,father. w ith in as a su ffix , also means step

father , as well as“uncle. Kdlioy also means

“tree.

”Isany bdhmr

(myyayawin nigo(He is go ing to put upa house ) . The imperative is formby su tfix ing in to the root . Ex . : I to

’

y yamin u inyong mahtisay (Do thiscarefu lly [in an orderly manner]I I I . In is the principal defin i te part icle in Tagalog, correspond ing to the

same )art icle in I locano and to on in Bicol and Visa a, the two last men

t ion also us ing in in comb ination w ith other partic es.

“'

IHCH DEFINITE .

IV . W h ile it is not so very har d to lay down fairlyclear rules as to whenthe defin ite and indefin ite shou ld be used (the former laying stress uponthe object and the latter upon the subject or the act ion ) , it is extremelyd i fficu lt in some cases to say wh ich one of the several defin ite part iclesshou ld be. Asageneralru le, in sign ifies motion toward the agent , orsometh ing by wh ich the agent obta ins control o f someth ing; i ind icates motionaway from agent, or an action by which the agent loses con trol of someth ing, and an generally has e ither the idea of place or of person connectedw ith its use . I jo ined w ith ka, resulting in ika , and fu rther comb ined w ith int oprod uce ikina, denotes cause , etc.

,w ith roots when joined to them , either

alone or w ith verbali z ing particles. For th is reason the proper defin ite tob e used in sentences having a defin ite object w i thou t other mo di fying circumstance is determ ined by the nature of the act ion, subject to someexcept ions, mainly for euphon ic reasons. Such words, however, as require

1 10 TAGALOG L ANGUAGE .

Mak e some tea for th is otiicer ) . . lny 11111111111 (w hat bo iled or made

[as tea, co ffee , e tc . ] . lny 1

°

; 111yl11J11 (the person fo r w hom bo i led ,11111119 ,

Any 11 11111 1111 ( the teapot , co ffeepo t , In the forego i ng exam

ples pay is used because the sentence expresses the person fo r whom an

act is pe rformed . I ’ug is also used w i t h and 11 11 com b ined in like cases.

[loony th i/11131 11 11 any pinnynnayan 115111 (Th is house is where thev13111 1 11.

I’m; mu st also be. used 3s ith the d e fin i te whene v er the sentence

expresses plu ralit3 o f acts o r agen ts, 1 11 o f fe ign ing or reciprocal act ions.

The art icle be ing generrally use d, we id ea o f a 3 erbal noun is most pronu

nen t . lny 11 11111 1"11 any 11 111 11? d asahin (He was

11.

1alinge ring so as to escape pun ishmen t ) . Root , 1111I. 1°

1 ( i llness ) . (Dim inut 13e~ mad e by repeating 11 b is y llab ic root o i the

°

f i rs t two o f a polysyllabicone , add 1 1 11 to impart a sco rn fu l o r con temptuous mean ing ) . . lny cuartel

any 11 1111 1 11111 11raI11 1 11 11 1°

I1'

1 (They insu lted each other in the barracks ) .Pinaysirft 111 1 11 1] 1111 111 111 1 IttIIW n 1 1111 113] 1111 1 11 111 1 In t/1 1W (The lad rones ha3e

d estro y ed man3 o f those h 1 111ses 1. -11111 1 1 1

°

111 1°

ny I1 1ilw a any pinaysird nil/1

(\ Iany houses 11m e been destroyed in them ) .ith ve rbal n was w h ich have d 1ffc rent mean ings w i th um and may,

the d e fin i te 1s 11c 1 o 111pan ied by [11 1 11 whe n the v erb formed by may is used.

: Roo t, ( id ea of t rade , barterr, 1 1 1 . Bonn /i, (t o buy ) . (to

se ll 1. [tony bu nny/1 1°

11 to,or [pinoJIn Ii I.o 1111 119 t1

°1

°

1I1aJ ( I ha vesol d th is house ) . 1111 1131 11111111 11 11 11 1) 11 1 11 11 1 I

'

o, o r B inili Ico 110 115] 1111111131 (I

ha v e bough t t h is ho use ) . 11 1; ( 11 1 111 111 ) pre fixed to 11112w i th Imn sufiixe d

ind icates the purchaser : the 11111 1 e or the price (pas t tense ) . I1

‘

or the presen t tense the firs t syllab le o f the root is re1lupli1 ated . E Any pinay11 111711 1 1 1 1iI. 1

°

ny I npatid 1111 11111 11 1 any

[1 1°

111111I1 1/1I1 11 11 I 11 11 111 1 11J I1 1 1I111 1/ (I so l l [ll.l \ 9 sold ] th is house to my brother[lit .

,m 3 b rothe t was the purchaa r from m e o t

°

th is Root,( to bo rrow ) 11113111111 11!) (to lend ) . l111ypa111any

( to lend w illingly ) . .lI11yI.

°

11 1it11ny ( to owe ) . E x : P inaytilany ko 1°

yany8 1111 111 1 1111 11 1 1111111 ( I len t h im that mone y ) .

X I . The Use o f the part ic les gi v es a great freedom in Tagalog for the

variat ion o f sen tem es , 33 l1i1 h howe v ,er ha3 e the same id ea. Thus theE nglish l) id u t l o rd 1 1 (1 11 tell ) 3 011 to d o th is? ” may be rendered bvthe

fo llow ing w i th eq ual 1111 1

1 11ra1 1)1 i111 11) 1if1 1 .1 111 1 1 1111 1 1 1 1 yan in n1o

(de f. [11 11 1I1°

11 I. 11 no r/1110 .1 st ress 0 1] a1 tion ) .] [1 11 1It

°

(lI.' 1 1 11 1 1 11 1/1 1 . 1ll lt lt’ f stress 0 1! k”

[1 1 111 1 11 1 11 1 1 I I 1 1 11I1

°

I. 11 1J1 1 11 1 1 1) 1 1 11 1 1 .wl 1 ) 1 1[11°

n1ry11 1r1i-1 ( 1it l.l l . In and 1

°

.1r1_ 1 1 111l1in 1 1d1 w i th 1 11 14 1 u lllt ' t‘ tllSn . E x . : A nd any 1°

1in1111111‘

1

cook ing? ) Fo r e uphon y the v erb w i th th is comb ina~

t ion is m uch t he re be i ng also found the forms inn /1111111) ,an d 0 3 1 1 11 11 1

°

I1 1 I 1 1I1°

1.

X I I ] . The Ve rbs an d 11 1 1 1 11 1 to ha v e ) and (n o t to ha ve)1 1 1 1 111i1 1 th e 1 l1 tin itc t

°

o 1 1n o f a 3 1 rl1 fo llo 33 in 1 ' them in a sentence wh ich33 h : 1t is ha d 1 1 1 d onc .

1 1 1 3 11 1 1 3 1 1 rsa. Bo tl1 su bject and object,ho u c 3 1 1 tak 1~ th 1 1 nom i nat i v e in 111 1 111 131 1 11 1

1

11 1111 911911 111111

t ll: t \ t ' ) t lll 1 l ll } i lllll£ (U l l1 1 . ) ll I’M /1 1°

I have

“ 1 1111111 11 1 lI 1 11 1/ s 1 I1 1 1 1 1/ 1111 1 1 1 11 1 1 3 i llavc th 1 3' d o ne “11111 116,

.11 1/1 1 11 11 1/ 1 11 1 1 1

1 1 i s ir ; t | 11 1 3 h.13 c n o t do ne a11 3 tl1 1111 1 1.'

l‘

l11 1 d 1 lin it1 is also lts w l in ~1 1 lltt °111 1 1~ h .1

°

3 i11 1r a person for the1 1i1j 1 ' 1

' t , 1 1 1 in 33 h i1 | 1 the o l1j 1 c t is mod ili1 d 113 an att1 ibn te o r attribu ti3e

:u lj ll llt‘t . Ti l t ing/1 11 11 1 1 1 I 1 ( 11 1 1 I’d /II I""10 T11151310771]

I 1 I1 1‘1 1 1 1 1 ; I1 1 1 1 1 1s 1 1 I. 1 1 1 11/ t lit‘lll‘: 11 11' that in M k 1 W 11 4 read ing lah t n ight ) .

111 1 1 1 1 1 1 ; 1 11

11 1 1 11 1 111 11 1 1 llo n°

t tha t 1. 111 1 1 1111 111; 1111111 111: (000k

th i s c h i c ken 1 . [M I/151 1 11 1 1 1 1 “rim.

' that water ) .Fu rth e r o f t l11 ' d e linnc part icles is reser v ed un ti l the

l lI l

TAGALOG L ANGUAGE . 1 1 1

THE INDEFIN ITE .

I . The indefin ite part icles most in use are 11 111 , 1111 19 (nay ) , and 11111

wh ich w ill be eXplamed in detail hereafter. These are. called acti v e particles by the Span i

s h grammarians, bu t indefin ite seems to be more appro

priate and correct.

I I . Sen tences in wh ich the subject is emphasi z ed ha ve th is in the nom inative, the verb be ing expressed w i th the proper indefin ite part icle wh ichis somet imes preceded by the article o f common nouns . The imperat i veindefin i te does not requ ire the art icle in any case . E x . : Siy1

’

1’

y 11 111111311

11510 1 11] libro (He is going to read th is book ) . nya 111 1y8 11I1 1°

(Yousaid that yourself ) . The object , it w i ll be noted , takes the genit1ve . Sig/11any maypapaaial (He is going for a walk [lit . , He w ill be the walker]Ilc ia any tumdung key Juan (Call Juan [be you the caller to Si

Juan ay any 1111y111’

1k110 (Juan was the th ie fI I I . The indefin i te is generally used in an intransi t ive sen tence ,

wherean object is not requ i re d to com plete the m eaning. Ex . : 1511 119111113 121111 111

-11

(I am w r i ting) . Sunymalat 111-11 (I wrote ) . S 11s12111t 11k11 (I shall w ri te ) .

Naymiral 1 11316 (You are learn ing ) . .ll1zy1 11’

1r11I (You w i ll learn ) .Kuny11111ka 1

°

11 (He is eating ) . K unynm in kw ai (W e were eat ing [bu tnot you ] Kakm

’

n tayo (We w i ll go eat [all o f us]An object may be called ind efin i te when the id ea of

“

a, an , some, anv

is inh e ren t, or an undeterm ined part o f the w hole is ind icated , providedthat the re are no mod i fying circumstances o f t ime, cause , pu rpose, instrumen t , or place in conjunct ion w ith the action . Ban : (1 ) .llaminonynany w ilt

-any 011811111? (Do you understand any of the Spanish langua ge

?)

.llar cinong akalamang nany 11'

1°

Ir(1ny laydloy,I1 1

°

n1li 11111 1 ' 121111 11y ako 11111 11111131111 811.

wika ny c astila, 116 (I understand the Tagalog language on lv; I do not k now

how to talk in Span ish ) . .Magsalild ka 11 1111 811 Iaya y (Then speak

in Tagalog ) . (2 ) N aglabas ka nany 11111 115111 silly (Bring ou t some chairs ) ..llagdalr

'

t ka d ito nanyf oxforrm (Bri ng some matches he re ) . .l111y1l1 1l1'

1 kn d ito

n any tabacos (Br ing some cigars here ) . .llayrlald I n 111/o nany (fr/1 1°

11 (Br ingsom e water here ) . Magh ttd kn nany 1811 119 manu k 10k a ch icken ) .

IV . The indefin ite is also used w i th sen te nces ha v ing a d efin i te object ifa part and not all of the object is meant. I n some cases the place

-

particle‘an is used for th is pu rpose, as it does not i nd icate an object . 1 11 or 1

°

would

b e u sed if all the defin ite object were to be ind icated . E st : . flco_

1/ k 11ny1na1°

n

n a 1 1 1°

tony111m11 11yk1111°

(I have alread y eaten some o f th ismeat ) . l'

111 1'

1111n1

n ito ny ulk ig n11 1111111111111 (Drink some of th i s clear water ) . (1 ) JIugIn'

yay 1111

m d kin (i11def . ) (1 Gave m e some o f that wate r ) . (2 ) 1119111111

1710 {yang t1ib1°

y (2, ( 1 1 1 0 me that water ) . [My 11111 1111 111; 11111gbili

n Etong big/18? (Do you w ish to sell some o f th is r ice?)V . A ct ions expresse d by intrans i t i v e v e rbs w h ich do no t req u ire an

o b ject. take the indefin i te un less the re are mod i fying c i rcumstances of

cau se , pu rpose, means, instrument , or tim e in c1_

111ju 11cti1 111 w i th the act ion .

E x . : A'

atiso d 111-15 (I stumbled ) . I1 1°

1 1 1 I1f 111 11y1111111ik1 1d nany

(\Vh y d on’

t you walk q u icker? ) Tang/111 1 111 1 11 11 11 13/ti (lie is laugh i ng ) .

V I . A sentence commencing w i th an i n terrogat i v e pronoun takes the

i nd efin i te if the subject o f the inq u i r y is an age n t , and the d e fin i te if a

d e te rm inate object is ask ed abo u t . E xt : 5 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 11 11 1 1 111 I1 1I1°

1 11111 1 111/ 11111 1 1111 1

bd hoy? (\Vho brough t [was the b ringe r]o f th is lum be r . lI’ 1311nyn aydald , p13 (1 brough t It, sir [was the b ri nger] . ln n ( 111

°

I d

(\Y by don’

t. you talk?) Al l/1 171 1 111? I‘

a Inn/1 1.” \ r11 3 1 1tl 11sl111 11 104 l to

?

) S um

a ny 1111031111712nany 8 1°

1111I1 1°

1110 11 11 W ho relate dto yo u w hat y o u ha v e toldm e?) Anony il1 1

°

y (W hat d o y o u . l11 1 111y

b in ili n ild .

’ (Wh ich horse d id thev buv?) - I11 1 1 11 11 i 1 1

1

1 111tract io n fo r 11 11 13

any (d ef.VI I . The indefin ite is also used w i th complex sen tences in 33 l1 i ch the,

subject is amplified by all ad ject i val c lause . l' ix . lng/ 1 1 1 1 11

hang kabanala’

y 11 11 111; kapala ran (The pe rson w ho d oes righ tw ill obtain happiness [be

1 1 2 TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

VI I I . I t must be noted that make in the sense of cause, used with

roots denotin cond itions, wrongs (torts ) and betterments , has a d ifferentconstruction rom all other particles, even maka with other meanings. In

the definite, wh ich only ex ists w ith i, combined w ith in in the past and

present tenses, the agent takes the nominative and the object the geniti ve,ike indefinites of other particles. In the indefinite the agent remains in

the nom inative, but the object takes the accusative, wh ich is always preced ed bym (not by nany) . Some other verbs have th is use of so also.

Roohts conjugated by may and man retain the definite forms pay and p an

W it maka .

IX . The Tagalog verb demands that the subject of a sentence shall be

expressed , the tense being ind icated by the verb or verbal noun . The

subject may be om itted ,however, when a number of verbs depend upon

the same subject, except in the first clause, where the verb must have a

subject . As will be seen bvthe examples, the syntax of Tagalog is verysimple, but care must be taken to use the righ t particles and tenses. I f

not, some annoying errors are liable to be made in conversation .

V . For any common verb see the vocabulary (English-Tagalog) . I t

must be borne in m ind that Tagalog has manvwords ex messingvariationsand mod ifications of the general verb as well as other anguages. Thesewill be noted in the proper place .

THE DE FIN ITE PARTICLE

I . The plain root, if capable of beingverbali f ed , is sometimes used w ithou t a definite particle if an a dverb of time or the context makes the tenseclear. The d efinite particle may also be used w ith an adverb of time, butas a ru le, if the tense is to be emphasiz ed or the context is not clea r, tense

)articles, accord ing to the ru les of the language, are used in the verbal

orms. And any sol/i mo kahapon .’ (W hat d id you say yesterday?) Ami

anyaabi mo flyayén? (What do vou say now?) And any cal/ i mo bakes?

(W hat w ill you say to-morrow? [with adverbs of time] Ami any sina bi

mo? (What d id you say?) Ano any ainasabi mo? (What are on saying

? )

Ami anymm bihin mo? (What w ill you say

? ) Anymbihin (t 0 person or

thing mentioned ) . Ami bayd any sasabihin ko kay Ig nacio! (What shall Isay t o Ignacio

? ) Sabihin mo ao kaniyfi nu, lind ang ko aiyd (You say to h inn.

that I have been calling h im ) . Any sabihan (the conversation ) .I I . I n (hin after acu te final vowel, and m

’

n in some cases ) is th e true-2defin ite particle . I n is prefixed , infixed , or su tfixed ,

as the case may be :bin and n in are su ffixes only . I n is prefixed to a vowel root and infixetlbetween the initial let ter and the first vowelof a consonant root for the past

(perfect ) and present tenses. I t is sufiixed for the imperative and future :

tenses . The first syllab le of the root is red uplicated in the resen t and .

future tenses. The te nses calle d the pluperfect and futu re per ect may beexpressed in Tagalog in two ways. The first plu rfect is formed byad d ingna to the past tense , and the second pluperfect y refixing no to theThe first fu tu re perfect is formed b y add ing na to t e fu tu re tense , and thesecond futu re perfect by prefix ing ma to the root . These tenses are little?) P

used in con v ersation . Na and ma correspond to the indefinite verbaliz ingparticles nu lman dmake respectively.

I ll. The subject o f a v erb conjugated w ith a definite particle takes the.

"e

gen iti v e,except in the cases alread y no te d. I f the subject is a pronoun ,

it

may either precede or follow the verb , the latter usage being m uch more :

common than the former. I f the sub ject is a noun or ph rase it always?!

follows th e v e rb .

For the conj ugation of a root. w ith in,w hether a vowel verb , o f

a consonan t one see the type-scheme fold er at the end of this hand book

V. In prefixed to or infixed w ith roots of the followingclam forms word s

d enoting a show ing o f the prope rties o f the root or a resemblance thereto ,

as the word like does as a su ffix in English . (1 ) Roots d enoting flowers , fru its , or other objects imitated in gems or preciousmetals by jewelers ,

1 14

w ith a consonant root.

being red uplicatd . Ex . :

TAG ALOG LANGUAGE .

E X . : Sumtilid , to spin ; Jinn/id , thread , anyth ingspun . Some may roots also have the rod uct denoted by in .

M y, to press, to crack rice, etc. ; pin

ith some roots in formsadjectival nouns, the first syllable of the root

E x . : Mayroasted and cracked rice . (7 )

Auan,known ; any kinukuan, the person known .

Mil/ml,dear ; any minam ahal, the esteemed (person ) . Sinai, love (from

Sansk rit, chintd , though t, th rou h Malay) ; any sinisinté , the beloved (wholoves in retu rn ) . Any nasin

aware of the fact .

ind icates a person loved without being

Vl . As in has the idea of attraction inherent within it, there are manyclasses of v erbs, conjugated in the indefin ite infin itive by um, which takein to form the d irect object .

To buy (general term ) .

To take (generalterm bring or take .

To carry; hear, etc . (bringor send )

To scoop ou t , or take anything out

of a hole, or insert the hand into ahole .

To use .

To choose (between good and bad ) .

To select (from amonggood th ings ) .

To pillage ; to plunder ; to loot ; to

despoi the enemy.

To sei z e ; to snatch .

To pray for ; to plead .

To complain ; to entreat ; to implore,to pray (as to a judge ) .

To request.

To borrow .

(1 ) Accord ing to th is ru le verbal roots of

tak ing, ask ing, and appropriating someth ing take in

verbs conjugated with maywhich also admit in .

There are someEx

Bumili. Anybinili,what was bough t.Gumutany, to buy rice by the yalany or chupa. Umtimot, to buyone th ingou t ofmany. Umanykat,to buy on cred it . l

'

maapin , to

buy fruits of the country.

Kama/m . Any kinuha, w hat was

taken or obtained .

Maydald . Anydinald , what brou ht.

Any ipinad ald , what sent it ,

what was ordered b rough t 8.Dunuikot. An d imilcol, w hat takenout, or what and was inserted in.

Gunuimit. Anyyintimit, what used .

Pum ili . Any pmili, what chosen.

Anypinilian ,what rejecte d (singu

lar ) . Any pinaypilian , what te

jected (plurality of objects ) .Humirany. An hinirany, what selected . Any inirari

'

yan, what leftout .

Sumamsam. Anym'

nanwam , thespoil;loot ; plunder.

U naya o. Any in ayao, what seiz edAyao nany tamis,mayao nanyuaim,

somewhat of sweetness, and somewhat of sourness (said of any substance which has th is taste ,

likesome fru its ) (id iom ) .

Dumald zi'

yin . Any d inalan'

yin, whatrayed or aske d for. Any dalan

'

yman, the deityprayed to or person

pleaded with .

Dumayiny. Any d inayiny, what re

lief asked . Any idayiny, the com

plaint . Any dayiri"an, the person

entreated , implored]

, or praye d to .

Humiri'

yi. Any hiniri'

yl, what re

q ues ted . Any hir‘

i'

ycin , person re

quested .

Umzitan Any imitany, what borrow Ex . : Imitany to iyanysalapi ibiniyayko ea kum

'

yaIcaha

(I borrowed that mone wh io I

gave him yesterday) . j itytawny,

TAGALOG LANG U AG E .

l‘

o borrow (anyth ingexceptmonev) .

d em and a treat (as at a cclchra

t in !) l .

l‘

o catch h u ld of ; to catch on thew ing .

PO abso rb .

1 1 5

the cause of borrow ing. Ang"huma n ,

the person borru wed fromthe lender.

Ham lin /u . . Ing hiniram,“ hat bu r

rnwed . Aug Iu lman the lemler.

Tamara /ran . . lng [ileum /tau,w hat

rece iw d as a treat. E x . : Tina

Iu m /m u nam in iloug [calcanm (weare act ting these 5“ eets as a t reat l.

D umal ip . . lnyd inakip, what seiz ed

Any hinilhil, what was

V I I . Und er this section may he consid e red in prefixed to m' intixed with

he pe rsonal prmmnns, w ith w h ich it implies the id ea o f

FU SSQSS IG I I .

lu tlix w 1th the se pronmms, m (hm ) exme ssee the sense 0

ng,repu ting, etc. , in same canes.

You r .

His ; h er.

I‘h e ir .

rmr (all o f us ) .

Hu r ( Vfl ll and I ) .

Ou r (b u t no t vou ) .

As a

regard i ng, ho ld

VI I I . Ve rbs of calling, whether by vn icc o r signs , also fo llow th is mod e

o f co n jugat ion . E x

To ca ll.

To call; also to h ring ; tn fetch .

To make signs for ; to motion to .

i l l ”N M

. 111g 111 1 11131 11, your pmpert } ,

you r. 11111 , consid er it as

y 1 1 11r 1 1wn ; take it fo r y ou r own .

111 1 11 1 1111 A 111; h is [her]) rope (I w illl11 1ld it as h is [he r’

K'

11 11 111'

1 . their propert \ . A1 1 11 1111I1 1

'

11 11111 , regau l it as

be longing to them .

1 111 1 1 . . I 111/ 1 11 1 11 111 11,

ou r property .

111111111 he regard ed it as o u rs .

K 11 11 1'

l1i. - Ing (1 111111 1 11 101, 1 1 111“

property. K in d /511 111111 ko

,I regard it

as yo u rs an d m ine .

4111 1'

11 . l11g 1 111 11 1 111111,ou r propertv,

bu t no t \ 1 1 t1rs . 1111111111 11 1 111111 (31 111

[plu ral] rmr 1rd it as ou rs, bu t no t

yo u rs ) .

Akin . -1111/ 111 11 1111 1'

11,

11 1y prope rt) .

m ine . [11111 1 11 (I held it as

m ine ) . 1 1 111111 1 11 (I am hold ingit as m ine ) . . l11k 1

'

11 1'

11 1 1 shallho ld it as m ine )

T11 111111111g. . tng f in/111 111) , who or w hat

called . 1 111 11 1111111 111, the 1 a,“ ih

strumen t,1 1r 1 .1use . . 1110 111 1111171 1 11

the pe rso n called in m dcr to be

aiven s1 1111e tl1i11g. 1 .x S um (1 111/

ho are H )"1 aIlill! ti f

f) . [11 1

( I was calling to Pe dro sir ) .111 11 11 1 111 1 711 1 111; w in

him t1 1 e1 1me and get som e lish ) .

. l111/ w hat called ,

1 1r l11‘

1 1 11gl1t , e tc .

lug 1511 11 1 1 11211 . w hat mo

\ l' li ' l f 1 1 1 1 1

1 16

IX . Verbs of searching for also take in for the d irect object.

To look for.

To search about)

To lo ok in every corner for.

To go in search of another.

To grope for (as in the dark or likea blind person ) .

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

Ex 1

1111 111d Any h indnap, thingsough t or.

Humalihao Any hinalihao, what

searched for.

Sw nalilm'

k. An 8111111113 111 , whatlooked for m t is manner.

personSun13gn

fidd. Any sinungdd ,t by another.

Umapdhap. Any inapdhap , what

groped for.

X . Verbs of moving, when not due to turn ing away of what is moved ,

also take for the d irect object .

To move .

To move restlessly.

To shake (likeobjects badlypacked )or to move (like loose teeth ) .

To move anything.

To shake (as something in a sieve) ,also to rock or dandle (as a child ) .

To shake a basket or measure so it

w ill hold more.

To shake the head m negation .

To shake anyth ing, as a tree to

gather the fruit.To wa ve the hands wh ile dancing.

Kumibd. 411g 111111116, what moved .

Synonym : K umu lot, umibd.

Gumaldo. Any ginaldo, the mischief done through iestlessnem.

Any yalauan the person d isturbedthereby. MagaldaanyLamayniyd ,h is hand is restless ; i. e . , he

'

is a

pickpocket or th ief (id iom ) . Kayd lauan, mischief .Lmugd . Any inuyd , what movedthus) .

Tumuyoy. Anytinuyoy, what move d.Synonyms: Umuyoy, umuyd (sometimes ) . Umuyoy also means to

stagger, to totter.

lmuyuy. Any inuyuy, what shakenor rocked .

U1 .1mloy Any inuloy, what shakendown .

Un11°

l1°

11y. Any iniliny, what d enie d.Lamayluy. Any Iinuyluy, what sheken , as a tree .

K iununday. An kinundaq , the wing thus. E

on : K inundau 111116

(she waved her hands wh ile shewas dancing) .

X I . also used to express the result of the action of verbs wh ichsignify carrying, cutting, measuring, or weigh ing, when the resu lt

'

18 con

sidere don the side of the agent or ended therein .

indefinite, but mayand other v erbaliz ing particles ar e to be found .

I'

m is generallvthe'

hen

the resu lt of a verb necessarily falls upon a°

person ,in is used to signif1

the person . E x .

To earrv (general idea) .

To d rag along.

To earrvon the shoulder.

To carry a ch ild on or suspended

from the shoulder.

Magdald . See under verbs of bringing, tak ing, ett

Humild . Any bim'

ld , what d raggedalon Means also

“to arrest.

”

Ang inild , the person arrested ; the

prisoner.

P unmscin . Ang pinasdn , what carried on the shou lder. Any pamnan

, the n on who carried anything on t e shoulder.

Mn sabi. Ang sinabi or a aabihin,tie ch ild carried thus. he cloth

by which the child was supportedis denoted by any ioabi.

1 18 TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

To cut into pieces .

To cut into eq ual pieces.

To cut upinto e qual lengths (as sugarcane, etc.

To cut poles or bambo o into pieces ;als o to cut at a d istance.

To cut into pieces (as a log) .

To cut water grass in order to catch

the fish .

To cut, as w ith scissors; to sni off ,applied generally to cutting air,metals, etc.

To split 0 n (as bamboo);to cut

against t e grain ; to pee off, as

shavings ; to go against the cu r

rent ; (fig ) to Oppose.

To cu t or break a rope, cord , or sim

ilar object.

To cu t o ff the ears or nose.

0

Tomeasure eithergrainsor liqu id s) .

To gauge ; to measure liquids bymeans of a ro d.

To measure by palms inches ) .

Maypu laa. Anypinolas,what cut upthus. Mariya paltwpalas nu taluh

,

pieces of

Pure silk . Any

tool used or cutting up.

Umalas. Any inalas, what cut thus.

Puminlid . .llagpinlid , to cu t muchin th is way . Anypininlid , what cutintoequallengths thus. Anypinay

pinlid , the large amount cut thus.

Any ipinlid , the u tensil used .

Any i1mypird id , the utensil used

much .

I ‘umidpid . Any pinid ) id (1 ) whatcut up thus ; (2 ) w 10 cu t thus.

Aug cpidpid , the tool or weap on

used . Anypidp inm , the place .

Guniiliny. Any yin ih'

ny, the woodthus cut up. Any igiliny, the toolused . Any manyiyih

'

ny, the woodcutter.

Maytu ltis. Anylinaltis,what cu t thus.

Any pinaytatcis, the large amount

cut thus. Any fields, the tool bywh ich cutting was done. Augipagtahis, the tool by wh ich muchcutting was done. Any pinaymlamm , the place where much cuttingwas done.

Gumipil. Maygupit, to cut one’

sown

hair. Anyyinupit, what cut, i. ethe hair ormetal. Anyyinupilmo

,

the person whose hair has beencu t ; or object from w hich s ome

thing has been cut off .

unalmZi/at. Any sinalm‘

f'

at, what

split open or peele doff t nushu iyan

'

a mo along Imuayan ,split

th is bamboo.

Mar/patid . Any pinatid , w hat cut

t us. Patarin (I’utdu n ) mo iyang

lubid , cu t that rope . .llapnlicl, to

part ; to break in two ; to cease

(fig ) . Napah'

d any kan iyu ny hi

airfij d , h e exhaled h is last b reath ;he ceased to breathe. .llagl

‘

up uttd

patid , to break up complete (asa cord or rope ) ; or into several

pieces.

Pumonym, variation Pununyaa. Aug

pumnyos, what cut off , as the ser

ered ear or nose. P ingas has the

same idea, but isgenerallyapplie dto cutting inanimate ob jects .

Tumtikal. Any tindl'

al, what meas

ared . Toke/in mo ilony bigda,measu re th is rice . Any takalcin,the measure .

Tumdrol. Any what gauged .

Any Miro], the gauge.

Dunn ing/ml. Any d inanykal, whatmeasured thus.

To set fire to .

To rip; to unseam ; to undo .

To e xchange ; to barte r.

'

l‘

o artange : to d isen tangle .

To b lacken .

X I I I . V e rbs o f rece iving take in fo r the o bject o f the act ion ; some.

tak ing 1 11 fo r the th ing.' affected and 11 11 fo r the pe rson affected, as W i ll be

seen from the e xam ple s .

To accept ; to re ce ive .

'

l‘

n gu o u t to m ee t all

co me b y 11 1ee t 1 1 1 1 '

l I l l lll‘t t t it ' llfl tt 'fl tllO fl f \ ‘

e rlN ”f i) “ “ing,

'

l‘

n iln ile . lny im ikft, W ho a lted .

lny the

pe im ited .

1 ’11 111 1311 1 111 - tny p in iymy,the pe rso n

inxited .

Mu g/11 1311 11} . . lny p ind n iy, the pemon

Invited

To invite a pe rso n to e at . lny ind ie /c,the person so

-11e 1 .1ll\ 1 le 1 11 1t1 s t he pe rso n .1 l"

in the actio n o f a \ erb .

w 11h th o s e \ e rle w h i1 | 1 1 11 -1 e n arilx hm e .1 p1 rs o n to r the o bje 1 t , o n accoou t

o f th e 11

'

I‘

o pre m il upo n . to pe rsuade w ith Mu g/1 1 1 1 1 1117. in f/ u nn oqd , the personb land ls h ln e n t s o pre \ aile d Upo n .

To wat t to r.1 1 11 1 1 1 111111 . . lny In n intay, the pers o n waite d fo r. ll inl in mo sild ,wait fo r them . .llayhinlay (l ) towa ll and guard someth ing for an

"1 1 111 1 1 (1 ) to allow one’

s self to

be k illed ; (2 ) to comm it su icide .

.

‘l"gsimi110g,w hat bu rned .

Taumstds .

-t 11g t1'

11aatds, what ripped

lip, u ndone , etc.

P umu lit. . tng pinalit, what ex

changed o r bartered .

A ny himisall, w hat d isen tangled o r set in ord er . M111;111 11

'

11/1 1is l ljl, to arrange we ll, to Se t

tle th ings w ith care ; als o to be

have w e ll.

-lng in itim,what b lack

ened . . Ing/ 1 111 111 , the b lackener.

Ka ilimu n,b lackness .

become black

T11 1111 1 11g11p. A ug (1311 111171111 , what re

ce ived o raccepte d. -lng tangnpdn ,

the pe rs o n from w hom acceptedo r rece ived : also t he place . - lng111 1 11111111, the nose o f rece iving, etc .

Sunn i/13111 1 1111 . . Iuy 3131 1 1113110 1111, the

pe rso n met o r welcomed th us.

-iloysmu lfllm ug) , to be received by

many , as a governor, etc . Magtt ) lllt‘t

‘t accidentally.

11 1111 damn-1 1 11 11

1m balmy/1» 11 11

( the two siste rs met acciden ta llv

[b v chance] in Manila ) .

ll1 11/l1 i 11 1 1 . l1 151 tim iuo ,the person ll)

\'

lted . TN No /u n mo Rig/cl, inviteh im . 1110 1 1 111} poyka

1li\ i1 | e the fo o d for each o ne

f the gu e s ts i i. e . , pu t it on

plates ) .

li

m o /1 11“

i1 1 \ ited

1 22 TAG ALOG LANG UAGE .

the canoe or place

from wh ich such fish ing is bemgdone.

To fish with the seine or net, called Maulambat (from lambal . ) Any 11'

lambat . 1111 11111111, the catch ; the haul. .tngip unlmnbnt

,the means for fish ing

th us, i. e. , the seine or net .

To fish using a ligh t (as also to hunt Mari/11110 . Any 5110 1271111 1111 11, the

w ith a flare ) . place where suc 1 fish ing or h unt

ing was done. A ny pinar‘

fgflao,what caught thus .

To fish (in general) . 11111 17918111? (from {add fish ) . Anyinafi

'

jflsdd , the fish wh ich have

n caught . Any mafiyiri'

fz isdd ,the fisherman .

To swe e

p. Maya-11113. Any inwalia, the sweep

ings ; what was or has been swept

up (from team,broom ) .

XVI I . In is also used to denote the ob ject w ith verbs of eating, d rink ing,swallowing, and analogous acts .

To eat .

To d rink .

To swallow (foo d) greed ilv.

To swallow (gu lp ) liqu id s.

To sip (as soup ) . . tnghinigop,what sippedTo suck at (as sugar

-mane ) . Any 11 11111119611, what

To bite.

K umu in . Aug kinniu , what was

eaten . E x N iuaia any kap atid

1111 lalaki 1110 any (ind your

brother ate the hr Kam'

n,

food (cooked rice ) . Hakw o

'

n,

delicacies. Ang kangin , the eating

place. Any kakandn , the d iningroom ; or latter. Mag/min, to eat

much or y many.

Uminum . Aug ininum. what was or

has been d runk . Inamia , d rink .

Ang inuman, the d rink ing place ;trough ; cup (d rink ing vessel) .Moyinum, to d rink much or bymany. Ma )ainum, to give an

other somet ting to d rink ; (2 ) towater animals or fowl. E x (1 )I ’aiiumm

’

n ko siyd nany ttibigf’

Shall I give him some wate r? )11 11119, paimnm

'

n mo aiyd nany111111: (No, give him some w ine . )(2 ) .l’inainum fl ing/13 bagd ( mymn

'

yci cabayo! (Did you water

[give d rink to] the horses?) 0116,(Yes sir ) . Papainum ka bayTomas (Ask Tomas to give y ou

someth ing to d rink ) . indef . )L 1111111 111011. Ang 111111 111011 , w at was

or has been swallowed th us. Var

Lumngok . Ang 11°

"agok, what gu lpetldown .

11 11 111111011 .

P anama/13:1.

sucked at

Kumugat. A 1111 kiangat, what bittenM1zgkag11lnn , to bite mu tually (astwo d ogs. ) Magkagatkaguhm . to

retend to bite mu tually. Nay'

akagalkagal (mgdalawang aao the

TAG ALOG L ANGUAGE .

To snap at.

To bite (as a pig at people ) .

To chew .

123

two dogs are only pretend ing to

bite each other ) . Man'

yayat, to

run around biting, as an an imal ina rage .

Sunu'

nyhal. Any sininyhal, who or

what snapped at .

If umabkab. Any kinabkab, who or

what bitten by a pig thus.

AZumog/d . Any ii'

yinoyd , what

chewed .

XVI I I . Acts of the senses, either general or mo dified , adm it in to

express the definite results of such acts, w ith two exceptions. These are

tumifi’

gin (to look at ) and tumimtim (to taste liquor ) wh ich take an as a

suffix for reasons of euphony.

To see ; to look at.

To look at.

To watch for ; look out for ; to sight .

To look attentively, tam ing the eyesor head .

To look much at things, noting and

considering them ; to inspect.To look sideways.

To behold ; to view .

To hear.

To hear.

To listen to ; to pay attention to.

To smell.

To scent ; to perceive a strong od or.

To taste.

To relish ; to like a taste .

To sample ; to try; etc.

To taste without swallowing.

To taste liquor withou t swallowing

To

lt

ieel; to touch (general) .

Kmn itd . lny Icinitd , what seen or

looked at .

fl unili'

yin . A ny tiii'

yntin ; any liningmin, what looked at.

Tmnando. Any linmn’to,what sighted .

Tanauan, watch tower ; lookout

Rlace.

Ianumio, watchman ; lookou t.Lu nu nyun . Any Iin iffytin w hatlooked at th us. EL : ] ) c mo akaUn i/Tye) : (you d id not turn .

'

our

head to look at me ) .

Unnm inao. Any imm inao, what inspected .

Smnuliyap. Any mnu ln/ap,what

looked at. sideways.

Panood . A ny pinanéod , what beheld .

D umin'

yiy. Any don z rtmy, what

heard . Any d iri'

yzin , person listened to.

Muykinuiy. Any Icim'

nyiy, whathear

Bu rnntyuy. Any binu tyay, w hat lis

tened to . kinamalyay andmalyny.

Ununnoy. Any inumoy, what smelled ,

i. e ., odor . Amoyin 71m [hi (smell

this ) .Sunmnyho d. Any sinrtnyhml, whatscented .

Lnnuwap . Any Iinusup,what tasted

Nunu u nmnn . Any n inmnnum, what

relished .

Tum ikin . lny tiknuin,what sam

pled .

Tnmipiny Any hpmyan ,what

tas ted thus.

Tmn imtim . Any tiintinm n,

tasted .

A ny hin ipf» , w hat felt or

touched . E x . ll’

u lu nynmh ihipdmt'

kaniynny Inihu y. [id iom ] (there isnoth ing to touch in h is house , i. e . ,

he is vervpoor ) .

1 26 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE .

into shoes ) . Munapin , to wear

shoes habitually.

To put an apron (tapis ) on ; to wear .‘fagtupis . ]yrmg l'

ayong iytin 031 la

a topic occas ionally. pim’

n u iyd (let her make an apron

out of that cloth ) . .lltlnapis, to

wear a tapis habitually.

To carry a cane, or truayko d. Maglunko d. [tongkcihoyna ito’

y tinn

tmogkocl lo (I am mak ing a cane

ou t o f this wood ) .

X X I . In , used with the name of a destructive agen t, denotes the presentor as t resu lt o f the destructive action . I t is prefixed to vowel nouns andin xe d w ith tho se beginning with a consonant (w is counted as a vowel) .

White ant (termite ) . . lnuy. [Maury any mmi‘

i ci libro (thebooks were destroye d w the wh iteants [were wh ite-an ted]

Locust . Btilung. Binab dlang any allay (therice is being destroyed y the locusts ) .

Daqc‘

i. f h'

nadngti any bigcix (the rice

['

hulle d] is beingdestroyed bvtherats [lit . is being

“ratted ” ]

Mandaragd , rat-catcher.

Crow . Uak . q uak (mgsaying(the bananasare being destroved by the crows

[being

XX I I . In, prefixed or infixed used w ith word s denoting parts of thebody ind icat

es past or present pain or su ffering in the part name d. Thefirst syllable of the root is red uplicatml to ind icate the present tense .

Head . Ulo. I nulo uko (I ha d a headache I .

Immlo nil/(i (she [he] has a headache ) .llasak'it (my u lo ko (my

head aches ) .Chest. D ibd ib. Dinibd ibniyci (he had apain

in the chest ) .Stomach . Sikmaro . Sim

'

sikmum ka.

’ Does

yourstomach painyou

?

) sin i

xikmura nké (yes, sir ; I have apainin the stomach ) .

Abdomen. Tiytin. Tim'

ycin "h i (m y abdomen

pained me ) . Tiu iliycin am (myab domen pains me) .

XX I I I . In like manner, in, prefixed to or inserted w ith roots signifyingd iseases may denote the. past or present state o f the d isease. The firstsy llable of the root is red u licate d to ind icate. the. present tense . I f achronic state of the d isease is to be ex reseed , the patient is denoted bythe sums-ing of in (k in ) to the root. (T 9 future tense , it must be remembered , red uplicates the first syllable o f the root. ) The su ffix in mavalsodenote a physical defect or the resu lt of a d isease .

Smallpox Bululmog.

-lngbinulmlulong, theperson who is having small x . Augbinnhihmy, the person w 0 has had

smallp ox . Ang M alawi/in, themarks o f smallpox . Magbulzilong,to become marke d by smallpox.ilugkabuhilony, to have an epi

demic of smallpox .

I f ilai. ] Iikm'

n, asthmatic person.

Pig/6. P ip/014i", gouty person .

Tip/(in. T'iyanin, corpulent person.

TAG ALOG LANG U AG E . 1 27

l \'

(m s ; sr r r lx sn .

X X IV. I n (kin ) su ffixed to nam es o f b ird s deno te s gamecocks of the

gene ral color o f the bird named . So me wo rds change t h e accen t. o f the

roo t . w h ile others retain the ongmal accen t . lix . :

llaw k (several species ) . m in . Lahucim u, game cock o f a

b rown co lor, like a haw k .

(‘

ro w . ('

u lc. (’m zkin

,b lack game cock . I t

w ill be seen that the first. svllab leo f the root is red uplicated .

X X V . I n thin ) d enotes the comple ted ac tio n or resu lt o f a verb w h ich

re qu ires an o bject it su tlixed to a verbal roo t oi th is natu re ; provide d theroo t adm its in fo r the d irect obj ect . E x ;

t'

w inam . I numin, d rink .

KH z /m in . Ka ll i”,food . If aku nin ;

Ixuko in,re freshmen ts

,swee ts , nu ts .

These las t w o rd s fo rmed w ith Ira

m ean food -re semb ling .

'

I‘

o sew (occasionally) . Tumu lu‘

. Tulu'

m, any th ing sewed :

tailo r \vo rk . Mug/laid , to sew in

com pany (many) or to sew m uch .

to sew fo r a living. .llu n(um/d , tailo r ; tailo ress ; seamstress

,

need lew oman (d ressmake r ) . Mag/[m in /vi, to o r der to sew . l'lx . : [h i

(my ]mmhi wig/ll so d iam (th is is

what she to ld me to sew ) .

To graz e . Scrum /aw l). . lnysobsahiu ,whatgraz ed ,

i. e .

,t he gras s . A ug m om /m u

, the

graz ing place : pas tu re ,e tc .

X X V I . I n used w ith verbal roo ts capable o f e xpre ss ing q ualit ies w h ichmay be acq u ire dor ex tend ed to perso ns . annu als , e tt Ind icate s the o bjec tof the actio n . la.

To look ou t (as from a w ind ow ) . ] )mm ofipm . - luy (Icufimu inmb y lo o k ing o u t . This and sim ilar

fo rms co ntain no te nse id ea. . lngw hat was o r has been

lo o ked at th u s . . lng d inn rnuyoo ,

what is be ing lo o ked at. thus . Anythe JIM ) !

u nfwm . to lo o k b y man y th u s o r

som e t imes to appi ar at th e w ind ow

(also id ea o f hab it th us ) . E x

11mm”[a ny] Hum u u gflm XI I ((I l r tt lamm (d o No t look o u t o f [o r appearat] t he ind o w .

llu ru u qu o ,to be

i t t he ind o w . .llu ru ru u g/u o sag/d ,

he is at the lnd o w .

to lo o k o u t o f a ind ow «asually .

in o rd e r tn h u nk O llt .

.llu l."lu f f/no , to j o in ano the r in thusloo k ing o u t . .

lfog/kupm lu 13pm , to

loo k o u t sud de nly . m oving q u ick lv

in o rd e r to d o so .

To sw im , [, n uu n fglu y , ,llm ll '

ar

ry ing so m et h ing . - lugwhat gained by sw imm ing,

o r ob

ject s wam fo r . . lng ilm i’

yoy, w hatcarr ied w h ile sw imm ing, e . g thec lo th e s : what means.

1 28 TAG A LUG LAN G U AG E .

To d ive fo r ; to d ive (oecasionallvl.

To run .

I n u s e d w ith w e ad jec tive s w h ie h have an att ribu tive sense

it l lpit l‘

lh‘

the id e a “ l.

ho ld ing , tO the

m e an ing o f th e ad je e tn e . Th is has bee n fu lly u nd er t he ad jeet i\ e I .

X \'

ll i . In s t i llixe d also e xpre ss e s th e ne t o f eau s ing em o tio n o r sensa

t io n in o th e rs w he n U s ed w ith ro o ts w In z' h l e q tti t l

' n o n lbj e t'

t . and fo rm the

t l-tw o f ve t b e ralled ne u te rs . h ieh are ge ne rally e xpre s sed in English bv

fo llo w ed bv an acljee t tve . lt mav als o be prefixed .

To be h u ng rv.lin t /Alu m

Tn lie tll itr tV.

HRH

Lu ng/«wan ,a buoy. Langoydn , a

place fo r sw inn ning ; w he re sw im

m ingmay he d o ne . P o u tg/lmfimyem ,

place w here sw imm ing was d onew h ile carry ing someth ing . E x

Ma r/ mu ng Iro ny Imm u imy.

’ ] lind i

) ni . l to yo u kn o w h o w to

No. s ir . Tim/f log) [so

’

I l oo t;

"Mi n imum; [su ng hnum “'

hat l

You a Tagalog and d o n’

t k now

h o w to Tar/u scion i n ?

here mm from ?)'

q u

( I live in the m oun

tains ,sir ) . 1 am(I d id not k now

it ) .

Lu m ipud . - luy lipu rin ,th e o b ject

f tllt' llitl llt . . li lf/ i/i/irl tl. tilt?

w ings , o r inst rum en t o f fl ight .

- lng plaee o f fligh t , ) IuyI II/ ( I d, to fly m uch ,

.o r to and fro.

.llrt f/pvt/ipm l to ( ause O i

’ teat h to

”V . ti l l] “ lltlt St‘t () l'

taugh t to ily.

l/ i c/ sis ir iu, w hat d o ye

to r . The t'

ze lso n fo r d i\ ing o r thebo d y s ltlune t ged ,

(m y; [s ian ] lny.w

'

s im n, th e d i\ ing plat e . VIM/sh iv].

to d i\ e m uch . I f “ ; p rm u /s is i l

w hat dove fo r n ineh . .llrm ixnl, to

d i\ e pro fes sio nalh ( for a living ) .

,llnl l f a/ t is il l

,l li‘\ t ' ll

Tu t /mu f f". . llo/ w hat may

be ru n fo r . Talc/w h im ru naway.

.lIm /tu lsln i, to run m uch . . lng/flu /J . the cause fo r runn ing o r

what is carried w h ile ru nn ing.

. ln g MUM /u m l l the place o f run

n ing ; ( 2 ) the pe rson run awayfrom : ( 3 ) the perso n fo r w hom

sm u e th in may he carr ted . Tu

to ro ve abou t : to run

tro u nd ; to gad abo u t . 310 17 110 1303,

to be ab le to run .

1.

lix . : \ umtmilmn ami ca

(nu /o l th e h o rse is h ungrv) . Haringn n nn/ g/u /n nu n any m bayo (don

'

t let

the ho rse go lmngry ) . Kay/um) N l lu . ll tltlge l

‘

.

Jin n /u m . Hom u} mm“ ) imu ihuo any(d o n

’

t let the (log r emainth irsty,

o r be su ffering fromI‘Ix .\ uyumitum baga

To jump.

To leap o r jnmp down ; to alight .

To go or come d o wn (the stairs or a

lad der, etc .

X X X V . Som e t ransitive (requ iring an o b ject) ve rbs do not, andintran s itive \ erbs d o , ad nn t i n .

I N

X X [N pre fixe d to o r in fixed w ith a root to w h ich an is sufli

the same t im e is used to express the result o f an act ion w hen the said

i~ a co ncre te u lij t’ t

‘i . lix :

To em bro i de r mats (pe tates ) . .llu gmilm l.

mat (pe tate l.

To d o fine n eed lewo rk : to d o fine ,S'

u u u ilum . Nina/(1 1mm , fine mse w ing . wo rk . as a hand ke rch ie f o r

art ic le o f line sew ing.

X X V I I . The sam e co nst ructio n is als o u sed to express the follo

( l l Th ing s pre pared fo r fo o d fro m th e raw material. (2 Ac ts d o nethe o b jec t e x presse d h } t he ro o t . (3 ) Th e re fu se cause d b y some ac

I’lu rah t y w ith the las t is e xpre ssed b y the u s e o f the d efin ite prefix 1

co nnection w ith [a

Mo ne y .

To peel rattans (bej uco ) .

To th resh .

To saw .

To so rt cotton or silk : to cu ll: to I ’

taken o u t . (as food from the

ing po t ) , o r w hat may flow 4

the bod y (as b lood ,

11 1/w in w e also nany kam'

n

some rice out fo r me ) . MugIn lu is, to go out and come in .

Lamoksci. Ang Iokm hin,what ju

fo r. Any [als o/um, the pl:

j umping. .llugloksé, to jum p io r liy many .

j um p b y man y in competitit

Lu uu imny. . lng [Maori/in ,1

leaped down fo r or aligh tec

. luy Insongu u , the place o f ligl

I d iom . L eisoug 7m 2

(s tro ke ) o f luck . Mag/Mamtln o w do “ u or push down .

I ’n u u l uaog. : Ingpanuogiu , th e .

fo r w h ich action may befo rmed . ing pu naogcm ,

theo r pe rson for w hom action it

performed . I ]x . : Pmmogrm :

mmg h ihig (bring me. some

d ow n he re ) .someth ing d own thus , or to

ch) “ 11 lll llCll

mo o. [w ring/fin ,an y th ingmad t

eggs , as cake o r an ome le t , eI ' d /Ml. l ’m N/u f f in , an y th ing

ith ho ne y in it . I ' llfoh in,s

mad e from h o ney . I ’u lotho ne y an d cocoanu t milk .

H u n g /«is . the pt

(s ing ) . Any pinuyl‘

nyt tsm

pcc lil lgs

(M um /s. ( . um b m , straw .

g it /mu ,m uch straw . fifagi

th re s h much .

L im i ng/o r}. l’mnqlagarian , saw

I to ; m ania/«lgu ri, the sawyern u n /i. - lng pin ili/um , the r

TAG ALOG LANG UAGE . 1 31

MA— lN (ans ) .

XX XVI I I . I n (kin ) auflir ed and ma prefixed to roots signifying mental

emot ions, passions, and involun tary actions form ad jectival nouns wh ich

generally require to be ex ressed in English b an ad jective and a noun .

X X X IX . I f the root at m its of contraction , ) eginsw ith l, or an intensive

degree is to be expressed , the first syllable of the rootmaybe re duplicated .

These words have the accent on the last sy llable as a ru le. For examplessee under ma .

X L . I t may be repeated here that acq u isition or assim ilation isgenerallydeno ted by in ; the instrument , if allowab le , and the reason for the carrying ou t of the act ion by and the place,

or the person from whom , by an .

Add it ional examples :

To reach ; to overtake ; con

elud e (as a meeting) .

To buV.

(Smilm l. Aug abulin , what reached ,

etc. Ing imibuf, w hatwas reached ,

etc . A ny u lm tun, the person over

taken or th ing reached for. UumIml

, to reach for oue’

s self. MagriIml

, to reach for another. lng

] )uyd lml, theact o f reach ing . 311 190bt

, to reach fo r each other mu

tually . .llugalm lu bu lrm . to reachman y th ings or pass th ings fromhand to hand in numbers . Jlalca(mm

, to take ; to be able to reach .

.llcrkidlm l,to ask another to reach

for some th ing. Ex

1341 3; J un"wmgMing I ask (l Juanto reach me [get for me] some

water) .

Band /i. Ing In'

lh in or anylu sln rl i t I n n [h i/ i t li u n u n -lun c h “ :

TO sell.

To snatch ; to pu ll up b y th e roo ts ; to

take b y fo rce .

To take .

To requ es t ; to as k fo r .

TH clo se the han d.

'

l’

l l I-J l . ll l .

l. The d e fin ite partic le i, h ich is alm o s t invariably a prefix and foundas an in fix w ith a w ry fe w w o rd s fo r stric tly e uph o n ic reaso ns, is u se d

ith se n te nce s o r ph ras es by w h ich the su bjec t is represented as losing con

tro l o f so me th ing ,e xpu ls io n . cause ,

mean in s t rument , time (not te nse ) ,and \ e rb s o f ad j u s tm co py ing in to , t rans fe rring. t ran s lating, transplant

ing. e tc in t he lat te r t . l~t* ind icat ing the ob ject o f the verb .

l l. Se n te nc e s o r ph rases inc lu d ing a ve rb w ith 1 have the agen t in the

ge n it iu '

, the d ire c t o b je c t in the accu s at iu ' ( if th e re is a d irect object ) ,H i ll th e w o rd d en o t ing the in s t rum e n t . t im e , o r cause in the nom inat ive.

'

I‘

hc N o m inative w o rd is e m phas iz ed bv be ing placed at the beginn ing of

th e se n te nc e o r ph ras e .

To pin io n ; to tie th e han ds . ”H ind/m s. . Ing tgupos , the m eans

i. c . the ro pe . lix . : Igapos mo 30

l/H I I” (Pin ion the

priso ne r w ith th is rope ) . Em

phat ic . Iro ny; ) ummh‘

igupoa mo m

In /ango in (w ith th is rope pinionA ‘

ilugln li. . lug ipaybili, what sold .

. lng'ip inngbili, what was or has

bee n So ld . Any pinagbdhciu , the

pe rson to whom sold (pas t tense ) ;the place , or the price . A ug nu :

pug/nh'

, hat has been sold byerror.

A ug tu t/urgbillu in , the m oney real

iz ed fl’ tnu w hat has been sold . Angthe act of selling. (The

tct o f b uying is anypug/hilt. ) Maghilu li, to sell by w holesale .

A'

n ummkum . .

fllng kim rmkam, what.

snatched , etc .

,th us (past tense ) .

A ug; b u nkum in,w hat snatched ,

pu lled tip, e te . (no tense idea ) ..llmfi/umlcum , to go abou t pu llingu p th ings (as a gardener pu lls upweed s ) .

K ron a/m . - Ing kw uha, what was o r

has been taken . . lng {Isa/m , the

m eans fo r tak ing (no tense idea ) .

lny l. imm ,w hat taken (no tense

idea ) . A ug; Mum /m , the means by

w h ich someth ing was o r has been

take n . . lng [sun / m, the place or

person from whom taken .

- Iug Im u ngi, w hat asked

fo r . - Ing w ilt ing“ , w hat ob tained

b y ask ing. Img 14 ingm ,what asked

fo r (no tense id ea ) .K um im h m . .

llvtg/U mlcim ,to gra

s p;to c lo s e the hand ttpon . -tng; Icem

In w in, w hat gras

ped . . lng “ n im

lam . w hat was o r has been grasped .

. In g/ the grasping instru

m e n t : e . g , the hand .

134 TAGALOG LANG UAG E .

VI I . l enerally replaces in with verbs wh ich a dmit

o

both d irect and

ind irect o jects, i being used to express dhe d irect obJect (accusative )and an expres

s ing the ind irect object (dative,

To recommend . Magbilin. Aug ipagbilin , the rec

ommendation . Any ip inagbilin,what was or has been recom

mended . . Ing mgbilimm , the per

son recommende d(no tense idea) .

Any pinaybilinan, the person who

was or has been recommended .

To make a gift ; to present with . M'

ughiyaya. ing ipirmybiyaya ,what

was or has been given , i. e . , the

gift. . lngpinagbiyayalin, the per

son to whom somethingwas or hasbeen given . Habit/«yang trim)

, a

liberal person .

To advise.Mag/wind. Th is verb also means in

some. cases to procure women.

Ang fluital, the a dvice . lug {hi

milol, what was or has been a d

vise d. . lng hulolan, the person

a dvised . Aug hinatolan , the per

son who was or has been a dvised .

Ang hmyh tilol, the woman pro

cured . .llo myhritol na taint-i, pro

curer; pant erer. Mapaghrilol mlb ab uyc, pru

-un 'ss .

To give back ; to restore. Magw oli. This verb also means to

go back , to return to the place of

starting. . lnyim’

mmli, what was or

has been resto red . -lng sinaolinn,the person to whom someth ingwas or has been restored . Aug

pagxaohin, the place returne d to .

To tell; to narrate ; to report . .lfags alild . Augm liliu , what told or

rep orted (no tense idea ) . Augainnlilct; arty isirmlitd , what was or

has been told , etc. Anyaimwalihi:any ixinoxalitti, what is being told ,etc. Any amen/iti"; (mg ixam lihi,what will be told or reporte d.

. lny 7mgm littuin, the person t oldor reported to (no tense idea) .lngpinoym lilarin, the person to ld ,etc. (past tense ) . . lug pinagmm

lilmin , the person being told or

reported to (present tense ) . . tng

pagmm litmin, the person to betold or reported to (future tense ) .Any i iinngm liu

‘

i,what was told

and t ie reason for telling. . tngungmliid , the teller (past tense ) ..

‘lng nogmwolild , the narrator

(present tense ) . Ang magmmlihi,

the teller (future tense ) . An

kamlitmm, the companion in tel

ing ; the coreporter. Mw lild,garrulous, like an age dperson.

To talk ; to speak . Sauna/i i. . lng aabihin, what said or

the person or thing mentioned .

Magaabi, to converse ; to say.


To signal.

Oth e r verbs w h ich have two ob jects like the fo rego ine'

are 11 111 1311 1 11,

to

teach ; 71111 1111a11'

f1i,

to repo rt ; to gi1'

;e and 111111711 175, to

se ll w l1 11 h ha1 e been or w ill be explain ed 111 o ther places .

I I I . In the majo 1 ity o f cases 1 expr11s> es the 1111 1 11 1111 o r instrumen t by

wh ich an actio n is b rough t abo u t. I t is 11 1 1311 1 1 11 d irectly to the ro ot fo rth ose co njug

1

ate d 11 1111 11 111 in any manne 1 , and to th e 1 11 1 baliz ing parti1 le,

in t h e o ther co nj ugations . Th is applies to all tenses . The first syllab leo f t h e roo t or the las t s: y llab le o f the parti1

1 l1_1,as the case, 11 111 y b1 1 , red upli

ca te in the present and fu tu re te nses . 1 11 the seco nd plupe rt’

ect and second

f u tu re perfect tenses the particle i is inserted be tween the particle 1 111 o r

n aa and the root, w hether the lat te r be simple o r (11 11 11111 111 11 11. (See tables . )

I \ . The root denot ing an i11str11111 1 1 11t , i 1'

1 .1pab le 1 11 co nju e atio n mayd en o te the ind irect obje1 t , if the re is no i1 1 111 1i11al d irc1 1 t 1 1bje1 t 111 the sen

t e n ce . E x . : l11o (1 11g 111 1111 111 1 1; h :1 11 11 11s he k illed w ith? ) 1 11 111 1i1 1l

1 1 531 13 h e was k ille dw ith a gun ) . 11h in the sen tence w ou ld be : 111311 111 11;11 1 1 1117 h im! (he 11 as k illed w ith a gun 111 the las t 1 1 xa111plc the norm

n al su b ject Miril is expressed . See tab les fo r the, co nj ugation o f 1m instru

m e n t w ith and w ith means fo r 111 1

1111 111pli> l1 11 11

1 11t 1 11'

111 1 ac tion . )X . I is also u sed , has been stated ,

to express t he 1111 1 11 1114 fo r the ac

c om plishment o f an act ion . l‘ix . : ll'

alci 171 17} 11111 1 111; 1117111 1”(he is

“' ith ou t the means to buvth is house ) . 1 11513 1711 1611311 111 31 1 11113(I have

t h e m eans to pay you ) .

X I . I com bined w ith in may cxmcss the d irect o b ject (accu sat ive ) ofa ctions perfo rmed for the bene fit o f o thers 11

'

h i1 h 11 111 1 also be e xpressed

h v 1 11 alone ,on expresses place in gene

1 1a] w ith 9 11111 I1 1 11 rbs ; and 1 1

1

1 1111

I 1ine d 11 itl1 1111ga11d 11 1 111 111 11 1 111 1rd in 1

,.r to 1111 1 1tense

,expresses the perm n 11 111)

is , was , has been ,o r w ill be the l11 1 1i11 ti1-iar 1 1 1 1

'

the ac t io n

To roas t (meat ) ; to bake or frv(lishor m eat ) .

To scald o r make, as tea ; to bo il (as

pota toes, etc .

To cook .

X I I . \Vhen roots beginn ing w ith 11 . I, o r 11 vo we l ( inc lud ing 11 are ( umjugate d w ith in and 1nstr11 111cn tal 1, e tc . , the l reve rses the particle

A ny 42m in,the reason or cause o f

the con v e rsat ion . l ing im'

nubi,

“ hat “ as u l‘ has been said . . lng

ip iuagxubi, what was nr has been

said and thvrvz lsn n o r mmse . -lngm in im"

, the ('n nvc rsatiun or sto ry.

A ug ]n’

mwsu bilum , what said to a

ce rta i n person or sa id at a certa in

Tann i n) . to pu in t ou t ; to

Show ; ( f . ) to teach . A ug ilinurb,“ hat signaled , poin ted ou t o r

taught . A ug tirmm u n , persun

show n (taugh t ) or signaled to

H f} fu n /um , hal f is beingfriml o r I‘l nh lw l. . I ugthe ') P t ll ln l

’

w h um m meth ing is

being: rn zb tml, c tc . J ug} i/umu u ,

the {M ing pu n n r m aste r. . Iug/

thc plavvu f w asting .

Jif fy/Mgr) . ‘ I ug/ i n c/ago) , h ilt bo i ledt ) l

' manic Hi lls . . lu g/ “ IO

]w rw m ln r hum tn ln ' made . . lng/lugm

'

m . thv ('

n n k ing pu t , teapot ,ctr . l‘fx [pu g/lny } 11m u /u

'

» nany.w (makv lu v .

\ cmw (ml ) .

UHy/HM. . lug; ll’h l l l l , “ h ilt ('

Ookml.

A ug; hat mm kvd ( see nex t

parag raph l . . Ing lu lu d n , thvconk

ing ntvnsil. . lng the

place

1 36 TAG A LOG L ANG VAG E .

in to in u r c hanges it to Na, in ( trtle r to am id the harsh sound s of the douhle

capec inllt'

“ ith m ots cnmmene tng w i th i Ex :

Tu th row t lown .

TU pla ce ; tn ]) llt .

Tu ge t rid ( ll ; tn d isappear .

X JI I . W i th c e rtai n c lasses of verbs su c h as (1 ) those req u i r i ng two com

plem e n ts . e t: ma gma/th i,“

to te l l ;”m ug/(ru ng, tn lend z

”mugbigay, to

giw ,

”e tc . “ Hi ( 3 ) w i t h th ew expre > > ing or d ispers i v e a c t ion .

9 . "N igh t/m u , l( ) th rn w away : Nu lyx fflu qh (‘t( 1 foruma t rue pastu r e

,w h i ch may he so e x pre s sed in E ng l ish .

X I W i th Ve rbal ran ts nu t inc l u ded in the fu rego ing c lasses 5forms an,

e x press io n pec u l iar tn Tugnln g and a l l ied lzu tgu ztgtw‘ b y d eno t ing e i ther the

i n s t rumen t . cu uw ,o r t im e a t the act io n . I n th e s e cases the cause

,reason .

i nstrum en t, o r t im e hecn tnes the su b jec t ( it the sen tence in the nom inatit e

( use , espec ia l l y if t he w n tence sim u ltl i nc lu d an i nd i re ct cmnplement

prc~> ive n f suc h instrum en t . cau se ,

t im e , e tc in ad d i t ion tn a d irect objl-ix .

‘

(H TH giH ’.

Tn t it t‘n w

THplan t : I n SH W .

ila r /( ru m !

t S t -e tab lt w‘ fu r c n n ju z z u t itm n f .w lm ci/mgz , i n m m , ith

X Y . H the in~t run tc u t i it t tu l l ith tl \ c rh u s ingr the ex tuln iw the i n s t rum e n t tukw the [m utte r tart -pm it tn u iu the genit i v e . ,x . :

H U I!"N u ll [N I /u l ufiu l N IH / 4] ( h t! i il l‘t 'w i iIt ' sand awav “' i til

Wag/Milo”. . lng ilu ilog, what. dashe dto ground or th rown down (no

tense idea ) . . l nf/ ihimilog or (tuginalu ilug, w hat was or has be en

th row n ( l own , etc. A ny ilu'

n ulu ilugor «my im tlm lu ilog, w hat is be ingth rown down , etc . . Iuy ilm /u ilog,what w i l l he t h rown down , etc .

(See tab les fo r these . l. lng flag/(131, w hat placed .

Any ilm uguu; (my w ilczyny o r anyiu a/u g/u y, tat was has been

placccl.

.llctgu

'

u lci. . Iug iniu-ulfi

, w hat was orhas lteen gotten rid o f

, etc .

. lug) iMn igm l. w hat wasn l

’ has heen g i v en . lix I /t in igrm

“ 5.1mm mu ng; set/up?(that money

was the gift o f Juan ) .”f igh t/m u . Tu m u lmn. tO cast ta» a

ne t » . w i th mug/(upon : [litm

1 14 1” IJ” ( f u r/

Mi

lli”( I the lettera“ a l . Im i (mymtg/u w in b ) n ilongw in"

sha l l 1 ( it) w i th th isfish?) [Il l/m u um th row it. away l.lix . itlt h mu q um .

‘

-llm stmg ilupun

N i t/m l) I. ” ( l caugh t th isfis h ith o ne th row [o f the net]. llu l t llt‘ liS lt l i ne : il ls“ ,

w he re an y th i ng: may be th rown :the sc rap ho le o r ltcap.

(2 ) .\ lm ) to hear hate or

runc u r toward ano ther . -ibingt f l l l l lf ’ l H I I / I f lu ng] ( I all] p lantitv. ! t it i ri . lu g] h t lh l

,the

place n t'

plan t i ng. A s w i l l lie seen,

ltt °~l4ltfl~ b e i ng contracted . there i‘=w it h m and n w i th

t lt i< “ ( t l’

t i \\ i t l l su tlixetl (m .

‘

o lend (mone y on l y ) .

lend w i l l ing l y .

X V I I . Th i s is a l s o s how n b y Im m i/i, to se l l ,

al read y e x pla ined I.

To ltllV b \ t’

t' t z lil ( n lt : l e t tm ll M ‘

iiit ' l . ( lu l l/ri ll. - luy fu ll/( tn, w hat was

bough t th u s .

To s e l l o n : t amall N ale . lug Om an/"hm ,w hat was

\ Vl l l t l l ll.” ( l i m o to r pas t and pre se n t te nses ) is gene ra l l y u se d to

o r and als o t im e t fo r the lat te r see u nd e r mu ) .

To d e s t ro y . M o u n d . Mu g/4 rd . to d est ro y n tttch .

ilar/, q s ird , in he at ltle to d e s t roy .

. lu g 7mm ; lam b /(mg(L' l nh lillg “ a.

“

th e t tu s e b y w h i c h he los t h is

1h ) i tt '

grea ts o t ro w .

( I l /J l t ' l l a l s o t-x tt t

‘

e s s t w W e l l pe rfe c te d itc h re su l t i ng from a S lO‘Vo r d e t e lo ptn c n t .

I t ' t'

n l l l t ' lu ' l lt '

l . to ad orn .

lltlt ad o rned .

10 be be tte r ; al s ol, c lc \ c r .

".llt tugmling JO

becom e m u ch be tte r . .llt tkuyu lm g,

in t lt ) gcn n l, d u g] the

t .t lt~e t i t be tte rm e nt . l‘ix J . lngn u t /731 i of t /n o t m ; s iy/rmy il‘ l lt f t gmyt th m ; H o n !) n u n /714i um”M t“ ! (med ic tne s are w hat c ause the re co v eryo f th o s e w h o are i l l . lng pumi

w u / l/J IUU INHNU m'

mi (the

Mag/ litany. (A lso to Don n "

. lny ipiungiitu ug,the loan .

lluwnummg. 1ng the loanmad e th us. A ny lm u lw fiz in the

perm n lent to th us . E x l‘zw

(i tn/in mu Nb ; mm!) puma t lend th e

a pe so ) . [su ng awl/ (pl Idm amg(my [pu n /10m g; 1mm iii/6 (I w i l l on l ylen dyou a hal t l ie s” l/u

'

mu itu ngIll/vi (my Ntl/l llu

‘

l hen c lentnay umney tn ym t l. lfcil‘it lu nd i

NM ( 1126 pim n u ilu u g tu t u”sn /upf.’

(W hy w on'

t 5m i l end m e some

M 1 [m g/h f ! fl u /i i, (he

c z lu < e I have u u ue l

c re di t [Gi l liam/«m d eb t

tn ('

l lN J

. ln g/ Mf r/n i/u s , th e mu s t: ( if

t un te n~c it le tl ) . l‘lx

[La w fu l/u s u u g/ [my/. tmm tuym ud t I w u~ ~u cld e u e ul b y

[tlt ' z ll ll] I.

I ' M /( i u l zu n sad d ened by

h i< cle u th l. H ahn /401m um (myu : ( in !

b e v u ld e n e ' l b y t he d eath of“M I! .llltt l l l 9211111098iu lw t t

ru w tu l «ob j e c t n r specta c le : a lso


weather caused h is im pro v ement ) .

Any N ita /13} gamu t (myikinagu lmg wild (the tak ing of th ismed i c i ne was w hat caused them to

re co v er ) . tt ) prosper . in!) pinaqmm/mq , pe rson o r

th i ng: pro speriu u. A ny imguga/ing,

pe rson impro v img. .llugpu lsugn

ling, to imp ro v e one’

s se l f ; tocorrect one’

s selt. .Vfl flpl lkll

(111/ing [my/(3‘mmg/ ma n y/n dxal "ing/45

(Im pro v e you rse l v es in y ou r customs [o r manners]l . Raga/h iya",good ness ; imp ro v emen t .

(3 ) I la , as we l l as 1 alone,prefix ed to i n trans i ti v e v erbs ind i cate t ime

as well as cause or reason . 1: x . :

To repen t .

To be asleep or s leepy.

X IX . I is general l y u sed alone to e itpress cause o r reason w i th v erbw h i c h d o no t req u i re an obj ec t to com ple te the mean ing ( i n t ran s i t i v es ) :

To o hev: to fo l low .

To weep (pu rpose l y ) . Tu nm m / ix . wee p in uch

or b y man y . to w eep(in \ o l. : l"(I the .ln s e o r

reason o f w eeping . .llug/pu lu ums

,

to w e e p e x ce ss i v e l y . .llu k ih lm /M .

to jo i n smo the r in w eep i ng . ]Cx

[h i],‘

l/l ln l l f l

( \Vh y i that w oman weep i ng[c ry in ; r . lm/ Min d fu l /7px new 3/

«my Ku nm in g/M n W i n g] (um /( tHer ery

in}: is t .iused bv the d eath o f [he r](

' llilt ll .

To remain beh ind (lett ing oth e rs go Ti l /u n t i. Mu g/in }, t., al low sum p

ahead ) . th ing tu re inmn . - Iu g/ i/m n

was o r has be e n le ft be h i nd : al soth e re n uu n ing be h i n d. l b w(my d in t /

“

i i I.” ( li lo t l l im e re

mai n ed h e re o n y ou r aeeou nt ) .

Allan-i i,to be le ft be h i nd . ”VIM/lg

nu tim,no t o ne remained .

llagxixi. . Ing; ipinugs isi, th e t ime ,

cause,

o r r niso n o f repentan ce(past te nse ) . Nu m is i

, to q uar re lw i th ope n l y . A ug ism }, the cause .

filmy/”Mu s l

i

n,to repen t d ee pl y .

”NM/ay. AY

H’NUH'H] (rug/ti [Jug/13! (Are

you ( h i; Mu g} I.” sm u t [i f/N

muM/ug/ (Yes ; I wou l d likc t i ) go tob leep) . .Vl lku h ilug, it ) fall ilS lt‘t 'p.

. lny; {kn / filmy. the t ime or cau se o f

fal l i ng as leep.

. ln r/ I S N INN I. tllt‘ t “itllh t ' O fo hetlie uce o r to llo w ing. l'ix . lmi

(my i s u u rs rmm / ”any “ U HF/ii S i l lldu lumy Ann i/N u !) 1m m)

! \Vily ( it ) St i ld ie rs o bey [fo l low ] th e i r con i

n iand ing o tliee r -lng

[N I /Hu n t luprl [Hin g/U N (U 1 i l l/{1 [s in u

S tl um l I l l/( i (The i r o bed ience is o n

accoun t o f the i r oath and a l so the i rrespe c t l


In l i ke manner i ntrans i t i v e v erbs a l so express t ime (not tense ) . I f

the ex p ress io n fo r the t ime is d efin i te ,it may e i ther pre cede or fo l low the

v e rb , bu t it the t ime is ind efin i te it shou ld a lways pre cede . Ve rbs w h i c hreq u i re Elm ( Jana ) for cause or reason l i ken ise ha v e the same combinat ionto ex press t ime :

To arr i v e . D unuiling. .

olng Mining, the t ime of

arr i va l . E x . : Ami any om s mu,

[dwelling wi

g/(if (W hat t ime [hou rd i dhe [she] Aug irhm ilingn igfli any langku ll (i le. [she] eame

at noon lw'

p (my «m m 7m [da rti

ling n ild .

’(W hat day w i l l t hey

. Iug it'

d /inn ing (m m mm!)Im mm (The fifth [day] of the

m onthTo em bark t rav e l (also to moun t ) . N om i/aw . Any snkuydn ,

w hat en i

barked on or mounted . . tug islan

the reason o r t ime (pas t tense )o f e u nbal‘k ing,

mount i ng, e tc . E x :

. lug lao ug isnmkm/ 10 sa Filipinos

(The. y ear [in w in c h ] I em barke dfor th e. Ph i l i ppines ) .

To cat . K u um iu . . luy ikinu in ,the reason or

t ime o f eat ing (pas t tense) . E x :

I ) ; ”Jumb o" (my (w ig/(mg hiluo

At tila /i new (green fruit sho u ldne \ e r he 'aten ) .

To d i e . ”H umili ty. . Iug w as an ikimnm ituy“ if/d ,

t he hou r at w h i c h h e d ied .

X X 1 . I is als o u s e d w i th v e rbs o f ad j u s t ing,eon t

'

orm ing,copying in to ,

t rans fe r r i ng . t rans lat i ng , t ransplan t ing,e tc .

,to i nd i cate w hat has been

th us t ran s fe rred . t rans lated e te

To con form : to makew e t read y .

-llu ylu igmy. . tug/ 1'

hinrigny. w hat waso r has been mad e su i tab le . J‘Ix

I f; l lj cl l/ I,” th isl i k e t l1at 1 .

lluglu iguy Lu "anyn u t /731.3 1mm mug/summit) (G e t thet

' h ihh '

e n reatly fo r the, party ) .IIu /n iq o u, to be prope r or su itab le :tls n to he pl t bpn l

‘

lit tlle t i. 11x . (1 )Vu ln lhrtrpu / bu l/l l mm ] (Ifl ld gtl

a n y] INN U ’IJ N I 7m In t /11 1ml uum qtth u m o u r/ N M . ( ls it proper, then , for

1 ) t 1tl l1tg woman to go a l one aboutq r” llu lm lmgriyan nany

fo u r/1 1 1 1 1 11 110 1 t i ri ngA‘

rlsuhmm t (The

pu n i s hm en t w i l l be su i tab le for

the g ra v i ty o f the o ffense ) . [Thepun i s hmen t w i ll fit the cr ime . ](23 lb li ru t /m inim”; sir/(i .s

'

a lam /d uglu tlm tsu u 1 He [she] is no t pro vor

t ione t i to h is [he r] h e igh t ) . heat t o t mak i ng su i tab le ,

(my payIt o /"iglo o E x . lmi (mg pugkulni

11 1/(i JuN / l .

)(\Vli

'

d t has th i s tO«lo w i th t hat . ) .\s a noun

,hriguy

m eans th i ng, matte r, su bje c t

propo rt ion , appearan ce.

Jix (W hat,th en , is the Aywd n

d i e d in th is ho use ) : lit.,

th ishouse was the dvmg pla ce of (my)fathe r .

"

I I I . I f a v e rbal act ion adm i ts of a place fo r its d i rect obje c t, th e latte r isgene rallv e x pressed bv 1 1 11 .

To (1 ) open ; 2 ) unco v e r .

To spr ink le from the mou th (as

('

h iname n d o c l o thes ) : llso to

bu bb le up (as wate r from a foun

tain o r spr i ng 1 .

To til l ; to make up.

T1 ) l ine .

To ]dan t‘

to

To co v er.

llnyhu /cdfi. -111171111ls1111 1'

11,w hatoper

o r un co v e red . A 111; 11111911 11k1is,the means by w h ich opened or

u n c o v e red . A 111; the.

place opened o r u n co v e red ; a lsothe pe rson o r obje c t u n co v e red .

('

o ntracted man y t imes to

espe c ia l l y fo r the imperat i v e . E x

] 1’

11t s 131 1 1110 11 111} p into (open the.

d oo r ) .

311 11111 11 114 . A 111] the p lac e o f

su ch spr i n k l i ng, o r the obje c t so

t reated . Pix [151 1 115 bug/16 11 11111

(d on’

t Spr i nk let he c lo thes from the m o nth ) .Th e re is a lso an id iom : Rug/16 11 11111711 11111 111 1 111} (1 111111 111 1 11111 110 1f (treat.u s o n ac c ount o f you r new c lothes ) ;“wet d own y ou r new s tr i pes.

”

Alb a/11 11 11 13. A 111; 11 11 111i11 , the p lace ofnlli1 1g, o r mak i ng up. E x Mug1 1 11 11 13 1111 1 11; [1 111 1 1111 dulmn i (makeu p tw e l v e [a d o z en] 1’11 111i1 1 111 1 1

1 1 1 1 1; 111 1 1 17111? (1 ts t l (ti l l the(11 1111311 11 1/ M UG/d ru se .

’

(Shal l I tillthe glas ses . .lI 1111p 11 111‘

1.

w ith g ra v e accen t , s tress o n nex tto las t syl lab le means to begin ; togo v e rn ; to head ; to lead ; to pre

s id e . Jl1 1 111 11 111'

1, to go ahead or in

fron t .

M1 1 11s 1 111711 . . l111; s1 111 11 1'

1 11,the p lace o f

l1 11 i11g, e tc . , also the im perat i ve .

. l111; {so/111 1 , the mate r ia l . 51111511 ,shoe o r sanda l . Kw apiu , a leaf(o f a boo k ) o r sh eet (o f paper ) .

manv lea v es , sheets ,o r fo ld s o f l i n i ng .

"1 11111 1 111111 (2 ) al so to bear hate or

ranco r towar d ano the r . A 111; (11111

11 1 1 1 1 , the p lace o r manne r O f p lanting . I'ix

[ 1 1 1 1 1111 1 1 1 11 (o i/( 11 1 111 1 111} 111 1ik 1'

1111

1J11 1 11 1 1 1 (Thomas p lan ted h is fie ldb y mach i ne ry ) . . \s has beenNo ted be fo re

,bes id es a c on trae

t ion , the re is a t ranspos i t ion be

twee n 1 1 and 111 w i th th is d efin ite.

.ll1 11/t11k 1'

11 ( l ) to co verup; to l i sh from many m noes ,

ge tt i ng the fish in be tween . A 111]w hat co v e red or the p lace.

Talc/ 1 1311 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 ( co ver the

TAGALOG LANGU AG E . 1 43

IV. An is enerally used to ind icate the person affe c ted by an ac t ionwith v e rbs ich require a pe rson as the d i rect ob je c t .

To menace ; to th reaten . . l11g pug/1111111111 , the per

so n m enaced o r th reatened .

To fr igh te n hy rush i ng ou t from ”11 11111111911. to trigh ten

h id ing and shout i ng. m u c h . - l11g [1111111111111 o r 11 11 11 11 11111

glu in ,the pe rson thus fr igh te ned .

K 111111l1al11gl111 11g 1111 111 1, a mar v e louswo rk . 1t11 1111 1/11 11

'

117lg1115 (th is [is] a most wond erful

To d im in ish (of itse l f ) . 1311 1111 1 110 3 . 311191111 1103 , to d im in ishby ou ts ide agen cy. Any 111 1111 111111,w hat d im in i shed . Any (1 1 1 1111 81171

,

the plaee (01,1rresp. to A ug

p11gb1 1 111 1s 11 11 , p lace (co rresp . to

the pe rson to w hom some

th i ng is gixen th us . JIabu uu s,to

d im i n ish ( i nan . act ion ) . A ug 1

71111 111 114

,w hat taken from . Make

1111 111111,to cau se to d im i n ish . Aloy

7111111 1 111 1s , to o rd er or req uest to

d im in ish . E x : [111 11 1 11111 1 1 11111 11111 111]71111 1 1 111! 11 1/11 1 .1/1u l (take someth ingout o f th ose jars ) . Jinn/111 11113

1 111 1117 11 1111 191 1 red u ce t he p r i ce .

1 11 11 111 1 11 so

l ("in no t le t it fa l l in low

11 1 1 11 111; 11 1 1 1111 1 11 (the w indhas d im in ished now

To give . fll111/11 11j 11y. A ug111 1 1 1 1 111 111, w hat was o r has been

g i v en . . 11111 the pe rson re

ce iving a g i ft . . l111/ t he

pe rson to u hom some th i ng u as o r

has been gi en . .l11 1p11yl1 11/1111 , gen

e rou s ; lihe ral; i nd u lge nt . .ll11 1111

gu y, to g i v e m u c h ; to la\ ish . li x .

1 111 11 1 1 1 1 1, 1 11 1 11 1111 1 11 (W hat (lid

you gi\ e . ) 13111111111 1111 1 1111 1111

gh t‘m e it l i tt le

re freshmen t [to eat] . [1111111111 11111

1 1 1 1 111; 1 11111; (g i v em e som e eggs if th e re are any ) .

N1 1111 1 1 11 ( l ga v e itto J uan 351 7 1 1 111 1114

l o ( I w i l l gi v e it to Tom as ) . A 1 11;

“ hat la v i s h ed . E x ;

111 1 111} {he haslav ished all th i s ) .

111 1 111) 11 111 1 11 ( th 1 vare 111\ ish ingalltllih ) . [pH / 1 1 1 11 1 1 111 1 1] 11 1 11 111 1 111 1 11 1]

(Y o n w ill la\ i s h all th i s . )

TO trade or sell ri ce. fling/1 1111 18 . the se l le ro r d ea l e r in r i ce . 11111 11 1] [1111 11

1 1 1 1 1/ 11 1'

11 1 11;11 1g1 1s 1 1 11 ( he mad e

that m on e ) s e l l i ng ( t rad i ng ) r i ce ) .

to ask fo r a l i tt le r i ce(see part i c le

1 44 TAGALOO LANGUAGE .

To guard ; watch ; look out.

To charge against (as a debtor ) .

To d ress one’s self.

To deceive.

Magbantay. Also means to make a

bird snare from bamboo . Mamantay, to catch bird s w ith a“ bantay. Ang namantay, what

caugh t . Ang binabanlay or an

pinup agbabantay, the person stau

ing guard , watching or look ingou t . Ang bantayan , the sen trybox . post ; watchtower ; look out

place. Also Aug pagbanh ryan.

Aug Inmtaydn (l th ing or person

guar de dor watched ; also imperative without art . E x . : Bu ntaytin

mo itong Inihay 116 (watch th is

house ) . B iuantaydn ko (mg comr

tel (I was on guard at the bar

racks ) . B innbantayén n iyd anycuartel (he is on guar dat the barracks ) . (2 ) arms or scales or

correctness of the balance . (3)A bamboo bed for sick personsunder which a fire may be made.

lllagbmllaydn , to make such a bed .

Aug bantayanin, the material; (mglmnlayanan, the la c

eof such a be d.

Magbinlang. (2 ) o bear false tes

t imonvagainst another. Angp agbintauqan (l the person charged :

(2 ) the person sworn against

falsely . Ang ipagbin lang, w hat so

sworn , i. e. , the testimony. Ex

(1 ) P inagbintafl'

gan altonang num

pouong palms (I was charged upwith ten 2 ) ]

‘irmgbiu

tmfi/an m'

ya alto (he bore false testimony against me ) . Aug paghi

binlang, theact of swearing falsely.

Angbinta iti/amongmabinlariginmngwmpagbintang, the person w ho habitually swears falsely; rjurer.

Dumnmit. Daramlin , clot es (pres.

tense ) . Ang domain , the person

d ressed or clothed . Mugdamit, to

d ress or clotheanother. Ang pagdaramil

,the act of d ressing (pres.

tense) . ll!" ramil, to cause or

order to be c othed . B IL ! Pru-mnidu mo ung walang dam

-it (clothethose who are w ithou t clothes) .

nd i mo pinadaramttin (mganak mo? (\Vhy don

’t you clothe

you r ch ild?) S apagka

’twald ukong

maibili nanydamit (because I havenothing to buy clothes w ith ) .

Mayday/d . Angpagdayaan , the person deceived . Ang darayd , theact of deceiving. n arayd , to

perm it dece tion . Magparayd to,perm it the eception . Parayd , toconsent or allow one

’

s self to hedeceive d. Ma rayd , fraudulent ;cheating (ad j .


compassion . Ex Kaauanmom’

(have charity [or compassion] or

h im) . AngHnaauaan, what givenin charity or extended in compassion . . tng ih

'

naaud , the cause of

giving in charity or extend ingcompassion . Makaaud , tomove to

compassion . Magmakanua, to beable tomove to compassion . (And ,is generally red uplica ted . EL :

Nagmamakaaud aud aké {longd ukhd

(this poor [)person] moves me to

compassion Ang ipinagmama

bou nd , the cause of being able tomove to compassion . Paaud , toask for charitv; to lead or beg formercy, etc . EL :

’apaaud siycim

akin (he begged me for mercy) .To hear (casually) . .llaririic

'

fig. [hrmiri'

gig, to hear pur

Angn aririgig, what heardAng d ifi

'

gin, what heard

purposely,as conversation d irectedto person . Ang d iri

'

gdn the person listened to . An ind icates person ,

in the th ing, w ith th is verb

and the following one, also others

wh ich will be seen in other places.

.

‘llaku ririfqig, to be able to hear.

Mugl'

aririgig, to be deceive dby thehearing. .llagpafi ri

'

gig, to force

another to listen . E x . : ll’

u hi akon

dhi'

gig (I heard noth ing) ; lit .,

“ l(was) without hearing.

”Nariri

'

gigmo (mg sirmbi kc? (Did you hearwhat I told you?) Hind iko nartngig(I (lid not hear ) ; I was not able tohear.

”Nakad iriri

'

gig Ira bagd? (Didou hear?) L it . :

“Are you hear

ing?”Nag/taro? (in aké (myhear

ing deceived me?(I ) To untie ; to loosen ; (fig. ) K unmlag. Ang kalgin, what untiedfree ; (2 ) to absolve . or loosene d. Aug talgtin , person

set at liberty or absolved . Augkalagparifgao, the jailor’s fees informer times, when set free.

V . In actions by wh ich the subject tries to d raw someth ing to h imself,an stands to r the person from whom that someth ing is d rawn .

To ask for ; to req uest. Ilmn irifqi. Makahirigt, t o obtain brequesting. Makehirijifl, to thanfor. Aug hifi

‘

gin, what askedfor. Any him

’

wfij t, what was or has

been asked for. Aug bir‘min, the

person from whom asket E X ’

Ako'

g humiri'

gi nany mafigd bun'

ga’

y nakohi131i abd (I asked for somefruit and got it for the ask ing) .

an importunate per

son . See also magbilt, to sell;kumu ha, to take ; dumain to eu

treat ; humdnap, to look for; and

TAG ALOG LANGUAG E . 1 4 7

tumangap, to accept or receive

wh ich , among others, use these

same forms.

VI . Roots wh ich express the ideas o f com ing or going, when verbal

iz e d. take an for the person affected by th e action , and i or ika (ilcina ) torthe reason or time of such action .

To come here . P umu rito. I’arilo,come here . . tng

ipinar ilo, the reason or time of

com ing here (pas t tense) . Also

any ikinapar ilo. . lng p inar itohm i .

the pe rson (or the place ) who wasthe object. of the action . Ex . :

Ami (m y ikimiparilo mo so I ’d

85g? (W hy d id you come here to

I’asig?) .

‘lling lid/my ( ing pinari

tohan mo .

"(W h ich ho use d id you

come to?

) I ’umnrilo has been d is

cussed previously. P imm roon fol

lows the same ru le aspumarito and

has also been explained . )

VI . An is rare as an end ing to the d irect object of a verb . Some verbs,however, wh ich wou ld naturally take m to r the d irect ob j ect su bst i tu te an

therefor on accoun t o f eupliony. as th e wo rd s are con tracted .

To salt ; (2 ) to make salt .

To pav for.

To no te ; to experience ; to perceive .

To pierce .

To grasp ; to hold .

lIu g/m roo d . .

‘lng pagmamltin : (mgmu sdd n any u rn /maid (iiid e f. ) w hat no ted , e tc . .lfogpa

no te d, to o rd e r to no te . A ug

]mpugmumhin ,the per

s on ord ered

to no te . - lng w hat.

o rd e re dto he no ted .

one w ho no tes , perce ives o r ex

pe riences a great deal.

TH IN G /( 1h . lo f] M I) ,in , W ll‘d t pierced .

Tuw alah is also to become d u ll"

(as a kn ife ) . .llrn/lo lu b, ( l ) to

pene trate d eeply ; (2 ) to d ye w ith

the lu lu !) ro o t . . tng [N igh t/Mm “

what pierce d deeply . . lng lu lu hin ,

w hat i lved . . lug eta/ob, the instru

i i ie i i t .

xlll lf/f l q /H N . . llig/ (U ri/tin o r

umm . hat grasped o r he ld . . lng

llagusin . . lug (m ain, what salted ;

inu smin,w hat was o r has been

salted . . lug/ pu /uusimm , the salt

pan ; also the tltce llar. - luynugousin ,

the person who eats salt

on rice o r fund . .Vu kil lsin ,to ask

fo r a little salt .

Moglmym f . . lng bag/u ran ,w hat.

paid fo r ; the ob ligat ion . Th is

verb also has the idea o f coveringup, and o riginally mean t

“to bu y

o r se ll slaves .

”Ex I

‘l/ony hu t/o

ru n (my lilt ing] mo (you r Ob ligat ionis to pay you r d ebt [pay what vouowe ]

{l l To try ; (2 ) to sample :und erstand a person

To lu0 k at ; to ie \v.

To learn .

V II . Som e roo ts use d w ith in w ith u m, marl, e tc .

, tak e on wh en conju“ ate d w ith ”HU I/M .

To t r °at We ll: to prospe r. .Vummgu /ing. l‘ixJ

( t reat h im [her] we ll) .

l ll . . lu som e t imes replaces the prepo sitio n so when the latte r means

to . as an im plies that the su b ject parts w ith some th ing,in the fo llow ing

e xamples . Acq u isit ion w ith the same cons tru c tio n l fo r") is express ed bvi.

l‘Ix . : rice ) . .\ lso expressml:u lcai

'

g/ m u ; hin ig‘wiu i i i/ti N ihmg li ly/1

,

18 . i t w ill be c learly seen that the d e li

ll ite i l ve rbal l ln lll) . Niu o IN N /d (m y [m un/hilhdn "ifld )m ug Runny c'l l’myo

( to wh om has h e so ld [d id he se ll] ) o tl t’ h o rse

?) I ’inuglfi/hd n n iyci (my ku ni

ya ng) [scribigm l (h is pu rchase r was a fr ien d o f h is ) . Also expressed : - lngI'm/hiya“ [I N /l l H u g) b ig/«i.

IX . . In w ith ce rtain no un o r verbal ro o ts ind icates place . The first svl

lab le o t'

th e ro o t is red uplicated fo r ro o ts adm itt ing: co ntraction or begin

n ing w ith

llu } n - leaf pipe r be tel l.

Bam boo (bam bnsa l.

Cocoanu t palm

used to grasp or hold w ith . Sy'

n

ilaghaucd ,wh ich means generallv

to hold or grasp bv tw .o lu '

x

Way Iumal (th i nyayon (I am busvnow [or to alay]

Tam i/sim . . lny tiknuin, w hat sam

pled . (Adm its in comb ined w ith

pa . ) E x ' l ’ulikmin mo 177m ab }

wilting filo /c (allow me to try this

w ine ) . Tilumin mo (taste it ; sam

ple it ) .Tummym , (2 ) .

llugtmgiu , to look at

much or b y many. Vagina/mum,

to look at each o ther. llagtiffiyinti/i

'

gimm ,to look at each other

closely . . lng tiu iifgin, w hat was orhas been looked at . A nglin iliz f qin,

what is beinu loo ke dat . . tnq h ugmm what lo oked at ; alone im pera

what lookedat m uch o r bvmany. Ang i/h a

’

gin,

the cause or w ith what,i. e .

, thecve . Aug {lmg (ipinug ) tmgin . thecause o f tim eh loo k ing or bvman ) ,

also the eves o f manv, etc.

llnmim l. lug pagam ltm , w hat isl 'arned . . lug pagu rnhin , theso u rce o f learn ing,

i. e .,th e teacher

o r book t' tt ' .

]hm i. -lt al gard en .

K a rim /(m . Annoy/(m u n, bamboo

gro ve o r th icket . Va” k ’aw lyan .

( Have (yo u ,o r is the re] any bam

b o o?! Knmu ww lm

, tu th row bambo o weapo ns at ano ther. A uglm ummnm

,the o bject o r person.

to cu t bamboo . Aug

[M ug/N im yu u . the instrumen t , l. e . ,

the bo lo o r hatchet , etc.

Av

on] . .Vh lyvm , cocoanu t grove.

Ku u iuytm , place o f many cocoanut

palms . A l l/NU NHNI M ay, a singlet ree . I whoong niog, a cocoanut.

‘orn

,e te .

ti'

wages .

souners are lcavmg [ i le I O “ U ) .

Su nn il11 1y. A 11 1} 1 1 11I1 1 1y, what sow 11

i. e the grain . . I71g 3 1111 111111 11, the

place , the field , rice pa1ld \ . Fx .

as \ e rhs : I s l/111.

1] 1111 1 101 (sow'

th is ) .

[mi/111 1} 111 11 1113s 1t 51111 711] (1 1211 11 (s o

th is 1 11 yo u r field ) . 521 11 11111 1 11. 111 1 1

111151 11 111} or 1 1 111] 1111 1 11 1}

51 111 11111 1 11 111 11 sam e t ran .

latio n as w i th except in the first

the emphas is is on th 1 act , and on

the place in the second . .lfugsd

Imy, to sow m uch . A ny 1

'

p11ys1'

1

(my,w hat sow n thus . (See tab les

fo r co n jugat ion of .wn .

from Sp. j 11[1 1i11 , soap. E x .

A nd (1 111) s 1'

1 1 1 1s1 1I1 1'

111 111 1 1 ? (w hat areas h ingw ith

111 11 1 1 111] 1111 111 11 (use soap w ith the.

c lo thes ) . Wald sub/111 ( lhave no soap) . -lI 1

’

I1'

I.' 11 11 1 1 1111 1 1 1

In?” (h u y some soap ) . I t w ill hesee n that assim ilated foreign W o rd s

fo llo w the same rules as nativeo nes in all respects.

May/1 11 1 1 1 11 . . I 11 1/ what th row n

away . lix 111111 11 11 11111 1112 (th rowth is away 11111 11133a h ibiy;[1 11111111 1 11 111 1 1 11 1 11; b ibiy 11 11 13; or (1 111)

1 1 11 11 1110 11 111 ; (th rowth is in to the water [in o rd er to getri d o f it] l .

- Iuy W hat set

up th us . the place .

( 1 ) [11 1 1113 1 1 1 11 1711 11 1; 1111 1 11 1/1i I1(1/1 11 1 ( se t these po s ts [pillars] uprio h t l 111 1 11 1; [1111111 1 1111 1111 1] siyd

I 1 1 1 1 1/ [n u /(1 1111 111111 11 1111 119 1 1I 1 11 1} b1iI1m/

(I am go ing to pu t up mvh o use 111

t h is .1 rd 1 7 11 11111311 1 , to stand erect(an imate he ing l. ]‘ix A ny 3 1111

1 I1 1I11 s1 1 I111r11p 7111 1111

11 11 111 1 (the so ld ier isstand ing [s tand s] e rect in fron t o f[l1ef1 1re ] l1is co nnnan tle r) Malay/1,in he 1 re 1 t ( inan imate ohject1 1 1 1} 111 1 1 1 1 111 ; Il 1 1/1 1/l 111 1 11 1] (I I. 719 b11I1ay

I l llt ’ | N lS i9 ( If HI V ilO llSt‘

s tan d [are ] uprigh t ) . ”11111 11 11!1 lso 1 1 11 ans u prigh t , h u t. generallvI I I 11 ll in l

‘

tl l sense .

11 1 11111 1

. I 1 11] 1 1 11 11 1 , the wage or pay.

. I 11 1/ 1 1/1 1 1I1 1 1 1 1 , pe rson paid or what

pai d fo r , as 1 rente d house, etc.

rad ieally in their meaning w ith 11 111 and 111119, or rather in opposite way s

from a neu tral po in t . W ith o ther roo ts 1111 11; expresses in tensit y°

of 11 hat is

expressed primarily w ith 11m. l'

111,11

°

l1i1 1 l1 is found in the so-vailed indefi

n ite ,changes to 11 1111111 in the pa

s t and presen t tenses , and d rops ou t in the

fu tu re ten se . Th ere are also plupe rfect and futu re perteet tenses, bu t the)°

are no t ge nerally used . For the 1°

1 1njugatio11 of a root w ith 11 111 see tin1

tab les . The re are some irregu larities w ith some roots wh ich are no ted in

the prope r place . I n the meehan ieal structu re of the language 11 111 is pre

fixed to ro o ts beginn ing w ith a v owel and in fixed between the first letterand the fo llow ing Vo wel o f a co nso nan t roo t .

I I . The ph ilo logist K eane gave t i . W . I ’arke r,au thor of the G rammar

o f the Malagasy Language the fo llow ing in formation as to

the u se and o rigin o f i1 1ti\ 1 1s,11 h ieh applies to Tagalog as 11

°

ell.

The in fix s 1 | lal1le 11 111 11 111 ) is a featu re 11 I1 11 h Malagasvhas 1 11

1 1 1 11111 11111 11 ith K hm e r (Camho jan l, 1111 1 11 111 1 s e ( s i1 11’h ilip

pine An h ipe l1 1, and no d o u bt o the r 1 111 1 111 l1e 1°s o f the \ I 1 llavo- I’olj nes 1 11n

fam ily .

K hmer : S lop , dead ; sum/11,1, to k ill. Ja vanese : ”11 11 111,flame ; 11 11 11111

71

1111,(1 1 inflame , Malay : P ili/1

,t1 1 (

' l11 11 is 1 1

; 1~ho i1°e. Tagala :

Bo w,to rea d (id ea o f read ing ) ; 11 11 11 1 111 1 1 , to make u se o f read ing (to rea dl.

( h iginallv 11 pre fix . as it st ill is in Sam oan ( l3x ; ll1 1l1 1,un ripe ; 11 10 11 10111,

to d ie 1 1 11111 11 1 th is part i1 le s eem s t 1 1 ha1 e w o rk ed its 11 1 1 1 in to the l1o 1l1 ° o i

the 11 1 1 1 1 1 l1 1° a p1°

1 11 11

s s o f 1 1 11 1 t11th 1 1s is analogo us to the t ransposition common

to m o s t languages (1 1 11 111111 1 11 Anglo -S: 111 1 1 111 11 1 w ith

I I I . As has heen s t11 t1 1 | , 11 111 is ge 1111 1 11111 ° u sed to express the simple 1111

1 1f t l1 111gen t , 1 1tl1er to 11 11 1 1l l1i1ns1 lf o r o thers p | o 1 11 le1I the

11-t io n is no t 1 1 1 1 11 liti1 1 1l I1)

°

1 1 1nd it io ns o f t ime (no t tense ) , man ner, instru

m ent num her (plur 1 lit 1 ) , o r o t l11 rw is e 1 arrie 1 l awav from its simplest\ I: 111 1 ro o ts 11 1lniit ho th 11 11 1 and 111 1 1 1; w ith little d ifferem 1 1 in mean

ing, and lame11 it is o ften 1 litli1 u lt to 1l1 1_ i1 le upon a 1 h o i1 e h e tween them ,

hu t it is ge ne rally safe to use 1 1 111 . .

t

\gain , 1 111111 1°

roo ts d iffe r w id elv withth e two part i1 l1

1s . [ 111 r1 1 f1 rs mo re to su hje1 t and h is a1 t ion,111ag to the

o hjeet and the a1 t io n o f the v e rb upon it .

h u m s 1 11‘

R1 11 1TS.

o f re f1_1 1r1 nee the roo ts conj ugated l11 ° 11 111 ha v e been ar

raged in to 11 11111 111 red paragraphs, those fo llo w ing the regu lar 11

1 111 j ug 1 t 11 111l1ei11g gi1 1

1 n in I M I ll, 1111 1 l th o se l1a1 mg irr11 1 1 u |a1 ities com ing und er

I’

ar . I I I .\ I . l ) i11 1inu ti1°

1 s are treated in

I . Ito o ts 11 h u h 1l1 1 111 1t 1 1 1 | llallti1 s 1 ap1ll1le O f he ing slow l1 ° assim ilated 111th e 111 ' 1 11t fo rm t he tirst e lass . I l11 1 1 1 11r1_

1s1 111 1e 1 11 11 erhs 11 h it I) are \ erbai

iz ed | 1 1°

1 1 11 1 in 1 1 rt1u n t ases .

To gro w dark . 311 191111111 1 , to grow \‘

P l'

ydark . 1 111 1] 11111 11111 11

,w hat is o h

se u red l1y darkness . ( 1 11111 111111111311,the o s ier with w hieh fish eo rrals

tied . ] h linu in is also the name

o f 11 1 illage near E x .

w ith 11 111 11 111} gubi

(The n igh t is grow ing d ark ) . . Ingthe eehpse

o f the sun . .lfu d i/h n

,to he o v er

tak en l 1y d ark ness ; also ad j . dark ,

1 1i1s 1 °

i 1re . lax 1 \'

1 1 1I111'

111 1m kom i

(1 1 1 1 1 14 (W e were o v ertaken hy d arkness on the road ) .”1 11 11111 1 1 1 1 1 ! ( I t 18 dark already) .

111 1 It 1s dark yet ) . Manto t ra v e l 111 1larkness . E x

1 11 11 1 1 11, 1111 1 111Iilim iyang cabayo (DO

TAGA LOG LAN G UAG E . 1 55

To grow up ; to become large,

To grow cool or cold (as food

drink ) .

To grow w h ite ; to b leach out .

To increase , etc .

I I . Um is used to ind icate in ten tional ar ts ml’

d es truc tion,«lznn zlge , e tc . ,

bythe agencyof an annnate being . I f m used by an inunn natc ugvnvy ,

such destruction or damage is explessed IN mu ka (nu ku ) . J‘Ix A ny lin

not tra v el in the dark w ith that

ho rse ) . .lluku d ilim , to heeome

dark (not lim ited to a slo w process,as w ith um . )

'

I izyd ilim , time or

season of dark ness. Tw iligh t ,(alum /5m .

Lam a/xi. lax L ung/nu lls; « In? sa

.\q m ih

‘

l (l grew up in Man ila ) .

.llq gfiuki, tn increa

s e ; to mak e son ie

th ing larger. . lng lu klu in , w hat

made large r. - lngagent . Mu ka/uki

,to cause or to be

able to grow larger. . Iny {Lu lu /sf,the cause . A nypu kuM/J h iu ,

w hatis to lie made larger . A

’

u lu klu'

m,

(ahs . ) siz e . Aug Imlab lu kilm u,

the Ve ry largest. Ala/m in im“ , to

grow greatly ; or too large . Jing

pu /u lci, to rear (as a (°il ilt i l ; to ed u

cate . l‘lx Nina (my M tg/Impala“

su ij/ei.’( \Vho reared y o u

?

) A ny(Using w m o

’

y aimi ng wugpu lu ki m

(My grand parent as the one

w ho reared me ) . JIM/«11.2

h ig ; large .

]m numu g. Ex I / tlum ig any at :

(The tea w ill become en ld ) . . tug“ ai m/«mu g a ny ilxalamo

'

g/

the cause . .‘It l j lll l lll ifl, tnan y th ing . Aug [u n i fy/rm , w hat

coo led . . lny pu ka/rum yin , w hat

]ilit to enol. .llagpu lmm q , to pu t

ou t to vim l. .lfalvm u

'

g (ad j . l, en ld :(fig . .lIu /um ig N tl banta or NH Mob

,

Co ld -hearted .

I ’um u ti. l‘ix Pu ngnmpu ti (my Im

Iu kh zk (The flower is gro w ingW llite l. . ln gpu f f“

,W llz lt b lt 'at‘lled .

fif ty /pu t}, to w hiten anyth ing . A nyipu fi, the m eans o r the w hiten ingmate rial. . lng Ind ium,

hat w h it

ened , as the wall, e tc . A ny puglmpu tin , what w h itened greatly .

A ny Isa/m liu n nany film”, the w hite

o f the egg. Kapu h'

a n,w h iteness

(abs ) .

from

E xt : A nd any lug/Hy"(my u nni ma?

(How is yo u r fathe r? ) L u ngm n lu blu i a ny sakit (”isillness is inereasing ) .N i l xii/t i (”O is lH‘fi l

'

t lt ' tltll'

s (lm ir )lit . lle is e x eeed ing ly ill. JingIuhlu i. to incr ease u nie h : trig. ) to

he in ipnd e n t . lm sex

t i/J u (Yn ll are tu n fo rward w ith

“ N “\

‘

U ll are ill llillt lt‘li t to tne l.

«Io!m ; mu’

m sirii s f : brihag/ (the earthq uake destroved the house ) . E xamples

in th is elas~_4 w ith um :

To k ill; (2 ) to ex tingu ish ; to pu t I’umu luy. l‘lx . : Altobagfi (my papa

nm (as a ligh t ) . My ihmg (hm? (Shall I pu t th is

ligh t o u t . (Hind i, akci log/a any

]mpu tfl y (no ,I w ill pu t it ou t mv

se lf ) .

To d estrov. Su uu'

rc‘

:

n s t' t lil' t ' i t ) .

ll l . \ s a ge ne ral ru le . m \‘

e rh s

The re w rs e i no t a lwm t i ne.

lng sirain , what destroyed .

l'ix . lm3u ug s u umn ird nu ngmu ugcl

halamu n .

’(\Vhat has d estro yed

the plan ts?

) . Iug "uni/fl bait ing( In !) swu ng lu ng/m il l“ ! nrmg («that

(the Itmasts ha v e w iped o u t exery

th ing ) . ( la z u l i/m 1, to d e vastate ;ex te i n i inate ; “ ipe n llt ; lay was te ;d es tro ) l. . luy is b

'd, the t i l llse O f

d e s t rne t io n . "award , to d estrov

l l l ll( h . 1m] pugs iru in , what th tisd estrtn ed . lax P lum/s t rd 1mm;nu n /7p} In t/m u (long mange: Imlamvlit

(the pigs haxe destroved these

plan ts greatly ) . .llu ru mmg hala

mu u u m ] [n iu lqm'

un d HIM (manv

plan ts are being des trm ed [Inthem ] : r the ) are doing nmehdamage

H

to the plants ) . .llas irrl,

to d es tro y ed ; to spo il. Sin i,spo iled . Nin i IN l cmg mah tm ls (the

prese r v es i re spo iled already ) .

to eanse to d estro y .

d estrue th e . Any 015”

sirrl. the ( anse o f spo iling (m tg)

pre se n t tense ) . 310

n o d , to d es tro y irreparab ly ; eon ]

ple te I} o r (2 ) Iiy man y . (I d iom . l

.llvtm ru m / 1m m, to d est ro y the

ho no r o f ano the r ; to d isho no r.

Mug/Am i : vis u al,

to be d estroyed( O lliplt tt

‘lV . l ix . lm / pinu qk‘

nla\ t l llM l lN U l mu n] ma u l/u Im uu

’

u mu )

,um/w hal e} destrovs towns

(fig . eo u n tries ] eo n iplete lyS im ; (M r/ti (my s u ngnm inog

I l l /M I N , (Ml/H U I ) U l ( \VllO bu rnedth is ho u s e?) . Ij/u

'

rmn nk-i, p4i ( 1

d o n'

t k no w , sir ) . . lng sim hmg( :w h i t was o r has, been se t fire to ) .lim p / mm ) , to bu rn np (in ten tionlll\ lm ] pumgm inoq , w hatliniu e ci np th u s . .

\Iu scinoy, to b u rn

u p ; to he harned . E x Nag/min ty.\ u / t i a n ] ; «im im/ ’) llhfl ’l (he bu rnedo n ! h o u se ) . .\ uminog any lim ingIu t/u m ho u s e bu rned d own ) .

to e .inse to se t fire to ;ils o to he hn rned . as from ano ther

h o u s e , e te . to su ffer

( man y ) from a eonflagration . S u

u m /, m n tlag rat in n (no te accen t ) .

haw a en rre ~| m nd ing d e finite w ith in.

the ar ts o f eans ing emo t ion In others,


To lean upon ; to recline .

To lie d own .

To lie face d ownward .

To pros trate one’

s self.

To lie on the side (action ) ; to placeone

’

s self on o ne’s sid e .

To lie on the back (action ) ; to placeone

'

s se lf on the back .

T o cro u ch on hand s and feet (notbend ing k nees ) .

T o sit d own ; to take a seat .

To sit d own to rest (briefly) .

\'

I . I'

m is used to express v olun tarily o r in v o lun tarily (bu t consciously)p

erform ed life-suppo rting actions and o rgan ic functio ns o f the bod y ,e xcept

some wh ich are used w ith way, an d a few w ith man . Some actions o f

i nan imate objects also follow th is ru le .

T o eat . K umm'

n . (Partly explained be fore . )Ji f fy/co in , to eat m uch ; o r byman y .

.llnylcm nlmiwm

,to n ibb le

l'lx . : siyd , he is

n ibb ling (pre tend ing to eat

.llm f yu in , to eat co n t inually ; to d e

v ou r. -llumiu , ed ible .\Iu

ab le to be eaten . .llaypu

Irwin , to gi v e fo od to ano ther persono r an imal. . luy pvt/mm ”

,w ho o r

what led . - Iuy our/min ,the food

giv e n . d ay pu ku u imm ,the place .

l‘iX J Palm /cu m It‘l l Juan ( tlSk

Juan to give y o u so lne th ing to t-at ) .

Ipupo h n'

u w e so coc im '

ro [to n y

[m id (Te ll the co o k to gi\ c th is law

(ch ild ) Som e th ing to eat [f i t/col

h im /i mo pinat a/n u n flow ; mu u yo

W h y are n’

t ) o n fe ed ing the se

pe o ple I’m/J u n ”um u yu s cld

,feed

tllt ‘l l l . - lm l H u g]”H U MAN /u n i t NU ) M l

[wo o /W t W hat are y o u g i v ingthem [to I

’om imm A!) w ill

) um y t have give n the n i

Humiliy. Ang ihilig, what part ofthe body leaned upon . A ny hili

gu n ,the place ; (co uch . etc. (I la

miligis to weave .

”No te accent . )

Humigr‘

z . (Pre v iously explained in

detail. )Tumnob. to place another

face downward .

D umupd . .llu rupd , to fall prostrate

(accidentally) .Tmuugilid . Mag/(agilid , to be lyingon the side (state ) . Augpalagiliu ,

the positio n o f lying on the side .

Hilid is sid e ; also en trance to a

house .

Tum i/myd . to be lying on

the back (state ) . ix lid/cit ka

m zlililu zg/d .

’(W h are you lying on

you r back ? ) .Viipah’

lmyd , to fallon the back . . lny potihayd , the

posit ion o f be ing on the back .

Tum u od . .llagpu tuud , to stand on

all fo u r feet (as an animal) .(

'

m u l id (o ne ) . .‘f m/upd (more ) .

.llu upd, to be Seated (state ) . r ingthe sitting position . E x

[M’

y go g/(w in "m ug mu ng pu upd

(Th is w ill ha v e to be d on e bvvouwh ile sit ting d o “ n ) .

i llllg/[il'

i lui . lng/ Ilkmuan,the resting

place .

Lumumou . \lready ex plained . )>r seed s o f fru it . L unu nm /c. - lny lanol in , \shat swal

lowed .

I'

uu

'

n um . Mug/51mm , to d rink m uch

or b y manv. ( l’art lv explained

be fo re . ) . luq pom in um ,who or

w hat ci\ en ad rink . Aug gu l f/mm ,

the d rink gi v en . ] u lm m lm, ha

b itual d rin ke r. l'

minum has an

irrewu lar fo rm o f conj uwatio n like”Mum/is .

a ngoli . K u lagok , a swallow . K u

ku lago lc, onlvone swallo w .

o

to grin . Aq umw

arilvi.

c ry l lllit' i lV .

Also maguyw : and ngmgn. Iug i ng/m o r any ipu

th e cause o f show ing the

tee th,

o r the m o u th an d tee th .

lny finn izfi/m'

lum, t he person or

animal the tee th show n to . Syn ,

Th e w ild hog is called

\ gis iwhen the tusks begin to show .

A'

yum ili. . lng tug/iii. the sm ile o r the

li lfl lltll . . lru ] 117/Ilia", the person

o r o bject sm i led at th us.

Tummm . .‘Il lyflltlt l, to laugh m uch ,

o r b y a few . to laugh

( by man y ) . Tatu m : mmg talcum ,

to laugh and laugh ove r again .

JIMg/HmHW N, to laugh at each

othe r . . lNg/Mm u um,hat laughed

‘tt by o ne o r a few . . Iug pug/lau

tlm iu , \Yllz lt laughed at b y many.

lug (h u n t,the ( d llN ' (o ne o r it’W ) .

. l/q/ (IN Iy/N l l l l, the cause ( if manv

laugh ing. Jim/(um,to laugh invol

u n tarily ; to giggle . lid /a t I n 7m

Iu lm m .

’ h ) are y ou giggling so? )

,llu lmhm u o r nmgpu hmu

, to cause

laugh te r . . lug ( owe d, the com

pan io n in laugh te r . .Vaivnmn in,

laugh ing pe rs o n .

n u n /N I. \ lso h ihikh fbils. Ango r Hm } ck’I /l t

i

lu k,the ca use .

A \ ariat io n ls h um im bil.’ o r h im/l ik

him /i lk .

L ' l lli l l /I li . - lny u ogllt Iuhd ,the eyes

bed d ing tears . . Ing i/nhd,the

tears . - lug [um /u lum n , the pe rsonbe fo re w hom tears are shed

,etc.

to she d tears u ncon

M' icand y . (my Iuhd ,

the tears are t rick ling.

-\ lread y explaine d. ). lug} b ilik

, the snorer.

I I I /m il l i lr, var. Im m igub.

last \vo rd s also m ean“to

-llagh i/ik , to snore much .

, lu f} pl igh t/1k, the great snorer.

To bud .

To sprou t (eslw cially of tu bers, likethe an d the comolc

'

To spro u t (as sucke rs fro m the trunk

o f o r at the fo o t o f a t ree ) .

well ou t , as water from a well or

spring. A 1 11; 3171 11 11211, the months

d u ringw h ich the rice sprou ts, etc.

l’

mw bo uy, from usbong, bud . Magusbongl, to ha v e buds. Syn .

,111111 1211 and

t1yb1is . L'

11111gl1128 , to h ud , to sprout .

E x . w ith 1111011 1111: L'

ngnomsbouy 1111

11 1111 111 1 1 1151 1 L‘1

'

1/11 111 (the trees are

budd ing ou t now ) .S u nn i/11 1. from 3 11101

,a sprout .

A 111; the tree .

Vi l l . I'

m e xpresses ( 1 1 meteoro logical phenomena, provided the root

does no t co 1n 111ence w ith I1 ; and (22 1 as tro nom lcal trans lttons, 1f the change

is repres e n te das occu rrmg and th e phenomena are not otherw ise expressed .

Iix . 1 I

To rain ; to be raining.

To b lo w : to be blo w ing; to be w indv.

To ligh te n : to b e ligh te n ing.

Tn ln ‘> i rll1

‘l< l1 \ '

llu lll llillg .

'

f 1 1 1 l11 11 1 1 .

To s h ine m s the sum : to be suuu v

(1 1 ligh t .

lloyl'

u log, to thund er 8.

(1 ) Sun ; (2 )day : 1 3 ) u eather. ) .

llogd roo,t obe

Ve ry s unny. 31111211 111, to be o ver

heated b y the sun . 1111 11119 kung"111/1

'

s ka’

t ma fi

1,

l lo n’

t. go out now , becausethe sun “ ill be ou t and you w ill

(311 1 111 211 . I'

111ul11 11ul1ir1 , to d riz z le.

to sow seed or to do an y

th ing in the rain y season . . i 11gthe rainy season .

land w h ich is plan ted in

the rainy season . . lny 111011,the

rain . .ll1 1 1111i11

, to ha v e many r ains ;1 Iso to be caught in the rain . E x

kom i’

y 1111 11111 111 1 11 (We

were walk ing along and were

caugh t in the rain ) .”1 1 111 11 1 13111 (from 1111 1717111 , w ind ) .

to blow con tinuouslyo r much . 311 1 11111 11111 1771111 , to wait

un t il the w ind changes ; also to

pu t anyth ing out in the w ind .

to place one’s self

w he re the w ind is blow ing. (Noteaccen t . )

10 1 111 1 1 111 1! (from “ 1111 11, a flash Of

ligh tn inm . .llaylri1ll11 f,. t1 1 ligh ten

m uch . U l dfo rt cirIot . Sr n . , lu lat

( rare ) .

( tw in [Ju li/c. The thun

d erbo lt .

A'

11 11 1 11/1 111.

great d eal.

( 11 1 111117 ( from 111/d morn ing ) . (2 ) torise early . .

llogogd , to rise early(man y 1

, as a regimen t, e tc (3 ) to

eat early. . l11g 1 111111 1 11 , w hat eatenthu s , i. e .

, the break fas t . P 110 11

to come early . 31111912 311113, iieearly. . I111] 1111 11 1912, w hat is

11 1 be ( lu ne early .

i frt tlil lil tlu

TAG ALOG LANG UAGE . 1 63

To becom e late.

'

To become n igh t ; to do anyth ingat nigh t ; to be o v ertaken b y nigh t .

’

To grow dark .

'

To grow cloudy; dark .

'

TO grow dark ; to become tw iligh t . 8 11 111511111 . Rx : 111 11 11 1 1

(Le t us wait fo r d usk be

fo re we march Lit . Walk on”

.

(23) T1 ) pe ne t rate (as the co ld

(2 ) S o n'

s i/im 11 1 1 11 1/ (11 1 11 11; ( I 11 111

ch illed th ro ugh by the co ld ) .

'

To eclipse (lit . to be 1 1 111 1 111 13. to swallowQ

sn u l l° 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1“ i n l b ‘l t

get overheated ) . .lIau r/arao, to use

dai : l11g 11 11 1?d raodrao, what islaily or something for daily

use. Jim/1111 1211 111 , to wait un til the

sun sh ines ; (2) to wait for day;

(3 ) to sun one’

s se lf ; (4 ) to pu t anobject in the sunsh ine . E x (3)1111 11 111; 11 1 1 1151 maypad rao (Do not

sun you rself ) . (4 ) Mcigpad rao ka

111 1 111; (10 111 1! (8 11 11 the clothes ) .to con tinue at a

thing until dayligh t . Ex Nag/

pakm irao siyd ng 1111 13/1'

1ral (He

stud ied un til day ligh t ) .Hw nupon (from 11 111111 11 , the time he

tween noon and dark ; afternoon

(No rthern Un ited States ) ; evening (Southern Un ited States ) .(2 ) To go to roost

, as ch ick ens.

Mug/1 1 1 111 11,

1” day. Kuhupon ,

yeste rday. K . 11 11 1111 umagd , yes

terday mo rn ing. N. 1111 119 111 1110 11 ,vesterday afternoon (even ing ) .

K . 8 11 gabi, last n igh t . Mamuyu ng1111110 11, later in the afternoon

(e v ening ) . 31111111110 11 , to eat sup

per. Any haponan , the meal.

Jimmy/1 111111 11 (from tighapon ) , to

do some th ing in the afternoon o r

e v en ing (gene rally ap lied to

lo o k ing afte r plants , ete i)

.

0 11 11 1 1 1111 (from gu bi ) , n igh t . E x

.lluguu u lu li ku

’

t gugu bihin 8a gfibu t

has te or you w ill be o v ertaken by n igh t in the tim ber ) ..\hgnhihu n 31

°

.

1/1i m d 1i1 1n (Nigh to v ertoo k h im on the road ) . Mag

pu kuguhi, to eou tinue at a th ingu n til nigh t . l'ix

mug/01°

1 1] (They stud ie d until

nigh t ) .1 111 111 111111 . (Already explained . )

(from ,lltd imlim

,

to he clo udy, ete . also

m eans to e luek,as a hen w hen

she lays an egg . A 111;th e egg lai d. to se t

1 64 TAGALOG LA NG U AG E .

To rise ; to sh ine ou t .

To eome ou t ; to as the sun .

1110 1 111, o r stars . To fill tipw ith peo ple ; as a eh u re h . ho use .

ete .

To se t (as the sun ) . primary mean

ing, to d row n . \pplieatio n as

to sun from fact that sun se ts in

the sea to'

I’

agalogs .

'

l‘

o d iv e : to plunge in to ; to gm tn th e

lmtto tn . (231 To se t . h t . to t ltve ,

”

as the sun .

IX .1 1 1 1 is u sed ith rt 1.1t s u he n a tt rae tion to “ and the agen t is express

ed .

o r w hen th e ag e n t gains en llt rt ui o f smne th ing. The opposite id ea o f los

ing t u n t t'

n l. e tt is s o m e tim e s e xpres s ed w ith the same roo t,and in other

w ith d iffe re n t ro o ts . the part ie le 111 1 1 11 be ing then the v erbaliz er.

31 1 1 1 1 17 ; in SP“. (BO lh Oi

haw alread v been ex

'

[i

n l11 1 l' rt 1“

T1 1 e \'

e hange : harte r . w hat ex

i

li

u t z lk t ' .

To re de e m : to ran s om .

to eat the sun and mo on fromtime, to time.

Nungmihmg 11 1 1 11 11g 1i1°1 111

(The sun has already risen 1.

11 1 1111 11 1151 11 11 111 1 1111 11111 1i111£ (The moon

w ill rise quiek lv) . 15'

11 1111111 ixil1111g,'

1 1111 111111 1 11 (the stars are

sh in ing ) . A 111; 81111 117111 11 , the Eas t .

A 111; 8 1 11 171 1 177111 11 , w hat was lit upby the rise of the sun or the1111 11 11) o r the sh in ing o u t of thes tar to wait un til

one o f al11 1 ve-1nent i1 1ned bod iesrise . l‘i. ’

]I-iLiI /u'

nd i 111 11 711111 1115115

11 11111 111 11 111 1 11 111 1317 111!

(\Vhy d on'

t

o u wait un tilsunrise? )(1 1 111 11 11 1 1 (1 1111 (1 11 11 1 Le t us wait un tilthe sun rises ) .

E x (1 ) 8 111217 1! 111 1 11 111;111-1 11 1 (1111 1111 11 ) (the sun [moon ] willrise (2 ) 18

'

11 111 11siku l ( 11as 1'

si

1311111 11 ) 1 1 111/ f1 1i11113/ 111711 h im) (Theho use, is filling [tillef] w ith people ) . .

llugpuxiku t, to wait un tilris ing o f sun m oon

,e tc takes

place . Ex l’1 1x1

°

1. 111in 111o 11 1111 1ir110

(Wait un til the sun rises ) .l1 11/ [ci t/11 11 11 17 1 11 . the “

'

est ;lit . the d rowning place .

”lix

Lu ng/111 1311 111! 11 1111 1ir1 1 11 (The sun has

set (Theman is d ro wn ing h im self ) .

1 111 1 1, to he d row ned . “ ltll

v o litio n mav he understood , andw ith 11111 acc ident .

Lu ne/161111 11 1111 (1 17 1 1 1 (Theon has se t ) . Lit .

“ d i v e d. M1 11)I to plunge ano the r o r an oh

j e t ' t u n de r the water

I

the se

plaillt‘tl. )

.111 1511it1 1 11g, to lend . (Bothpartly explained be fore . ) Ex

S i 731 1111111 11 1 1 111} 1131111 119( l w ill bo rro w 5 pesos from

Ka n /1 1 117 111 11 , (abs. debt .

c red it .

. l111) 111111 1111,changed o r hartered .

1 1 111 1111 1 1 . , l1111 the act Oftak ing .

( Fo rms w ith in, 1

,iku .

and 1 111 ha v e been explainedhe re to fo re . )

.lloysdkop, to re deemlid s/111 1111 , to be dom inated .

166

To reprove.

TAGALOO LANGUAGE .

lfmduay.

one another; to litigate . Mariyasap. to talk much ; to talk to an

aud ience. E L : Houag mo aktmglukasan nany pati

'

fmiifmiaap (don’t

talk to me so much in such a

rou h way) . (As the variationsof t e idea to sue are derived ,theywill be om itted ) . Makipngcfsap, to converse with another ; (2 )to thrust one

’s self into a conversa

tion . Ex . : I bigmongmahpagiimpou akin? (do you w ish to have a

talk with 0176 (yes, sir ) .

fi ayé’

ybimlimangyalyar i, it is not

possible just now ) . J ak ipakiiisap,

to rush uninvited into a conversa

tion between others. Palacimp, a

barrator or perpetual bringer of

ground less suits. Magin latisap,to become a liti

gator. x .

l

Ita'

n m a/ump aiy t naginmala an

Kirahe has become s barrator aide

dcommon d runkard ) . The firstvice, barratry, is very prevalentwith Tagalogs ; the second is veryrare. I t would be unusual to find

the combination set forth above,but grammatically it is an excel

lent exar

ii

lple w ith magin.

aganay, to quarrel w ith .

Kadaay, antagonist ; enemy.

Ang ipagciu ay, the cause of q uar

rel. Ex . : An ipinagduay mmgmaii

'

gd ka'

d hay namin (131 any«30 m

'

Feia’

ano, p15 (a dog o f Feliciano was the cause for the quarrel of our neighbors ) . [tong btihayna «6 any pinagauayan m

'

ld (thishouse is where they ha ve been

quarrelling‘[or where they quar

. lakipagtiuay, to pick a

narrelor to interfere in a q uarrel.Iagkaduay, to quarrel (two or

more ) . Nagkariuayany dalmcan

mamm ua 8a Hang; (the h usbaman wife quarrelled in the market

place ) .

X I . I'm also expres ses movement in itself ; movement from an outside

agency‘

being expressed by may, except for the root hari'

go, which takesum . l am :

To walk ; to pass

travel (on foot ) .march Lanai/cad . Ang lakarin, what walked

for i e the ob ject of walk ing.

Ex lno t hind i ka lungmaldkmf

nan malad in! (why don’t you

wal more Magldl'

ad,to walk muc or quick ly; to carrysometh ing wh ile walk ing. AnyM ind , the means of walk ing, as

the foot, or the object carried

TAGALOG

To leap or jump down ; to aligh t.

To sw im .

To d i v e .

To stop.

To cease ; to end , etc.

To run away.

To hide (from fear ) .

To pu llou t ; tu take ou t ; to d raw ou t.

To craw l; to walk on all fo u rs .

LANGUAGE . 167

along. . lng lakaran,the person

walked to ,or the place walked to .

lny pnglalvrrcin, the route, path ,

or road , etc.,walked over. lng

mag/u ltikad , the walker ; tra v e ler.

.llaglu lcmlldka' l to stroll.

Ang pug/laIsadlakardn ,the ground

strolled over. .llagpaltikad ,to or

d e r or cause to walk up or go

ahead . Jlakaltilcad ,to be able to

walk . E x . : Polo/sari?) mo agomu ngcalm/u awn. (make that horse walkupl. I l imffmakuhiknd siyd

’tln

'

lml,

(he is not able. to tra vel; he is

ame,sir ) . .Vu lcu lu lail‘mlalso(I am

ab le to walk ) . Allkald/c’

lknd Rig/(l,

m u tt (he may be able to walk ) .L ama/chug, is to go a long wayson foo t ;

” “to make a h ike .

”i t

has the same changes and variations as ldkcul. There are severalother variations of the idea, allrare .

Tumakbci. A lready explained .

Already explained .

Tmmclfm. Any tolomm , the place.

Ex . : Tumu lrin kn sa h ibig (jumpin to the water ) .

]A l lll llStln”. Already explained .

Lemming/ay. Already explained .

a a‘

dmy. Alread y explained ; syn .,

sian].

Tu mult/m. illugtu lub i , te stopanother;.V uyluhmm u

, to stop each other

(two ) . K ayla/ad"street in Manila

means stopping place ,

”as it ends

at the bank of the Paisig R i v er .

] lmm lmpo y. ll'

ulung binuyan, end

Tummmn .

Til /I lfl lflw. Any mag/(atoms,nm lu ln

s in,o r pct/u lukas , the h id er (person

h i ding ) .

I lmmufi/o . Th is form originallym ean t to redeem anothe r fromsla v e ry, and mu has been re tained

w hile the meaning has changed .

.lluglu u fgo (now o u t o f use ) m ean t

to red eem one'

s se lf from the same

cond ition .

(i’

llm -i/u lng. , In”fu lfil m ; lol ll‘l lyugti

[mug (the child is able to craw l l.

X I I . Um is used w ith vo lu n ta ry actio ns upo n or against ano th e r. Ac

tions affecting the subject are expre ssed wu b m ay} . (31: is n o t used w ithinvolun tary actions, as i/iatimn l

,to stumb le . l'lx

To wash the face of another. I f um i/umo s, e v id ently from dames;

u a .‘al l r t i rmu s o “ l f i t “


TH care ss ; tn fo nd le .

To like ; (23

) tn d esire .

X V . (311 u s e d w ith d e no tes permanency in an y place .

lax . l1 1 ([ 111 1 1 1 1711 ; , l111 1 1‘ 1 1 ‘

1 l 1 10 RU N /[HU LW I (Th e Americans are

se t t ling: pe rmane n tly in the arch ipe lago ) .

\°

l. I'

m is al~o n~ed in so m e plan-s tn -s.

~s the i dea that w hat may

be b y the 1-1 m l is tak ing place h e re . the re , and e v e ryw here ; the

id ea 1 1 1°

1'1 111 lll~' ln tl be ing in he rent . l'lx . : (31 1 1311 1 1 11 (o r 1 1 11 1 1 111 1 11 ) 1 10 1511 (all is

1 | 11a | rvline the re ) . ( 111 1 1 1 1111 1 1 ( 1 1 1 1 1 11 111 1 11111 1 (e v e ryone is ge tting marrie d

llt ‘l' t ' 1 .

I°

1 1 1 i~ fu r th e im pe rativ e in Manila, the tenses being ( listin

g 11 i> | 1c 1 l l» ) ad 3 e r i 1s' 1 11°

t ime ,lin t probab ly d u e tn the fact that t he

speak e rs 1 1 f'

F11eal1 1u in Man ila ge ne rally 1111 3 11 su m o kn o w ledge o f Span ish ,

e r11~p 1 1 t°

t h 1 ~ 1 111 1 pu re Tagalog.

l l. I'

m, nw d W i th so me ro u ts ind icating ce rtain act io ns means to be

o cc u pied in a m atte r. altho ug h pe rhaps n o t ac tually perfo rm ing the act

ind n-ated . la x [1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .1mm 1s lmsvw 1th w riting ) .

I ltR t l'

I

X V I I I . I n m me parts 1 1 1

°

th e Tagalo g leg io n the presen t tense of the ind e tim te w ith t he primary id ea t he s nlw t he reg u lar fo rmatio n W ith 11 119 111

and the red uplicatmn s o f the firs t s y llab le 1 11°

the roo t ) , is sometimes ex

pr1 b 3'

t l1e part i1-Ic 11 1 1 prc tixm l to t h e ro o t . Ex

To read . 1151 1111 111 11,from San sk . m ic/1d word ,

d is co u rse .

”There are th ree

fo rms o t the present indei. w ith0 Q I ,

pr11nar3 i dea. l ax : .

elko y nabasa

( I am [o r was] read ing) . Akd’

y

the fact . Jlaibigin , an amorous

man ; a flirt . .Vukaih ig, to care fo r

natu rally . If u ibiglin (abst . l, lo v e ,

desire . . lng kaibigan (note ao

cent ) th e friend .

-Iny kinu ibiyu n ,

w hat lo v ed . A'

n ibigibig (ad j d,am iab le ; lo v ing. Abso lu te ,

211111.

. 111 13(my Mfg mo? (\Vhat do yo u

ish . [bigmung 811 11111 11111 sa d /5111?

(Do you w ish to go w ith m e?)

dictum/1 131 , “ ) to like man } (23) to

flirt hab itually ; (3 1 to care first

fo r one th ing and then another.

E x . w ith ibig, T. P . luq [13711131 11 11

pug/”11g 1111 1196 11 311 11 1112 1111101 111211

(True lo v e is sweet to the end ) .

446 . K u ng (111ml 111 1 1

111 1 11 mu n 1 1 3/ lo v e isreal e v en h itte r is sweet ) .

— «l47 .

. lug frog/1°

11, the p

erso n ea

ressed . an affectionate

pe rso n . . lug big/ciyu'

t frog} 5 11111 1 19

(gi fts and caresses

gain m e r w hat can no t othe rw ise

he gained ) .

— T. P . 144 .

a d esirous pe r

$ 1 111 . : I 1/ 1 1 119 p ita Mob (itis the d esire o f my heart ) . 311151

1 1 1111 m 11 1 1 1111 0 11 1'

1 111ang1 1 1 1 1 h im fo r anyth ing yo u

w is h ) . is a rather rare

M ito nvm . to lik e : to

TAGALOG LAN GUAG E . 1 71

To write.

y 1111 11119 (I was reading and fell aslc 11I.

'

11

(I am read ing) . Bu ngnmbasa uh )

(I am read ing) . (See tables for

other tenses ) 111 1; 11 11111 111 111, what

read . . tng 11 113111111 11 , the person

read to. Busuhdn , pro fessor, lee

tnrer. ilagbasd , to read u iuch ,

or bymany. Aug the act

of read ing. llahabasu , any thinglegible. E x . : 3 111111311 11111 71 11 11 1117[111 1 11 1117 1

°

; 1i11al1 1r11111 I o 8(l 11113? (I ladvou [ha v e you already] read thehook I lent you

?) l l 1 11 1I1

‘

1. 11 p11 71a

I1a1111 ( I ha v e no t fin ished read ingit y te to order to

read . Pix (111g111111111111 1r1 11 8a 11111 175111 bald (theteacher is ordering the ch ild ren to

read ) . ”1111113011111 ; ”111 1110 1110 31: or

p1111 1busa,reader. Tugabusa,

reader

hv occupation . 1211311 is also ap

plied to a gra v estone . 1111 11111111?

fr1 1111 1111s1i ) , is‘

t1 1wet,tomoisten .

Th is last. is e v id en tly a Malayan

word ; Malay, to Wet, or

moisten . (from Sansk .

11111 11 17 m eans language ,s ) eeeh ,

in

Malav, w h ile 11111 1111 has l1een se

lected to represent the ideao t read

ing.

1811 111 11111! ( from Arab ic a chapf o r a t fl u : K a r o n t h r n n u ls \ I o la v )


To lmv.

To obey; to follow .

To resist ; d isobey; contrad ict ; contend with .

To show anger ; (2 ) to turn aside

from .

To stand up; t orise to the feet .

To sit down .

To look at .

aiyang 8 111311111t m'

yd (th is pa r

is for h im to write upon Unfit

) .Magmlat,towritemuchor bymany.

Ma aulatm latan to write a

litt c; to scribble. Ex Nagmum

latm lakm (I am writinga little ;l am scribbling) . Manding towriteasanoccupation . Augmanum

’

dal,the clerk ; writer. Any pamildl,the pen, stylus, brush , etc. (Seealso undermake ,magpa, and maki

Mapagadlat, a person who writes

muc

Kumain. (Alreadyexplained . ) Ex .

with us : M zkain aiyd (he is eat

ing) Kungmal'

ain siyo(he is eating (

regular form]Bumil (Alreadyexplained . ) Ex

Nabili ak6 nany damil (I am buyih some clothes) . Also bungmi

‘

i akonanydamn.

Sum11 11011. Aasunod 111°

yd , he is obeyingor obeys. Anym ndalong sungmwmnod

, muorin simi h m o cial

(the obed ient soldier w il be

obeyed when an officer h imself ) .Magm nom n

, to follow each other.

Magm nodsunod , to follow in rapid

succession many Hagenmunod,to follow closely, also two ch ildren

born in succession . Hoyt-ammu

nod , to follow wherever another

may go, or to obey implicitly.

Ex . Nagkakasumunod anysundalo

an 111111111137 111yd (the soldier followsh is officer wherever he goes ) .

any pinagkaaumunddn 1110?

(Who are you obeying so implicitly

?

) Aug 710119 ko (mv commander) . no an

yipinagl

'

akaau

munod mo [11111311] 1111 kaniyd!

(Why do onHe obey him so

implicitly? A’

y sundalo, p15(I

am a so ld ier, sir) .Sum1

'

111y. Namiay111116 , he is disobeying. 1111193111131, to disobey, etc.

(much 11111 111111, d isobed ient ;contrad ictory. Magmagm11

, tocon

trad ict each other. Magaimiay, tod isobey (many) . Kasuayan ,

dis

obe dience.

Tlmuihog. E x N'

atdbog siyti (heshows anger ; he is turn ing aside ) .

N utind ig (he is rising to his feet ) . Verb has alreadybeen ex lained .

(711111116. .1'

aupo1111 (theyare sdown ) . Verb has already been

explained .

Tumni'

fn'

n . Natmgmako(I aming) . Verb has alread y been

explained .

1 74

To pluck ; to gather, as flowers. Pumilcia. (Already ex p

To tempt ; to try.

To peck (as a bird ) .

To lea v e ; to go away.

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

mil (Juan told Pedro to get intohis clothes) . N pdsokm

'

Pedro

nan damit (P ro put on the

clot es) . Makapaypapdsok, to beable to order another to

F0 in .

ann ed . )Conj . like pumdsok.

Tumukaé. Imp.,111112 6; tumuksé

(tempt, try) . Past, Nuksé; tungmukaé (tried ) . Pr. , N u n u kao;tunymu tukaé (tryin Plp. , Nakatul°a13 (had tried? F. , Tutu kaé

(shall, will try) . F. P .

,.llal‘atulz é

shall, willhave tried ) . Anypay

paytul'

sé the trying, tempting.

Maytukso, to tempt much ormany.

Any tukaohin, the person tempted .

Anypaytukaohin, theperson greatlyor many times tempted . Anyitukaé, the cause ormeans of temptation . Any ipaytukao, the cause

or means of great or repeated

temptation . Any tuksohan , the

place of temptation . A paytuk

011111111, the place of muc or re

peated temptation . Haytu k aotukmhan (d im . to tem t a little,or inmockery. Manukao, to tempthabitually. Any manunukné, thetempter ; temptress. Maypanuksé,to tempt frequently and a great

deal. Any ipanuksé, the cause or

means of the foregoing. Anypa

nukauhan, the place corresping toforegoing. Maypakatuksé, to temptstrongl Ex . : And any ipinafi

xx

katukso can (ipinakapaytu kao 11 )111111? (Whywere theyso stronglytem ted?

Tumu ‘d . u

i. like tumukaé. Ap

Earently app

iad to bite of snake.

x . : Sig/(1 tinukd nany ahaa (hewas b itten {y the snake ) .

Umatia. Imp., (I . ) Malia Ira;

(R )

umalis ka. Past, Nah) ako

Unymalia 11116 R. ) (I left, wentaway, etc. ) tea , Nanalia 0116

(L ) ; unymaalia aké (R . ) (I amoing away ,

leaving, Plp.

,

ifaku lis a“) (I had left ) . Pu t.

Aalis (I shall leave ) . F. P

M al-11 11113 okd (I shall have left ) .Any 1190128 , the leaving. (Thisroot as already been partly ex

plained . )

The follow ing roots are conjugated like alia

To ascend . l'

11111k3/at. Any inakyat, what ascend

ed or th e person ascend ing. Anyinky/at, the cause. Aug akyatdn,the place.

TAGALOG

Not to wish .

To for water w ith a pitcher.

To rink .

To turn back ; to go back ; toback ; to retreat .

To return ; to come back .

To lead ; to go ahead .

X X . Some polysyllab ic (of more

LANGUAGE . 175

(3111131110. E x . : Pam/110 1311 (say youdo not w ish to ) . 11111311 napa

ayao'

(\Vhy d id she say she d idnot w ish to?)

(1111 111111 .

Um inum . Imp.

,51111 11111 d rink .

Malay 111 111 11 111 means“to d rink .

(This verb has alrea dy been ex

plained . )Y I

( '

111 11r0ng.

A lreadvexplained .

than two syllables ) roo ts beginn ingwith 11 , p,

l,or a vowel, are con jugated w ith the particle 11111 11 (q . v.

X X I . Some six ty-six polysyllabic v erbal r0o ts comm encing w ith pa

replace the first syllab le w ith 1111 in

the imperative and future .

syllable of the root is reduplicated and 11111 the first .

resembles bu t is not identical w ith

vowel mod ifications . (See tab les to

the pas t and presen t and w ith 111 11 in

In the presen t and fu tu re tenses the secondTh is conj ugation

1111 111 . There are also som e euphon icr synopsis o t conj ugat ion . )

The verbal roo ts , wh ich are conjugated in th is manner , are the fo llow ing :To verbaliz e these roots, change i

of indefinite .

To rise early.

To profit ; to make (in business ) .

To listen to (with attention ) .

To solicit or u rge (for good or

To bathe one’s self ; to take a bath .

To swell.

To dwell; to li ve in a house.

To swell u (as a sting) ; also to

swellTo supplicate ; (2 ) to ascend into a

house for important reasons.

To wag the tail (as a dogf

To incite ; to provoke.

nitialp to 11 or 111 as req u ired fo r tense

Pauyd from morning .

P 111° 1°

1111111my. Probab ly from a lost.roo t 1111111 1111, w h ich still ex ists in

Bicoland Visavan , w ith the mean

ing to aid ; i elp; su 1°

co r ;”

and

the prefix 11 1 1131, d e f . of 111 1111 1.

P 111° 1°

11 ig. To listen to much,1111191111

from 1131111 and 1 11111 1, def.of 1111t1°i.

to bathe another ;also Sy n . 1 1 1 111110 (rare) .

311111171311 1 (take a bath)mu 11 1111 1 1 11111 1111 (wash the h o rse ) .

P 11 11111y1i, from“

a tumor, ah

cess,”and 111 1 11 .

P 11 1111il11 1‘

11, from 11111111 11,“ house, and

111111.

Pu nm ngzhid , from

{111 11ghid

swell”(the ner v es and pan .

from 11111111 11: and 111m .

P 11 1111i 11111111 m rc Seiple thinksmaybe from lo st roo t 111 111111 131, v ariationof [m y/1 1 1 11 , fan . , l11 1 11 11 11/111 1y,

to

fan 0 111’

s se lf o r ano ther . l'

sual

W u n i in \Vt ‘”l~1

Pas/11111 11 1 111 1 1 any 1111 11 111 11 1 wa v e theflag ) .

1 ’11 11 111 1 1g1°

1 111 i lax1 1m Q u ’fl n h '

ro o ffe r ; to ded icate .

I‘

o envv.

I‘o s ig h : ( 2 ) to w h ist le .

To d ream .

To pu t o ne'

s Se lf u n de r th e co n t ro lo f ano the r.

To pray .

To trust ; to co nfid e

vam | u i~h z uaiu : c o nq ue r ; w in .

To ~s ing lu me ra l s o ng “

Sc 1112 ,

TH l1 } 7~l z l il‘~ H I' ltlt lt lt ' l’ l

to s pe nd ; t 1 1 | 1~1' lll1

funeral

a \ ariation of pongkd ,

“to invite

to a q uarrel,”and 111111. Th is root

is said to be of Chinese origin .

Se iple says from Vis.

part . 7111111111 and w hat .

P 1 1 1 1 1 111I1 1 /i. Seiple also gi v es th is asfrom 1111 111 117 and 11 111

,

“e n vy.

”

lix . : 1111 11111] k1 1 11y131 111 11 1 1 111 1 1 (d uo (DO not en v y you rneighbor ) . Svn .

(rare 1.Pe nny/1 1 111, from 1115111 1111, to pan t , t

b reathe hard ,

"and 1111 11 .

from 11111 111 and 110 1 10 , a

com binatio n fo und b y Se iple in

bu t fo u r W o rd s of po lysy llab ic

struc tu re l‘ix '

.V11 111 1 111 1111'

11 1’

p l’

\ re Sy n .

h umo u r/1111 11, from“

sleep.

”

fi' U lll and p0 7] .

'

l h e u ltimate roo t is 3 11 111) w ith the

same gem ral mean ing.

P 1 1 11 1 1I1 1 1 1 1/ 1'

1 1, from

l im o /1 11, from l .x Sum 11 11 11

s 1 1 1 1 1s 1 1/11/1 1 1 1 111 1 11 1111 1 111}

( I tru s t in h im , and am b ra v e forthat reas on ) . 111 1 1

111 1 1 ) “P ty o u r t ru s t he in ( ind [trust in( i1 11 l]

1 ’1 11 1 111 1 , tro lu 111 1 11 . 57110 1 1 1111

11 1 1 1 1 1 111 1. ho was the w inner?)in d isplllt

‘

(1 1 110 ‘Vnghd o ,

t1 vargu e 1 two ,e tc .

f [11 1 1 1 1 1111 to allow

o ne'

s se lf to he t'

o nuluered .

to co n s e n t to be \ anq u ished . JIG

to in te rfe re in a d ispu te .

lug} “ 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 110 , lllt ' w inne r ; ('

O ll

1 | u e ro r. . l111} the van

q ll islled .

from 1 1 1 111 1111,

1 1 11 su tlixed and ,11 1 11 .

St‘lpll'

gt‘S a l’anay l

s ayan ro u t 11 1 11 111, b ut the Szimar

l.e y te d ialect seem s to lack th is

w o rd . l‘ix . : (Tag. ) ]‘11 1111 1 11 1i11g, t 1 1

d es ce nd a ladd e r (also , to go or

co m e t i1 1 \\ n stai rS ) . ding/11 1 116 1 11] ,to d o t | 1e abo \ e m uch . ,ll' tgpupo

1 1 1 1 1 111 , in o rd e r the abo v e to lit‘

do ne ; to u se up ; to spen d. Fx . :

11 1 1 11g 11 1' i 1 1 119 7111r 11

1TM pi ope rty has been used

u p o n ac co unt o f po v erty ) . Napa1 11-1 ; 11 1 1 1111 11 11111 111] 11 1803 (I

ha v e spen t li v e pest 1s l. A lso W ith11 1 1 1 . . l11g 111 11111 111i11g 8 1! 1ii°1

°

11

1 1 11 11 11 1 1 1 11g111~1 1s (The amo un t Of lily

spe nd ing was live pesos ) . Vag

[1 1 1 111 1 1 111 also means to bring some

1 78 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE .

To think ; also to regret."

To squat .

To believe ; to confide in ; to trust.

To guide ; to lead .

To accomplish the will.

To V iew (as a spectacle ) ; to at ;

to sigh t ; to behold ; to ook at

from far off ; to V iew with astonishment.

To make wate r .

To lodge.

To wait upon the pleasure of another ;to flatter ; (2 ) to ser v e .

To promise .

To dare ; to venture.

paper. Root tu n and pan . Tan

means topro oneselfw ith hands

and feet in o er to rise .

”

Panimdim (from dimd im and pan ) .Th is root is domdom in Bicol.

Pani kayad (from tinkayad and

pas). Also tu rninykayad , with

same meaning.

Paniu '

ala (from tiwald and pan ) .Anykatiwala, theconfidant ; human

friend .

Panéyot.

Panoloa (from a lost root, (aloe, sug

gests Seiple, who cites the Javanese word

“talus, sincere ; faith

ful; loyal, etc.

”and adopted in

Malay) . Ex Hind i at é manoloskumain, at any nam ah

'

t ohé nanyIay nat (I can not force myself toeat, because I am sick with fever ) .

I ’amiod (from néod and pan ) . Ma1113011, to look at what conten ts and

gives pleasure . Any pinan

what beheld .

Pumibiy (from h ibiyand panPanaluyan (from triloy an pan ) .Any panuluyanan , the lodgingplace ; also any tuloyan . Any ip a

nuluyan , the cause or rson for

whom lodging is looked or . Maypapanuluyan ,

to give another lodgmg. Anypapamtluyan in, the person given lodging. Tamalay to

lodge. Magniloy, to 10d?

manyor much . Any tuluyan , t e lodgih place. Any paytuluyan, thei gi ng place of many or much .

Any (buoy, the cause. Any {payttiloy, the cause of many or muc

Maypah iloy, to give lodging. A119

patuluyin, the person given lo dging. Any patuluyan, the placewhere given lodging. Anypapaylulugn

'

n,the person given much

lodging. Any 11111 17911papaymluyin,the persons given lodgin

g. Any

p‘inaypapaluluyan , the odgingouses. Ex Sino an nam muluyan 8a bdhay mo! (‘gho is the

}odger at your hor

ise?)

dIaan ma

1 1

'

rap napinatfiloy'

oaa king hall

(apoor man whom I have allowed

to o dge at my house ) .Panuyo (from my?) and pan ) . See

panayiauyb.

I ’mi'

yakb manyakr)

Syn ., panata . From (iko

,

“secu

rity,”and pan .

Pafl'

yahas; man'

yahaa (probablyfrom

daht'

w,

“ idea of bravery and.

pan ) . Seiple points out that the

TAGALOG LANG UAG E . 1 79

Pu become tired from much stand ingor b e ing in the sam e posi tion a

long time .

To become th in ; emaciated .

To become num b (as the arm or legfrom inaction ) ; to go to sleep.

”

To told the arm s.

TO rest the face upon th e hand ; tobu rv face in hand s .

TO apprehend ; to d read . P’UTfl’lNib 0"

“id ea of

T0 b ear a ch ild ; to lie in .

TO b e with ch ild fo r th e first time .

0 d read .

To lo ok in m irro r o r other reflecting hu age ,

Su rface .

0 h urt ; to damage ; to mahgn ; tom ake as hamed .

To talk in sleep; to d ream . (trap ,id ea o f

andTo b umble o r abase o nese lf. [Qua/1 131 11111 1111) ( from and

panTO make lo v e ; to woo . Pam/51,111 (from and pan ) .

To be jealous. id ea O f

To tremble ; to sh udder. id ea of

TOwarn ; to guard oneself ; sneakaway.

regu lar formation shou ld be pana11118 . in Bicol

,(Iahds means

lencc ; fo rce .

I 111 1791111131. I‘Ix Nanyanydlay ka.

(Are you tired already?) 11 111111

1113 (no, sir ) . The roots rig/1111”,lu ng/1111131, 11yal11, and 11 1111111 have

abo u t the same meaning.

1 ’11 1 17/1 111rany (greater than yayal ) .Syn . , p11 1Ty11t1

'

yany. Root, ri'

yaliranyand pan .

1 1 1 117111111 (from id ea of pain

from fatigue Syn .,

[Qua/11101 11115111 (from 11 111111‘1p11'

p , to

cross the arm s ) .

Uphip . Ult . roo t , k ip/( 111 . E x

to lay the arm or legupon any th ing. [11111 1 151 1 11 11 117111 151111111 1111 111

? (W h y are you fold ingyou r arms . ) Se iple shows that

o ften prefixes roots com posed

o f t e n id en t ical syllab les .

1 '1 1 11 111 1111 111 111 11111 (from 1 1 1111111 11111111111 and

pan ) . 7 1111 011911111111 1 1E11 1I 11 1111111111i , l melancho lv

pr rson .

(less than

l‘

rom yam/11 1 ,d read , and 1111 11 .

1 1 1 13111 111 11: (from 1 1 111113,

ch ild ,

”and

I’11 1 1 111 1 111 1 1,

1’1 1 1 1 1/1 1 11 111 (from 111111111 , id ea of beingin danger

”

(( weate r d egree than

Moi /11 111111 1 (from 11 11 11111,

shadow , and pau ) .

I ’l l / 1111 1 1 1y11 1/1 t ( from and [11171

to cause dam

age . (111111,a perso n

w ho de stroys prope rty ,maligns ,

ete . a la z y pe rso n .

,ll1 11' 11p 1 1p 1 1 1 1ya 1111113111 barm

fu l; h u rtfu l; sland e rous

Pam / 1 1 1 111 (fro md ream ing ,

( from 11 1 1111111,jealou s y still fo und in 1111 111

1 ’(l l 1 1)111111 1 11 ( ll n lll 1 111 11101,trem b ling

1 51 1711111 11) 111 1 1 1 1 4 111 11]bo th from 111 111. to flee .

-Vayi/ay, to d ra asid e ; to avo id .

1110 any 111 1 1 1 1111 1 11111 111117117 111 1 1111 1111111111 1r1 111 1 11 (a v o id men

w ith o u t ed ucation [b reed ing]

To he seornfu l. Seiple th inks may he

idea of a w ord vq uar

To keep holidays.

To heeoine numh (as the arm or legt i

'

o i i i i i iae t io i i so to s le ep.

To tre inh le ( inueh ith eo ld o r tear) .

To fee l a tingling pain in the tee th .

To shak e (as from th e agu e 1.

'

l‘o preeed e (as in room o r st reet ) ;

to e o in n ie nee : to start o r hegm .

To lo se in trad e ,husine s s

,o r barte r .

To talk .

I ) ! lN l'

T lVPN l \'

\'

1 1 1‘ 11s are mad e d im in u ti v e h y th e repe t itio n o f th e ro o t if h isvllah ie

o r the tirs i i \\ t t sy llable s i t lo nge r . lax

To run , 7111711 1141 13. Tumal.11 114 1 1111 13,(“ rall i h li

to run a little

To rain . ( 11 1 1111 1 11 - 11l1'

1 11,to d riz z le .

111 o rd inary eomposition the h y

phe ns are generally om itted .

'

l'

ll li \'

l1‘

li ll l’

Th e | 1zl rt i0l0 1 11 1 1 1/ is U s e d ro o ts,as a general rule , either

w he n a d e fin i te o h jee t i~1 h e ld in N ew o r e lse w he n the \ erb d o es no t

1 1 111 1 1 1 1

1: 1 11 1 1 l1j 1 1

1 l to e x pres s in te n s i ty ( s o m e tim e s plu ralit y ) w ith ro o ts

in the s im ple s ts e nse “ ith 11 11 1 . May has also a recip

l i lll llz ll l i1 l1 1 i , 1 1 1 1 l1e i li 1__1 11 11 i ll\'

su llixed .

1 1 1 1 \\ li t 1 h is ll\\ ; 1 \ l t 1 1 1 1 1 11/ in the pmsent and pas t

te n s e s l li e 11m ! s \ ll: i l1 | e o t t he 1 1 1 1 11 is H i lliplieate d to r the present andlll t ll l e 1 1 U s e s _

l/1 1 / 1 1 : I l li l “ li lt ‘h : lr11 l is1 1 l 1 1 ) ind i1 ate. the second

I i i tm e pe i fed and plnpe rle e t . respe e t i i e l) , re tain 111 111, the d e fin ite o f 111119,i th t he l o o t . as the y are als o ind epend en t part ie les w hen u sed alone.

in th is i es

pe 1 t . and als o in the re te n tio n o f the parti1 le in front o f thei ed i ipln ated in it ial sx llah le o f t he ro o t in the fu tu re t 1 u s e all parti1 lest il llt r ll t i lll H IN . ro o ts .

J 111 111 , | 1r11 li .\ 1

11 l to I n n is \1 h i1 h .id in it 1 1 1 1 1 and w 1li i1 h d 11 11ot 11hunge the

111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i th 11 1 1 1 11. s ign i fie s plu rali t y e it he r o f pe rsons or acts, th is beingthe gem m l ineai i iiw im parted h ) t li i pa i ti1 le . .ll11g (nay) sometimw“m ow the .t 1 1 1 i i t upo n the last s i llah le o t a ro o t . E x

from 3210

rel,”an pun .

P I NE/{12°

72 (from 117/filing, id ea O f t il)

ser v ing holidavs [fies tas ],and pan ) . Se iple o bse r v es that

the final (1 of the roo t has been

d ropped ,bu t th is mav be acr i

d en tal.

Pang/mu (from ummi) . Svn . pang/010.

l ’u umn i'

g (from kin ig, really Icmyigu .

K mn im’

g, to trem ble w ith co ld or

fear . Mug/Irin ig, tn t rem b le m uch

thus . .llukimg, to be trem blingth us [state] . illm i

'

f/inig, im le l'

. of

pu uym ig. illakupmfi/in ig, to cause

to trem b le w ith cold or fear .

[b uying/JO (from itse lf from

a t ingling pain in the teeth .

I'u ug/Mi (from A im u mm

.

r/ii fg/iki (I am shak ing )I ’n

'

nma (from mm,

pu n

l’mfimlu g/i (frnm zfilulugi, a loss in

business. and pan ) .

( from fisup and pan ) . Ex

”and? Ian

yo u talk?) (See alremlv

pm'

tlv explained ) .

To recall to m emo ry .

To cheapen : insu lt : d isho no r.

There are com paratiyely few ye rbal r1"its beginn ing w ith m in the Taga

l The fo rego ing are 11 1-11 1 iy all t hat are in co nu non use . few o ther

are to be fo und,w h ich ill b e n o te d later. 11~e 1l w ith o ther part ic les .

l ll. Ro o ts w h ic h change t he 11 11 1 111 1i11g ith o u t and may are plu raliz ecl

in two way s w ith may) . l i theo

rum l sy llab le o f th e root is a ccen ted nor

mally t l1e j i1 xl s y llab le o f t he ru n! is 111l le 1l 1 1 1m in all tenses,b ut it the

accen t is no t n o r11 1ally u pon th e la~t M llab le o f the roo t, plu ralit y is

e xpressed b y 11 111 1111 11 11: the accen t to the iinal sy llab le . I t shou ld also be

no ted that the meaning chu m/1'

s Luck .

To bu y .

To teach (us 21 d o c trine ) .

Th e red u plicat io n o t'

a b isy llalnic root o r the first two sy llables o f a po ly~y | l11l1ic ro o t i111e n~ilie < plu ralit y w ith m u g; r1 vu ts . Th is same constructio n

w ith u m l'

H u lh in dica tes d im in u ti v e Mu g; ro o ts add 1 1 11 (11 11 11 ) (0 express

1 li11 1 i11 11 ti1 e s o r re c ipro cal \ e rbal ac t ion s,w h ich haye to be d istingu ished

b y the 1 1111 1 111 111 15x :

To th in k to th ink

'

l'

u m ed itate . Jim / 11 17 1 1 11

'

rl l li

t i lli i “ i t )

l\'

llo o ts \1 l1i1 h may a dm it the Mea o f m o re or less s take an ad d i

t io n ; 1I 1 c pt t it io n o t the tti1 ~t sy ll11b |e to s iennx in ten t o r plu rality I f the

e n tu e l'

n u l b e 1 epe11te-l t he plu ralit y is i11te n > 1 lie 1 l. Roo ts of th ree or m o re

1 1 1111 t he tw o th at 11 1 1 11 1‘

1 lin : r to the ge neral ru le in Tagal \ 1 1 1/wu w lm /u i

vt /. 1 i .w z l l haye (’

ll l’

SC tl 111V ne igh bor1 11. 1 1 .

"e Al l/N IHMIIU N I ’1 0 (I b‘d ‘e cu rsed

L~I11 1i1 le 1 1 1 |Jm y n emh ho r tu ne s \y itl1o 11t 1 1u n 1b e 1 1

th e d o u b h d ro o t in 1 e 1 111 in 1 .1> e~1 sign ity the performance1 11 11 1 11 11 114 l i s o r q u ick

1 11 1 1111 1 o t (c ) I n the present

l1111pi/mmnumuhin ,the point from

wh ich proceed ing. , lluhi as prep.

means from ; since .

Mu g/111 111) . . \ lso mean s to Open the

e y e s w idely ; and to look at \1 ell.

,llumm '

u, to lower in

w h o . l ng mum /1m, what Cheap

encd ,o r 11 111) insulted

,d ishono red ,

Ole .u ru nm ru

, to (le‘pise

in tensely. Jlugmum han, to insult

1 1 1u tually . l

mo ru kon m'

lti,they insu lted each

o the r in the cou rt room

B lu n t/i. .Vclglfihili

I 11 111 se lling . ,Vm/hihibi/i

1 1111 1 b u y ing: m uch . Th is fo rm is

no “ raw . m an ( 11. V . ) be ing ge n

e rally used . l‘ix X n nn'

m ili

(I am buying m uch ) .

-llugd ru l, to learn : to

stud y . .llogn ru l, to teach m uch :

to preach . No w ge ne rally re

place d b y man . lax llo u gciro /

to preach .

-llfl j lis i/i .

d cepl\ : pi'

1‘

1f1 1u 11d ly.

to med i

ta te pro fo u nd ly . 311 1 1151113;11 co nsid e rate person . .

lln n i/agl.

illN ) m eans to fish . l’u n iu ihw u u ,

a fish ing canoe.

Nu um umf . -WINM I, to it illOW

in rapid seq uence (man y )

TAGALOG LANG UAG E . 1 83

tense nag may be d ropped ,being replace d b y the red uplicated in itial

svllable o f the prim itive root. Some um v erbs have th is form also .

To pass.

To go or come out.

To turn over.

To stagger ; to reel.

To shift ab ou t ; to change con tinu

ally ; to tu rn over con tm ually .

To wander abo u t aim lessly . (11m

To stagger.

TO tiptoe abou t ; to walk on tiptoes .

To bend over.

Tomove c ) .

To walk w ith the head on one sid e

Du nm u n . , lfuyduun ,to pass many

times o r b y man y . Mag/f lau ndmm ,

to pass and repass man y times.

Domain, a mad e road . I ) ?ma t/111 1

nu n ,impassible .llaku ru au

, to be

ab le to pass . Mag/pum a"

, to allow

to pass Ex . : Pu ruun in mo air/1

(let me pass ) . 11 13111? pararuu n in

hu ng/(1 11 (hf 1110 1 1h ? bibigyrin nanykm l u ting (I w ill not let you

pass un t il yo u giye me a little

w ate r ) . [Man also means hun

d red .

L iou u bda. .lluglu lnis, to take out .

to go o ut or 00 11 19

in (many times) .

filog’mhg/md . .llugbaldmlig/tad , to

turn oycr. E x . Bubahbaliglud

(my ma y so“ ! all hihigdn (the sick

man is tu rn ing over and over in

bed l.

ll ug/lmlinglniling. B ahu linybti1ing]h ilm , that man yonder is

ree ling. .Vugpupagbalin( flailing. to

be staggering from walk ing. etc.

E x . P 1 11upoglmbalm y/Inflowmo

1 111 1111 my/u i imp m ( I am readyto fallt' rom loo k ing fo r y ou . Sy n .

.lf uypu /iugptiling.

ditty/1 11511 1111 17 1My] . l‘ix . : B ibi/inghflh i’

ym u m /in sigli (he is sh ifting abo u t ) .

Bibi/iuyln'

liw/ (1 11 5; Mob ( I have.

m y d o ub ts ) . [Kiln /hmlu'

liug (1 11gma y s i r/J ! so Mil ly/tin (the sick man

is tw ist ing and turn ing in bed ) .

mind

(he is 11 11de ring ab1 1u t aim lessly

1l11151s 11 1'

1 13/m im y, ru um?m y

(ls hc s tagge riug l ip/1 , ( 1 113/ los ing(m sum : ra j /s tif fl y 1311 113; b ond /sod (yess1 1

'

, 11 d ru nke n man staggers hen

he walk s ) .

u m im l. .llu ylim ltiad , to tiptoe abo ut

m uch .

f

i llimllim l (1136 ( I am walk

ing abou t o n m y t iptoes l .

(b u i/ Ju l. .l/u gdkud , to bend o v erm u ch . to be ben t o ye r .

.llogu b n ld kod , to \\ alk be n t ove r

o r sw i

(he nlks be n t ove r ) (fi lm /171. 11 1 1

311m m } m u ta n t /47 ( tlltli U lt l pe t

‘

s n ll

alk s halt ing ly l .

ICU /u l’m 310 1116 1 11 1 11. l’u i, lll t ) \ t ‘

luri ng b l ]l‘l l l ’

To wabble (c) . K u nm iday. Magkindaykinday, to

wabble much . Syn . -

‘llagkind ing

fi nd ing.

Mug is also used to express personal act ions wh ich may be d ual o r

i lu ral in eliaraeter , ree iprocity o r m u tuality be ing implied . I t the plu rality

is to be in tensified ,the root is repeated . su bjee t lo the general ru le for po ly

sy llab ic ro u ts . l'ix

To q uarrel; to tigh t .

To assem b le pu rposely . )

To as sem b le ; to meet (purposely) .

(’

ltlier \ '

e i' bs o f th is natu re

,all o f \y li ie h haye been m en tioned before ,

ar e

to s eparate m u tually ; Hum/nan “, to associate ; mugketd , to see

ea< li o the r . to ae e o iu pa i i y eae li o the r : nmgmlo , to argu e ; andlu rl r/ liN lp , in m i li h

'

l‘s e : in lil lutllt ’

.

\'

l . The d is t ii ie t io i i be t xi e e n plu rality , in tensity , ete .

, and m u tuality,

l‘

t‘Cipl

‘

m it } ,e te .

,i s s o m e t im es mad e b y a eliange o l

'

aeee ii t . E x

T“ {11 41 1 0 11011 (U llt‘ l . H umilu f , ,‘I l l flllipll, tO (lh i‘v near .

lin g/fu ll”, to approach m u tually .

near . -llu lriln t siyd sa akinHe is a re lat i v e o f m ine ) .

'

l‘

n l' u i k at . Ai

u nu hi

l , Jluglu ld , to l00k at eacho the r . ,

llvig/Intf i, to look at many

th ings ; o r to look at inten t ly .

\'

l l. .llu g/ yerbali/ es re eipro eal ae tio n

< o i a natu re a dm itting compe t itiono r ri v alry , pro v i ded that n o s pe e ial em pha

s i s i s placed upon the conten‘ 1

lluylm lmy. . lngpugbubog, the act o f

q uarre ling. -llupug/Im lmg, q uarrel

N i ine pe rson . . lng Im imgin ,the

perso n q uarre led \y ith .

lli rg/pri/o uy. E x .Vugpupciloug «mymu m /ct m ug/mm 8a [mg/an (the

pr ineipales”

o f the tow n are

assem b ling ) . . ln ri «my pim igpu

[OW/"N (\Vil y liaye they

met?) A ug {p inamn ilong i ti/(i

’

yn a ny (my [nu/(Mungmmg/ guber lm (lar-yem

’

ru l (The pur

po se o f their m eeting “ as to talko ve r the eom ing o f the go v erno rgene ral) .

llrigf i/u in . Tam i/ ion ,to join (one ) .

llrigztw tipou . to meet o rassem ble byehanee (as a street ero w dl. E x :

Nor/Kah lu a” (mg mom/L (d uo In ?

q / lm haye happened

to mee t in m y house ) . A ug kah

pumm , the as sem b ly. A lso the

popu lar name o f the w ell-k now n

Socie ty, the K . K . K .

E x . lug p i unglm/cu lipu uu n h u ngM u f f/d um rumbmug (The m eeting

plae e o f the learne d peo ple— i. e .

,

o f learne d St u ' ieties, e te l. I lo img[ ri ng] s u mumu

’

t [u m/i mfln lbagoy m{su ng do ing/ring ]N U IU H

‘

OU N 8a p ilin g,

ku ku liliunu n Hu ng iu u rl im ing lu la/{ i

(Do no t aeeompai iy [li im , her , orth em ] beeause it is no t pm per for1 girl to go w he re th ere is a meet

ing o f man y men


To use insu lting 1 11-ind ecen t language ; .llagtw ffmyauan , to

to say such word s . abuse each othe r thus. 311171 11 13;to abuse or insu lt. thus con

tinually or habitually . .llapagabuser ; insu lter .

Among o ther \‘

erbs o f th is d escript ion may be cited 1111 191 1191111 1 11 , to biteeach o ther ; mum/15111 1 11 , to like each o ther ; 1 11 1 111111 111 11 1 11 , to cudgel each

o the r ; 11 1 1 11/s 1'

11l11111 111, to 11 1 1 1

1 each o the r ; to follo 11 each o ther ;and nu n/11 1 111 1 111 1 11 . to laugh at each o the r . \ Ilo t these ha1 e been men t ioned

be fo re .

In the use O f 1111 1 17 to 1 e rbaliz e actio ns adm ittingr 1 9 1 iprocit 1 care is

ue1 essa'

1 1 y in noting their natu re and the in ten t and purpose fo r 11 h ich theactio ns may be e xec 1111 1 11

,as the re are lo cal d iffe renc s

'

e in th is respo1 t .

Recipm cal 1 erbs r1 1p1ire an o b je 1 t 11 h i1 h re tu rns the 11 t 1o 11 1A ) Th us111 1 11; pr1

1 tix 1 1 11 l and 1 1 11 s11 tti \ 1 1l 11 ith a 1 1 11 1t 11 11 11 h adm its com petition

e xpresses rivalry . (B ) 1 1 the .1 1 tio 11 req u ires an object and r1 1 air1'

to

be expressed , the su llix 11 11 shou l d be repeated

To jum p.lI 1 11/1ol s 1

'

1, to j ump 111 111 h

.lI1 1 1/I11I s111111n ,

to j umpin 1 1 1111p1 tition . 1 l

’

h is 1 erb has

1lrea1l1 been explained .

'

1‘

1 1 11 11 1k . -lIug/Iiuym , i t) look ‘

d l

m uch o r b y man y . 3111911 1 111 1 111 1 1 1 ,to lo o k at each o ther . (Hereto

fo re explained . )To push : to sho v e o ff { as a b oat Tu nu ilu k. .

lI 1 1yt1iI1 1 I'

,to push hard

o r in manv. te pnsh

.1g zlii1st 1 a1 l1 11ther . Mug/11114 1 1 111 1 1 1

to push in r"i1 alr1 o r compe tition .

lI1 1 1/ and the 1 e 1l11pli1 ate 1 l ro o t fo rm in ten s iv e recipro 1 al 1'

e rbs 11 h i1 h11

11 11 1 11131 be d is t ingu ished l | 1 1 1 | 1 d im inu ti v es \'

e rbs o l

i111 it.1 ti1 111 . 1 t 1 . b 1 t he 1 1 111 t1 \ t . .\ s 1 1~11.1 I po l1'

s1 llabi1 roo ts r1 peat the

tit st t 11 1 1 s 1'

1ll 1b le s 1 1n l1 .

T1 1 1 1 llll1ru 1 °e . i t) G i llhrtlt ‘t’

each o the r ; to tie up to a po st .

to 11 111b race

e ach o the r warm ly ; also m eans

to em b race a lit t le , to prete nd to

emb race . to im itate em brac ing .

( ) th c r \ t ' l‘lh a lre ad y 1

‘il1 ' 1 l are 11 1 1 1111 111 11I1 I I1 11 I1 1 1 1 , in reach man y th ings ; in

1111514 11 111 11 1

'

th ing' s frn ln 1 11 1 111/1 1 1I 1 1 II1 1 1I 1 1‘1 1 11 , i t ) send in each

o the r. e tc 1nd to lo o k at each o the r c lo se lv; to pre tend

l”

X I . w ith [own ing 111 1 1 17511 11} . the particle th us

m a de im parting th e i1 l1 1a o t g reat plu r-l litv 11 1111 1 1 prefixed to a root . E x

TH lo co nvew e

1 great 11

1'

11 11 1 l

X l l. lio u re 11 ith 11 1 1 1 1 ; 1 11 1 11s 11

1 l b o th 11 ith and 11 ith o 11t an ob ject , the11 11 1 11 11 11 1 in ~111

1 h 11

: 1s 1 lix

'

l‘

o d i1’

i1 l1 1 1 1 1t 1 1 1 -1 111al part -lI 1 13/I1 1 1lu ig/i 11111111! Di

pe rs e f .

ll1 1g/I11 1I11 i1/i 11 1111; 1 1 11111111 311

X ll l .

-11 1 1 a11s 11 1 l b y . 1 11 1 1 11ir~i1 le is e xpressed by mag. AS

11 1”be r1 1 1n 1 1 1n b 1 1 r1 1d ,se lf-m o v em e n t i 1

s se 1 l b y 11 111 (l’ar. X l, um ) .

tn pu ll 1 1111 . take 1 1llt . N 1 1 an e xceptio n in the ru le . E x

TAG ALOG LAN G UAG E . 187

To tell trees ; to blow trees down (asthe w ind ) .

To part from another ; to go to a d is

tanee .

Tn rise (volun tarily, as a hin t ) .

Among other v erbs o f like natu re ,wh ich ha v e already been explained ,

are mag/(d is, to take away magi/mil, to d raw some th ing near ; mag/pan ting,to take or let any th ing d own stairs or a ladd er ; mugprm /u ls. to take any

thing Upstairs o r up a la dder, e te . ; uu lg/S i/ill, to pu t an y th ing in o r in to ;waging/6, to se t tip ; and umglim liy, to stand an y th ing u prigh t .

X IV. Bod ily Volun ta ry actions affect ing o ne'

s se lf o n ly,o r th o se per

mitted to be done , are expressed w ith may. Tho se ae tion s o f like natu re

performed upon another tak e um (Par . X l l , um ) . E x . :

To whip one’s self (as in penance ) . llama /"pas , tn w h ip

ano the r . .llugpu lmminis , to allow

u ne’

s se lt to he w h ipped , e te . I ’u

lunup/ls, to en nse n t to he wh ipped .

E x ; ”0 1q [su ng[inbu ilt/nix 8a .vino

mu n (d o n'

t le t at ly n ne w h ip y ou ) .

( )ther v erbs follow ing th is ru le are fully explained in l'

ar . X II underum.

XV. As has been note dmay expresse s fo r the ind efin ite th e id ea o f los

ingcontro l as u m expresses the idea o f avq u iring the same . “'

hat is lo st

control o f 18 expressed in the d efin ite w ith o,em nh ined w ith in fo r the

past and other tenses w he re neeessary . Fo r the ai d o f the memo ry it

may be said that \ '

e rhs o f th row ing away ,th row ing at , ete .

,so w ing, s

'

at

tenng, pou ring ou t , m ix ing, placing, pu t t ing , g i\ ing . and selling fo llow

this ru le . E x . :

To th row away .

To throw or dash d own .

To th row at (as w ith a ro ek ) .

To th row at ; to pe lt .

To th row up (in ueh ) .

To seatter n ee. seed .

To scatter in the air ; to em it .

To scatter seed .

TO transplan t . .Vl lgjp ll u /l i . tn plan t , i t )

w t ou t (alread y e xplained ) .

Mug/hu rt]. 1uglmah'

n , the tree felled .

. lng ilnm l, the pe rson te lling, or

w ind . A nglm u lrm, the plaee . . lng

)mmw rl,th e instrumen t, i. e . , ax .

[AU /41 1316 . m wo. to remain le lt far

away (by anothe r ) . .llug/uyd , to

part (two ) ; also to rem o v e am

tllillg i t ) a d istance . JIM/u m) , d is

tant ; far.

Tumrius. .lfngt/ms, to raise ; to lift up.

.lfo trimt,h igh ; tall; noted . Kama

mm,he igh t . Katuaslm zm n .

trem e heigh t

(Alread y.lfuylu i/og. (A lread y e xplained . )

hat th ro wn

at , o r stoned . - lug ou r/ml,

hat

th ro wn .

-lfu g/lm glfs . Ex : .Vogllm g/is a lso mmgmm ( I th rew a stone ) .

filagp u h i , Nu m tl/J l , t” I ll l‘H W lip.

tn So w ) l lllt‘ll

rive th us o r hv man y W o rk ing to

ge t llr r .

Mug/wu u lu ilu t . . Iu g; mambo/at,“ hat

seattered . as g rain . e te . S u nm m

lni/u l,to \

‘

eat te r, d l~pe r>e ,

e ro w d o f its o w n \ o lit io n . JIN

lm m’n i/l ll . tn emi tte r l l l llt‘ll

, e ithe r

by insid e o r o u ts id e agene y .

filmy/«Moo. (A ll‘

ead y e xplained . )S ) n .

,nu n /m ild . Ma g/I.Alo h alread y

M ' i fo rth : m eans to apr'ad

, propagatt


To scatter. Magbulagaak. (Alread y explained . )To break up; scatter (as parts of a Magwcu ak.

house torn down ) .To pour ou t.

To pour out ; shake out (not liquids) .

To saturate with water.

To mix .

To stew ; to boil meal, etc.

To put wood on the fire .

To place.

To put in the sun .

To place in layers, etc.

To give .

To present w ith ; to make a gift .

To grant ; to give.

To give ; primarily, to hand to an

other bv reach ing out the arm .

To sell.

To sell good s.

To trad e on a small scale ; to sell at

retail.

To sell at cost . Magdmot. Any ipagdmol, what soldat cost.

Verbs of permitting, sending, restoring, etc. , also follow the mayand icon jugation . L it . .

To permit . Maghilot. Any itfilot,what permitted .

To send ; to remit. Maghatid . (Already explained . )To res tore . Mags/1 01i. (Already explained

X VI . Being o f like nature verbs of“speak ing, relating, telling, etc. ,

are conjugate d bymay in the indefinite and i in the definite . A few ,how

ever, have um W ith i for the ob ject . E x

To tell; narrate ; report . .llugsalitd . (Definites, already ex

plained . )To report ; to announce ; to tell the Magbalizd . Ang ipinagbalitd , thenews. news announced or reported ; also

the cause or means (past tense) .

Maybobo. Any bobcfn, what pouredinto. Any ibobG, what pou red

out. Syn . , maybuhos (alreadvexlained ) .

ayhoh6. Any ihoha, what poured

or shaken out, as grain , etc .

Maybim l , var. maybayaak.

Mayhah) . (Already ex lained . )Syna ,

maysahoy, mayla wk. L u

mahol , t oJoin .

Ma leigao. Any ilu ao, thematerial.ny liimiyao, ttge mush ; stew .

Any luyauan, the stewpan , etc.

Mayyétony, also to stir up the fire.

lliiyp aydtony, to ask that the fire

be stirred up. Makiydlony, to ask

for a few coals to start a fire. Anyiydlony, the poker, et c

. Any

yatori'

yin, what burned . Any ya

tmi'

yan, theA) ace.

Maglaya ( lready Gxplained .

llaybila

a

dl. Already explained . )

A( lreadyex ) lained .

(Already explainsMaybiyaya. (Already explained . )Maykaléob. Any ipaykalciob, the

grant.

Na

gyyduad . Gumduad , to strett h out

e arm in order to reach some

thing. An yauarin ,what reached .

Anyiydt , what given or handedover. Any iyinduad , what was orhas been given , etc.

Magbili. (Already explained . )H aglakb. Haglakd , to ped d le fromtown to town . Any flake , what

sold . Any ital-6, what pedd led

from place to p acel

Mayutay. (Already explained . )


or sell them ; with e dible things, etc. , to eat them ; (c) with property,

to it ; (f ) with names of re atives, to know how to act toward them ;an (9) with the possessive pronouns, to have :

Ex .

To pu t forth leaves (as a tree, .llagdalum . Also means to pu t thefood on leaves, as when out ofdoors. Any tagapagdahon , thecook . Any dahonan, the eatingplace thus.

Ex . (b )°

To build a house. Magbtihay. (Already explaine d. )To make soap. Magoabén. (Already explaine d) .

Ex .

To sell or trad e rice.

3:4 1e explained . )

To sell or trade unhulled rice. .x agpdlay l'

a. nany

palot (trade palayfor some honey) .Ex .

To sell or eat pickled fish . Magbagoon .

To eat fruit or to sell it. Magbmfga. E L : Nagbubunga siyd

(she is selling fru it ) .To eat or sell fish . .Vayisdd . E L :

'

agiisdd mild (theyare selling fish ) . Lbniadd , to havefish once more in a river or creek,etc. l‘nymiind d ribayi

'

m ea flog(there are fish now in the river) .

To eat or sell eggs. Mayillog. EL : Nagiitlog siyd (she issellingeggs

To eat bananas or to sell them . M agafigmg.

(Alread ex lainéd ) .

To d rink chocolate . Maggie-tild e rom ll ex . clamo

Iate; from Nahna(Az tec ) , ch ocolad ,choco, cacao ; and tall, water) .

To use tobacco . Jlaglab aco (from Sp. and originallya West Ind ian word ) .

Ex . (c) :To have property. Magari. Mam-i, landowner. Aria

n’

an, small farm ; also householdfurniture.

To have any th ing of one’

s own .

EX (f ) :To k now how to treat a father.

To know how to treat s'

ch ild , i.how to be a go od parent.

Ex .

To ha ve as yours.

To have as theirs.

To ha v e as m ine.

X IX . Words signifying articles of wearing a parel may be verbaliz edw ith may to express the wearing of the same. x . :

Mirro r ; (2 ) spectacles ; glasses. Salamin . Magaalamin, to look in them irror ; (2 ) to wearglasses or spectaeles. Ang aalaminan, what seenin the mirror.

Trousers. Salaam. Magdalawal, to wear trou

sets .

Magam d. Ex Si Juan ay maalammaymmi (Juan knows how to treata father

P. e. , how to be a good

son] Iagamci also means fatherand ch ild .

Maganak. E x Si Juan aymar zinongmag/anal: (Juan knows how to treata child [1 . e. , how to be a good

parent] Also ch ild and paren t.

TAG ALOG L AN G UAG E .

Shoe ,m ndal.

Apron .

Nambi t/ile

S epia.

191

(from Span . sombrero ) .

.lfagsumlmli/o , to wear a hat (oceasionally ) . .llanmiihalilo, to wear a

hat habitually.

Mug/mph ) , to ear sh oes ;also to line.

Ti ip is. Jim/taper, to pu t on or w ear

an apron .

XX . Maggenerallygo v erns allSpan ish , E nglish ,and other foreign word s:

not inco rpo rated in to the language .

To play baseball.

To gam ble .

X X I . Roots denoting officials mayd u ties perta ining to the office named .

To be go vernor.

To b e mayor iresidente ) .To b e a couh ei man .

T o be secretary.

T o b e. treasurer.

T o be prosecuting attornev.

E x

.lli iglwsbol. lix . : Nag/whesbiil am;"anti/ii bald (the boys [ch ild ren]are playing baseball. )

Saga]

is the usual term . Lani is the na

tiv e word an d means,like the

Spanish , either toplayor togam ble .

tak e may to express the d ischarge of

E x ;

.llaggohermulu r .

.lli igcimsij i ii.M tg/secrete rio .

.lluyh’so rcro .

.llugriscal.

X X I I . Mag, prefixed to abstracts beginn ing w ith [m and end ing in ( IN ,

s i gn ifies to do what is expressed by the abstract . Such wo rd s are used

fl n ly in the in finiti v e, and shou ld be clearly distinguished from those roo ts

p re fixed bv the particle mar/kn , w h ich lack the suflixed (171 W ith the in

d e fin ite in finiti v e. E x . :

T o d o d eed s of v irtue or justice .

T o d o righ t.

T o act chastely or in a clean ly man

ne r.

T o beha ve obscenely .

XX I I I . i th ad jectiv es fo rmed by pre tixmg um to the ro o t , may sign i

fi es to assume or boast O f W hat is e xpressed by the ad ject i v e ,i f the mean

i n g perm its S ti t'h assumption o r boas ting .

r egard as sign ified hvthe ad ject i v e .

T o boast of good j udgment .

T o boas t o f know le dge .

To boast of beauty.

in some. cas es may m eans to

Ii x . :

S i.lluymu hu it.

h is good.lmm (Juan boas ts o f

judgmen t [o r .

‘llabo il

,j ud ic io us

, prud ent .

Magmaminongl. .\ uymu nm rii

"may in . lm hv’

s (And res boas ts o fh is kno w ledge ) . W ise ,

learned (li‘H lll d i

'

o uma) . Kar im !»

i i i/4 111 , “ is do in , kno w ledge .

Virgi i i ii riicil. l'ix . : so

B iting/o i, (Maria bo as ts o f her

beau ty ) . Har il( ll, pret ty (from[M in i/Col, to gm “ pretty .

-l’um lil‘il tn lw an t iiv.

.Vuybunulu n (from kubrm alm i, virtue ,

justice ) .-llag/ku tu irlm (from kah u m n

, righ t ,justice ) . I‘ix [In to/(m mo sdd nanykalu im n th em w hat is

righ t ) .

JINg/ku lhoim n from kalim sau,clean li

ness l.

.Vl l f/kl l/N lh l llf ln (from Icahn/(won,( ib

scen itv) .

To boas t o f elegance ,beau ty .

To boas t o f b ra v e ry ; to swagger .

7

X X IV . If an ac t io n d o t s no t admit o f boas ting,71mg used w ith a lu l l

ad je i t ii e d eno tes beco m ing . g i o w ing,e tc . . w hat may be sign ified b \ the

ad jecti v e .

'

l hc d e iin itc part icle i n is gc ne rallv s u tlixed to the roo ts in

tliese i ascs . 1.x . 2

To becom e fo rge tfu l.

To g ro w ii i ti i' in .

X X V . \'

erb s w ith "m y; are made d iin in ii tivcs by repeating a b isy llab ic

ro o t o r the lirst two o i a lo nger one . ind su tli x ing o n,IN "

, or no n,as

req u ired . l‘lx . :

To w rite a litt le : to s c rib b le .liar/so Io ls u lu hm (from M int ) . (Alrea dy u se d) .

To cry a little : to s i i ive l. ( from fun k ) . E x\

'

mp um Im /o lum N /ll IN) Iu itlm q iyiin ,

th it ch ild is s ii iw liiig.

To i i i lilile . used . )

The same fo rm as t he ahm e al~o s ig n ifies ic ign ing,im itation ,

m o c k e ry. pla y ing at . c tc . llo th these and tho se m e n tio ned in Par . X X V

i . in o n ly I d is t ing u is hed b y the co n te x t from in te ns iv e reciprocal v erbsi'

o i'

in c d H i th e sam e (S e e l'

ar . X ) .

To a ffe c t \ li l lie , to play th e Ex :

ln po c i‘itc . Vo l/ho bo w i llow / (Io n sly/i (He is a

To play a t ln i ib lii is.r lio i i~i N ( as c li il (from In ihcm ) .

«li e l i i .

To play at b i t ing ( . i~

'

l‘

o inah ngc r'

ic ig i i illnes s .

To ll ' l l llll a lit tle o r to pre te nd to (fromtem pt .

To s ham in s an it y .

san it y .

To fe ign d ea i i icss . Ii ilitij i) . EL :

111m m } l u ng Ili tujbl li lj ibln~

glllati

( lio n t tr\ to sham deafness ) .

Ex .Vaymamagm idci

Lolcng,Dolores (Lo la ) boasts

f he r elegance ; beau ty . .llo

wo u ld , elegan t , beau t iful. Keyri n

dohu n e legance ,beau ty.

Vo l/ immipo ngz . l‘ix .Vagmatdpm cgs l I 'lm sti no (Faustino boaste d o fh is h raxer) ,

o r Faustino sw ' o

go red ) . ,

‘llrmipnng, bra v e . Ko la

po m /u u b ra very .

.llriq im i limolin . L um imo i

,to try to

fo rge t . .Vo I‘u lImoL to fo rge t . 31aI z

'

mol, fo rge tfu l. .

‘lu t/ Mali/"ohm,

w hat fo rgo t ten . ,llalwlinm tm

, a for

ge t fu l person . Kalinmhm , forget

iu lness .

.Vt iglii z cisu I Jiu . E V .Vugmumasu kh'

n

Sign?(He isgrow ing in firm ) . .Vuy.W IJII

, to be ill. .llom suklin, an iii

tirin ,sick ly person . S umo/cit

, to

fee l pai n anywhe re . Any m k ilnn ,

th e s e : t o fpain . (See l’ar X XVI )

li y im vi ite ) .

\ lr 'ai ly u se d. ).lI'w I ( from Imgn f ) . (Airead y u s ed . )

( l‘

l‘

t llll I‘JX\

.

l tflxl l w ll. I INI I ICI IN N I n (yo u are ma

linge ring ) .

( l'

s ed be fo re . )llvlaj i i I l l /N IH Id / z ( from iiIllI ) . (

'

In iiINl,

.llm ilul, t0

be c o m e in s ane . . lug/ {Izo d/ill, thecam e o f insanity . iii

XXX I . I t plu rality is to be ind icated w ith w o rd s some times used in thed ual sense , Aw red uplicated . E x

The friend s (se v e ral) -tng 11111gl1°

1111 °11 ibigu n.

The compan io ns Any nauglcu lsasfnna .

X XX I I . (f o rre lative nouns are expresse d w ith 111111; prefixed to the root

o f the principal wo rd . (See also I’ar. X VI I I . ) E x

Father and ch ild . -llayumd .

Mo the r an d ch ild . Mug/ind .

Fath e r (o r m o the r ) -in -law and son -Vuyh iu h dH .

(o r daugh te r ) - 1 11- la11°

.

Mas ter and 11111 11 .

XX I I I . I f the second co rrelati1 e is e x presse d especially by a proper

11 1 111 11 , j 1 1in t l1 11 i th the lirs t . the partie le is prc tixed to the principal, the

su ho rd in :ue tak inu1 the gen iti1 e case . i x

Joh n and h is tathe r . 17111 1 11 .

Jo se and h is l'

at l11 1 r-in -la11 ' . ling/1 1 1 1 11 131 1 1 1 1°

I 1 1 1 | 11 11n 1 | h e r In u the l' . Va r/ 1 1 1 13 71 1 1 1111 11 1)

VX X IV. .ll1 1 1/ d e no tes to tality w ith som e r1 11 1ts 1 1f t in 1e . Ex

The “ hole n igh t : ai‘n igh t . l°Ix . : .Vuyd /unag ukung

( I sle pt all n igh t (M M isthe u sual w o rd fo r n igh t .

The 11 h o le d ay ; all day . Mu g/1 1 111 1 1 1 1 . alone means the

tu ne from 111 11 111 un t il dark .

X X X Y . pre ti\ 11d to roo ts 1 on j 11 1vated 11 ith 11m an d 111 11 1; torms verbal

1 11 111 11s s igu il°

1 ing th e age 11t . I‘

he tirst s 1 l|ahle 1 1t the ro ot is red uplica ted1nd the art ic le g e ne rally use d. E x

The th it ' f.

The iahu re l‘. - l1 111 Jlugsaku ,to W ork

I I I the li1 1 l1 i1~.

XXX VI . V1 11; re tain s

111 1 1 1 w ith the d e fin ite in certain cases , bu t w iththe -1 11 h | 1 °h ha1 e be e n po in ted 1 1 111 tro n l t im e to time , thed e ti11 11 1 - 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 ; ro o ts 11 1 | l1 1 11 s t he sam e ru lc as th e d e fin ite o f 11 111 . (See I

'ar.

°

r1 1 1:

l . . \ s t rue 11 11x 1li1 1 1 11 1° l1s are no t fo u nd in

'

l‘agalog, the participle as

s 11 1 1 111 s 1t s 11 111 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1~ 11 s the re are t1 11s1 s

,the i11 1pe rat i1 e e xcepted . By

11 1 1 11 1 1111: t l11 11 1 1 111 111 1 1 1 1

1

1 1111

1 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 111 1 1s,

1 1 1 1 1/. the,

’1 1r a de 111on s trat1 1 e

pro no u n t o the p1 1 1p11

i te n s e 1 11 11 1 1 H» a part 11 le is fo rmed “ h ich 11111 1 bet ran~ 1| 1 11 d i11 se 1 1

1 1 1 l 11 11 1 1 1 1 11 | 11 11 1 i11 | 1s 1 1 1 11 l. 11 1vlisl1 .

1 11 1 11 1

11 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1l1 °

11s 1 d in'

I agalo g w h e re the idea would beI 11g l1~ l1 I 1 1 t h e i1 11 i1 11 ti1n t1 1 part 11 le ,

bu t the best way to obtain

1 11 1I1 11 1 11 1 11 11 124 11 11 1 1111 1 1 11 t l11 1 1

° °

a 1 iati1 1n s t 1 1 11 l1i1 h lagalog 1 erhal nouns mavl1e s 11 l1j 1 1 te d to 11 1ak 1 11 1 11 151 1 stnd 1

°

1 1 t t he 1 \ 111 1ples f1_

°

1llo 11 ing or referredtn I‘ X

- lugpugkumalay, the act" | a '

TAGA LOG LA NGUAGE . 195

To fail. 1‘1 t1h lil0fl. Any pagkah lilog, the act

o f falling.

To eat . Kumm’

n . A ug pagka in, the act of

eating.

I I . Pag (definite ) correspond s to may (defin i te ) in certain cases. As a

ruleverbs w ith may have the same defin ites as can ,except as no ted . W hen

pay is prefixed , in is inserted for the present and past tenses, form ingpinay. Pay only is prefixed for the imperat ive and fu tu re tenses, in beinsu ffixed at the same t im e . The first syllab le of the root is red uplicateglfor the present and fu tu re tenses. (See the tables . )II I . P 111; som e t imes expresses place in emn bination w i th su ffixed 1m

,

11 here an alone is used to express the pe rson 11 ho may b e the ob ject of the.

act ion . (See hanupun and paghanapau ,Par. V

,the d efin i te . )

(b ) Th is rule also applies w here the object takes 1 1 11 instead o f in .

To collect ; to dun . Sum ilfi/il. . lug d iff/111m ,the unpaid

d eb t . A the place of

ask i ng for a d ebt . ”11 11 117151, tovoller t o r d un as an b eeupation or

hab ituallv.

IV. The part icle [ mg is also used w i th the d e fin i te when place is d ireetlyex ressed in the sen tence, bu t not w hen im plied o r ine taphn rieally (liguratively) . Th is use of howeve r, is 1 11111 '

w i th those verbal rou ts wh iehadm i t an fo r the person o r objee t of the 111

-tum o f the 1

'

1~rl1 , a11d 1 1 ith o ther

verbal roo ts pay is no t used in th is sense even if place be expresse d Ex :

To bury ; i n ter.

To end ure hardsh ips.

To place.

To embark or travel.

t

(11 ) See also magpailong, to assem ble . and 111 11 11111311? to m ee t,se t up.

Pug is also comb ined 11 ith i d e tin ite,fo rm ing as a pre

fix , w hen the person for 11 hnm an ar t is pe rform e d is m en t ione d. (SeePar. VI I I , the d e fin i te . )\'

I . hene1 er the sen tenee e \ presses plu r.1lit 1 o f .t 1 ts o r agen ts, 1 1r 1 1f

fe ign ing or ret ' iprou t l act ions, pm ; (.1nd 11 11 111 11 111 1 1 req u i red ) m us t he U sed

wi th the defin i te . The artiele ”1 1 1/ be i ng 1 ' e n 1 r.1ll1 11s1 d, gi1 es the 1 1 1m

pound the idea o f a verbal 11 1 111 11 in the 1naju 1 it 1 o f 1 : 1ses . l‘1 1r e .\ amples

see Far . I \ u nd er the d e fi n ite .

VI I . Pay is reta i ned 11 ith the d e lin ite o f the may; form w hen rootswhich d i ffer in mean i ng w i th 11m and “ 11 11; are u sed . See PM . K , the d e li

ni te for examples.

VI I I . The part iciple Ls formed from 1em 1 e 1 hs ro o ts bv pre lix ing pm ;

to the root . the compou nd pret ed ed b 1 the artie le o r its e1111 i1 alen t . Th e

0

. lngpughumum,the buri

al plave . Ex : [Li u ngpiuugbaon(1n

11 1 1 113} su nd ry/( 1 (Th is 1'

as the bu rialplace O f the

l”7 110n iraplm ,the hard

sh ips .

mpu u n il ? (Th e to 11 n in wh ichthey end u red the hardsh ips ) .

.ifaglug/u y. [Arm/(in mo u u ng(1711 13; [long 11 1 1 17171?(Pu t some water

in th i s llNM pug/ln

1115131171 1 n ilu u g/ salami“ (The re 11 ill

be 111 1 plaee fo r m e to pn t th is m irro r ) .

SN um l. 1 1 11. A 115; 3 1 11.7 1m o r susakguiu

boat o r vesse l o f any k i nd . E x

[to 31 1 1 111] bu n gl u ng pim lgsasu l yd u

111 1 115; m u m um (Th is is the °

anoe in

11' h i1-I1 1 1 111 11 1

' h '

1 1'

e em barked ) .

[I

[I N O V

T11 teach . I'

1111iral. Any pugd ral, the teach

111g.

To stud y . Mag/(ind . Any pagad ral, the stud y

111g.

To d escend ; to fasten upon . H 11 111 1211 1g. A 111) the de

scend ing; fasten i ng upon .

TO th row or das h d own . Mag/11 12111 11. A 111) pug/1 101 131011, the

dash ing d own o r th rowing d 11 11 11 .

IX . P1111 som e t im es in dicates the presen t tense . E x . : Pug/said ko 111 1

(as soon as I told h itn l.

The re is occas ionally a to ne o f 11 111 11111 11 1 in its us e. E x . : 1 111111511111

11 11111 11111r11 11 ( i f he d oes not come here , I shall

no t pay h im ) .

“I f is generally u nd e rs tood , the id ea be i ng a fu ture

cond i t ion .

X I . P 1111, w i th verbal roots of some k in ds , ind icates act ion as transpi ring.

L igh t ; clearness . 11 111 131111 11. . 1111/ [10 111511 1i111117, t l1e grow

ing hgh t (o f the day,etc . A 111;

l1°

11 1i111 1y 1111 11 1) cirao , the ligh t o f dmo r of the sun .

V I I . For Ve rbal changes ,see tables :

T I I E IND I‘IFI X ITE PA RT IC LE

I . Th e ind efin i te verbali z ing particle 711 1 1 is used w ith roots wh ich dono t req u i re an o bject w hen verbali 7.1-d

,o r w i th those verbs expressing

111 1'

1 1111 11111r y ac t ion . .lI1 1 changes to 11 1 1 fo r the pas t and present tenses .

The firs t s y llable o f the 1 11 111 is red uplicated fo r the presen t and fu turete nses .

lI11 ge ne ra“ ) ex pres ses 11 state o r 1 1 1nd itio n o f be ing,

bu t there 1s

also a po sse ss i1 e id ea o f to h a1 e , an d 1111 111 1 1 many roo ts are made

.1 1 lj 11 1 t 1 1 1 1 s 11 h 1 1 11 prefixed b y th is p.1 rt11 l1 1 as is alread 1 fam i liar to the

read e r.

I I . Su ch ad j ec t ives in 11111 m u st e xpress in trins ic states or cond i t ions,t u d states o r cond i t ions w h ich may o r can be attained bvthe vo lu ntarve ffo rt o f an age nt 1 : 11 1 no t he e xpre ssed 1 1 ith 111 11 .

lll . \ 1 t i1 1ns 11 h i1 h r1 1 1 |u i l e an object 11 1111 11 con jugat1 d 11 ith other part i1 11 11 11 111 1 111 1 1

1

1 1 11jng11 1 11t1 1 l 11 ith 111 1 1 i f thc1 take place unconsc iously or Mc zh 1111 1 1 111 th e p.1 1 t o f the age nt .

The con j ugat ion o f roots w i th 11111 (1111 ) has 111 11511 and 111 1 117 1 o f the

ph lpe t‘

l'

e c t and fu tu re pe rfect respect ive ly replaced by 1111 an d 11m . .Va isals 1 1 r1 p1 11t1 1 l afte r the ve rb in bo th these te nses . Some roots beginn ing11 ith ,1

s t 1itt 11 it to 111 afte r 1111 1 . (See ttables fo r e xamples . )V . ad d e d to 1111 1 form s the parti1 l1 s 1111 1 1 111 1 and 11111 11 1111 used to

e x pr1~sphu : 1lit1

'

11 h 1 11 pr11 tix 1 d to a 1 1 1 rl1al roo t . Along/(1 , as has been

s e e n . is t he u s ual i nd icat ion o f plu rali t y 11 he n u sed as a separate wordbe fo re nou n e tc .

h ungry . ”111/12111 111 . llxa llarmm r1ya any11 1 1 1 1 111 17 11111 111 (many 11 ere h ungr y ) .”1 1 1 1 1 111 1 11 119 nanqng uyuh un

(m an y are hu ngry ) . .llarmm 11 170

1 1 1111 (many w i llh u ngry ) . The roo t is gu tum, theid ea 1 11 be ing hungry .

\'

l .llc1 is nsed to e xpress 111 t i1 1ns 1 11 an 1 11 1

'

1'

1 1 I11n t 1 1 1 natu re or be yond the1 1 111 tr1 1 l 1 11 f1 1 11 11 111 111 111l1 1 11s 11 1 1rd s also tak e ma . E x

To fall. "1111 13111 11. . l11g 11101 111090 11, the perso n o r 1 1l1je 1 t on whom anyth ing

198

To be ashame d.

TAGALOG

To be pleased .

To be sad .

To be glad ; amused .

To be asleep.

To be th irsty .

To cry; to weep (uncontrollablg) .

To giggle ; to laugh uncontrolla ly

LANGUAGE .

Mahiyt‘

i . Mahihiyin, a bash ful person . (See Par. X V, ma. ) Forhiyd w i th other particles, see index .

Malugod . L umugod , to lease ; to

recreate . Kalugoran ,friend ; com

pan ion in recreation .

Malnmbay. Ex . : Tila nalulumbaykey/6, you seem to be sad . (Seeindex . )

Matml. Aug katuaan , the neon or

ob ject over whom or wh ich one is

pleased or amused . (See index . )Matélog. Anglulogan, sleepingplace.

Matulogin, a res t sleeper ; alsomapagh ilog. unuilog, to go to

sleep; to sleep (little used ) .tulog, to sleep a great deal. (Seeindex . )Mauhao. (Alread y used . )

.llalmibis; manangw. (Alread y used . )Malaria. Tumaua

, to laugh . Magtmm

, to laugh (two or th ree ) .Mavi

'

gagtaua, to laugh (many ) ..

‘llagtaud , to laugh much . .

‘llaka(mm or magpataua, to cause to

Ian h . .llawuan in, a laugh ing,

sm i ing person .

VI I I . U nconscious or uncontrollable states of the m ind are expressedw ith ma.

To forget .

To forget to do .

Conscious or controllable states are expressed with um or may.

Halimot. (Already used . )Maliaan . Lumiaan, to omit to do (onpurpose ) .

IX . Ma (nu ) is used to express accidental or internal acts of a destruct ive nature, or when re ference is made to an actual state of destruct ion .

To break up; to sput up.

To break up (from internal causesor accidentally ) .

To Spo i l; to become pu tr id .

To break (int . or

To part ; to break in two.

Deliberate acts of destruction take um or mag.

llabu li . Ex . : Naball any tungkod

(the cane broke ) . Nabaliam m’

ydnanypad (he d islocated h is foot ) .Maghall, to break up, to s lit, aswood , cane, etc. E x . : B iin mo5yang tubb

’

l aké’

ybalian nanymum(break u

pthat piece of sugar cane

and brea me off a little ) .M ubrimrg. E x . : Nabdsag a: moo

(the glass was broken ) . a hémg, to shatter ; break up, as g as ,

crockery , etc. Nagbdaag siyci nanyw uraming vase (he broke manyglasses

Melind ak. E x . : Bulok na ang fadd

(the fish is spoiled now ) . (Seemugpa . )

Malagot. E x . : Malalagot {tong similid (th is thread w ill break ) . Kalagot anysimllid (the th read broke) .Mnglugot, to break , as thread ; totear up, as vegetables, etc.

3101x1101]. (Alreadvused . )


To spo il; to be destroyed . 3111111117. (Alread y u sed . )To bu rn (Already explained . )To (in (See index . )

(h ) follow ing the root w i th \ e i bs o f d estruct ion gi 1 es the ad ject ixalidea w i th “

alrea dy or“now .

’

( lthe r actual states are also e xpressedwi th the root and 1111 i f the contex clearly ind icates an actual state o f being.

(See und er bd sug, (1 11/0k, sird , 7111111 11, 1/11 1 i for e xamples . )W i th verbs expres

s ing si tuat ion 1 11°

“postu re 11111 (1111 ) i nd icates the

actual state o f be ing 1 11 such posture or posi t ion , or else the)involun tan or

unconscious tak ing o f such pos i t ion . E x

To be lying down ; to be in bed . 3111115110. (Already used ; see index . )To be on the k nees ; to kneel in Ala/1111 11 11. (Alread y u sed ; see i11

vo lun tarily . dex .

To be ly ing on the back . .lf u

l

H/u lyd . (A lread y used ; sec in

e x . )To be on one

’

s feet. 3111113111111. (Alread y used ; see i11

dex . )T., be seated . M11 111113. (Alread y used ; see i nd ex . )

X I . Cond i t ions or states reached b y slow t ransi t ion in most. cases o r a

retu rn thereto are expressed b y 11111

TO be d eaf . 3111111170

715. l‘ix . : Ai

d /1 1.

01.

1411 he isdeaf ) . (See und er mugin . )

To be stu ttering. Alugu ril. lax A'

1 1g11g11 1’

11 11 13/1i (he isbeginn ing to stu tteragain ) . M1 11]

to stu tte r ; to stammcr.

11 1111,stuttering ; stanunering .

To be insane ; craz y . Mu n /111. E x ; Nu n/11! (he wentcram is craz v) .”11 11 111111 (he “ ill go craz y ) .

(he \1 as sham

m ine i nsan i ty ) .

To lose the m ind (lit .

, to become Ala /1 1111) . \ lso ad j . tu rb id ; mudd y ;tu rb id ) . ldcare d (eves ) ; th ick (spee 1 h ) .

I‘

x . : 8 1 1/1i 111 171 1/ 7111111 15111

(h is m ind became clouded ) .

\ I I . The use o f 11111 is Somet imes gm e i ne d b y reason o f the rat ionali t yo r i rrat ionali ty o f the agen t . E x

To be uprigh t. 311 11111117. (A lread y used ; see index . )

X I I I . .lfu lca ( 111111 1 ) is somet imes U se d in place o f 11 1 1 1 these, parti

c les having many analog i es . (See l’ar . X lN . )X IV . Other u ses o f 111 11 have bee n e xpla ined u nd e r the a dject ive

,11.

X V . Ma prefixed and 1 11 (11 1 11 , 11 111 ) su tlixcd t1 1 ro1 ‘

ts s 1gnify 1ng m en tal

e mo t ions, pass ions, and invo lu n tar '

a1-t i1 1ns fo rm ad jec t ival nou ns

, wh ichg enerally req u i re to be expressed 1 11 E nglish b y an a djec tixe and a nou n .

A h umane person . ,llm u u u

’

n (from (See ind ex . )A n i rascible pe rson . Aha/1 111111 1 ( from w rath ; ire ) .

A loving pe rson . (from 511 111 ) (See ind ex . )A n affect ionate person . .l11 1 1

'

ru q 1'

11 (fro m affect ion ; ca

ressing ) .

A lm ing person . -ll1 1sc11/1 1h 1 11 ( from s iu td , love ) .A n obed ient pers on . .

ll11s 1 1 1m r 1'

n (1r1 1n 1A wee er ; a weeping person . Ala /1 1 1751 111 111 (fromA smi ing person . .

lf 1 1l1 1 11 1 1 11 1'

1 . (ti

rn n t

A sleepy pers on . ( li

rn lll (d in g ) .An affect ionate person . Jin nah /1 111 (from affect ion ) .

X VI . I f the roo t adm i ts o f con tract ion , begins w i th I, or an intensw e

d egree is expressed , the first s y llable o f the root mav be red uplicated .

A bash fu l pe rson . .111111 111 1 111 (from (Root con

tracts . )A fever i s h pe rson . (from l1 1g1111l, fever ) .

(L . root . )A forge t fu l pe rson . 311 11111111111511 (from 1211101

,fo rgetful

ness ) . (I 1 . root . )A jo y fu l pe rson . .Vu lu /ugd iu (from Ittgod , joy ; pleas

u re ) . (L. roo t . )An i nfirm ,

s ick person . .l11 ts1 1s1 1/cti11 (fromtracted root . )

A faint-hearte d pe rson . ) Iah d u kotin (from ltikol) . (I n tensived egree . )

1 1 1 1: D EFIN ITE PART IC LES AND

I . From the fac t that 111 1 1 verbs do no t generally requ i re an ob ject, thereis li ttle use fo r some forms of the d efin i te . Every act ion , however, mayhaw a reason , t im e

,o r place ,

and thus 1

'

d efin i te and an d efin i te are to befound 111 11 be ing replaced by as a ru le

,and always w i th i defin i te .

K 1: 1111,as has been seen , fo rms abstrac ts and places , as w ell as stand ing

for persons and o bjects of the act ion .

To be glad ; amused .

To be blind .

TU lN ‘

| 11 1 1 1T.

To be ru ine d in bu s ine s s ) .

To be lame .

To f.1 i1 1 t awm ; to sm m n .

Tn tll‘n l) “ ft ; 1 1 1 1 lr1 1p St lll lt‘llllllg up

1°

1den tally .

llu tu fl . . lug lcu lumm , the person or

ob ject o v er w h ich one is glad ,etc.

A ny Usu tud , the cause o f glad nessor anmsemen t . E x Kalmmn mo(mg mu ng/«1 bu tt

“

: (amu se you rself“ ith t he ch ild ren ) . Kinaluaan

(m y “m ug/(l Imh i (she amusedhe rse lf ith the ch ild ren ) . K inn

lumm m n i/d (my"uni/(i [m id (theyarc mu nsing themselv es w ith the

ch ild ren ) . angnun /71d ba ld (I w ill amuse myselfw ith the ch ild re n ) .

.llu mu hm. (See index . )(See ind ex . )(See in de x . )

JIM/”1 131 1 . - luy M'

l lli ilrfli, the cause Of

d eafness . Kubh fi/ihan , d eafnew .

Mabel/”31 . Em : t ulagcm siyd nnnggpl/l l (ho w as blinded bvw rath ) .

b lind ness.

Jim /”U n i . . lug the cause

f pm'

e rtv. poverty.

[M in n /sim, to become poor. . tng

f lu /31m in , the person becomingpu o r th u . . (See index . )

,llu lm /i. . lu f/ aka/11

.05, the cause Ofl' t ' illfl ru inc d. Lmn ugi, to d ecline

(aw l’

mm age or natural causes ) .JIM/”low . lu g; ikapiluy, the cause oflunw nt . lameness.

JIM/u h) . l'ix Nam/O faintedaway ) . -\h hihilb siyu (she is fainting: away ing Imh iloan , the place.

lin ing/«151. . lny Imluglugan , the place_ i d ru pping. . lng ikalaglag, the


by.p

refixin pan to the root, the first 8 llable of which is red uplicated .

T e use of t e definite particles in, i, an an follows the general ru le.

To rid icule ; Manlibak . An

ylibakin ,

what or

etc. whom rid icu ed , abused , etc . Anylibakan ; also any mapaylibak, thescoffer, hoaxer, nio

cker, etc . For

indef. with man see tables. E x

Bdkit lea nanlilibak ca kaibiyan mo!

(Why are you rid icu ling your

friend?) Syns. Uroy; uyam, uyao,and tiyao.

To give much ; to lavish . Marni ay (from bigay) . For d efinitewit i see index , also the tables.

To buvmuch . Mamilifirom bili) . For definite w ithin see tables.

To be nauseated or d isgusted . Mangliri. For definite w ith han see

ta es.

V . Man is used to express plurality of a cts rather than of persons w iththose roots which denote the simple action with um or may. W ith some

roots of colors man denotes intensity, and with some other roots ind icates

continuousness . I t is essential for these ideas that the meaning shall notbe changed by man from what it is with am or may.

Ex . (B roots) :

To divide up among others. Mamahayi (from bahayi) . E x . : Ami

kat/a any ipinamamahayi mo!

(What are on d ivid ing up?) Any{pinamam ayi ko

’

y naualamannan

ymarTyd pinamuma hayinan to

(W fat I am d ivid ing up is knownto those for whom I am d ivid ing) .

To habituate ; to accustom . Mamihasa (from bibasa ) . E L :

Ho uay kanymamihdaany maminlcia

8a maflyc’

t wpidbtihay mo (Do not

accustom yourself to complainingabout your neighbors ) .

To pull up continually or continu Manuinot (from Minot ) . Bumcinot, to

ously. pull up. Maybtinot, to pu ll upmuch .

E x . (D root ) :

To pray constantly. Mainalarfyin (from dalan

'

gin ) . See inex .

E x . (G roots ) :

To im itate much or habitually. Manyayad . Gumayad , to im itate.

Mayya to im itate (many ) .To m ix habitually (as a d ruggist ) . Manyam 0. Anypanyamam

'

n, what

so m ixed . Any ipanyamdo, whatused to mix with thus. An pan

yamauan, the place of ha ntuslm ixing. Gumamao, to m ix . Anyyamauin, what mixe d. Any igamdo, what adde d or the infi rmment used to mix with . Any

gamauan, the lace ; the mortar;d ish , etc. ayyamdo, to mixmuch . Any pagyamau in, whatm ixed much . Anyipayyamdo, theinstrument thus. An

mamin, theflees of muc mix ing.

To clear off (as land ) . Gumamas. ny whatyamacm,

cleared off. Any yamaaan, the


To reap; to cu t rice.

To quarrel w ith ; to reprimand

loud lv.

To cu t d own und erbrush ; to clear

o ff land ; also to speak freely .

T o th resh (hvmany ) .

E x . (ll roots ) :

To scou t . Jinn/ninap. (See index : Iu inap. )To s ow m u ch rice : or by many. .llu u lmsik . (See index : Imam. )To was h one

’

e face (habitually ) . .llanhilmnos. (See ind ex : Il l/1171108 . )T o pre dict habituallv. Van/m id . . I ny m u n h u h u h ) t h e

prophet ; soo thsay e r. ] I umu lri, to

pred ict ; fo rete ll. A ny Ian/u h ),

w hat fo reto ld . -lny bahmu, the

person to whom to ld .

E . (I roo ts ) :

To lik e (man y ) ; also to flirt. MmU/ibiy. (See ibiy. )To a void en tirely . , llm iyiluy. (See ilay. )

E x . (K roots ) :

To d e v ou r ; to eat continually .

To take hab ituallv.

To cling to w ith hand s an d fee ta monkevdoes ) .

To nibble much ; to bite w ith the

front teeth .

To tremble m uch or freq uent ly w ith

cold or fear.

To break o ff (as flowers o r fru it ) as .llmfifi lil ( from isib

'

l) .

an occupation .

Sec ind ex .

]( um ilfl, thesimple ac tio n . .

llu yln'

h l,to break

o ff thus m uch . S yn : P u f f; and

see also ]u itu l.

Ex . (P roots ) :

To pluck or break off much ; o r b y .llum ims Sec ind e x .

many .

land cleared off . Jiayyanu is, to

clear off (by many ) . Munyamaa,to clear o ff m uch. A ny panya

masun, the land th us cleared .

G iana/ms. Anyyopasin , what reaped .

Any yapmmn, the field . A ny yin

apu san ,the stubble left . .llayyu

to cu t or reap m u ch . Mu n

yapus, to cu t or reap (man y ) .

A ny ]mnyupas, the sick le . Anyumnyuyupas, the reaper, harveste r

(person ) .Any yasrm n

, the person so

quarreled w ith or reprimand ed .

Mayyasri, to quarrelw ith much,o r

to reprimand much or man y .

myusd

, to quarrel with or to

reprimand hab itually.

Gum /wok. Any yasalvin , w hat clear

ed . i. e the underbrush . lny

gasakan , the place. Any yasakin

is also the person spoken to freely.

.llauyu su k, same actions as fore

go ing b y many.

Manyiils. (See index : yells. )

.Vmfimin . (See Isa in . )Alum/uh”. (See.llu uyuyvi/n l (from

w hat c lung to ,i. e

tree . e tc . ]x'

mw iydlu l, to graspl ll lls . . lny Mug/rip”, w hat W ith

,

i. e th e hand s. fee t. e tc . No old

wo rl d mo n keys ha v e a tail wh ich

can he u sed fo r grasping ,the Ph il

ippine I sland s spec ie s includ ed .

.llmfiliiu

'

t (from to

n ibb le .

.llm iyin yiy (from kin yiy) .

204 'rAG ALGG LANGUAGE .

To break off (by manY) ; to gatherhabitually (as flowers or frmt ) .

To whiten intensely .

To grow very pale.

To cut up (as clo th ) .

E x . (8 roots ) :

To d isperse ; also to scatter much Manambiilat (from aambdlat ) . Seethe air. index .

To bite much (as a mosqu ito ) . Maniyid . Any aiydin , the men,

etc ., bitten . Any payaiy n

,the

place. Sumiyid , to bite (as one

mosquito ) . Manyid , to be bitten .

E x . : Nanim'

yt'

d any mari'

ya [amok

(themosquitoesare bitinghard [in

To destro completely. Manira(from sire) . See index .

To curse abitually. Manumpd (from sumpd ) . See index .

Ex . (T roots ) :

To peck much (as a bird ) . Manukd (from tuba) . See index .

To tempt habitually. Manukso(from tukaé) . See index .

VI . W ith roots w h ich adm it of the idea of mak inga living by exercia

ing the acts denoted bvthe roots , man expresses the i eaof an occupation,

trade, or profession .

To preach . Mari'

ydral (from aral) . Any manyari

'

yaral, the preacher, bu t anym

yrggam z, the m

aster or teacher

(0 a octrine, etc . Any i n‘

ydral

, what reached . {pinari

'

yaliral, w at isbeingpreached ;the subject of the sermon . Anypinan

'

yari'

yaraldn, thepersons beingpreached to (the con tion ) orthe u lpit. (See in ex for dral. )

To care for. Mama Old (from bahald ) . Th iswordis from Sansk . bhara, the root ofthe English

“to bear, Lat. f em .

Kay/i bahald , pli (you take care,

sir [i. e., pay what you

Sino any namamahald ca balmy!Who is tak in care of the house?)

t

'

i Juan (JuanTo practice me dicine. Manyumotflrom yamot ) . See index.

To m ilk (as occupation ) . Manyatus (from gatas) . Anynanya

yalas, the milkman (or maid ) .G'

umalas, tomilk (occasionally) .

Mamuti (from putt) . Pumuti, to

break off . Mayputf, to break off

much . Mafi'

yaypuli, to break off

(byman Syn . : Kilil; andpawl. ny pu lila

’

n, what broken

off. A than, the branch

from wh ic much is broken off .

Marnuu'

(from pu tt) .)See index .

Mamutld (frommuta

nt“ See ad jective. to

.

grow pale.

Putlain , a

dperson who is always

pale ; palli MaputIA,a person

who may become pale or pallid .

Kapullaan, pallor. Hakapulld , to

cause allor.

Mamuto ((alreadyused . ) See index .

To fish for eels.

To hunt. sea tu rtles.

To gather or h un t for honey.

To gath er o y sters .

To hu n t d eer .

.Vanm /vis (from palds, eel) .

.llanm w ikan (from pa'wikan , sea tur

tle ) .

JIanm Iol (from p it/of , honey) . .lfan

pa int. to buy honey. .llaypnlot

(l ) to make honey ; (2 ) to d eal inhoney . Any pulotin , the h oneymade . I ’inalottin

,w hat has been

ma de from honey (from pu lotd n ,

sweets made o f honey ) . I ’ulotin

is also a term o f endearmen t . E

w ith o n : Jimmy mo alcony palatan

i lon'

i flatte r honey ) me P alat

guh i, h one y and co coanu t m ilk .

Man o /ain'

t (from fellow ) . K alalab a

lam, ( i) ste r bed .

Alina/u s” (from New,d eer ) .

I X . Sim ilarly an y inst rumen t. weapon ,u tensil, or animal wh ich can he

so use d is ve rbalm n l “ lt ll the id ea o f h un t ing ,fish ing for, or ca tch ing by

I-Zx . :

To hun t w ith d ogs o r hound

HU I “ .

To h u nt w ith o r to u se a gun .

To fish w ith a ho o k .

lish w ith a small b o ok .

To lis h o r h u n t w ith a ligh t .

To u s e o r h u n t w ith a spear called“

kalfim i t .

'

rl ) ilh il “ lt ll t llt ‘ il t lt lk .

'

l‘

o lis h w ith a w in e .

'

l‘

o 11 .

-li w i th an y t h ing that n an be

lls c i l to catc h lis h .

o s e ine w i th t h e larg e ne t ( .l ilt ' i i

[vil llg t l

piiko t .

To n-h w i th l'

i n l. line . i nd h o o k .

Jlu nm la la ya ( from

(from asa,d og ) .

llvm /a nMum y (from lambanq . a

h u n k )Sec ind ex : lambat.

P u

m a/a/sa na ,to lis h o ccas ionally .

JIM /u ri nal}.

lla n ii l ( from S ilt, a thorn or book ) .

lo a to make anyth ing out of

tho rn s o r boo ks ; to make abbatis.

S yn {o n /c. Tin ik also means fish

.llumm ' i/ (from bar”

, a Shotgu n ) .

.\ lalay, lu trl’

il. A ug mnmumu rvl,

the hun ter .

llm nm m l (from bhm il ) . See ind ex .

llll /u h s (trom Mum s) . Th is means

to use a rod and line . B um um

to lilt the hook b y the line . 3qbit / u s. to d o th is m uch . . l/su y

m rtnu mm '

u s (l am go ing fish ingw ith a rod and line ) .

'

lIN IQ/l/t lu (from ”NH,11 ligh t ) . EX

,tIu J /u fip hm 1m bug/cl (A re you

go ing lis h ih e w ith a ligh t?) (h i

- l/u q/ [H i/JV! (mg p immgnTg/r/u u rm mm.

”(In W h it ' h field

are you go ing to lis h w ith a ligh t?

)[ya ng In t/m1 mum ; mu luyo su "tango:(N i/m y ( In that he l d o v er there farawa y trum the houses ) . (

'

uu lun,

to ligh t up. Jil ly/flat ) , to earrv a

ligh t . . lny ilumm,the lamp or

[d itt‘e ( i t ligh t .

llm fi/u /d u ct.


X . W ith roots denoting arms,tools, or instruments mu n ind icates the

habitual use or wearing of the arms and the constan t use o f too ls o r instru

ments . E x . :

To use a d ger. (from iwa ) . See ind ex .

To use a sic lo. Munlilik (from lilik, sick le ) .

To use an axe. llIama/alro/ (from poluknl, axe ) ..lIrig/pd hlktil, to ha v e an axe .

To use arms. Ma riam /um (from sou /lulu, arm

,

weapon ) . .llugmm dalu ,

to bear

arms . . lny .m m /umhma, armedtorces ; Ie \ y en masse .

To use a syringe . .llnnu nq u t (fromTo use a kn ife . Mariam /(m g; (from sum/«my, k n ife ) .

.llugs um lu tq j , to carry a kn ife .

To use a war bolo (tabak ) . JImm /m/c. to wear a war

ho lo . Tumubu l, to cu t off w ith a

war ho lo .

X I . W ith roo ts d enoting certain places nm n ind icates the li v ing in such

) laces, earmng the li v ing from the prod ucts th e reo t,o r traw ling in such

ocalitv. E x

To li ve (general idea ) . .

‘llunu ilm g/ (from Iu tlum) . I d ea is toreside , e tc . .Vuylu i/m y, to liv e .

b’

u uu ihu u, to gi v e life to . Ba/my,

ali v e ; liv ing .

To dwell in a house . .llamrilm y ( fro m See inde x . l'lx . : So o n [cc/ yom umumwrm .

’

(W he re d o yo u liv e?) . Iny lnilm ycit /ci srt (N H/(mg Uri hn lise ,

s ir, is he re in th is town ) .

To liv e in town . Alllum lyvn wli

l fl l l l’Ml l/N N )fe llo w - to w n s man . cou nt ry

man . Jil ly/”w o n, ( l ) to lo o k fo r

a tow n s ite ; (13

) to to u n do r hu ild ato w n ; (3 ) to appo rt io n ivy tow ns

am i no t hv in habitan ts ] {cq /u u

t ) n le tlns s pace earth

ind sk y . d av ( rare ) , and weath er

(rare )To live in the m ountains ; to wand er

there ; to gain a li v ing from the

pro ducts the reo f.

To liv e in the open coun try.

To lead a seafaring Inc ; to he a

deep-sea fisher .

To li ve in the t im be r ; to lay the

tim ber waste ; to wand er in the

wo ods ; to li v e hvwood chopping ,

etc.

To tra vel or li v e on the hank o f a

river or the seacoas t .

( li

l‘

l t l ll Th is

w o rd ma y also mean lo trzu e lin the

m o u n tain Tu g/d ham le t, m o un

ta inee r . s o m e t imes u sed insu ltingly , a

' hayseed , in linglish .

.llt lu u ib J ( fro m

Alam o/u ! (t ro m «Mg/cit, se ; ) qmo ngo l, sailo r o r d e e p

-sea fisher.

A lso loo/u r o ya l; {n n u ng/ (h ou rly/m.

Magi /d oo r, to t taVe l b y sea . ] ) rt

”Mir/I I I , lo tio u t i the land .

(ti

l t bl t l ti ll/N i t,“

tnn her ; fo rest . lu j / I/ i f l l l fl i

l tl ' i t, w hat car

ried m the t im be r .o r the cau s e o f

wand e ring . e tc . . lu g;

the place o f w o rk ing . d e v astating,

wand e ring , in the to res t .

l h m u ihu l, to llt ‘t ’

U I I lt '

t it rest .

tind u -r land o r fo re s tedco u n try .

.llu u lu m /m y ( from lu mhu‘u ) , ,

lluglam /my, to earrvan y th ing to coast


or bank . Lumambay, to go to or

alor

)1g the bank or coast (single

act

X I ] With roots denoting certain articles of wearing apparel man ind i

cates their habitual use or wearing.

To wear a sh irt habitually.

Ex

Mamaro (from baro) . 808 index .

See also aambalilo, hat ; aapin,shoe ; and tapia,apron .

X I I I . W ith roots denoting veh icles, boats, or other means of artificial

locomotion ,man sign ifies to travel by what is denoted by the root. E x . :

To travel by canoe.

To travel on horseback .

To travel by quilez .

"

X IV. Man also denotes self-sup

Mamanglcd . EL ; Hang arao bankain mula d ito hangan Mag/nag;(Howmanyda ab banka [canoe]from here to L ani a? ) Maghaponkayang bangkain (Perhaps all of

one day byban a

Maribabayo ( rom cabayo, horseMan

'

giles (from kites, avehicle namedfrom Guillermo Quilez , of Vigan,

I locos Sur, who suggested it to hiscarriagemaker,anative of Vigan ) .

rting and slowly developing actions

from with in such as the growth 0 flowers, fruit, etc . y roots commencing with b, wh ich would otherwise be conjugated with um, take manfor euphonic reasons.

the bamboo ) .

To open (as a flower ) .

To bloom ; to blossom (as a flower ) .

To bear fru it.

To bear fru it ; to be full of fruit.

XV . Some roots have d iffering meanin

some cases the variation is great , but in ct ers little or none .

(See um,Par. VI I . ) E X . :

To sprout ; to put forth shoots (as Manlabong (from labong) . Alsolumabong. Maglabong, to haveshoots .

Mamukadkad (from bubadbad ) . Visayan, bu kad .

Mamulaklalc (from bulalclak , flower ) .Visa an , burak; also applied to

the i angilan E L : Namumulalclak anyman?) halaman (the plantsare blooming) .Mamurfga (from bu ri

'

ga; fruit ) . ExNamumunga na angman

'

fn’

i kahoy(the trees are alread y bearingfru it ) .

.llamusaksak (from bun b ak ) . E L :

Namummaksak itongpu lukban

(this lukban tree is full 0 fru it ) .

InMan

, how

with um, may: and man .

ever, looks to the effect or result more than to the simple action , which isexpressed b um or may. The examples will best show these d iffere ncesand resemb ances. E L :

W or ds d iffering in each case :

To teach .

\Vord s agreeing w ith um

To intrude or steal in .

To th row a lasso or rope .

Umaral. Magaral, to study. Mangaral, to preach . (See index : dral;also talc and salamin . )

and man; bu t d iffering with mag

Dumikit; manilcit. Magdih’

t, to farten ; to to together.

Sumilb. anilb, to lasso ; to rope;to ensnare . Magda) , to make a

lasso or snare.

The Sick le .

The spad e .

The b rush , ruler, etc .

The pocke t hand kerch ie f, napk in ,

towel, ete .

The hammer.

The pen , pe ne il, e tc.

The string, co rd . ro pe , ete.

X VI I I . “ ith nam es o f the days and nouns like

d enotes some th ing used dailv or on th e day named .

Som eth ing fo r daily use .

Som e th ing fo r u se on

X IX .

(day) panirao

E x .

ing pangriramirao.

rated .

Aug pu n/lines.

(Noun re dupli

In like man ner.1mm

,w ith the red uplieated in itial syllab le o f the

ro o t . ind ieates the habitual agen t w ith tho se ro o ts capab le o f d enotingoeenpat io n , trad e ,

o r pro fession .

ro o ts

change s .

I t may also be used with some o ther

In so me eases the pd rltt' lt 'S are repeated w ith occasional euphon ic

The fo llo w ing have a simple red uplicat ion°

Barbe r.

Hunte r (with gun ) .

Salli i i‘.

Ph ysician .

Reape r .

e r.

Tinsin ith , plum ber, e te .

Snw y e r .

\Vrite r ;Spinne r .

Tallln r , M ’

tll l ls‘

l l‘

t-s s

‘

.

Re s e lle r . n d ee ln e r .

Tem pte r.

In th e lu llo w in e xam ple s

t iz l l s y llab le o f t h e ne w w o rd

part le le

Preach e r .

llu n te r w it h d o g s o r b o u nd s .

Fis h e rm an .

X X . W ith w e igh ts . m ens u ri

tn eale h ,

":lpleee ,

u n de r th e n ume rals . )X X ] . “ lib man y ro o ts 1mm s ig n ilit

l t l' "l ‘l e l i f -‘l l t i l l

llmfipufipira/ (from to

preaeh ) .

,llmZ/u ng/u so tirmu many/am , to h untw ith d ogs ) .

llm fi/u fiu'

x-(lci (from mangmdd , to fish

fo r a living) .

ind sim ilar no uns . man prefixe dsign ifiesu n o un ts as m ay be d en o ted b y the nou n . (See

l re sem b lance to what may belc‘

Any pang/apes (from gap as) . (Seeindex : yopus . )

Aug ]mnlu ikuy (from h it/my) . (Seeind ex . )

A ug 1n t /tih il (from git/t it ) . (h um i

Iu'

t, to line ,

mark, or paint .

. lng/ [mm /Mid (from p tu luih id , to rub ;to elean ) .

-lng/ pum u kpuk (from p ttm ukpn l.‘

o r

wmgpu lcpulc, to strike ) .

A ug po n d /u !(from mm u ilal,to w rite .

[fo ra li v ing] (See ind ex : S it/at. )'tm / plum /i (from MU) . .llagtali, tot ie , fasten , hind .

.llumu ih il (from usually 31cm

“

:

m fgcih il in Manila.

Jlrmmmrtr il (from hard ) .Mu nom igml ( fro n tllrl lljj f l fll l lll l i l (fromflf l t ugu gm/m s (from

(from hell/ i ) . I l ll lllf tI/ t, tow ea v e .

.llu u lu lmm ng t from h imm q ) . Hum?

mm q , to so ld er.

Mu n /u lu ga ri (from Iagmri ) . (See ihd e x . )

Ala n / I n fi ll ]! (from .wilal ) .

( it‘

t tlll

fila uan d /l f ( ll'

fl lll

No rm /m l.) ( from ti t/o ) .

(fro n t tu b/ts ) . Tuma’n'

u,

to re s e llt ’ to redeem (sim ple act ) .(from til/cad ) .

it s t'

n nj llz zl tt ' t l W it t) Hum has th e illibe tw e e n the nu t an d the mg or the

TAGA LOG LANG UAG E . 2 1 1

Hu rricane ; typhoon . B 11g1/15. F\ [long1111 1 171111 (Tliis “ ind seems like a

typhoon ) . \ agfalayag silo y bina

gyoMM 311 d t’

tyal (They were coast

ing and were caugh t at sea bva

typh oon ) .

A nger. (h i/it. Ex . : Alumni/1111611! 11110 119

[infinofipisap (That way of talk

ing resembles anger ) .

TH E I ND EFIN ITE PART I C LE .\ I AK A .

I . This particle (m l/( 1 1 in the past and present ) has two d istinct mean

ings, the first being that of cause and the second that o f powe ,ability, etc.

For this reason there are two d e finites, that co rrespo nd ing to the idea of

cause be ing ka , and that to the id ea o f po wer be ing ou t

In both cases the true pluperfectt and fu tu re perfect tenses are formed by1111 following the \ erb as ex ist ing in the pas t and fu ture tenses ,

respecth ely.

The id ea of ( ause is ind icated bv w ith roo ts d enoting 1 11nd itions,

to rts (w rongs ) , and bettermen ts w 11 11 h hat e o n lv one de finite ; that w ith

1, wh ich has 1 11 w ith the past and p1esen t tenses, to r1n ingand ikw a also ind icate time (not ten se ) in 1 e rtaii1 1 ases . (See ind ex . )I ] . The d ifference in syn tax be tween these verbs in the sense of

cause and all others m ust be no ted . In the d e fin ite these v e rbs have theagent in the nom inative and the recipie n t o r ob ject o f the action in thegen iti v e . In the indefinite the agen t is in the u s ual nom inati v e also

,bu t the

recipient or o bject takes the aeeusative ,w h ieh is in v ariab ly preeeded bvso

(ne v e r by Th is use of 31 1 is also fo und w ith som e other v erbs .

I l l. M1 1 11 and man roo ts re tain the d e fin ite fo rm s 111111 and pan wh en eon

jugated w 1th muku,as w ill be seen from e xamples

To be able to learn or stud v.

To be ab le to teach .

To be able to preach .

I \ . Roots v erbaliz ed bvnut/. 11 red upli1 ate th e first M ilab le o f the roo t inthe present and future tenses. In some d is t ri1 ts the seco nd s x llab le o f the

particle ts red uplicated , bu t th is is a pro xine ialism .

To cause damage . (from d ug/11 .1111 andSee in dex

To cause angu ish .

Vo kupnyd rvtl. lax

(I was able to stud y ) . Nu kupu

gvu iru l sou? ( lle [she] is ab le to

b t llf ly ) . af t/t i (The )w ill be ab le to stud y) . Hind i (tl1 ;vuakopo gnu iru l (I Shall no t be able

to stud y Nupugoiru l 1 1 111; 11 1m l

(1 was able to learn the lesson ) .

1\'

1 1/11 151111ir11l 11 115; 11 1m l

[she ] is ab le to learn the lesson ) .

Mupo g/u dm / 11 1112 a ny hin t! (Theyill be able to learn t he lesson ) .

,Vokm irn l. .Vo lu uim l 111313 ( Iwas able to teach ) . Th e o ther

te nse s,bo th o f the ind e fin ite an d

the d e fin ite are fo rmed in the

sam e, wav.

(1 was able to preach ) . Nu isaKlimt i8 21 l) l(’ tO

pr'ach sig/(i

(lle ill be, ab le to preach ) . Thed e fin ite is fo rm ed in the sam e way

1s ith [umpire ]

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

To cause satiety.

To beautify or adorn .

To cause d isgust.

To do good .

To h inder.

To adorn ; to embellish .

To cause relie f.

To cause sadness.

To hinder.

To cause another t o tremble w ith

fear.

To cause to tremble with cold or

fear

To o r do evil.

cause d isgust ; weariness ; annoyance .

To daz z le (as th e sun o r ligh tn ing) .To cause anxiety.

To cause nausea.

To wound (lit. , to cause to be

wounde d) .To cause to be set afire.

To cause loathing (as food ) .

To cause fear.

To cause laughter .

To cause pleasu re.

Makabusog. Bfiaoy is a bow

(weapon ) .Makabuti. Bumuti, to w handsome. (See buti in in ex . )

Hakadt'

mtirim or makarimdrim .

Mandimdrim, to d isgust . E x . :

N andimdrim ako ou km'

n niyd

(figs manner of eatmg d isgusted

me

Makayaliny.

Makayambald .

Makayandé. Ex . : Any kahinhina’

ynalea ayandd aa mmEa dalaya

eety is a beauty in girls ) .Any kahinhindn ay sit/any

ikinayayandd nany mafiyd

Hakayinhdua. Ex . : Makayinhdua anin

yoany yamot (Let the med icine

re ieve you ) . Nakayizduiuam alt-ia

any yamot (I was re lieved by themed icine ) . Naka

gyinhdua ou ka

n iyd any yamot e is beinlieved by the med icine) . Ma ayi

ginhriua ao ing/6 an gamot Youwill be relieved by t e med icineAny1mykayinhdua , the relief (acti

Makuhdpu . (See index : héMakalibany. (See index : ligang. )Makalmfi

'

gildbot (from 5 16110! andn ) . Kakilakilribot, horrible.

11 akapafi'

yinyiy. (See index : Icinyt'

y) .

(See index : yaliny. )

Mal-mama. Makauwamd , noxious;malignan t . Also fu ture tense.

E x . : Houay many kam'

n ilonyburi

‘

yé’t makoaasamd 11a iyo (Don

’t

eat th is fruit, because it w ill ihjure you [be noxious to you , in

Any ilcinasaaamd nanydicing loob ay any kaniyany p aymunnim n walany tigil (What putsme in ba humor is h is everlastingslanderiu tz (lit. , The cause of mybad humor 18 h is slander-ing w ith

out cessation, def. ] Sumam1i, to

become bad or evil. (See indexaamd . )

filakaaaud .

Makasilao. (Syn : p ulay.

.

‘lI akastikal.

MakmmHamMakamiyat. (&e index : myat. )

Makaxcinoy. (See index : annoy. )Makam yd . (Syn . aunok. )Makauikot. (See index : ldbol. )Makataua. (See lau d : index. )Makalud . (See index : tad . )

TAGALOG LANGUAG E .

have to send to your father in

Manila Aalia aké nanymais tilat

na ni iniu los t o ao kam’

(i

(Iwill,

w en he writes down t e

ordersgIo

have given h im ) . (Seeindex : smal. )

To be able to run away. Makatakbé. (See index : takbn) .

V II I . W ith negative particles the imperative is largal used instead o f

the presen t tense, although the meanin is the same as at of the latter,i. e .

,hind i alcfmymakamilal, I can not write ; I am not able to w rite ; instead

of hind i akony nakasumilal. The definite is sometimes used in the sameway w ith the negative, and even with the affirmative. Examples : Hindiakonymakapaydral (I can not [am not able to ] studyJ

or learn ] H ind imomadampot? (Can

’

t you

Ipick it up [gras it] Hin i komai kayay (from

lidyay, ma,i, and pa ) can not revea it [make it publici

t

y.l

Hind i akamake /ads ao Ma ala

’

t akd’

ymayaak it (I can not down to Manila, becauseI am ill) . “

’it um th is ma be expressed kin t akaman ariny lummism

Maynild’t akamay sakit. ind f kayomakapari

'

ydsa (an’t you talk?)

Hind i ko mawikd (I can not pronounce it ) . Hindi o maaaysay (I can not

ex lain it ) . Hindi ko masabi (I can not tell it ) .X . Malta (naka ) w ith the indefin ite and ma (na ) w ith the defin ite sig

nify to do what is denoted b the root mechan ically, casually, involuntard y

,or

Isuddenly (occasionally) , especiallvacts of the mind and physical

senses x

Makaamoy. Nakaaamoy kayéf (Do

you smell any thing?) Naaamoy

ninyé bayd anybari'

yonyisinasambtilat nanymariyd bu laHalf (Do yousmell the fragrance shed by theflowers

")

To feel. Makaramdam,from damdam. Na

ramdamdn mof (Did you feel it?)

nadaramdamdn kopa (Ya , I .

feel it yet ) .To hear. Makarinyiy (from divi

'

yiy) . See index : d iri

'

yiy.

Makalasap . (See index : lasap. )Makakitd . E x . : Aké

’

ynakah’

ld nanyisany tauonydig/an (I saw a person .

there ) . Aakitd bayd (Didou see them?) Hindi n

"n i

’tmaw

' ikita ko sana (No, but Immay be:

able to see

Acts of the mind :

To k now (something) . Makadlam. Walany nakaad lam (Noone knows) . Hind i ko naaalamarz

(I do not know it . )To th ink . Makaisi Hindi maim

’

p , incomprehensi lo. Ex . : And any {sip me?

or Naiim'

p mo or Naiisipan mo

(What do you think abou t it? )Km

’

aipan , o inion . Anypayka isip ,

the act of t inking.

To com ) rebend somewhat ; to feel; Makamalay.

to un erstand .

To understand (naturally) . Makatalasais. Ex N a ta ta lastd 8

f ling/6 bayd? (Do you understanit? ) Walanynakatatalaslds (No on eunderstands) . Tumalastas, to nu

derstand (byan act of volition ) .

TAG ALOG LAN G UAG E . 215

To remembe r (cas ually, Jlu lumluu lu . (See ind ex : altm lu . )To forget . filalmlimot. (See index : Iii/w t. )

\ I iscellaneous :

To like (naturally ) .To ascend o r go up

To enter (casuallv) .

To fall asleep.

X . N a (no ) is used in connection w ith a n s o me tim es in ) to express

being o v ertaken b y w in d,w eather, n igh t , (

' I ( and also to ex press the

cas ual ad v en t o f a season , date , etc.

Som e ph rases o f th is natu re are used w ith in on lv.

The d efin ite on lv is fou nd .

To be caugh t o u t in the sun . ,llm im n See ind ex : tlTU O and {n it

To be overtaken by n igh t .

To be caugh t in the rain .

To be b lind ed .

To be h o t (warm ) .

To be cloud ed ; tu rbid .

To be o vertaken hvJuly.

To be found at Eas te r. -llupu scuu ; nmpasd'o. I‘Ix . : Kapos

Isn lm n mt (Easterfound m e i n Man ila ) .

X I . Make also signifies the possible accom plishmen t o f a purpose w ith

the indefinite ; nn r be ing used w ith thc d e lin lte . no . ) The accom

plishmen t o f the end sough t 1s alwavs e xpresse d Hi the past tense .

To be able to lift . liftab le.

I‘Ix . : Balm /mm: [so ito ny hayonyAnny nu t/n i/m f (I w ill lift this suck

it it be liftalde ) .

To be able to o v ertake bv running. llt th l/u ihol. Hou nd /m l,to run after

m o th e r m to o v ertake h im(he r ) . l‘iX J [CO e ff/(

i

t’

ll

h in t /i naln‘

t /nd t I ran afte r h im [he r]bu t co u ld no t o v e rtake h im [her]

To be ab le to find . filt tku lu in up . (Sec fu tm tp .

‘ ind ex . )To get by ask ing. din/co lu mn . (See nnfi/i: index . )To be able to catch fish . Mu b q nnn/m h i. li e : ”so 31 w o n!!

in g/ lath? l u ng mu kup tt ngtmh i t i am

go ing to lish if it is poss ible to

catch any fish

To be ab le to pass an exam inatio n . .lfitkumilit. l'ix . : S imilit avg/ti nany

tty (hind?) M ikael/(h f

.Mu /Ja fbtg. (See llldOX : Nu'

gj . ),lfakupcm lu

'

l“ l' .x ° Nupu nhilsu n [so

(my [Mi/m y mmg l t d /n ou n 1mm: (1w en t up by chan ce in to the house

o f ou r friend ) .

filu ku lnisok . (See ind ex : p ixels. )l‘Ix ' l i

’u nynmsa u ko

’

yM ike l/f log a ka ( 1 was read ingand fell as leep) . . lny i/t‘ah ilog,the cause o r t ime o f sleeping.

. [m/ rpm/Ming], the cause or time

o f s leeping a graat deal

fo r e xs .

Jim /u h]. lix (y'

ayu bih in la 30 da un

(Yo u w ill be o v ertaken by n igh to n the road ) .Mu n /(in . (See index : u lcin . )All i/w ing. (See ind ex : buluu. )Alfa irn l. E x A

'

u iin ilan also (1 amwarm ) . (

'

m in it, to become ho t .

Mug/in cl,to heat . JI t lg/ptt iltfl, to

allow to become hot .

(See ind ex : lube. )Main /iv. Rx K im“ 31"aud io/m u so

'

I'

m lm (J u ly fou nd us in Tarlac ) .

\m m o nth mavbe used in th is

to gi v e an accoun t 0 1 .

To be ab le to h it w ith arrows. lf 1 1I’ 1 1/11 l111i . 1 ' 11 11111 111‘

1,to sh oo t at w ith

bow and arrow . E x . : P 11 11J 11111 1111

1111 1711111, I1 1

'

111I 1'

h u la/111 1 11?11111 ?(I le shot at the birdsw ith bow and arrow

,bu t was no t

able to h it them ) .

used, expresses physical pow er or ab ilitv as a

gene ral ru le,11 1113 11 and 11111 11 11111 1” be ing u sed to e x press m o ral power o r

ab i lity By the uned ucated,these word s are u sed almost ind iscrim inatelv.

(See and ind ex . )X I I I . JI 1 1I.°11 is also used to v erbaliz e I°11 1/1i,

'

perhaps , m ay be ,

w h ich is conjug i ted as in the fo llow ing exam ple

(I d o no t

'“

kno w if I w ill be ab le to carrv it ) .0 111

.

11I. 1 1 111 1 1I 1 1I. 11 1/11 171 1111111 1111 1111 I1 11 11 1 1/1 1 ( I d o no t k now if I w ill be able to

gi v e th is to h im ) . Ila/1 1 1 1I 1 1111) ( I ha v e no way to d o it ) . lIaI n

I.°1 1 111'

1 (W ill vou be able then to buv th is? ) D I I O

(I am no t able to figh t against. vou

1 1 11 11 111 1°

11 I. 11,I. 11 11 111 1 1 I. 1 1 111 1111 1 11 I. 11 (I w ill d rin k it, if I can ) .

B u r/1}, perhaps , bycl1.1n 1 c , e tc .

,has a stronger mean ing than kayd .

(11111 ) is some times u s ed in re luc tan tly adm ittmg a fact or in

a v o id ing too d irect an inju rv to the fee lings o f another. E x . : (I ndef. )(he mavha v e stolen ) ; 111111111mak11 1 1 11 13 (he

may ha v e sto len th is ) .

is also used colloq u ially in con v ersation as fo llows : .ll1 1ka11 1

1 111 11 11 I. 1 1 11/1’

(ls there anyth ing m o re to be asked abo u t it? ) .llakakitd11 1 1 111 1

!

(Is the re anyth ing m o re to be see n . )m o i e u sual fo rm is made w ith 11 111 1 , m ore

,and the roo t w ith 1 11 .

iz z I . 11 1z 1 1 1Io ls t he re anyth ing m o re to ask abou t it?) L 11 11111Io

( Is th e re any th ing m o re to be seen?

)X \

'

l. liq /. 1 1 fo rms ce rtain ad jectivcs in Tagalog w h ich ha v e the inhere nt id ea o f po ten tialit y . The se °

a1lje 1 tn es w 11 11 h in English are generally

fo rmed bv the su ffixes and {ble o r bv f11I, l1ave th ree d istinct form s 1n

Tag alo"

II . (11 ) Roo ts ”(pressing q ualities w h ich mav be fe lt by the m ind

are mad e by pre fix ing the casual d efin ite o f 111 11 I°,

11 to the

ro o t,w h ich is r1 d uplicatcd to the seco nd s y llab le . I ]x . :

“

d e ligh t fu l w h o lesome ; salubrious ;"I‘u ibi

1 | 11 ial1l1 ,

“

ho rrible ;”I‘u takolldkol

(h i/so l )"fearfu l; d read fu l.

(I1 ) . \d je c tivc s o f sim ilar mean ing are also fo rmed bv maka w ith the

fu tu re ind e fin ite . I'ix

ll«1 I. 1 1I1 1/1 1111?”bash fu l; 1111 1I°11 11111 1111111111 ( 111 1 111 131 ) mortal

”(death

1 an s ing ) ; ( 1 11 1 11. destructi v e : 111 1 1I.°1 1I1 1 111 11 1 1 laughab le ; ( 11 1 1?1. plea

san t,agreeab le .

"

W h e n the ro o ts may e xpress aptitud e o r inaptitude o r facility or d if

fic u lt y in d o ing an y t h ing : if allir11 1at i\ e the ad jectiye is fo rmed w ith the

fu rm c 1 l1 °lill ll 1 ° o f the po ten tial p.1 1°

ti1 le 111 1 1,.1 nd if negatixe w ith the impe ra

t i\ c 1 1 1 1 1 (w ith o u t rc d11pli1 at io n o f t he firs t s \ llab le o f the root ) , w h ich isg 1 11e ral| y p1 1

-1 1 d 1 d bv t he 111 g:d i\ c partic le 1l1 ,‘‘no t . I x . .

ed ib le : 1 11°

lmed ib le . u neatab le ,11111g1zgawti,

“

plac ticab le , 111 1 1111 1 1 1 13

,

“

i11 1prac ticab lc , 111 1111 11 11 111, potable , d rinka

b le ,1 11

‘

u nd rinkab h , v is ib le : ” 111'

11111kild,

“

invisib l1 , 71 1 1 ls 1 tx1 1 I1 1

,t 1 1I 1

'

111 1 1 1 1 1 I1 i,

“u nte llab le

, unspeakable ; man"po

s s ibh ,im po s

s ib le ; 1 11°

1111 1111 1111,in tolerable

,

”

111'

111 1 1I 1 1I1 11} , ind iw o lu b lc f’

1 11‘

1110 111 1 111 11,“

inaccessib le ; d i

111 1 111 111 1ns u ffe rab le ;”

111‘

Hu rting/1 11111 , incomprehensible ;"d f maoakmg,

- l 7 ,

TAGALOG L ANG UAGE .

To order to read .

To order to do or make.

To order to come or go out ; (2 ) toor der to take o r bring ou t .

To or der to ascend .

To ord er to go or come down ; to

order to descend .

To o rder to ge t into or en ter.

To order to write .

(my iyeng anak (or der you r ch ildto stud

y) . P im pagd ral ia 0115

nany 6 ing ind (my mot er or

dered me to keep on studying) .

Magpaptmgaral (l ) to order to

preach ; (2 ) to req uest to preach

(if not competent to ord er ) .

Magpabasa. Na papahasa (mgmacs

tro aa uu uibd fild (the teacher is

ordering the ch ild ren to read ) .Magp ugatrd . Nagpng am i (1c (I ordered [someth ing done or madNammlmgauwi siyu (he [she] is orderin [someth ing] to be done or

Nukap aglmgawd (Iwas able to order [someth ing] tobe done or made ) . Ma p apagmrd

ah?(I w ill order [somet ing] to bedone or ma de ) . Makapa pap a

ako (I shall have ord eret. [someth ing] to be done or made ) . Thedefini te w ith i is : Ipagam imo ilo sakau iyfi (order h im to do [make]th is) . lpinagam

‘

i ko aa iyd 516 (Iordered you to do [make] th is) .Iphmgagan

‘d n iyci 8a iyé th i (he or

ders you to do th is ) . IlmgagauviIto m ité (I shall order vou to

do [make] th is ) . (See index :ga ted . )

Mag pulubt’w. Magpalabtis ka kayJuan

(order Juan to get out ) . Mummiabds kn kayJuan m ug damit (orderJuan to get the clothes ou t ) . Palabasia mo itong use (have th is dogpu t out ) .

Magpapanh ik. Papanhikin mo anymari

'

gd b ald (tell the muchachos tocome up) . Makapaypamnhik, tobe able to order to ascend . Nata

pa papanhik ako (I was able to

o er to ascend ) . Nakapa pa

panhik also (I am able to o er to

ascend ) . .llakapag‘

papapanh ik ché

(I will be able to order to ascend ) ..llagp amgpan hik

,to order some

th ing rough t upstairs , hoisted ,

etc. Papagpanhikin mo an mat?"

bald nany ttibig (tell [or er] t e

muchachos to bring 11 somewater) . (See index : paniiik. )

ndog. A lsomeans to spend ;to use up. Maypapaqpandog, to

or der someth ing to be b roughtdown . (See index : pandog. )

Mammmisok. (For examples see index : pdsok. )

Mugzmsc'

clu t. A ugmari'

gdd ral aynag

pnscilat an {316 (indef. inau ilal I'

a

nanymafifidd ral (deI. ) the teacher

ordered you to wr ite ) . The definite

TAGALOG L ANG UAG I. 2 19

O

w ith 111 is : ”111 1111 11111 mo 8 11112 11 1711 11173 1111 1! (ord er h im to w rite th is lette 1 ) . Th e d ual (tw o ) is used in

the follow ing exam ples b ut thev

are translated as usualin to I1:uglish .

11 1111 11 11 11 1111 11 (I ord ered1 1111 to 11 rite th is let1 ter ) . P 1111rs1c

111111 11 (I am ord ering you to 11 ri te this let te r ) .

1111111111 111“ 151 1111 11111 1 1 111 11

1311 11 ( I w illo rd e r yo u to w rite th is letter ) .

(See illt lt ' X :

To or der to lock . ding/11 111

11 111. To l1 11 °k ; 11 1 1 1115 71111.

8 111 11 11111 1{ 1i (l1 1e k th is ) . 1111 111 19 1110

3 11 111 1 1 11 1111 (1 l1 111

°

t lock th is ) . 1113

11 111 111 11 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 1 } (th is is n o t loeked ) .

, il1s 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 111/ 1 1 1111 (1111loek th is [lit .

,release th is eo nd i

t ion o f be ing(lock the d oor ) , 1111]

the

lo eked . I 111/ 1111 1 111 1111 1 , 11 hat i1 11 ked

11 111 1-I1

,o r tl1e z

~1 1 t o f 11 11 k ing. - 1111/

111 11119 1111 1; w hat U sed to loek m uch

w ith .

is d istine t t°

r1 1111 . clear ,pure , o r 111

111 1, 1

‘ l1it h comes from

To order to sew . 1113 11 1 11; 111 111 111 1 3 11

11131 11 (th is i~1 11 hat she told me to

se 11 ) . (See ind ex :

I I . 11101s reverses the mean ing in sen tenees w here an in fe rio r ad dressesa superior, or in w h ich the subject has 11 1 ) po11 e r to e~11 111 1and ,

t l1e part icleth en meaning

“

to req uest , ask ,e te . Mug/ 11 1111 1 11 11 1 1 11 3 .

111 1 111 111 1 111;0 1nd

“ask v o ur fathe l to d o th is

,1111 !

“ ord e r 1 1 1 111 f.1the r to d o th is .

”

filagpa dm l 1 11111 1 111} a n d }: 1111 1 11 1 (i111h i. ) o r I 'd /11 1110 17 111 71

n im/131m any (mak 1 1 1 11 111 1 11

11 111 11 11111 11 (d ef . (le t 1 1 111r 1 h il1l stud 1 fo r .1

11 h ile vet at St hoo l)I I I . The ind efinite form w ill be seen 11 1 the ( onjugation o f 11 1 11 1111 11111 1 111

1‘

to ord er to d o o r 111ak 1,

’

there bein" lin t o ne i1 regu l.1rity o f note,1 121 :

I n the pluperfect and future perfect tenses 1 1 1 11 1 1 an d 1111 1I. 1 1 , 1s ith 111 191111 pi e

fi xed to the root and 11 1 1 f1 1ll1 111°

1 11g, express these te uses , re speet 11 el1 (Seetab les for con j ugation . )I V . P1 1 , the correspond ing d efinite Ve rbal partieiple to 111 1 11111 1 1 , 1n d

fo rmed by d ropping the first syllable o f the latte r,form s the three d e li

h ites regu larly. The exa111ples gi1 en in the tables are 1111 11111 1 1s 1il1 11

to ord er to w rite to o rd er to d o o r make

and 1110111111111 111111 1 1r1le r to so “

V . llagpa may he pre1ed ed l11 ' form ing the co inund giving the i dea “

to be able to ord e r to . u nd e r "111 11111 111 1 1“11lc in Par. 1

,

\'

l . 51111111 11 also d enotes what is su ffere d w illingly o r w hat is d one 11 ith

Out restraint by others upon the su bjee t ; to allow o r perm it , 11 ith thoseroots w h ich adm it sueh id eas . The en n tex t ser v es generally as a gu id e to

d istingu ish the id ea o f“to o rd er to

"from to perm it to . l1lx . :

To allow d eception ; cheating. (from (See ind ex :(11 1 1/1i.

To allow oneself in he erueilied . May/1 1 1 1 111 11 ( from (See ind ex :1,1]11 i ,

To allow oneself to he w h ipped . (See i11d e x : 1111 11111 1°

1x.


To allow oneself to”

he flatlv ('

on 311 11111as 1rat.

t rad icted .

To allow one’

s hair to he com bed . 1150 to ord er to

(See index :To allow oneself to he slapped . T11 11111mp 111, to Slap.

.l111 11t11 111p1 ll, to slap much .

V I I . .ll11 11p11 , 11

'

ith a roo t d enoting a state o r cond ition resulting fromgrad ual in t rinsic ac tion ,

u nh eates the pu rpose o t th e subject e lther to accel

crate o r allow the trans it ion .

To allow to hccome pu t rid .

To o rd e r to th row d own : raz e ; (2 )to allow to fall in to rum .

To allow to hecome h o t .

To allow to heco tu e cool; to coolauv

th ing.

To allow to d rvup o r o u t ; to pu t ou t

\'

ll l . is also u sed to e xpres s ac ts o f the ('

reator : o f nature ,and

o f pe rs ons hevo nd the con t ro l o l the speake r . 1 111111111 '

11' ith the id ea of

l-Ix . :

To cau se wa1 e~ ll1 1 1/p1 1 11/11 1 1 . 11 1111 nagpupmilon 81!

(W hat causes the waves1 t . l111/ 1111 11111 11 (the w ind ) .

To cau se the 111 111 e rs to l1lo 1 111 1 .

To cau se it to thu nd e r .

To rear : l1ri11g up (as a ch il d) . .ll1 11/p11l1 1k1. (See index : laki. )

\l1111p1 1/1 11111’ 11011 111] 11101111 kabu lokin

1 1 111] 1111 1 17111 1 (don’

t let thehauanas r1 1t ) .

JI111N1 1 1 1/11111 ,( 111 1111061 , to (10 awa y

w ith ; to le v el ; to th row one’

s se lt’

d own . . l11 1111111 1b1i , (l )w hat th rownd ow n o r le v e led ; (2 ) what d oneawa y w ith . Mom/ 11111, to th row

d o 11 11 many th ings .

Jf agpa 1111111 11,to ord er som ething to he eated .

(See ind ex :I’d /1 1111111111 natin 0 111}

.11-1 1 1 1 (lc t us wait un til the dav is

coole r ) . ding/1 11111 11111] ku 1111 111} 1111111}

(le t som e watc r eoo l [i. e .

, pu t some

water o u t to Jpn/(1 11111; 71111

1 1 11 1) 1 1111111 (pu t the water some

11 here to cool) . 13111 11 11111 111 ka

1111 111} (\Vhyd o n

’

t yo u a 11 11 some wate r?) S ean

7111 111]

shall I pu t the water tocoo l?) [

1

111 1 111

11 111 1111111 111] 1111111 ( 11111

1110 1111111] 11111111 (letth e 11 ater co ol ou t there on that

po rc h [17111111111 11 1111 11 111] 111 17 119 8 1111]

1 1 111; 11 1 11 1 1 11111 111 1 111 111111 1 1111111) 11111 111

(y es te rda y I let the wate r cool in

the o ther room ) . .lI1 11/pup11yl11111 111,

to ord e r some thing to be cooled ) .111 1 111 111 11111 111) patuyo in

1 1 1111 1111 1 11111 : (don’t let. the

plan ts d ry np) . T111/1'

i 1111 p1i (theyare d ried up alread y , sir ) . Hind i

I am “ Oi.

le tting them d ry up) . 1 ’1 11uyoin 1110

1111 111 , d rv that 1 1 1‘ le t it d ry .

TAGALOG LANGUAGE .

To beg; to ask for aims.

To ask for a ple dge or pawn .

X I I I . Actions in wh ich theby 11111111111 . Ex ;

To hear confession . Maypacumpiaal (from t. confesar ) .Scan naroan anyparé1

?(Where is

the Naaypapacumpisalsiyd (He is hearing con fessions) .1111q 1111113111, to con tese.

To pardon . Magmatu uad . (See index :To get shaved . Maypad hit. (See index : 111111.To ha ve the hair cut . Maypay up t

'

t. (See index : yupil.

To have cleane d (as shoes) . 1111911111111 18 (See index : 1111 111.

\ IV lluypa also expresses the idea of repeat ing someth ing manytimes, or reciting the same much , and sometimes by many. Pagpu is

treate d grammatically in many es like ma pa— i. e.

,the last syllab le of

the part iele°

is re duplicated for the present anyfuture tenses . E x . : Ma

we”I'm/13(All of yon say

‘we many tim t s ) . Naypad iablo 111-1s 121 1 1111 1314

(I ca lled h im a devil many times ) . 1111} any ipinayp apad iablo fl ing/6 .7

(W hy do you say devil s o much? ) 111111111; u inyonguaypapad iablohan any1111 101111 111110 (Don

’t say devil so much to those around y .ou )

'

V. I n some cases maypa sign ifies to do voluntarilywhat 18 denoted bythe root . Ex .

To adorn one’s self. Maypamu ti (from buti ) . Naypa a

b1111°

31111111 dala a (That gira dorn ing 1 .erseli

To praise one’s self. Maymnmr i (from par1 ) . At yaong

y nayp upmnu ri (and that one

is [doingthe same] for the praise ) .

Any ma 17111111 11 dalnya’

y piuu tr

”:nany 10 11111 (A sensible gir

praised byeveryone ) . Kapu rihan,

praise ; honor ; fame . Syn . : bunyi.

\ VI . llaypa w ith some datives and all ad verbs of place sign ifies to go

or 1 ome intentionally,”where denoted by the root, etc. Ex . :

To come to me.

To go to y .ou 51111111118 11 111316.

To go (1 ome ) t o the person . 1111191111811 t1iuo.

To go to Ped ro . Mag/111 111 131 Pedro.

To come here. (near bv Maypud ini.To go there . Maypadoon.

To go up the river, or up coun trv. M11ypa flag/a.

XVI I . l{11p11, forn1ed hyd r opping the yof maypa, sign ifies to in some

d iret tion naturally or au identally ,and without intent ion on t 9 part of

the subjec .t [ gene rally preced es the root. Fx

To run off or lower (as water) . ilapa tmbabd h a painbabd any ttibiy

(The water is low [or'

is

(Seemi

l

n ex : babd .

(I asked Pedro to pay one peso intaxes ) . I sanypiso any ipinabu iskay Ped ro (one peso was what Iasked Ped ro to pay in taxes ) .

I tony bayan ay any pirmypabu isanko (th is town was wher e I col

lected taxes ) . Maghnia, to paytaxes.

Maypaliméa (from Spam , limosna ) .

Ma 11111. Sanypisoa any sanladu°

o 111°

10ny8 1°

ny81°

ny(I want to pledgeth is ring for one peso ) .

has a passive part are also explained


To ascend (as smoke ) .

I’

o flvup in the air (as a b ird ) .

\'

VI I I . I t w ill be obser v ed that the greater part of the roo ts verbali z edby 1111191111 requ 1re 1

°

in the defin ite to express w hat is ordered (lone, giv en ,

e tc . , and 111 or an in the same form to express“

the person commanded,

e tc . E x

To gi ve food to another . .ll aypakain . (See ind ex :T o allow to be pun ished ; or to cause .lIuy/nw usu (from 1111 111111 111or1y

or order to be pun ished . 1111 11 1 111 11111 11 any 111 1111 1 11} kusu lu nan

(Do no t pc rnnt the innocent [notguilty] to be. punish ed ) .

T o perm it to pass. .lf11yp11111 1 11 11 (fr1 11n 111111 11,

road

See ind ex .

T o gi v e another someth ing to d rink ; .lInypainmn . (See index :to water animals o r fow ls .

T o cau se to walk up. flfuypu ldktu l. (See index : ld lau l. )'

To cause or order anothe r to stand .lluypu tin lliy. (See ind ex :

up.

X IX . A sense o f ord ering ma y be gi v en to roo ts no t ha v ing such an

i dea by inserting a second p11, altho ugh it is cleare r to u se may w ith a fol

l owing infinitive . Th is second [11 1 (w h ich remains in all tenses ) w ith roo ts

h av ing the id ea o f ordering sign ities to order a person to ord er another,

a lthough simpler form s are generally u sed . lax . Iny 1 1 111111311 « 11 nay]

311111 1 11 111 sa 1111 1 171711 cabuyo (The captain ord e rs the ho rses to be watered ) ; o r,.Any 0111111 611 113/ nag/11 1211 111 1111111111 111 1111 11111 177111 11 111 1 1111 1 [sam e m ean ing]. (2 )allay/papasfilat kn]! J 1111 11 17 131 I o r

, Mu g/1711 111 [my J 1111 11 1111. 11111 111111

.11121111 1tig/(i key Ped ro ) rd er Juan to orde r I’ed ro to w rite ) .

X X . The tend ency o f Tagalog, like all languages , to sim plify itself, isshown by the use o f the root w ith 711 1 pre lixed ,

w ith the s ign ificance o f a

verbal noun . The agen t takes the gen iti v e and the object o r person acte dupon the dat ive . l'lx . . perin111e ; 11 1 1111 1111

°

ho lidayor parade appearance ; 111 1111 1113, bu r den o r w hat carrie d; 11 11111311311,“ jewel;

”1111 11111 1111 , inheritance ; 11

1 111 1 111 1, a hat

116 (my 11 111111111 111 1 «ikin (Th is is what he ord ered me to hide ) . P 11 12

tany, cred it.’

'

rm-z 11 11 111 11 :e

I . Th is part icle has many atlinitics w ith 111 1 1 11111 1 , as w i ll be seen b y the

examples . I t red uplicates the tirst s y llable o f the roo t fo r the present andfuture tenses , except w hen 111 1 isattached to and incorpo rated ith it . W ithroots of place, h ich req u ire /1 1 1.1 1 1 , the tirst syllab le o f the particle is red uplica ted fo r these tense s . is pre lixed to p1 1 in th e ind efin ite past andpresent tenses w ith both [11 1 and 111 111 1 1 . This lattc r particle shou ld no t be

confounded w ith roots beginning w ith so conj ugated w ith pu . (See tab les :hilony. )I I . One of the prin cipal sig11iticati1ms o f 1 1 1 is to ask o r beg fo r in re fer

ence to the. subjec t , wh ile 1111 1111 111 is gcnc r afly applie d und er like circum

stances to the object . Ex .

To ask for pro tection . 1 7111 11 1116 11 .

To ask for merc y o r compass1ou . I‘u u mi . (See index :

To ask for shelter or suppo rt . K um upl up. to press toI l i a ] hP‘i q k‘t l b l' G li t t lf l a r

311111111711113 . N11pa1111171 1113 11 11g(is/1 (Thesmoke is: rising ) . ] ) Z 11111 11. 111ak1

'

l1‘

1

1 11111 n on/11.1 , 1136 any

(A lthough the flame may not be

seen ,the smoke w ill reveal it.

T. P .,

Aug 111211011 1131 11111111 1

111 1111111111 111 1 impapu u id (The eagle

ascended into the cloud s )

224 TAGALOG L ANGU AGE .

To ask for aid , succor, or a favor. Pam ngalang. Magsangalang, to aid ,favor, or succor.

To ask for defense . Patangol. Tuma 01, to defend .

To ask for help. I ’ntfilong. (See ta les :

I I I . At times a sign ifies to perm it ” the action ind icated by the root

upon one’s eel and sometimes to ask ,

”as above explained . I t de

notes greate r w illingness by the person affected than magpa does. E L :

To consent to be dece ived . P 1rd1'

ayd

)(from dayd ) . (See index :

ayd .

To ask to he k issed . Fokalik. (See index :To consent to be wh ipped . Pahampéa. (See index : hamp da. )To consent to be vanqu ished . Patalo. (See index :To consent to be slapped . Patamp al. (See index : lampal. )

IV. (11 ) W ith the ad verbs of place, and roots expressing lace, signifies movement to or from what is denoted by the root . (X) “ '

it roots

of place 811 is added to the part icle, form ing mm , wh ich b isyllab ic rticle red uplicates the last syllable of the part icle for the present and uture

tenses. The in it ial d of the a dverbs chang es to r after 1111. Ex . Par in i, come here ;

”parito,

“come here ;

”pariydn, there ; p uroén,

“

go there .

”(See index : d ini, d ito, d iyan, hese fou r adverbs

adm it the definites 1°

and 1111 . That in 1°

is compounded w ith ka, form ingika, ikinu . In may be used if compounde d W lth magpa, signifying

“to

order to come or go .

”(809 tables and index : dito. )

Some localities are to be found where the last syllable of the part icle isred uplicated w ith these adverbs of place for the present and fu ture tenses,bu t th is is irregular and incorrect . The practice is unknown to the earlierwriters.

The four a dverbs wh ich have been considered are also further con jugatedw ith 11m

,mak ing iufinitives, etc. Ex . : P umar im

'

, pumarito,“

to comehere ; pumariydn , pumarofm,

“to go there .

”

(I1 )“togo to the house. (See tables : béhay. ) Paaabtih

'

d,

“to go to the country (fields ) ; pamdég

at,

“to go to sea ;

”paaailog,

“to

go to the river ; ” pasalnmdolc, “to go to t e mountains ;

”pasa America, to

go to America ; para Is’

asliln , to go to Spain .

” 321a (Scanany 111 1370 (Where d id he go?) Napaturi

'

éo 311 Haym’

id (He wentto Manila) .V . P11 also ind icates to say what may be denoted by th e root, but w ith

ou t the plu ralitv ind icated bvmagpa. E L :

To say ves.

To say no.

To say

To say not to w ish . Pang/110. (See index : ayao. )To say

“de v i l. ” Pad iablo. (See index : d iablo. )

To call “ch ickv-ch icky. P 11k11ruk 1

’

1i .

\'

I . ] ’a, prefixed to roots denoting bod ilv positions, forms words ex

press ing the position taken . E x

Lengthw ise ; lengthways. Pahabd . Pullin mo nany habd

l(cut th is lengthwise ) . 153111611,ong.

P 1160. P0 150 ka.’ (Say es . Na

ado In 811 kaniyd? id you tellim yes?

Fad ili. Fad ili ka.

’ (Say no

Dill rin (No, indeed ) ; var. d iri.Aug piuad iri fan; pem n to whomno is being said . Magpadiri;

to say“no

”repeated ly. Aug

) igacrgd irian rson towhom no"

has been sai often .

Palu'

nd i. Pahv’

ndt ka (bag/13) (SayCtno

”)

226 TAGALOG LANGU AGE .

To d im in ish (voluntarilvTo esteem one

’s self big

To allow one’s self to k illed ;

(2 ) to comm it su icide.

To despise one’s self.

To repent (deeply) .

To exert one’s se f ; to make efforts.

To enrich one’s self. (See index : yé

IV. As usual, 1'

stands for cause, reason ,or instrument of the action w ith

magpaho , and an for the place or the object, accord ing as the verb for thed irect object a dm its it or not for the d irect object. Ex

To take exact notice. Maypaloatandd . Pakatandaan moanyamasabi ko ca i316 (pay exact attention to what I am tellin you ) .(Th is word should not In con

founded w ith its homonym toadd,

idea of age. )

V . The forego ing sense of maypaka generall applies to actions wh ich donot go beyond the sub ject or to verbs wh ich 0 not req u ire an object tocomplete the mean ing; but when used w ith verbs adm itting a d irect com

plement other than the subject or capable of voluntariness, maypaka givesgreater force or intention to the root. In th is sign ification the icleadm its in , i, and an

, the red uplication being generally from t te firstsyllable of the root, as paka is the usual for m of the defin ite in such cases.

Roots con jugated thus must be capable of express ing the idea of more or

less. Pay is retained in th is sense w ith may roots , forming pakapay or

11111111

2511, a

lsthe case may be, and in certa in cases paypakapay may

orm .x

To teach earnestly. llaypakad ral. Pakaaralan niayo anmmTyd bald (

try to teach the ch i

d ren earnest y) . Muypakapaydral,to study earnestly. Paypakapa

yaralan n ingo any wihang T

(tryearnestly to study the Tagaloglanguage ) . Maypakapafiydral, topreach earnestly.

To have great pr udence. Maypakabait.To go very slow ly. Maypakarahan (from dahan ) . May

pakarahan k1my lumdkad (walkvery slowly) . Pakaraham

’

n moany p1i hila (th row it very deliberat ely Dalmnan m0 iyang911101111111 (do that work of ou rs slowly

M11°

arahan , to

slow down ; to ome qu iet.Napakarahan an (it has becomequ iet already; it has slowed downnow ) . Dumahan , to go awayslowly. Maydahan , to go slowly.

(See index : Jahan. )

Maypakaliil. Haliit, small; little.

Maypakamahal. (See index : mahal. )Magpakamalay. .Vaypakamala an

tauo kusa m’

yd the man all'

owedh inmelf to be k i led ) . Naypal

'

a

malay any a Hapcin sa kam'

yanyaarili (the a anese volun tarilv

k illed h imsel [comm itted sui

Maypakasamd . (See index : scumi. )Mam z kasisi. (See index : 358i. )Maynxkall ipany. Ta

fm

‘

a'

yan (paka m

papi'

yin?mo any oob mo (exert

youree f ;“ brace (See ia

dex : ldpany. )filaypalcayriman .

man . )


To love greatlv.

To guard one’s self well.

To th ink earnestly, deeply.

To arrange well.To rect ify well.To tempt greatly.

'

I . B m luplicatin the root, roots capable of express ing the idea ofmore or ess ac qu ire stfil greate r force or intensity w ith ma In . Theare generally used in the defin ite w ith th is construct ion , an the redu il

cation does not extend beyond the first two syllables of the. root, accor dingto the general rule. Ex . : Maypakadalidalild ,

“to suffer intensely or to

endure reatly.

”Pakaisipisipin mo,

“th ink intensely.

’

“take t e greatest of care ; care for it sed ulously.

”

VI I . Dropping the la from palm,there remains pa, wh ich pronounced

long and almost as paa, has the same mean ing as p uke, bu t should not be

confounded w ith pa (the defin ite of maypa ) , p a (thepa

rt icle ) , nor w ithpa,

“

yet. I t is genera ll used in the imperative.

‘

x . : Pabuksdn mo

(0 yen w ider [or qu ickerfi. Papal?) mo (strike harder) . Pataponan mo

(t row it w ith more force [or (See index : Bukaa; pale; andpan .

VI I I . A further use of maypaka w ith nouns or verbs expressing time isto sign if

yto

hpersevere or remain un til such time, doing what ma be

y td enoted 0 root used . Th is signification adm its of in, and an. x

To until morn ing. Maypakad rao. (See index : time.

To until evening. index : hapon .

To all n igh t awake. Alaypakapciyat. Any ipinaypapaka

puyat L'

o’

y {tonygawd (Th iswork isthe cause of my having to remainawake all n igh t) . I tony silid 1103;any pirmypakapuyatan ko (Th isroom is theplacewhere I remainedawake [or watched ] all n igh t ) .

IX . W bfin an

alccident

‘al or

kfortuitous action is

lto be expressed w ith

‘maypaka t e y is roppet ma ing mapaka, an ana ogous particle to ma.

F inal-a,formed from paka and in , shou ld not be confounded w ith pinakri,

u sed in a very d ifferent sense . (See index : pine /rd . ) Ex

T o mu lt iply . .llapalcarami (from dami) . Appliedtoanimals,et

c. (See index : dami.

T o come to poverty. Mapalcadukhd . (See index : d ukhd . )T o row greatly. Mapakalaki. (See index : Iaki. )T oadelayed more than usual.

THE INDEF‘IN ITE PART ICLE MAR I .

I . Th is part icle, known as the six th to Span ish grammarians, has

p ah'

for the defin ite, and red uplicates the second syllable (H) of the part icle for the present a nd future tenses. The pluperfect and future perfect

te nses are wanting

. Maki chan es to naki for the past and present tenses,and pal

-i takes in or the same, ormingpinakt’

.

I I . The principal sign ification of mah w ith roots capable of expressingcompan ionsh ip, etc. is join ing w ith ,

accompanying anoth er, inte rferenceo r inter-medd ling in what may be denoted by the root.I I I . Mal-imaybe combined w ith um

,may,man,maypapa , and as well

as w ith itself There are some verbs wh ich resemble ma in form.

Maypaka'

ia. P inaka'

yilio bonyI'apatid

mria babaye (m

s;l

dearly beb

1”lovedLa

s

ister

i agpa M7atMa akaisif» .t ink veryMp . )

Maypakahémy. (See index : be'

way. )Maypakafu id . (See index : laid . )Maypakatulcaé. (See index : wh o. )


such as pat indbany kim‘

y, etc. wh ich are classed as um verbal forms,and should be carefq d istinguished . Ex . :

To join w ith or interfere in writing. Mal-imam (from sumz’

dat ) . IpinakiW at to as dean (I am puttingthis in so it may bewritten there ) .Iyany man

‘

gé stunt ay pal-faulatan

mo and (Pu t th is in to be writtenw ith those letters ) . Mah gpa

az’

dat; to join (or interfere wuth ) inordering to write (from maypam

'

l

lat ) .To join w ith in play or gam ing. Makipay

larfi frommaglard; to pla'

or

mb e ; see tables : taro ) . A

akipaylaroan mo 81°

Pedro (Playw ith Ped ro ) . (W ith Papal

larm’

n mo si Pedro ca aniyli (Tell

[make Pedro play w ith h im ) .To join in fishin

gw ith a cast ing net Makipan ala (from mandala;

called dala.

’for a living thus) . Dumala ; to fish

occasionally) w ith a“ dala.

Iaydala, to use a“dala.

dala; to be able to catch anythingw ith a “ dala.

”

To join w ith in saying yer . Makipaéo (from paoo; to say yes.

To join in a conversat ion un invited . Makipakiflsap (from makitisap ) .

IV. See tables : umdral; m ayaral and mmakay.

V . Maki by itself a dm its only of,

i and an in the defin ite. I representsthe reason , cause, or object of the action , and an the person in terfered or

medd led w ith , or joined , accompan ied , etc. For the conjugation w ith isee the tables : mile!and hum utid . For the defin ite w ith an see maglaré.

VI . I n is only used w ith mah’

in comb ination w ith mayp a (pa ) . Ex . :

Papakiyawin mo any aIiIa mo ao martini tauowan (Tell your servan t to jointhose men in their task ) . See also makipayln ré in Paragraph I I I , preceding, and tab les.

VI I . Some roots conjugated w ith the principal sign ification of maki ar e :

To jo in or medd le w ith teach ing: Makidral. (See tables. )rat

, to°

oin or medd leing. tables. ) Makipar

'

iydral,to join or medd le w ith preaching

To pick a quarrel. Maki uay. (See index : duay. )To

.

claim a part in ; to part icipate . Malnrdmay (from damay) .To ca

rry along with ; to join ; to in Malcfhatid . (See tables . )

ter ere.

To embark w ith . Makisaka (See tables. )To th rust oneself int o the com Makisanuiipany of another.

To th rust oneself into a d ispu te or Makitalo. (See index : tale. )argument.

To join w ith in weeping. MaHlafi'

yia. (See index : tanTflJ . )To join (or medd le ) in pleasure. Makitud . (See index : tad . )VI I I . An is sometimes suflixed to roots conjugated w ith maid to exprem

intensityof the idea d enote d by the root . Pay is generally retained inexpresswns of th is class. E x

To mock greatly; to make fun of, Makipaybiroan . (See index : bird. )maliciously.

To join eagerly I nplay or gambling. Makipayla rocm. (See index : Iar6. )To th rust oneself in to an alterca .llakipayaayutan . Ano’t nabih '

payaation ; to answer w ith vehemence. yutan 3a kapidbdhay mot (Why

To ask fo r news . (from 11 1111111 ; see ind ex :I11111

'

l1i ) .

To ask for a passage (as on a v essel) . ”1111 1111 111 13; (from

X IV . 1th roo ts sign if1 ing nationalit y,race , s

,tate cond ition

, oc11

u 111

tio n , pro fession e tc 111 1 11 1 is some times u se d to s ign if y that one acts like ,bears h im se lt like

,o r t esem bles w hat 1s d enoted b y the roo t . This id ea,

howc 1 c r, is ge nerally o thet 11 ise expressed , as som e roots use d th us. are no t

clear u n less fu lly explaine d by the con tex t .

\'

V. W ith 1111 1,w al l has a neu ter mean ing sim ilar to that borne b y 111 11

alone . E x

To appear lik e a noble (1 1 11

To ac t like o r resem ble an me rican .

To ac t like o r resem ble a Span tard .

TH ac t like 1 1 1'

resem ble 11 Tagalog.

Tn ac t like 1 1 1“

re se n th le 11 pe rs on .

To 111 t like a w oman .

To ac t like a man ; to ru n afte r men .

'

l‘

t 1 11 11 t lik e a beas t .

'

J‘

o con fo rm to in c us to tn ~

11

1 11 1 11 11 .

l.l/1 1 1; / 1 tl1c n in th ]111 1 l 11 le 1 1 1 the Span i h 11 r1t1 rs upon Tag1111 11 m ay

be 11 11 :1

1 | 1 / . 1 1 l in to 111 1-11 and / 1 1 , 1 1 111 1 1 11 t h e 1 l1 | i11it1 1s o f 111 1 1 . [h is par t ic le

g11 1 11

~11

a | l1 e xpre s s e s the id ca o t ing ( o r be ing ) 11 hat 11 11s 11 1 1t l1 11d 1 1r pos

sess e d ( 1 1 1°

11

\ 1~t 1 1 1 | 11s 1 s tat 1 111 1 11 1 11 1 1 . .\ s 11 M i le , m ug/. 1 1 re fe rs to cond it iono r s ta te , w h ile re fe rs mo re to th e ac t ion by w h ic h 11 state o r cond i

ls l1r1 1 11g l1t 11l11 1tlt .

Th e s 1 1 1 1 l t1 l s 1 ll. o t the p.1rt i1 11 1 is re duplit atc d fo t th e pres ent anditttn r1 t1 1 1s 1 s 11 h il1 1

1 11 1 h 11 11g e ~ t 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 the p.ts t and 111 1s en t , l1 1il1 111 it1 1 ' the

u s 1111l 1 1 111 . l h 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 ~ 11 1c 11 pt io ns ,t he tirs t s 1 | |al1le 1 1! the root be ing

i11 s 1 1 1111- 11 1 1 t 1 ls 111

11' I1ile 1 1 1 1 stand s fo r

e it he r 1 1 11

111-rs 1 1 11 , : 11

-1

_

-1 1 rd ing to t he nature o f t he act ion . (See tables :

So m e t 1 1t‘

t‘

e 1' t : 1 t t 1 l \1 i1 l1 1 l\ '

lls e 1 l ex pre s s ion s are t t tz lt le i i)“

using an

\\ illt

To look m uc h a t th in to in spe c t,

'

J‘

1 1 11 1 1 1n s 1 1 o nc'

s sell.

11 1117(11111111 (Th e sla v e loo ks lik e a n oble[has 1111 1

1

11 11 11 1 so casually].llu lt iu"111 11 11 1 11 110 .

-lf ulcicu sti/u .

.\h kikitugd log [lo ngM11 1 1 3 11 111 1 1 11111 111/1

'

1s11p (Th is 1 1 111 11

resemb les a Tagalog: in h is man

1 111 1

‘

1 1f speak ing ) .111 111 1 1111 11 . (11151 11 111 13

(Th e n io nkevacts like a pe r

son ) .

s i J uan

(Juan acted like 11 woman ) . Th is

also to ru n a fter 111

1 1 11111 11 .

Nah /1111 1“ 1111 111] 111 1111 1

1112 (Th is 11 1 11111111 ac ted like 1

ill/ 1 1 1] [d u n

(Th is 11111 11 acte d like a beas t ) .

ll'

t tld s ri/mt 11111111 !

1.‘1 1 1u 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (The re ill be no place“ lle le I w ill be able to look at it

[in s pec t it ; stud y itll

'

1 t’1 i [Hi

l tfl g/ka

l'

lie l' e 11 11s 111 1 11l11 11

e 11'

l1 1 1 reth e y cou l d am u se themselv es ) .

Ala/11111 1 1 1 1 11. to be am use d: d i v e rted .


Some roots conjugated in the forego ing sign itivatio n w ith "mg/1m are :

To have ch ild ren .

To

fineness prudence .

Tn ave crocod iles aga1n (as a river ) .

To he lad en w ith fru it.

To have (there ) .

To have reason .

TO be lucky ; to ll‘

ave luck .

To have rive again (also to have m uch

rive ) .

To err ; to sin .

Tn fo rbid .

To have m o ncv again .

To be ill.

To have enough .

.\ H /cl

on ) .

To have gray hair. .lIu g/Am ilm u .

To owe a d eb t . ) Iug/lsm ihm q . tab les : lilt ing. )

I I . The vasnal,aec

' iclental. o r ehanee o f man y pe o ple o r

th ings , even t h o ugh inn nate rial. ii N une llln e s (' Y pl

‘

ew w l h ) " mu g/Au . The

partiele (le no tw a plu rality o f S lllijm' h

' in m e h H IN‘H N o ppo

s ed to a plu ral

itv o f acts , 11> e xpres sed ln ' m ine o ther part ie le

».

To quarre l (as tu o o r ll ln rt ' ,llu g/ Jninu y. ilu le x : ll'l f ly. )

To be eq ual: to to .llu vlh u u /o n .

To mee t casuallv; to gathe r (a 1 (Se e im le x :

crowd ) ."m e ! i

TO assem ble casually l~ :l t'

l'

t l ll l l lt ’x : xi i /m l . )

To mee t Casually l~°

a ” n u l l im le x : lipu u . )

I I I . Ha u lm also int lieatt u n i\‘

e r< alit y o r plu rali t y o t \ l ll ijm b o ffe ringfrom o r affe cte d in so m e lw w hat is (lc' n o tm l In the ro o t . l

Tl ) SUfit‘l’ fl’O l l] 11 l} ]illcm l l .

To su ffe r fro m an o f s mall

po x .

To su ffer from a fam in e fo r

man to he, h u ngry

To su f e r from a eo n tlag ratio o .

To en joy a ho lid ay .

To have a rio t o r tum u lt

To be sq ueez ed o r pres a wl in a e h m l.

.llngkummk .

,lh lfllfl l’n l il.

.llagkalmayu . .Vugkukahuayu nu [to ngHog (Th is river is in fested w ith

eroeod ilea again ) .

.llagku bmfim. 7m Mung[sci/m y 7m ito.

’(Has th is tree horne

fru it already?) H ind i 1m nag/ka

Lmfi/u (As y et it has no t bo rne

fru it ) .

.llugka rmin . (See index :.llugh l ixip. m t d ong;fumi ng ih i.

’(“ as th is ch ild reaso n

y e t? li. e . ,has it ve t arrived at the

age o f reason

.lfug/Jupcilu y.

A u g; ipag/kam kit, the

cam e o f illness . Ami (my ipinugb um/( ll mo .

’(\Vhat mad e o n ill?)

Pain t/sh in , to lie millet . lngo ne illfrom h is own

fau lt,also a siek pe rso n .

JIM /h txig/d . ll'

o /d Iu i, h im /i nag/1.7 111 1

m ]u rgku ln i/m g/ (No,

it" h e d o es no t ge t eno ugh to live


IV. Another use of magl-a is to exprem an unintentional or casual error

in what may be noted by the root. The imperative is made w ith maid

or bakd (q . E L :

To say one thing accidentally for Magka ibd . Na‘fkaibd ciyd (He acci

another. dentally sai one thing for eu

other) .To err in countin Magkalimang.

To e quivocate accidentally. Magkamalt. Nagkamalt alto (Iuivocated a c c i d e n t a l ly) .ouag mong akalaing ako

’

u nae

kakmnali (Don’t you think I made

any mistake) .

V. Magka isalso used to express self-deception by the si h t, hearin etc .

,

the defin ite past tense w ith ( m sutfixed bein taken as t e root . or the

present tense. the first syllable of the root is uplicated and not the secondsyllable of the part icle . Ex

To be deceived by the hearing. Magkariri'

gan . Naghan n ngan (1M

(My hearing deceives me ) . (Seeindex : d irf

'

gig. )To be deceived by the sight. Magicakit d. (See index : kitd . )

VI . A further use of magka is w ith the am infinitive of some verbalroots and some adverbs of place, with which infin itives mayka expressesthe idea of mak ing the said movement or going to or from the place ind icated by the adverb for some particular reason or cause. E x

To follow (or obey) for a particular Magkasumunod (from sunod ) . Alsocause or reason . to follow w herever another may

go. (See index : m nod . )To be here for a particular cause or Magkadum ito. (See index : d ito. )reason .

VI I . Doubling the root intensifies the meaning w ith mag/ca in somecases. E x

To be very late or tar dy. Magicabdlambdlam. NagbakabalamW a rn ka (You are very late

To be broken in to vervsmallpieces. Magkalansaglam ug (from loam y) .Lumansag, to break anyth ing intosmall pieces .

To

1be finished or conclude d com Magkalu tfzslulcis (from Ind ia) .

p ete

To be complete ly broken up (as a Magkapatidpalicl (from patid ; see

rope or cord ) . index ) .

To be completely destroyed . Magkasirdaird (from sir-d ; see ind ex ) .To be torn into tatters (as clothes, Magkau

'indangwindang (from w ind

ete. any)

VII I . Sometimes kn , the definite of ma comb ines with pay to denotethe sou rce of someth ing. (See index : aim . )

THE INDE FI N ITE PARTICLE

I . .llagin ,

w hich Minguella th inks a“ d isgu ised passive in conception

red uplicates the gi of the last syllable of the particle for the presen t andfuture tenses. I t also changes m to n for the pas t and present indefin ite.

I t ex ) resa 's the co nversion or transformat ion , either grad ual or sudden , ofone t ling into another, as a general ru le. the root bein that in to whichthe other th ing is converte dor transformed . .llayin is a so used to exprem


To be converted into an animal. Mayne/rayon Mayhdyo , to sell, deal

in , or raise animals. f ag/o n, cor

ral for animals ; pen. Ka n,

br utiahnem. Any paykalmbrutality.

To b ecome an hab itual litigant (bar Mayinlmla tisap . ginpalauaap siyui

rato r) . (he has become an habitual liti

gant ) .To become deaf. Mayinbinyi.To become blind . Mayinhulay.

To become d umb . Mayinpipi.

\'

I . W ith some roots mayin may express the idea of “to be.

To be the motive or cause. Ala!indahihin . ltd any nnyindahi

ldiu (this was the reason ) . 116 any

nayiyindahilcin (this is the cause ) .

To befall. Mayhmdlad . A n May/i anymayiyin

]nilml 1m! (What w illmy luck be?

[What w ill befallTo turn ou t to be true. M ayinld éo. Nayinlohio anysinaln

'

mo

ao akin (what you told me tu rne d

out to be true ) .

To be a servant. Mayinalild . ] lony tauo ito u mayiyin

alilc‘

t ninyé (th is man w ill be y ou r

servant ) .

VI I The idea of volition is sometimes adm issible with mayin when u sed

with personal pronouns. Ex . :

To be thine. .llayim'

uo.

To be mine. Mayindkin. Ako‘

y mayiyiniyo t ih io

ay mayiymdkin (I will be yours

and you will be mine ) .

VI I I . (a) .llaq in is also used in combination w ith the interrogative

adverbs ildnf ow many?) and maykano! (how much?) and with the

answers thereto . (b ) W ith mar in prefixed to a number and na followingit the com iletica of the peri named is denoted . Mayin expresses theidea of

“a u t

”in these cases. Ex . : (a ) .llayiyinilan silo? (abou t how

man w ill there be? ) Mayiyinildn any paroronn? (about how many w ill

go t ere . ) .llayiyimlalammy puo (about twenty) . .Vayiyinmaykano it!”(How much w ill this be worth

?

) Kuny mayiniaany budn na (Afterabout a month ) . Nanymayin ilany drao (after a few days ) . Kunymayin

sang/tam nu (after ab out a year ) .IX . Mayiu may be used sometimes in the sense of

“be. it or

either” “

o r.

” Ex ; .lfayin itci; mayiniycin (be it th is or be it

that ) . Mayinlalaki aiyd ; mayinbabaye (be it man or be it woman ) . lla'

m‘

zyayén; mayinbdlcaa ayp aroroon aka(either to-davor to-morrow I willve to go there ) .

THE I NDEF‘IN ITE PARTICLE MAGSI .

I . This particle, wh ich changes initial or to n for the indefinite past and

present, reduplicates the last syllable of the article for the presen t anduture tenses. I t has all three definites, am may be combined w ith allother particles , wh ich are placed between it and the root, except mat

-a and

ma definite in the sense of power, which precede it . (See tables : alix;

yau'd ; (upon, and kuha. ) I t has no other signification than to denote a

) luralityo r universality of sub jects in connection with the verbal action .

.

'

atural y there is no singular number. may be inserted after thefirst two letters of the particle to ind icate an extreme degree of plu rality.

See tables : payliral. Ex

To teach (many) . Mayaidral. Magsipagd ral, to study(many) . Anymati

'

yd bald dito ca


To co nic: s (many

To g o out (many)

To 10 0 k ; hehold ,etc. (man?)

To e n ter ; come in (many)

0 la u gh (many) .

'

rn s INDEFIN ITE PARTICLE MAG PATI .

I This particle is little used , and besides the usual change of m to n forth e

p ast and present indefinite red uplicates the second sy llab le (pa ) o f thePa r t i c le for the present and fu ture tenses. It is used w ith roots express‘n g t h e idea of motion or )ositions of the body, and signifies to performsu c h motions or take suc positions voluntarily. and with b riskness orE"l d

a

d enl I f such sudden motion occur or position he assumed involunta f i ly , the yis d rop ied . formingmapati, eq ual in meaning to mapa. Thed e fi n itesW ith i (iii

-a) in the sense of cause, and an (han ) for place exist.

(S e e tables : luhod . ) BT o ) rostrate one

’s self quickly. .Vaypatirapd (from dapd ) .

T o i e down quick ly; to throw one Maypatihiyd . .llaypatihiyd ka (lieBe l f down . down quickly) .

To f a ll on one’

s knees. Ma patilahod .

t e cause or reason for falling on

the knees. Any paypatiluhoran :the place where or person knelt

to. (See tables. )T o t l I rn the back abruptly. Illaypatilalilrod . To do the same

TW ithout intention ,

mapalilalikod .

0 S p ring to the feet . JlI aypalilind iy. .Vaypapalilind iy xiyd

(he is springing to h is feet ) . Na

papalilind iy ah ; (I sprang to myfeet unconsciously ) .

0 S i t down suddenly. Maypatiupo. To sit down suddenlyW ithou t meaning to : mapatiupé.

THE I NDEFI N ITE PART ICLE MAX I“ .

iI This particle beside the chan e from m to n for the past and present

“ d e finite, reduplicates the. second sy lable (hi) o f the particle: for the present5 future tenses. Th is particle is used to express verbs of searching forI

{In ‘l l i telyy for those eXpressiiig the idea of removing d irt, etc. , fr om the

3100 or bod y, and for m iscellaneous id eas wh ich w ill be bet ter seen from9 exam les. Certain letters beginning roots are mod ified by nmnh i, the

Sam e as t ey are byman. The definites with i and panhi, in the sense of

ba t/(m tlo’

y mayai'

sipaydral na Iahat

(all the ch ild ren here in this townare studying) . Any manya bald

ni'

lony Pam ela/can narTyaysiaripayaral

(all the ch ild ren in th is school

are learn ing [or studying] May81

'

)mTydral, to reach (many ) .ll (ui

'

ydysipafi'

ydralzto preach (by agreat number ) .

Maysipaycnnimsal. To hear con fes

Sions (many priests(; niaysilmypacumpiaal. (See index : cump isal. )

Maysilabds. Maysilabds kayony Iahal

na narin’

to so look (all of you whoare inside go out ) .

fifayai (mood . Bdkit ipinaysisifmnoodn il any dllytlt iyany niaITyd [duo

i’

ydnf (W hy are those men looking at the sea for?)

M aysipdsok. Maym'

pdaok I'

ayony[aliatna narirtyanywalanyyami : (Comein all of you who are ou t theredoing noth ing[or without work ]

.lfayxi'

laua .

maray,‘nanay; ti nyn . )

I I . A reCiprocal fo rm of many o f th e verbs con jugated w ith manhi maybe formed w ith an su tlixed o r “ llli mag/t i in place of manhi

,retain ing an as

a su tfix ,howeve r. l‘lx . :

To search for carefu llv; to glean .

To peck h e re an d the re (as a b ird in

searc h o fmain ) .

To s' tl l

'

t’ll fo r grain o f m e tals o r

m ine rals

To \i as h o i ic'

s face : to remove s tains,

s i i iudue s , e tc .

To co i i ib the m u s tach e .

To pick the tee th .

To c lean the ca ts

To clean the eve s .

To treat swe lled cvelid s o r

them .

To c lean th e nu ll .

To c leanse from head lice

Ti ) fu llHW b y l l‘

ttlll li i ' tn llu lli lli

i ii c li in n

TU ri ' lii ' l: revn ll .

T‘ : t \'

i o r lak e

Tn pe c ld lc : to se ll liz li lmin d s .

To ac t like at ch ild .

To tell th e fo rtu ne b y the palm .

mus

lfanlcinuilay (frompdlay, un

husked rice I ’an z imalayin (himalayiu ) mo an il/( my ku ku u in

(look for [gleanflwhat you have

to eat ) . Any gu lum ay any ipi

7mu lu'

lu'

mt’

tlay mytl (hunger is thecause o f h is gleaning ) . A ny bcilcid'niJwm ayanypiuanhimalayan niyci

(he was glean ing [he gleaned ] inthe field of Juan ) .

.lfu nhinukd (from mka) .

.Vu nhiuu ilos (from p it/ox,

all o f oneI ’lilua also means the

grains t hemselves.

-llau h ih imos (from himos, stain ,

The root h iltimos isfrom th is com b ination .

.llvm /u m isu y (from mixay,taehe

.llu uhin u l?nt (from w hat 8 1]heres to the teeth

”. See tables ) .

Mu n /m m ]: (from tutulz

Jlm ah ium h‘

: (from mum,

“secretion

o f the eye

.llcm himuklci (from pnktci, swellingo r in tlannnation of thel 'cmm lctolu

'

u , a person freq uently: t lllicted thus.

Jq /m fi/oisd (from koko,c law

JIu n Im q /um (from Icu tu, bead

lo use .llu nlu uyu luhun or mayIl u iF/nh llum , to cleanse eac h otherth u .llu n/cimnua

, to cleanse O flu nly live . Toma/tin

, person aiflicte d th us .

.Vu u /u’

m u b is (from bab ls, footprin t ,s ign , trail, etc Buknsin w e at

m i l/«i (m y; o/«ipu lc (follow it, here isthe fo o tprint ) . M ug/lu

'

makasan,to

fo llow each o ther on the trail, etc .

Alf tlnh imu gm /c (from bflgstk,

“

cru el,

ty rann icalllu nlu gu u li (from gantz

’

, reward

prem ium I ‘immhiganti n ilam m (the y avenged h imS rlci (my pu nh ih igantihan n iyti (hew ill take revenge on them ) .

Mu n/”10 k“JIM/ah[Hu mmu s (from mou nds.

.Vosmés mo 116? (Isth is you r ch ild ?

)) [u u lu

’

zizdlu d (from pdlad ,“

palm

238 TAGALOG L ANGUAG E .

THE INDEF’IN ITE PARTICLE MAG KAPA .

This particle changes initialm to n for the past and present indefinite,

and red uplicates the last syllable (pa ) of the particle for the presen t andfuture tenses. The sole use of the particle is to express, prefixed to roots

denoting positions of the body or motions of the parts thereof, the invol

untary remaining in such position , etc. , as the result of frigh t, surprise, or

otherviolent emotion. The definites with i, toexprese the cause, and with

an , to express place, exist. (See tables : m zilal. ) Ex

To remain with staring eves. Mag/capad ilat. Dumilat , to open the

eyes. Mad ilat , to be open (as theeyes) . 8 n . , magkapamcilal

, to re

main wit the eyes Open . Any1°

p aykapam1210! thecause of remainingwith staringeyes. Angpayta

pamt'

llatan, the place of remainingthus.

To be left with the mouth open ; to Maykapafiyan'

yd , from n‘

gafiliyd

stand with 0 en mouth . martini, to open the mou t 1

To stand showmg the teeth (as an Muykapaii'

yisi (from iii/fat) .animal, etc.

was mnarm rra m ar row MAG R AN.

I . Th is particle takes 11 in the past and present indefinite in lace of m,

and has the peculiarity of rcduphcating the initial syllable of l roots con

jugated by it. For the present and future tenses t 10 second syllable (Ira )of the particle is red uplicated in a similar manner to the reduplication ofthe yi of mayin . (See tab les : luha. ) Maykan signifies rimarily the involun tary flowing ou t of the secretions of the body, and as the definitesof i for the cause and an for the place. In ametaphorical sense maykan isalso used to express involuntary emotions, actions, etc.

, as will be seen bvthe examples :

To b leed . Magkandudugfi fromdugé,“ blood”

To sweat from fear or illness. Magkanpa mi: (from pan-is) .

To slaver ; to d rool. Maykan

)way (from (away,

1va”

To weep or shed team unconsciously Magkarddluha(from (aha, tear

(as from a wood fire ) .To blush . Magkanhihiyd (from hiya) . Kalli

ydhiyd , a shameful thing.

To und ress or lose the clothes Magkanhohobt) . Nagkakanhohobb 81°

voluntarily) . Juan nanypagtaua (Juan is shak

ing h is clot es off with laughter) .To overflow ; to exceed . Magkanlalabia. Linabiaan mo ang

utos ko 3a iyo (You exceeded myorders to you ) .

To d rop off . Magkanlalaglag.

To burs t into laughter. Magkantalaua.

To be stunned by a blow . Magkantitilap.

COMBINATIONS OF PARTICLE .

The combining of various particles is called“transcendenc by the

writers u n Tagalog, and may be said t ohave the following chtics : W it two exceptions, double or triple combinations of particles

prefixed to a root demand that the one immed iate ly before the root takethe definite form . (See tables, dual; alak.

First exception. Some roots conjugated y may and magka admit um.

(See tables, pilit; dali; sunod . )

TAGALOG L ANGUAG E . 239

Second exception . The particle maka recedes other particles, a prope rty alm possessed by magsi, except w 1en in combination with make

,

w hich goes be fore magsi in such cases . (See tables, Ian) ; gauri; Inilog;d ito ; 0153. I t must further be bo rne in m ind that roots wh ich are primarilyconjugated by may retain pay as a pre fix invariably, as do also those roots

d iffering in mean ing w ith um and mag.

THE DES IG N ATION O F PARTICLES .

For convenience of reference to the Spanish work s and also to the worko f Humbold t, the numbers given b y the earlv w rite rs to the various

part icles mod ify ing.r roots are of use . Thevare

let . I'

m

3d . Alan. Pu n .

4 th . Mi lka . Mu .

5th . fifngpa . Pug/pa .

6 th . Maki. I ’d /Ji.

8 th . JIM. Ka .

9ih . Magl‘

a . I ’ugka .

I n,i and an are the three particles alwavs accompan ying the definite .

THE PA RT ICLES K A PAH AND K APAG K A .

These particles are m uch used in Tagalog to express the id eas given in

the fo llowing examples . The agen t takes the gen i tive (o r possessive ) caseand the object o r e ffect o f the act ion the accusat ive . E x

\Vhen mv father le ft , I le ft also na ny tiking mm : 3; aké’

yu ngw u /is dm .

A fter he finishe d h is work , he came Kupugkatd lm s wig/d nany kan iyangto where I was. ya u z i

’

yp imu' itohan n u /(i aka.

THE PARTIC LES PAH A N !) I’Ah K A .

The same expressions as the above mavalso he rendered by pay and

peyku . E x

W'

hen mvfather had gone awav, they Pogo /is (Mo na ny ciking 1mm y aimingarrived . pagrldh ng ni/(i.

W hen it strik es twelve , we w ill rest . Pug/ugh !”nany (i [as (love mugpa

lug/n .

After you pay your respects to h im , Pag/ml} M N m ku n iy/l’

y pu rini kn .

come here.

A fter I eat , I shall go for a walk . I’ugkakaiu ko’

u ako y magpapasial.

'm s PARTICLE m KA,

This particle, prefixed to roots . sign ifies to be held o r repu ted in w hat

may he expressed by the roo ts . I t mav also mean num ber o f t imes

mad e i t] some cases . l'lx . :

Rice is considered to lie the lireat l ( bf - lng} [san in (m sit/(mg lu na lmtmdpayt he Tagalogs . Hu ng mum/u lu g/d ing.

\Ve regard you as a paren t . Ka y/(3pci’

y/ in ru t/mummilrmg nu nu u .

He is regarded as their leader. S ig/d any pumkapum) n ilti .

l0th .

l i i lL

12th .

i3th .

l i th .

15th .

l titli .

17th .

Mag/in .

Alas/sf.

.11(lgsa .

Man ]: i..lluypu ku

.Vugpali.

Mag/kapu .

Mag/ke n .

I ’ngai.Pagan .

I ’d nh5.

Pa91mka.

Pugpati

Pay/mpa .

I ’aykan

Nouns are formed in vario us manners in Tagalog from roots .

I . Some nouns are fo rmed by prefixu ig nu t/mg to the root . Ex

Mocker ; sco ffer . Mapagbirci. Respectfu l person . .ilapagp itagan .

G ene rous person . .ilapughiyuya . Destructive pe rson . Mapagsird .

Sco ffer ; lioaxer. .llapuglihuk .

P roud ; irn igm t

pe rso n .

I I . 1’ I’d pre fixed to ro o ts fo rms other nouns

(.z tiarrelsome person . I u lar

’

i imy. Blasphe ther. Palas umlxi.

Drunkard . 1 ’«ilu im t in . Bai rato r (litigant to Pal/i dea) ;

( i lli tto i i . I ’u lub i in . cx t css ) .

Loving (aii io z'

ou s ) I ’a/usinld . Roas ter ; greaf talker. I ’ ilu u ih t .

Some o f the s ho w “ it“ hc \ c rbaliz cd by changii ig the in itial to n o r m .

E x w‘

i/d (he liecai i ie .t glu tton ) . \ o lu la iu um sir/a (he is be

co n i ing a d ru iikard ) . .ilu lu lu irikd sim? (he w ill become a boaster ) . Th isis no “ provincial.

l I l . Some no uns o f the classcs und cr co ns id e rat ion are formed b y prefix ing no t either to the iinpe iat ixe or fu tu re of the root, as comb ine d w ith

l .x

Friend ly person . -llcu bigin .

.\ ino rous person . -llu iroyii i ; im isiidah in .

Dis o bcd ic i it person . Maxim ?"( from May) .

t ilicd icnt pers o n . .ifusuno i ' iu (from N IMOJ ) .

jo lly .ilu tu uu m

'

u (from ta im ) .

.\ n affec t ionate person . .llm r i

'

lili iu .

tim id , bash fu l person . .ilu lu

'

lu'

gin (fromA fo rge t fu l pc rso ii . .Vt i/ilii im liit (from limol ) .

plea~an t pe rso n . JI / ilitli lg/d in (from Illfllfl l) .

A so rrow fu l pe rso n . Jlu luh u u lm i/in (fromA d e licate . sick ly pe rs o n . .lfu svisu lcliu ( from xi i/cit ) .

t im id perso n (co ward ly ) . Jlumtriku liu (from

t ithe r no u n ind icating: o c cupations , pro fess io ns , trad es, e tc . , are

fo rm e d b y num w ith the fu tu re tense o f the ind e finite . See list o f such at

end o f sec t io n th rce .

V . \'

cuns ind icating .1 pe rso n su ffering fi o in a ( llrt ill it d isease o r fau lt

W e to he fo u nd lo i i i iecl b x su llix ii ig in to the root deno ting such d isease

o i fau lt . (Sce l'

ar. These no u ns may be \'

erhaliz e d hvo i lax S ig/i i 3; [a m b it ( he su ffe rs from asthma ) . .S

'

ild’

y tinatamad (th evire laz y ) .

\'

I . So me no uns w ith an id ea o f place inhe ren t are formed w ith th e

fu tu re ten se o f some ro o ts ith an . lax . 1’uflmbuomm , ce i iieter\

“ bury ing

place (from boon ) . luipistry ( ti on i hing/rig) . I ’cimmpumydn ,

ah liato ir . fl aw o f c xccu tio n l’ig/lu lu lu ud u (from Mim i ) .

\'

I I . So n ic no u n s ind icat ing o t c iipation are fo rmed b y lag/u com binedw ith I 'm ] (Momma) l) t lu re 2! ro o t . lax sentinel “

'

llt t‘h

m un S u i : 7 ilfll l/N lflh‘l l l l lfi , co o k (from Stiing, 000d

So i i iet ii i ics h iya : ilo i ic ind icate s th is . Tagaligao, wanderer,

\ l ls t E L I \ NEU I'

S

The fo llow ing w o rd s arianecd alphnbc ti~s llv hv roots in Tagalog w ill

Sho w the use o f m an y id iomat ic ph rases , e tc

( )ccnpat io i i : c i i iplo y i iicnt . ”N I/l l (sy .n gw a i ) .

To try ; to in te nd . .llm /u b ilu (ti-om akalu ) .

TAG ALOG L ANGUAG E .

To choose ; to se lect.

To ick up.

To ome dull (as a knife or 1 n or) .

To boil rice.

Pes t ; e idem ic ; to suffer from .

To pro ess ; to vow ; to believe in.

To pass between rocks, h ills, etc.

To p.

To care for most d iligently.

To grasp; take hold of ; pinch .

To put vinegar on anyth ing.

Can be.

To run away from or hide km 1 .

To betray.

To cu t grass ; to mow .

To atch .

To e gaping stupid ly.

To look upward .

P leasure .

To do anyth ing sw iftly.

To look d own .

To assign to ; to turn over to .

To sprink le.

Orphan .

243

I ‘umill. Anypilan , what chosen or

selected out . Any pin ilian (sing. )or Any pinaypili

'

an whatselected or chosen from .

.

‘llayp iilol.

D amoral(from rat) . Anypurolin,what dulledi

u

Tnmomal (fromfound ) , to be du ll (as business ) .Katu iimlan, dullness. Any itomal,the cause of such dullness.

Sumdiny (from aid ing) . Sinding, boiled rice .

Maykaadlot.Sumamp alataya. Anymmasampalalogo, the creed , faith or believer.

Sumilang (from ailany) .Sumilip (from silip ) .M iypakasipaysi

’

pay (from sipay) .Sumipit (from sipit, Sin i

pi'

t,an anchor.

Maym kd . Anyw kaan ,what d ipped

in or flavored with vinegar.

Sil/cal. Di saikal, can not be. Stikulbayd aiyany paykatiwalaanf (Canhe be trusted?) Silica! [di mikat]siyan paniu

'

alaan (He can [cannot] 3 trusted ) .

Tumukun (from lakes) .

Tumul‘sil (from Talm'

l na

him), a traitorous or treacherous

i iian . Kalaksilan,treason , tresch

ery.

Tumaypmi (from taypas) .Maytaypi.Talaii

'

ydtaii'

yd . illaytan'

yataft'

ydhan , to

feign stupid ity.

Tumi ri'

yald (from lu i

gald ) . Any

tiii'

yalain,what seen t us.

fl umtiy (from tiliy) .Katotohin mo siyd (befriend

ini ) .

Tad . Any ayddtiny ningo’

nakatumd 8a (f

l/iin (Your arrival

lcauses

me pleasure ) . I kind tutud ko any

paydétiny ninyd (You r arrival is a

source 0 pleasure to me) .

Tumulin (from lu lin ) . Maytu li'

n, to

go swiftly. Any ipaylu lin , the

cause of oing sw i ftly.

Tumu r‘

fyifl rom tan’

yo) . Also to bow

or incline the head . Any tu r‘

i'

yhdn,

what looked at thus or the person

bowed to.

Maya/col. Si Pedro no ilkol nanykaniyany yayaw in hay nan (Ped roturned over the work to be done

by h im to Juan ) .Mayu

iiai'

k. Any panwiaik,s rink ler.

UI a.

TAG ALOG L ANG UAG E . 245

ruso any pa 1paIcot 3°

bo y so Harbin,sapayIa

’

l mayno I iI in iI inilo silanyma I iny panJan 311

°°

no sosapilin doon. lny da ny t3333a373ya3t 3333 ruso oyany l lad h ostok no Iam lanJ inasohany 331apoJ131313a 3/o 333/ maiyi honyany somayI aroo n 3Ty Iapayapaan . .llasomd any 133336 373; myo I11

'

3I 13031y.

ruso, data

pu u'

a’t 133

°

n313 naman nu t/3331333333333, 310 do I33°

l sa y331ony nanyyoyor i so Ht3s3°

u .

llaram i so Rusia any nan in iwold 31a modadmJ any I333I 130 733°

general L 3

°

uc1 3°

,1cI3

at IanJ may/cayayon 33ymayI'

aI'aroo n 33J I'

apayapao n .

[Transla tion ]

St . Petersbu rg, 6th of April. The Japanese are advancing little bvlittleupon the pos ition o f G eneral Linevitch and h is armv. One daymore

, and

Harbin may p31ss 1blvnot he rremain ing to th e Russ ians , l)ecause thevth ink

it may be d estroyed by the enemv. The Russians are 11 1ak ing 11o efforts

to strengthen themselves in llarb1 11,heca use they be lieve them se lves to

b e'

m great dange r o f cap tu re there . The place of re treat for the Russians

is lad ivosto k ,w hi3 h thevh0pe to fort ify so well as to ho ld it un til peace .

The situatio n o f the Russtan arm ies is had,bu t it can not be bettered 0 11

account o f the riots tak ing place in Russia. Many in Russia be lieve that

the armvo f ( icneral Linevltch w ill be d e feated,and that in that even t

there w ill be peace .

] i'

. 3133331133 14 373] (Iobernodor Dom 31 (LalawiyanyR 1 no 31033333] 33333333331 3Ty iI o .3 33y

.

133333tr33y 13333133I3iI 333I 3333 3333333 nodaI i

B aybayin no 33311333331 touony at s3°

ya3n no I 3313313ao 3333 333°

n 33no Iao so Am a

lichcs, dalowo ny Lo ri! a t (Ia u'

ony re3013z z3’

3 h oony 3

°

I a 1 1 3333 333333; nadaI ipno 133333y 1313333333} 13313333 no 33331 3; (1331333333, isony I ol3313o33, ot iso ny rif h ny monscr

,

dalu n ang pouny cartucho’

t 31o1o 33 333331 3333313331 3 1113 33y “ 3331333313333. Noo ny 3

°

I a I f}

ay may nasanqmnyan any 31 333.~333I3>33Ie so no isony r3 3333333313333 no 3333333

8 331313313033y ( 3334333 1333. . lny 3333 3133331 I3°

3 so toso rcmo 33333331°

c3°

13ol.

\ oony 3

°

I' 33 I I 333/ 3333I 31 3133I 3'

p 313°

n s3°

1 133333 371 333} many naynyanyalo ny P 3 313 3) l‘3

°

,o no 313

°

3333333333; 3333333313333/331333y no 733331°

y1°

so

B oronka at noony viernes. 1 133 31 {133331313331 o mayor I I osI cIl 33yconslahular io . ML33/ 33333133I~1

°

p po ring (1311333333333; tanony 3333 may 3°

s3333yrcroIrer colt at sampaonJ cartucho.

[Translat ion ]

I t is announced by Governor Dance ] (Riz al Province ) that on the morn

ing of the 5th o f the current mo n th the re we re captu red at Ba gbagin th ree

o u t laws and n ine o f the carabao stolen from Novaliches,two sho tguns, and

two revolvers . ( ln the 1 1th the re were captu red one armed o u tlaw, one

carabao ,an d one Mauser rifle , twen ty cartrid ges, an d twen t y Rem ington

r ifles. 0 11 the, l0th the presiden te (11131 3

1 3 1 1 ) o t° ’

l'

avt:3ys ee u red a Rem ing

ton and ten cartridges . The carabao were se n t to the m un icip: ll t reasu ry.

O n the 1 1 th t i 3 i 1 erno r Dancel was also ab le to captu re one called 1’e 3e

P io,said to be the pers o n w ho mad e tro uble at Baran ka an d \ l: ‘

1 1 i31u ina

las t Fridav. Th is pels on was tu rned over to Majo r Haskell, o t the con

s tabu lary. There we1e also two outlaw s captu red w ho had a

°

( o lt 1 e 1 o l1 er

and ten cartridges .

l°

. 11131311 moIolaunon at maytatoyo r3°

13’3 so 133333133131 33y 133331333333 I333s

°

.p1to I

1 10°

31 183133J a33313oyo 33 no I33331 33313 33y B rn o 3/ naso I 3313331031

( 31 131033.

Any salapmy yuyuyuh n (331 I‘

l lIOo I; 333} III/331 333} 333313331 so I lo r 3",

3n 31

P r inceton,I’cnnsyh on io at 1 3313333313133.

Any 331133 333/ 333331 IyIcsio 13°

333s3'

3333331, 1331313333333313313

a ny sinomany 313333103so 11333133]

[Trans la tio n

I t

l

will not be long until there w ill be e rected here in Man ila a new ho s

This w ill be from a subscriptio n so lic ited bv th e Righ t Reverend

BisliOp Brent when he was in the Un ited States .

The money to he offered is from the fund s (interio r ) 1 five un iversit ies :llarvar d, Yale , Princeton , Pennsylvan ia,

and Columb ia.

The d irection o f th is (hospi tal) w i ll he u nd er the EpiscopalCh urch ,hu t

anyone w i ll he rece i v ed belonging to another faith .

l'

I . . t111/ gobernador 1111 111111111 11 31'

G . T11 111 1is del Rosario 1111 nag 311 B 1 1

111 171111 1711 1311 111; [1111 11 119 111 1111 1 3 I11“

;1 t1 1 1 1’11 111 I1111111/1i, 111111 1111 111 11111111

111 1111 1 1 11 17? 1111 1 111} 8°1 1 1 1111I11 1 1/ 8 1 I101 1I i 111] 1111 1311 11 11

1 11 11111 1311 1! 171/ 1 111r 1'

c 11ll11 1 11 11 171] 111711 1 1 119 111 111/I501 8 1 1 at 111 119111

111 11 1111 1111 1 11 1 1g 1111111 71111131130 111 11/ 1111 7111 1111111 111 1I 1i.°1 1111 I

'

1111 1 11 11 11 .

1511 1 1111 1111 1°1 11 1111 11111 11 1 111 I 1 11 I11 1°

11 1 11I11 r 1 111 11111I1 11l1 11J"1091 11 1 711111 11J 1111 1 111) 111111 str1 1 11 11I111y11 11 111111 1 117 1 1 1111 1111711 1111 1 1111 11 01 111/11I1 11J 11 1111

1 r1

00 110 11 1 1 11 1J1'

1 111111 1 11 11

[Translat ion ]

The go v ernor of Bataan , Hon . Tomas del Rosario ,has given a 1iece o f

land compris ing 15 hectares and w orth P L OW) , in Balaifga, iu emle r thatthere may he a s i te fo r the e rect ion o f a secon dary school.

” That landmav he u sed fo r teach i ng agr icu ltu re o r to r sc iences o r occupat io ns pe rtaini ng to the land , and tor i nstruct ion in the means o f strengthen ing the

bod y (m anual t raiii inw sc hoo l) .

The end ea v o r o f the govc rno r ill he to ha v e one American teacher in

eac h to wn in orde r to show the cu stom s and hab i ts o f the Amer icans tothe Fi lipinos .

11 11111 1111’

11 1111 11 71 11 1 511 1111 (11111111 11 111111 111) 111} 11 11 11 1191 1 11 an 1

’1 111 1 11 111111.

111 1 111 11/I1 1I1 11/1 111 11I1 1 111 (Im 711 1 11111 11 1111I1e1°

11 11 1111r general 111}11 11 111 1 1 1 1 111 1111 11 1 111°s 11 11 1111111I.

'I1 11I1a11 11 111; 1111 11 11 11 11

15111111 1 . t11 1 1 .

[Transla t io n ]

lt is sa id that the e lectr ic street-ear companvw ill as k that the line heperm i tted to he e \ tendc 1 l to reac

°h as far as Paranaq ue .

\'

o t icc has also he e n g i v en to dav to th e go v e rnor-gene ral hv the man

agemen t o f the e le 1 tric railwav that o n Mo n dav it w i ll commence t h e

operat ion of the roa d to .m ta 11a.

VII I . I ‘1 1 11 11 1 1 11 °

1 1 .

— [11 1 1 111 11 1 1 1 11I1 i/s 111 1 3 1310 111 11 111) 111111 111 1210! 1111 1 1111 111} (18 11 111)I1 1I1 1I. i 11 11 1111 1 11 I1 1 1I1 1I1 II1 1 1 111/ I. 1 1 I1 1 1/ 1 1 1 11

11 1! 111 1 1 11 11 1111

’

111 1 1I1 I1 1I1'

I1 1 1! 11 1 1 (In/11 1717 111111 111]I. 1 1 11 1 1 11 s 11 11 1 1 1

°

1°

1II1 1 1 111 1 11111 11 11 11 111 1 1 0 111)1,11 11 11 1 1 1 1111 1111r 1 111/ 1.~1 1 11 I1 so 111 1 1 1 1111 lr 1°11 11 11 1te I1 1l11111/ (I1I11 .

1 1 11 11 1 1 11 11 1 ~1 11111 1111I1 11 111 1 1 11 1111 111;

[Tran sla t io in ]

—l t is req uested that anyone w ho may pick up a male dog w i thco ffee -colored hai r and w i th h i te o n the h rcast and the end o f the r igh tfron t foo t , heari ng): a collar o n t he N eck an d a tag w ith the numbe r 196 5

,

w ill he ah le to re tu rn o r resto re h im to No . 1 718 -\ rranq ue street, w here a

rewar d w i ll h e g i v e n . toge the r w i th manv thanks .

S 1 1 I11 iI1 1 1 1/ 1 1 1 1 I1 1'

I1 1 1 11} 1 I1 1 1 1 1 11/ Rud d,Tondo , nan

-( 111i

11 11 11 151 1 1 1 1; 1 1 1 1 I11 1I11I1 1'

I11 1 11 1/ 111 11 11 1111 1 1 1111 I1 1I1 1'

1I, 111017 11 15

1 1 1 11] [11 1 1 1 I I1 1 1I1 I1 1 1 I1 ) 1 1 111/ 1 I1 1I 11 11 1 1 131 1 1111 1 1 . 3 1 1 11 1 111 11 11 1 1 111] 111 111

'

1111111/1I11I1'

1 (51111117 1

]1 1 1 11I 11 1'

1 i 1711 I‘

1 11 1 1I1 1I1 1171/1i1 1 1 17 } 171/p 11bu 1/a1zg 1111111170 1191 1 1 1I 1 i

[Tran s la t io in ]

Los t — From th e hou s e N 74 Rada stree t , TomlO , there has been losta “ ith w h i te and red (las ak i plumage black spu rs , and w hite

lt‘t i w ith th e m i d1He 1 Im 1 1f t llt ' l i1z llt too t crippled . .\nvone who mavheah le to hrinar or ] 1-1 I lll o u t t he n h e rc .1hou ts o t the said fow l W ill be given a

- l o . ¢ l

English .

TU b ite

To d env°

cloak

To eat

To u ntie ; lu m en

Le ft,

To ob tain

To grn pe fo r

To grasp; em b race

To n ibb le

To cu t o ff

To kno w ; he acquain t“ !“ ith .

To exvcmi

To place

Strength

To gm “

Co n ten ts ; pu lpTo so fte n

Far ; ‘iir ltlll t

Five

Tu e rr ; in lnak tl m is take .

To e xpe rience

To begin ;

To N‘ti it‘; appease

Tn co n tain ; i ' tc'

To lis ten

To d ream

T0

Tu

T¢

Ti l

'

l‘

< t

r

lfi

‘

b reak (as a rope , e tc . )sq uee z ering

(“

I ll

em bark ; in moun t

he i”To e rr ; s in

To te ll; i‘

c lm rl

Evil

Tn vn nw buc k : tn give luic k

Tn im rn ru lilsi~| i

Tn «lm m n . cu t

To pu t in tu

Tn fu lln “ ; u i

Tu “ U ll ' ll‘l'

all

TU

To tu rn t he hac k'

l‘

n ,u m

Tu g h h p : i n il t i it i l'

l'

n .s tz i n f l

'

l‘

n t : l~t( tn'

l‘

l l Il ll lk

Tu t‘

w im ‘ln

TH t inv .

'

l‘

c ) nm ve'

l‘

o ra-tn rn ; repent

Tu .\ it ( im s n

Tu lack

\ l lH ,

Con traction ,variation

,Roo t .

M IA(till .

,VHI‘

I s ildn .

Kugu t

K in /ti

Kain

]x’

ulug/[Cu /hm

AV/( l/N

Lug/(w

L i l/(fix

L i t /( i

[A im /I N

[.I I/ti

Lug/4)

Lina/l

JIM/i

.‘Irmicl

.‘Iu /ciI ’l l/I lfll f l/I ‘d /(m um

I ’l l/J U N]

I ’m fim/u u

P ig/( i

[HR /i

,

I’i i/U /

Ni l/( l

.\ i l lll ti

\'

u u m l'

I'

u /u i

Tu ll/(N d .

'

I iu u m

TWP/rm

'

l'

l /cim(

f i ts/in

Tu t/f)

( M I

( 7 ;

(i

/n i

”ll/( i

Nagtin .

X vi /yin ; knlgdn .

Ku licr in ; kuh’

nvin .

Kup z'

n ; ker/Ni".

Kupliu ; kaph in .

[Cc/d in ; ktbh in .

K it/in ; killdn .

K i/em /Zn .

Lab/«in .

Lu l a-«in .

Lat /t in, MHz /m.

Lu h’

n ; [( tlcin .

1 .1 1mi".

Lim b/I n .

) [u lim nu t/ch i .

JINM /(ifl .

Ji ll/t ill .

P i ling/yd". From Iagny.

I ’m/amnaiu . Fr0 111 Ianu’

m .

I’(ll. in g/tin .

I ’m u u /impcin .

I ’igiu ;P ix/in .

I'M /m ; [m l/tin .

oq l lk ll t’

l J

NHL/I'

M ;

Nu n /«in .

Nu ll/I'

M.

Nu n /in :

N il/[tiu

Til/Jain .

'

I illcpr

'

m .

Tah it i /(in .

'

litmmin .

Tina/min .

Tm (i I.1 1 .

Tl /( lmin .

r v

I

tubxrin .

Tug/En ; (uyd u .

lmu .

( lin ; ('

hin .

l'

prin .

Wu lin : n'

aldn .

TAG ALOG L ANGUAG E . 249

I I . For names of animals, bir ds, fishes, and invertebrates not given in

t his work the stud en t is referre d to Jordana s Boat/w it) (icoyrdfico c’ ”is

lor ico \ atu ral del Irrhipit’

lago I' ilipino ,

Mad rid , 1885 ; to the work o f Friar

Casto d e Flera, Doni inu an , entitled ('

cmilogo S islemciiim dc Toda la Fau na,

d c F lipinas, Man ila,1895; and to the book o f \ Ion tero y idal, 1 l Aw hi

pi/lar/o Filipino 3; (as {alas Mar ianas, ( m olinu s 31 Paluos, Mad rid , 1886 . For

the fauna the great m l: o f Friar B lanco,Augustine, w ill be o f great aid ,

as well as the reports of the forestry and agricu ltu ral bu reaus at Man ila.

The work of Father Delgado, S. J .

,Manila

,1892 , deserves attention as

revised and annotated .

In conclusio n , it is hoped that a careful stud y o f the language und er d is

c uss io n vi ill lead the stud en t to explo re for h imself, and no te the localism s

an d changes in each province . Auv suggestion corrections, or criticisms

ill be welcomed by the author.

INDE X E S . 253

(lend e r, lack o f,38 .

(ienc ral te rm s. lack o f, 19.

( ienitive s . d o u b le ,o f personal pronouns, 35, 36 .

1441 44 (s u tfi x ) . 56,14 1. I , 11, (fu ll d iscussion ) 142— 153

14444 (s u ffix ) , 18 . 56 , (w ith weigh ts. measures. etc. ) 82 .

l lomonym ,d e lin ition o f, 437 .

[particle ]. 108 . IV, (cause. instrumen t o r time ) 109 . V , (cmn lwined w ith

144 ) 1 10, X I I , (fu lly d iscussed ) 132— 14 1 .

I dioms,

47m [compound particle] (w ith adverbs ) 84 . 8-3, (mean ing 4 .1u se ) 108 .

IV, X V I I I "I I,I .

[com po und particle] (w ith adve rbs ) , 84 , 55, (mean ing cause )I V

,X V I II .

[com pound particle] (w ith a dverbs ) , 85.

Im pe ratiw ,1 1

In tensity, q u icknesss, w ith ,105

,I I I .

1 111pe r1'

cct tense . 100, X .

444 18, 50, (inserted ) 57, (w ith we igh ts, measu res etc. ) 8

"(with

744 4 ) 84 .85

, (motion toward or con trol o f ) 108, IV. (combined w ith

1 10, X I I , (d iscussion ) 1, to 114 . VI (id ea o f attrac tion toward )

1 14— 1 15, 4possess ion ) (\ e1 l1s of calling,

1 15, (o f reaching fo r ) 1 16 ,

(\ e rlis o f carry ing. cu tting,measu riug or weigh ing ) 1 16

—1 19, (ve i lws ot

d e s t ruction ) 1 19 , (verbs of receiving) 120. (of inviting ) (o f eating,

4l1 ink ing , etc . 122, (acts of senses ) 123, 124 , (acts o f w ill o r m ind )

125, (verbs o f mak ing) 125, (o f wearing ) 125, (various ) 126 , (su tfixed )

127— 130.

] 44 4 441 , 130.

In clusive “ e ,

"38 .

I nd efin ite,20, 30, (d iscussed ) 1 11 , I , t0 1 12 ,

V

l’rincipal particles o f,1 1 1

,I .

In dicative . 14141, 1X .

Ind irec t o b jec t,I llt)

,VI .

I nfin itive ,100

4444 [co mpou nd particle] , 1 10, I I I .

I ntrans itive 1 e rbs,107,

[( o lnpo lln tl particle] (explained ) , 109, V I I I .

[4 4 411 11141111141 particle] , 109 . I V (explained ) , 109,V 1 1 1.

[compou nd p.1rt14 le] 109 I I I .

(ply/11 414 1 [00 111114 1111141 particle], 109,3 I I I .

41444441 [compound particle] (w ith adverbs ) , (explained ) , 109.V I I I .

414444443; [compou nd particle] (eX pIained ) , 109 , VI I I (e xample ) . 1 10. I N .

[1444441111344 [compou n d particle], 109 , V I I I .

41444444511 441 4 1 [compound 1article] (with adverb ) , 8-3 (explained ) . 109, VI I I .

(particle express ing likeness )

(compo und particle ) ,(im parting idea o f intensity . etc. 105, I I I .

(link ing opposite id eas ) , 100, V I .

[particle ], 2 1 1 .

44 44 [compound particle] , 200, 201 .

[part icle ], 239 .

b one/1: 4 1 1arti4' le 2 39 .

[Ni/44149 (adverb m ean ing“ less 4 3 .

44444 (ad jective fo rm ing particle ) , 55. (use ) 1 1 1 . I , (fully d iscu s se d),196

"01 . (d e f. o f 2 1 1

444 l3 1,1

4444451 56, (ve rbaliz ing a dverb ) 84 .

83. (use ) 1 10,X . 1 1 1 . I . (fullv dis

cussed ) 180— 194- 234 .

38 . (comb inations ) 109, V I I I . (use ) 1 10 X , (fu lly4 IiQ 4 ‘I lQ u‘u al )

magkapa [particle] , 238 .

44mgkap41 14lay (compound part icle ) , 73.

4414tgkapar44 (compound particle ) . 73.

magkaparis (compound part icle ) , 73.

"mg/casing (compound particle) , 73.

magma (compound particle ) , 56 .

magpa [particle], 109, VI I I , (use ) 1 10, X , (fully d iscussed ) 217—222344441411401 71 [particle], 225—227 .

444449144411 [particle]. 235.

44444934: [particle]4444147414 [particle]. 235, 236 .

[particle], 201 , I V, (fu lly d iscussed ) 21 1—217. (when 1114

cause”) 56 , (pecu liar construction w ith ) 1 12, VI I I , (ind icating

pleted ac tion )(13

"N th : [particle], 09 7—230.

44444144 (form ing ad jectives ) . 56 .

4444444 [particle], 37 . (w ith w eigh ts, measures , monevs ) 8 1 , (w ith a d

85, (fu lly d iscussed ) 201—2 1 1 .

4444444141 [particle], 235— 237.

444441441 (as°

ad jective form ing particle ) , 56 .

4444414444) (as ad jective form ing particle ) , 56 .

may (use ) 1 10, X I I I .

444a3/réon (use ) . 1 10, X I I I .

(4444444444444 ) [particle expressing opinion], 56 .

4444 (as ad jective fo rm ing particle ) , 56 , (use ) 1 1 1 , I . (fully d iscussed201 , (def . o f 4444414 4 ) 2 1 1 , (w ith irregular form o f verb ) 1 71 - 175.

44443] [particle] (w ith adverb ) , 85, (use ) 11 1 , I , (fullvd iscussed ) 180444141 4 44 [partic le].4444541 44 [partic le] (w ith adverb ) , 85.

"(U/134444 [particle].444491 441441, [particle ], 23h4444411 4441. 44 [parti4 le]4444gp4414

'

[particle]4444414 41 [particle],”( If/3 1

4 4 441 44 [particle]. 201 . IV , (fu lly d is cussed ) . 2 1 1 214444154 [particle ], 227 . 1 .

4441 44 [particle], Qtl l, I V.

[compo und particle ]. 223. l ( w ith a dve rb s ) ,4444/441s44 [part ic le ]Negative ad je c t ives. 54 .

Negative adve rbs 99. 100.

Negat ive ve rb s , 0

X 4 41 1 1 illtt t i\ 4* 4°

z ls 4 .

Preced ed b y article and fo llo wed by gen itive.238 .

W ith ge n it ive inse rted betw een nom inative and article. 28 .

N4 411 11 .

111 gen itive 111 4-

14lit'

y i11g nom inative ,31 .

No u n 20. (co mm on ) 28,(ex p.

.\ 41u r4 4 . 28 . (from ro o ts ) 2

340.

\'

um e rals , 70— 80.

\ du rb ial 80

('

ai d in : 1ls . 76 77

Dis t ribu tiw s

( ) rd inalH ccupatio ns (w ith 4444144 prefixe d) , 2

30-1 "10.

U rd inal num e ral 78 . 79 .

) 444 . t he 06 ro o ts beginn ing w ith . 17 43— 180.

p44 (w ith ad ve rbs ) . 84 .

(d o . 8

14 4 1“ I llll. 4 1

p4 4 [defin ite o f 109,V I I I , 2

31 7 . I , ( fu lly discussed )

S y no nym ,detin it ion of

,57 .

Synon ym s, 19 .

Tagalog language , importance o f, 13.

Dialects of, 13, 35.

Relationsh ip o f, 13.

Prese rvation o f verbal system o f,

Number o f ro o t w o rd s in,13.

Sansk rit e lemen t in 38 .

('

hiuese element in ,14

,38 .

Arab ic elem ent in,14

,38 .

Spanish e lemen t in,14

,38 .

linglis h element in ,14 .

Lac k o f Japanese e lement in,1-1 .

Tagalog :

Pro nunciation o f,15.

S tructu re of , compared ,107 , X I V,

V e rb . compared ,107. X VI .

Tenses , 1041, X .

Lac k o f change w ith in , 107, X I I .

Ties, euphon ic, 31 .

Ti ans itive ve rbs ,107, X I .

w hen co nsid ered as consonant,31 .

(particle ) , (w ith adverb ) , 84 , (U se sho “

cussed ) . 153- 170, (Dim inu tives ) , 180.

V e rb (un dersto od ) . 32 .

V e rb s,20 , 38 , (d iscussion ) 105- 108 .

('

o inple teness o f Tagalog verb ,107

,X V I .

De tin ite,108 . I . I I , I I I .

l 'e lin itio n o f,ltlf) , I .

In t t ansit ive,107

,N 1.

.\ lo d e s, l01i, I X .

l’

art icu lariz ing,19 .

Supe rlat ive fo rm , 70.

Te n s es . 100. X .

Trans itive . 107 . X I .

ll'

o/d (w ith ad jective ) , 74 . (use ) 1 10, X I I I .

\Vo rd s,numbe r o f in Tagalog.

l \ “ L Y

\ blt ' tn,14 1 l4e , 231 1 . I I I , 2 lii, V I I .

\ lilt‘ 10 ( In,14 4

,l77 .

“ W 4 14 , 14 4, I'

l l ) .

to l

. \ 4 '

t like : 1

-\e ts o f the se nses, 1

'

1134 , 231-1.

. \ 4 '

l s 4 11 “ ill ( 41‘ l l tilli l,lZ

f-I,I II

. \ 4I4 I , l l ) .

. \d vis e . 14 1 . 1 34 .

I "1-\ id

,to ,

\ n itnals ,d o mest ic 28 "1

. \pproac h ,to . 184 .

A rrange ,to . I

'

l l) .

to , H0.

14 1 . 17—1 .

.\shamed . to be . l0s .

.\ s k . to .

\ s leep, to be ,1118 .

\ s s 4' 1 11l1le , to , 18 4 .

-\ ttrae t io n to ward . i dea o f, 1 14 .

I I I . I Fu

INDEX ES . 257

13111119 , I t ) , 1311.

Bed ; bedd ing,23 , 29.

Bed ,to be in ,

199.

Be d, 10 gt ) 10 151 .

llitc , to ,123.

Blow , to ,162 .

Body, parts o f, 49 ,50

,51 .

Bo rrow ,to,

1 14,1 15

,137

,

) S ( if,198 .

1 15.

to ,133.

Bui ld i 43.

Bu rv,195.

Buy

“

,to ,

1 14 , 131 , 164,172, 182, (at retail)

Calcu late , to , 124 .

Call. to ,1 15, 173.

Calling, verbs o f,1 15.

('

aptu re , to ,1723.

Care for. to , 160, 204 .

Carry , to ,1 16

,133, (d ifferent wavs ) 1 16 . 1 17

Cau s e to , 2 11 , I V, 2 1"

Charitab le . to be ,145.

('

hoo sc . to ,1 14 .

(‘ivic (lign ities, 53.

C lo th ing, articles o f,5"

Co ld, 4 7 .

(‘o m c d own ,

to,130.

Com e here,to , 147.

('

U ll lt ‘ 111 . to ,1 73.

Come o u t , to , 120,

Com ing o r go ing,20.

Co mm un icat ic111 , m eans of,43

, 44 .

Compare , to . 14 1 .

Compas s, po ints o f,47 .

("ompeL to . 103.

('

on iplain , to , 1 14 .

Con fo rm ,to ,

140

Co nque r, to , 176 .

Cons id er, to ,124 .

(em with ,to

,172 .

172 .

(‘

o o k ing u tensils,etc .

, 40.

Cook ing, verbs o f,135.

Cou ntry ,characte r o f

,44 .

(fove r,to

,142 .

('

u rse , to , 185.

Cu rsing,Tagalog, 103 .

Cu t , to 117, ( diffe rent \vavs ) 1 17 . 118 .

Cu t ha ir, to ,163.

Dark , to become ,1633.

Dawn,to , 162 .

I lece ive , to ,144 .

De scend ,to , 176 .

Desire to ,160

, 170.

l)esire,to ,

124 .

Destroy,to

,1 19

,138

,156 .

Destruction ,verbs o f, 1 19 , 120.

D10, 10 , 1 19 . 14 1 .

6855— 00— 17

Toilet , the ; (d ressing ) 2Tools, list Of, 42 .

Touch ,to

,123, 124 .

Trails, road s, etc . ,4 .

Translate, to ,14 1 .

Translations, 244- 246 .

Transfer, to , 141 .

Travel to,140

,195,

"011.

Traveling, 22 .

Trees, plan ts , etc .,53 .

Trench ,to make a, 151 .

Tu rn back , to,1 75.

Uncover, to ,14°

Un tie, to ,146 .

Use , to ,1 14 .

U tensils, cook ing, 40

U tensils, list of, 4"

Vegetab les, k inds. 39, 4

V erify , to. 125.

W ait for, to , 120.

Walk , to,166 .

Watch ,to , 144 .

Water, 29 .

\Vater cou rses, 44 , 45.

Wearing, verbs o f, 125.

W eathe r, cond itions o f,“

'

eep, to ,139.

Weigh , to , 1 19.

W e igh ts , measures , 11 11 1

\Vin , to ,176 .

ish , to ,169

, (no t to \1

11 1iscellaneous ,Wound , to , 151 .

W rite,to

,17 1 , 1 1

W rit ing materials, 43,4

Y es ,99 .

. l/l,

l tiS .

. Iln u la , 124 .

1211.

1 1 W “, 1112

14 7 .

. Im'

t. 145.

11111 ,

("H I /u rbl i 1

7

15 ,

114 1 127

1, 1 - 3.

B i

l

/U N I , 12 1 .

III/vi, 1S5.

B i l/41g, 21111,

1 11411.

( 1121 111 1 111 1, 53 .

(only retaine d in 111 1

“mm ,

1h 1/m n (mum /1 1 1 11 1 ,95

[11 1/vi, 1 14 ,1 16 .

[) vum (1 1 1 1 1 17 1 111 1 1. 58 .

lhum’

t,144 .

[ 111 3/t i nmgdarumi 69 .

D if f/7g, 123, 146 .

Tagalog Language - Forgotten Books

Documents

Transcript of Tagalog Language - Forgotten Books